Mac OS X Panther ®
™
in 10 Simple Steps or Less
Steve Burnett
Anne Groves
Wendy Willard
Chad Fahs
Mac OS X Panther ®
™
in 10 Simple Steps or Less
Mac OS X Panther ®
™
in 10 Simple Steps or Less
Steve Burnett
Anne Groves
Wendy Willard
Chad Fahs
Copyright © 2004 by Wiley Publishing Inc. All rights reserved. Published by Wiley Publishing, Inc., Indianapolis, Indiana Published simultaneously in Canada No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, or otherwise, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without either the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, (978) 750-8400, fax (978) 646-8600. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the Legal Department, Wiley Publishing, Inc., 10475 Crosspoint Blvd., Indianapolis, IN 46256, (317) 572-3447, fax (317) 572-4447, E-mail:
[email protected]. Limit of Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty: The publisher and the author make no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this work and specifically disclaim all warranties, including without limitation warranties of fitness for a particular purpose. No warranty may be created or extended by sales or promotional materials. The advice and strategies contained herein may not be suitable for every situation. This work is sold with the understanding that the publisher is not engaged in rendering legal, accounting, or other professional services. If professional assistance is required, the services of a competent professional person should be sought. Neither the publisher not the author shall be liable for damages arising herefrom. The fact that an organization or Website is referred to in this work as a citation and/or a potential source of further information does not mean that the author or the publisher endorses the information the organization or Website may provide or recommendations it may make. Further, readers should be aware that Internet Websites listed in this work may have changed or disappeared between when this work was written and when it is read. For general information on our other products and services please contact our Customer Care Department within the United States at (800) 762-2974, outside the United States at (317) 572-3993 or fax (317) 572-4002. Trademarks: Wiley and the Wiley Publishing logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of John Wiley & Sons, Inc. and/or its affiliates. Mac OS and Panther are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Wiley Publishing, Inc., is not associated with any product or vendor mentioned in this book. Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears in print may not be available in electronic books. Library of Congress Control Number: 2004102332 ISBN: 0-7645-4238-9 Printed in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Credits
Acquisitions Editor
Project Coordinator
Jim Minatel
Courtney MacIntyre
Developmental Editor
Graphics and Production Specialists
Kevin Shafer
Beth Brooks Sean Decker Carrie Foster Jennifer Heleine Lynsey Osborn Heather Pope
Production Editor Pamela Hanley
Technical Editor Chad Fahs
Quality Control Technicians Copy Editor Foxxe Editorial Services
John Greenough Andy Hollandbeck Brian H. Walls
Editorial Manager Kathryn A. Malm
Book Designer Kathie S. Schnorr
Vice President & Executive Group Publisher Richard Swadley
Proofreading Laura L. Bowman
Vice President and Executive Publisher Robert Ipsen
Indexing Richard T. Evans
Vice President and Publisher Joseph B. Wikert
Executive Editorial Director Mary Bednarek
About the Authors
Steve Burnett is a writer, system administrator, and musician working and living in the Research Triangle Park area of North Carolina. He holds a Masters degree in Technical Communication from North Carolina State University and is a member of USENIX, SAGE, and the Triangle Macintosh User Group. A Mac user since 1986, he has contributed to or co-authored 15 books since 1995, including the Mac OS X Bible, Jaguar Edition (Indianapolis: John Wiley & Sons, 2003) and Windows 2000 and UNIX Integration (Berkeley, CA: McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2000). Contact Steve at
[email protected] if you have questions, comments, or corrections to the content of this book. Wendy Willard creates and teaches Web design throughout the U.S., preferably on Macs running OS X. She is the author of Photoshop 7: Tips & Techniques (Berkeley, CA: McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2002), HTML: A Beginner’s Guide, Second Edition (Berkeley, CA: McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2002), and Web Design: A Beginner’s Guide (Berkeley, CA: McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2001). Wendy thoroughly enjoys life in Bath, Maine, with her husband and two daughters. Anne Groves lives in Columbus, Ohio, where she works as Web developer for Ohio State University. She has edited several titles, including Mac OS X: Unleashed (Indianapolis: Sams Publishing, 2002), FrontPage 2002: Unleashed (Indianapolis: Sams Publishing, 2001), Teach Yourself Macromedia Studio MX 2004 All in One (Indianapolis: Sams Publishing, 2004), and Teach Yourself Mac OS X in 24 Hours (Indianapolis: Sams Publishing, 2002). While she enjoys developing Web sites, her passion is teaching others how to use today’s technology to make their lives easier. Chad Fahs is an author whose work includes the MacWorld DVD Studio Pro Bible (Indianapolis: John Wiley & Sons, 2002, Final Cut Pro 4 For Dummies (Indianapolis: John Wiley & Sons, 2003), Flash MX Design for TV and Video (Indianapolis: John Wiley & Sons, 2002), and Apple Pro Training Series: DVD Studio Pro 2 (Berkeley, CA: Peachpit Press, 2003). Chad writes, directs, produces, and consults for a variety of projects and clients. You can contact him at
[email protected].
Contents
About the Authors Introduction
Part 1: Mac OS X Basics Task 1: Logging In, Setting Automatic Login, and Logging Off Task 2: Acting as Another User Task 3: Shutting Down, Restarting, and Putting the Computer to Sleep Task 4: Setting the Clock and Date Task 5: Setting the Volume Task 6: Viewing a Contextual Menu Task 7: Browsing the System Task 8: Closing, Hiding, and Exposing Windows Task 9: Creating Aliases and Utilizing the Sidebar Task 10: Ejecting a Removable Disc Task 11: Taking and Printing Screen Shots Task 12: Installing New Software
Part 2: Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account Task 13: Changing Your Password and Icon Task 14: Setting Keychain Preferences Task 15: Setting a Background Image Task 16: Setting a Screen Saver Task 17: Customizing the Appearance of Windows and Setting Folder Options Task 18: Setting the Dock Preferences Task 19: Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock Task 20: Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login
Part 3: Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
vii
xvii
1
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
27
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
45
Task 21: Setting Finder Preferences
46
Task 22: Setting the Startup Disk Task 23: Setting Display Preferences
48
50
x
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less Task 24: Setting CD and DVD Preferences Task 25: Setting QuickTime Connection Speed Task 26: Setting Up Handwriting Recognition with Inkwell Task 27: Adjusting Sleep and Energy Saving Settings Task 28: Starting, Stopping, or Restarting the Classic Environment Task 29: Setting Mouse and Keyboard Options Task 30: Setting Language and Regional Preferences Task 31: Setting Speech Preferences Task 32: Using the Font Book
Part 4: Finding and Working with Files Task 33: Using the Home Folder and Customized Navigation Task 34: Working with a File Task 35: Creating and Selecting Files and Folders Task 36: Deleting and Undeleting Files and Folders Task 37: Opening Files in Preview Task 38: Searching for Files Task 39: Searching for Aliases Task 40: Searching for Folders and Applications Task 41: Indexing the Hard Drive Task 42: Searching by Visibility and Content Task 43: Transferring Files by Physical Means Task 44: Transferring Files Using an iPod
Part 5: Managing Users Task 45: Viewing and Setting Your Account Information Task 46: Adding a User Account Task 47: Changing a User’s Password Task 48: Changing a User’s Icon Task 49: Setting and Changing a User’s Permissions Task 50: Deleting a User’s Account Task 51: Setting Automatic Login Task 52: Switching Users Quickly Task 53: Setting Login Options for Users Task 54: Enabling the System Administrator Account
Part 6: Word Processing with TextEdit Task 55: Starting and Stopping TextEdit Task 56: Saving a Document in TextEdit
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
71
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
97
98
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
119
120
122
Contents Task 57: Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit Task 58: Opening Documents and Saving Documents to New Locations Task 59: Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text Task 60: Setting Font Appearance Task 61: Adding Special Characters Task 62: Making a Template Task 63: Printing Documents Task 64: Using Recent Documents and Applications
Part 7: Networking Task 65: Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection Task 66: Configuring an AirPort Network Connection Task 67: Configuring a Modem Connection Task 68: Working with Network Configurations Task 69: Working with Proxy Servers Task 70: Creating a Wireless Computer-to-Computer Network Task 71: Joining an AirPort Network Task 72: Joining a Closed AirPort Network Task 73: Browsing the Network Task 74: Connecting to a Local Server Task 75: Sharing an Internet Connection and Using the Firewall Task 76: Creating and Using Network Locations Task 77: Using Target Disk Mode
Part 8: Printing and Faxing Task 78: Adding a Printer Task 79: Configuring Page Setup Task 80: Managing Print Jobs Task 81: Sharing a Printer Task 82: Exploring Print Options Task 83: Exploring Further Print Options Task 84: Faxing Task 85: Printing from Classic
Part 9: Using .Mac and Sherlock Task 86: Creating a .Mac Account Task 87: Accessing Your iDisk Task 88: Using iSync Task 89: Searching the Internet with Sherlock
xi 124
126
128
130
132
134
136
138
141
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
169
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
187
188
190
192
194
xii
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less Task 90: Finding Pictures with Sherlock Task 91: Searching the Stock Market with Sherlock Task 92: Searching for Films with Sherlock Task 93: Searching the Phone Book with Sherlock Task 94: Searching eBay with Sherlock Task 95: Searching for Airplane Flights with Sherlock Task 96: Using the Dictionary Feature of Sherlock Task 97: Translating with Sherlock Task 98: Searching AppleCare with Sherlock Task 99: Setting Sherlock Preferences
196
198
200
202
204
206
208
210
212
214
Part 10: Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
217
Task 100: Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account Task 101: Starting Mail and Importing Email Task 102: Reading Email Task 103: Sending Email Task 104: More about Sending Email Task 105: Adding a Signature File in Mail Task 106: Sorting Mail Task 107: Searching Mail Task 108: Replying to Mail Task 109: Forwarding Mail Task 110: Working with Draft Emails Task 111: Adding to the Address Book from Mail Task 112: Opening and Saving Mail Attachments Task 113: Mail Tricks Task 114: Editing New Messages Task 115: Filtering Your Email to Reduce Junk Mail Task 116: Using the Address Book Task 117: Removing an Address Book Entry Task 118: Adding a Group to the Address Book Task 119: Using Mail and the Address Book Together Task 120: Customizing Address Book Entries
Part 11: Surfing the Web with Safari Task 121: Starting Safari Task 122: Using Bookmarks Task 123: Managing Bookmarks Task 124: Customizing the Web Browser’s Appearance
218
220
222
224
226
228
230
232
234
236
238
240
242
244
246
248
250
252
254
256
258
261
262
264
266
268
Contents Task 125: Searching the Web Task 126: Saving a Web Page Task 127: Setting Safari Preferences Task 128: Emailing a Web Page Task 129: Exploring Safari’s Pop-Up Menus Task 130: Using SnapBack and the History Menu Task 131: Printing a Web Page Task 132: Resetting Safari Task 133: Browsing with Tabs
Part 12: Instant Messaging with iChat Task 134: Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name Task 135: Setting Your iChat Status Task 136: Adding a Buddy Task 137: Viewing Information about Buddies Task 138: Using Buddy Groups Task 139: Starting a Text Chat Task 140: Starting an Audio Chat Task 141: Starting a Video Chat Task 142: Saving a Chat Session Task 143: Sending a File Task 144: Blocking Annoying People Task 145: Setting iChat Message Appearance Task 146: Setting iChat Message Actions
Part 13: Scheduling with iCal Task 147: Starting iCal Task 148: Adding an Event to a Calendar Task 149: Adding a Repeating Event to a Calendar Task 150: Adding Reminders and Notes to an Event Task 151: Inviting People to an Event Task 152: Adding a Calendar Task 153: Sharing a Calendar Task 154: Working with a Shared Calendar Task 155: Subscribing to a Calendar Task 156: Adding a To-Do Item Task 157: Searching Calendars and To-Do Lists Task 158: Printing Calendars and To-Do Lists
xiii 270
272
274
276
278
280
282
284
286
289
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
304
306
308
310
312
314
317
318
320
322
324
326
328
330
332
334
336
338
340
xiv
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less
Part 14: Audio with iTunes Task 159: Starting iTunes Task 160: Playing a CD with iTunes Task 161: Using the iTunes Equalizer Task 162: Importing Music from a CD Task 163: Using the iTunes Visualizer Task 164: Viewing and Editing Song Information Task 165: Exporting Your Music List Task 166: Importing Downloaded or Shared Music Task 167: Creating a Playlist Task 168: Creating a Smart Playlist Task 169: Listening to and Editing a Playlist Task 170: Setting iTunes Preferences Task 171: Setting More iTunes Preferences Task 172: Burning a Music CD Task 173: Setting Burn Preferences Task 174: Sharing Music with iTunes Task 175: Listening to Internet Radio Task 176: Searching and Sorting Your iTunes Library Task 177: Using the iTunes Music Store Task 178: More about Your iTunes Music Store
Part 15: Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto Task 179: Importing Photos from a Digital Camera Task 180: Importing Photos from Your Computer or a Disk Task 181: Rotating a Photo Task 182: Cropping a Photo Task 183: Editing Photos in Separate Windows Task 184: Editing Photos in Other Programs Task 185: Customizing the Way That Photos Are Displayed in iPhoto Task 186: Adding Text Details to Photos Task 187: Finding Photos in iPhoto Task 188: Adjusting the Exposure of a Photo Task 189: Retouching a Photo Task 190: Removing Red-Eye from a Photo Task 191: Converting a Color Photo to Black and White Task 192: Creating a New Photo Library Task 193: Creating a Photo Album
343
344
346
348
350
352
354
356
358
360
362
364
366
368
370
372
374
376
378
380
382
385
386
388
390
392
394
396
398
400
402
404
406
408
410
412
414
Contents Task 194: Using Photos as Desktop Pictures and Screensavers Task 195: Emailing Photos Task 196: Exporting Photos Task 197: Printing a Photo on Your Printer Task 198: Ordering Professional Color Prints Task 199: Creating a Photo Book Task 200: Creating a Slide Show with Your Photos Task 201: Creating a Web Page of Photos Task 202: Archiving Photos to CD
Part 16: Video Editing with iMovie Task 203: Capturing a Digital Photograph from a Digital Video in iMovie Task 204: Importing Existing Content into iMovie Task 205: Splitting Video Clips Task 206: Adding a Transition or Fade Task 207: Trimming and Cropping a Video Clip Task 208: Adding Still Photos to a Movie Task 209: Adding Motion to a Photo Task 210: Adding Audio to a Movie Task 211: Adding Narration Task 212: Saving a Video to View on Your Computer Task 213: Saving a Video to a DVD
Part 17: Terminal Tricks Task 214: Starting Terminal Task 215: Setting Terminal Preferences Task 216: Customizing Terminal Appearances Task 217: Customizing Terminal Settings Task 218: Customizing More Terminal Settings Task 219: Customizing Color and Window Settings for Terminal Task 220: Customizing Terminal Keyboard Shortcuts Task 221: Saving Custom Terminal Settings Task 222: Changing the Terminal Shell Task 223: Connecting to an FTP Server through Terminal Task 224: Connecting to an SSH Server through Terminal Task 225: Adding Services and Servers Task 226: Turning on Sharing Services Task 227: Using Terminal to Start an Application
xv 416
418
420
422
424
426
428
430
432
435
436
438
440
442
444
446
448
450
452
454
456
459
460
462
464
466
468
470
472
474
476
478
480
482
484
486
xvi
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less
Part 18: Speech and Accessibility Task 228: Having Your System Read Aloud Task 229: Changing the System Voice Task 230: Starting Speech Recognition Task 231: Setting How Your System Listens Task 232: Choosing and Viewing Recognizable Commands Task 233: Enabling and Editing Spoken User Interface Preferences Task 234: Adjusting Mouse Usage Task 235: Changing Keyboard Settings Task 236: Viewing and Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
Part 19: Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help Task 237: Finding Detailed Information about Your System Task 238: Using More System Profiler Features Task 239: Checking Your Connection Using the Network Utility Task 240: Running Software Update Task 241: Disabling Unwanted Updates Task 242: Downloading Installers through Software Update Task 243: Force-Quitting an Application Task 244: Force-Quitting an Application from Terminal Task 245: Launching the Help Viewer Task 246: Getting First Aid Task 247: Restoring System Software Task 248: Erasing a Disk Task 249: Resetting Your Forgotten Password Task 250: Resetting the Root Password Task 251: Deleting a Problem File Task 252: Controlling Access with Keychain Index
489
490
492
494
496
498
500
502
504
506
509
510
512
514
516
518
520
522
524
526
528
530
532
534
536
538
540
543
Introduction
T
he Mac operating system has come a long way in recent years, with monumental steps, for example, from the “classic” OS 9 to the flashy new OS X (10). Both on the inside and out, OS X brought a major overhaul to the Mac, and changed the way new and long-time friends approached it. While the Mac has always been known for its highly graphical interface, OS X “upped the ante,” so to speak. In fact, just about everything in OS X is now animated, from the Dock that houses links to active and frequently used applications, to the animated transitions that appear when switching from one user to another on a shared computer.
Panther (version 10.3) is the most stable operating system the Mac (and, arguably, any computer) has ever seen. Daily crashes and reboots are things of the past! The UNIX-based foundation provides for a strong system capable of running separate application environments seamlessly. The suite of tools available in OS X is absolutely superb. Home and business users alike can create professional-quality slideshows (iPhoto), movies (iMovie), and audio CDs (iTunes), as well as videoconference for free with other iChat AV users anywhere in the world. In addition, Sherlock puts valuable information about stocks, maps, movies, flights, phone numbers, and more, at your fingertips.
How This Book Is Organized This book is organized into 19 parts, containing specific tasks with 10 steps or less. For the most part, the book begins with the very basics and progresses into slightly more complex areas of the operating system. Because the Panther operating system ships with so many add-on applications and tools, only the most commonly used of those are discussed in depth. For example, Safari (the Mac Web browser) has its own part entirely, because it’s such a commonly used aspect of the operating system. By contrast, the Font Book (a new application used to manage fonts) is discussed in particular tasks, but not given space in an entire part because it’s not as commonly used as Safari. Following is a brief synopsis of each part in the book: • Part 1: Mac OS X Basics — This part discusses the very basics of the operating system, such as logging in, setting the clock and date, and browsing the system. In addition, opening and closing windows is discussed, primarily because it is different than how windows are opened and closed in other types of operating systems. • Part 2: Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account — Part 2 moves into discussing how to change your password and default user icon, as well as other ways to personalize your account on this computer. For example, this part tells how to change the screen saver and background image, so they are customized according to your tastes each time you log in.
xviii
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less • Part 3: Utilizing Preferences and Customizing — The system preferences can be a daunting piece of the operating system all on its own. This part helps you work through those preferences, and introduces the new Font Book. • Part 4: Finding and Working with Files — In Panther, the way we search for and work with files is different than in past versions of the operating system. Part 4 identifies those differences and provides step-by-step tips for creating, selecting, deleting, opening, and searching for files on your computer. • Part 5: Managing Users — This part deals with the issues that arise when a computer is shared by multiple people, at home, school, or work. Tasks in this section cover topics such as adding user accounts, changing user permissions, deleting accounts, and switching users. • Part 6: Word Processing with TextEdit — Panther comes with the TextEdit application, which is capable of serving most word processing needs. Part 6 discusses starting TextEdit, creating new documents, adding special characters, and customizing the appearance. • Part 7: Networking — Even many home users have multiple computers now, which can be easily networked together to share files, Internet connections, and even printers. This part covers how to set up a variety of different types of networks (such as Ethernet, AirPort, and modem connections), as well as how to share your Internet connection and connect to a local server. • Part 8: Printing and Faxing — The OS 9 Chooser is a thing of the past, and so this chapter on printing is important to experienced and new users alike. Tasks in this part include “Sharing a Printer,” and “Managing Print Jobs.” Furthermore, the print tool in Panther is also capable of faxing, provided you have a modem and your computer is connected to a telephone line. So faxing is also discussed in Part 8. • Part 9: Using .Mac and Sherlock — Apple has a fee-based service called .Mac that provides users with everything from email accounts to Web disk space. Part 9 teaches how to set up your own .Mac account and configure some of its features. In addition, it covers Apple’s built-in search tool, Sherlock, which is capable of searching the Internet for everything from stock prices to movie times. • Part 10: Correspondence with Mail and Address Book — Who doesn’t have an email account these days? Apple’s built-in email program, appropriately called “Mail,” is a powerful, yet easy-to-use, tool for managing all your email accounts. Its sister application, Address Book, stores all your contact information for friends and family in a single database that is easy to configure, search, and even print. Part 10 covers both tools in detail. • Part 11: Surfing the Web with Safari — Mac users have long wished for a Web browser that was stable and powerful. With Safari, both wishes have been granted. This part discusses everything from starting Safari for the first time to using bookmarks, preferences, and more customized features such as SnapBack and tabs. • Part 12: Instant Messaging with iChat — In addition to wishing for a stable Web browser, Mac users have long wished for a stable instant messaging program. iChat AV, in particular, is wonderfully stable and superior to other instant messaging tools because it offers free videoconferencing. Learn more by referencing the tasks in Part 12.
Introduction
xix
• Part 13: Scheduling with iCal — Panther ships with yet another tool that adds functionality to this already stellar operating system: iCal. This calendar program makes it easy to manage multiple schedules visually, be it for work, school, the kids, birthdays, or whatever. This part covers starting iCal, adding events, customizing calendars, and much more. • Part 14: Audio with iTunes — Music aficionados take note: Apple shares your love of music and makes it easy to manage that love with its add-on tool called iTunes. Part 14 covers this tool in detail, from playing a CD on your computer to creating customized playlists of songs and then burning those playlists to a CD. Additional tasks include “Using the iTunes Music Store” to download music. • Part 15: Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto — As more people get digital cameras, the need for more powerful digital storage programs exists. iPhoto helps Mac users catalog, search, and otherwise manage large collections of digital photos. This part delves deep into the tool to make you productive using it. • Part 16: Video Editing with iMovie — One of the most commonly promoted aspects of the Mac is its ability to very easily create slick home movies using the iMovie tool. Part 16 discusses the basics of using this powerful tool, from capturing digital video to adding audio and saving to a DVD. • Part 17: Terminal Tricks — This section of the book is different from the rest because it gives a glimpse “under the hood” of the operating system. Topics covered in this part include starting the Terminal application, connecting to an FTP server, and using the Terminal to start another application. • Part 18: Speech and Accessibility — As computers become increasingly complex, their ability to understand verbal commands also increases. This part covers some ways to use voice recognition with your Mac, as well as ways to customize the keyboard and mouse settings. • Part 19: Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help — Well, if none of the other parts answered your questions, hopefully this one will point you in the right direction. Regardless of what book you’re reading or class you’re taking, you’ll always have additional questions. This section of the book provides steps you can take to try to solve problems, as well as places you can go for more help.
Who Should Read This Book The Mac operating system, and, in particular, Panther (10.3), has quite a varied audience, from long-time fans to brand-new users. As such, this book was written with that varied audience in mind and is suitable for all users of the Panther operating system (whether you’ve been using a Mac for years or days) who are looking to increase productivity and efficiency with the system. The nature of this book — 10 steps or less — makes it particularly useful to people who are more interested in how to perform specific tasks, as opposed to those who want to know exactly what is going on behind the scenes. This book leaves out all of the confusing “techno-talk,” replacing it instead with clear, concise, step-by-step directions on completing common tasks.
xx
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less
If you’re new to the Mac, you’re probably best served by starting at the very beginning in Part 1. In fact, even if you’re a long-time user of Macs, you’ll likely need to refer to Part 1, as it discusses (among other things) something completely new to the Mac in this operating system: logging in and sharing your computer. If you are an experienced Mac user, you can quickly jump from one part to another, without feeling like you missed something. The following parts will likely be of particular interest to long-term Mac users, because these parts outline common tasks that are distinctly different in this version of the operating system: • Part 1: Mac OS X Basics • Part 2: Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account • Part 3: Utilizing Preferences and Customizing • Part 4: Finding and Working with Files • Part 5: Managing Users • Part 7: Networking • Part 8: Printing and Faxing • Part 14: Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help Each part is clearly named according to the tasks discussed inside. While the tasks within a particular part do tend to build upon one another, the Cross-References in the sidebars provide quick reference to related tasks.
Tools You Will Need The tasks in this book were written based on version 10.3 of the Mac operating system. While many tasks will also work in versions 10.1 and 10.2, most require at least Panther (10.3). Unless a particular task specifies otherwise, all tasks can be completed with the basic installation of the operating system on any Mac that meets the installation requirements.
Conventions Used in This Book As you go through this book, you will find a few unique elements. We’ll describe those elements here so that you’ll understand them when you see them.
Text You Type and Text on the Screen Whenever you are asked to type in text, the text you are to type appears in bold like this: 1. Type in this address: 111 River Street. When we are referring to specific filenames, directories, pathnames, or URLs, we’ll use a monospace font, like this: 1. Check out http://www.wiley.com.
Introduction
xxi
Icons
A number of special icons appear in the margins of each task to provide additional information you might find helpful.
note The Note icon is used to provide additional information or help in working with Windows XP.
tip The Tip icon is used to point out an interesting idea or technique that will save you time, effort, money, or all three.
caution The Caution icon is used to alert you to potential problems that you might run into when working with Windows XP.
cross-reference Although this book is divided into tasks to make it easy to find exactly what you’re looking for, few tasks really stand completely alone. The CrossReference icon provides us the opportunity to point out other tasks in the book you might want to look at if you’re inter ested in this task.
Part 1: Mac OS X Basics Task 1:
Logging In, Setting Automatic Login, and Logging Off
Task 2:
Acting as Another User
Task 3:
Shutting Down, Restarting, and Putting the Computer to Sleep
Task 4:
Setting the Clock and Date
Task 5:
Setting the Volume
Task 6:
Viewing a Contextual Menu
Task 7:
Browsing the System
Task 8:
Closing, Hiding, and Exposing Windows
Task 9:
Creating Aliases and Utilizing the Sidebar
Task 10:
Ejecting a Removable Disc
Task 11:
Taking and Printing Screen Shots
Task 12:
Installing New Software
2
Task
1
Part 1
Logging In, Setting Automatic Login, and Logging Off
O notes
• • •
Only an administrator can delete other accounts. No one can delete the user account that is currently logged in.
S X allows multiple users to use the same OS X system, with each user having different desktop settings, access to certain programs and files, and other features. This task explains how to log into and out of an OS X system, and how to set a specific user (such as yourself) to automatically log in. Since you’ll almost certainly start logged into a system, you’ll begin by logging off. 1. Choose Apple ➪ Log Out. The dialog shown in Figure 1-1 asks if
you are sure you want to log out.
You can edit or delete accounts if you have administrator-level access. Only the administrator can delete an account, and no one can delete the user account that is currently logged in (you can’t delete yourself without logging out and logging back in as someone else).
Figure 1-1: The Log Out dialog.
2. Click the Log Out button in the dialog shown in Figure 1-1 to log out. (The system automatically logs you out after two minutes if you do nothing.) A dialog appears, showing the names of the user accounts on the system. 3. Click your user name. The dialog changes to show only your user name and a field for a password. 4. Type your password in the field and press Return, or click the Log In button. If you accidentally clicked someone else’s user name, click the Go Back button to return to the display of the list of users. 5. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock, or choose Apple ➪ System Preferences. The System Preferences window appears, as shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2: The System Preferences window.
Mac OS X Basics
3
6. Click the Accounts icon in the System row to show the Accounts pane in the System Preferences window, as shown in Figure 1-3. Click the Login Options below the list of user names.
Task
1
tips
• • •
Figure 1-3: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
7. Click the box next to “Automatically log in as.” 8. Click the drop-down box next to “Automatically log in as” and select your user name. 9. A drop-down sheet displays the user’s name and an empty password field, as shown in Figure 1-4.
• •
If you are the only user of this OS X system, set your self up to automatically log in to save time. You may not want to set up automatic login if the OS X system is in a place where others can use it without you being around (such as an office). You can also log out with the key combination Ô-Shift-Q. If you are the only user of the OS X system, set up automatic login to skip the login process. You can set applications to start automatically when you log in, and also to have them hide automatically after they start up.
cross-references
•
Figure 1-4: The user’s password must be entered in the drop-down sheet to allow the user to be logged in automatically.
10. Enter the user’s password. Click the OK button.
• •
Changing your password in the My Account pane of System Preferences is dis cussed in Task 13, “Changing Your Password and Icon.” Part 2, “Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account,” discusses other ways to modify your OS X system. Part 5, “Managing Users,” shows you how to modify user accounts and preferences.
4
Task
2
Part 1
Acting as Another User
I
n some cases, you will have other user accounts on the system. There may be times when you will want to be that user. You can have multiple user accounts for yourself created with different access to programs and files, or with different settings for the screen and Dock, depending on how you want to use the computer. This task shows you how to access the system as another user.
notes
•
•
In Figure 2-3, the prompt shows that you are now acting as the James Mason account only in the Terminal application. If you click the desktop, the OS X system still has you logged in as the first user account. A recently created user account has the default settings, and does not inherit any custom system settings you’ve made to your account. Also, the new user will have the default setting for any applications, whether or not you or another user has cus tomized those applications.
1. Choose Apple ➪ Log Out. A dialog shown in Figure 2-1 asks if you
are sure you want to log out.
Figure 2-1: The Log Out dialog.
2. Click the Log Out button to log out. (The system automatically logs you out after two minutes if you do nothing.) A dialog appears, showing the names of the user accounts on the system. 3. Click the name of the user account under which you wish to log in. The dialog changes to show only the chosen user name and a field for a password. 4. Type the user account’s password in the field and press Return, or click the Log In button. If you accidentally clicked a user name other than the one you wish to log in as, click the Go Back button to return to the list of users. 5. You can also act as another user on the command line, with the Unix command su. To use the command line to act as another user, doubleclick the hard disk icon on the OS X desktop to open it. 6. Double-click the Applications folder to open it. 7. Double-click the Utilities folder to open it. 8. Double-click on the Terminal application icon to start it. Figure 2-2 shows the open Utilities folder with the Terminal icon in the background and a Terminal window open in the foreground. Looking at the prompt, you can see the following, which shows that you are logged in to the Rosanne-Groves-Computer system with the mikejones account. Rosanne-Groves-Computer:~ mikejones$
Mac OS X Basics
5
Task
2
tips
•
Figure 2-2: The Terminal window and the Applications/Utilities folder.
•
9. Enter the following and press Return: su jmason
10. When the Password prompt appears, type the password for the user account you are switching to (in this case, mason’s password). Figure 2-3 shows the new prompt in the terminal window.
• •
Preferences for applica tions are separate for each user. For example, if you use iTunes and then log in as a new user, you’ll need to go through the setup for iTunes for the new user account. To see what account you’re currently logged in as, open the Accounts pane in System Preferences. The current account is in the left column under the heading My Account. Shutting down the system automatically logs you and everyone else out. You can also log out with the key combination Ô-Shift-Q.
cross-references
•
Figure 2-3: Switching users in the Terminal does not affect the OS X system desktop.
• •
Shutting down without log ging out automatically logs out the current account. When the system restarts, the user defined as auto matic login (if there is one) will be logged in. To set a user to automatically log in, see Task 1, “Logging In, Setting Automatic Login, and Logging Off.” To see who you are, open the Accounts pane of System Preferences, as pre sented in Task 13, “Changing Your Password and Icon.” Part 2, “Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account,” discusses ways to modify your OS X system.
6
Task
3
Part 1
Shutting Down, Restarting, and Putting the Computer to Sleep
W notes
•
•
A sleeping system uses less energy than an actively running one. If your system has a wireless (Airport) card in it, you can also turn Airport off if you’re out of range of a wireless network (to conserve more energy). To restart your system in Classic mode (Mac OS 9), use the Startup Disk pane of the System Preferences window.
hen not in active use, the computer system can be “put to sleep” to conserve power (especially important for extending battery life if the system is a notebook computer) or can be shut down. Sleep is a pausing of the system from which it can “wake up” more quickly than it can restart or shut down and restart. This task takes you through several ways to shut down and restart a system, and also shows you how to put a system to sleep and wake it up. 1. To put a system to sleep, choose Apple ➪ Sleep, as shown in Figure
3-1. The screen shuts off, and the hard disk stops spinning. However,
the system is not completely shut down, and the system will not quit
any open applications.
Figure 3-1: The Apple menu offers the options to Sleep, Restart,
or Shut Down the system.
2. To wake up the system, press a key on the keyboard. If you have a notebook computer that is sleeping, opening the screen and tapping the spacebar wakes up the system. 3. To shut down the system, choose Apple ➪ Shut Down from the menu (refer to Figure 3-1). A dialog shown in Figure 3-2 appears, asking if you are sure. Click the Shut Down button in the dialog (or just press the Return key) and the screen shut offs. The hard disk stops spinning, and the system shuts down completely. If the system is a desktop or tower system, you can unplug the power cord and move the machine at this point.
Mac OS X Basics
7
Task
3
Figure 3-2: A dialog makes sure you don’t accidentally shut down the OS X system.
4. Another way to shut down an OS X system is to press the Power key on the keyboard if one is present. A dialog shown in Figure 3-3 offers the options to Restart, Sleep, Cancel, or Shut Down. To shut down the system, you can either use the mouse or trackpad to click the Shut Down button, or press the Return key on the keyboard to choose the highlighted button.
tips
•
• Figure 3-3: The dialog displayed when the Power key is pressed offers the options to
Restart, Sleep, Cancel, or Shut Down the system. 5. To restart the system, choose Apple ➪ Restart from the menu (refer to Figure 3-1). The OS X system shuts down all applications and restarts itself.
•
If the OS X system is a notebook computer, you can put it to sleep simply by closing the notebook. If you use another way to put a notebook to sleep, you can close the screen with out waking up the system. Since a sleeping system uses much less power than an “awake” system, you can improve battery life on a notebook computer by putting the system to sleep when you aren’t using it. Restart a crashed system by powering the system off and on. OS X does diagnostic checks after a power cycle, so startup may take slightly longer.
cross-references
• •
For information on adjust ing energy use of OS X systems, see Task 27, “Adjusting Sleep and Energy Saving Settings.” To restart the system with OS 9 (Classic mode), see Task 22, “Setting the Startup Disk.” For informa tion on troubleshooting hung or crashed systems, see Part 19, “Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help.”
8
Task
4
Part 1
Setting the Clock and Date
W notes
•
•
•
Only an administrator can set the system date and time. If you can’t change the date and time, you don’t have administrative rights on this OS X system. Log out and log back in as an administrator, or ask someone who has adminis trator rights on the system to help you.
hen OS X is installed on a system, the OS X Installer prompts you to set a date and time. The date and time is used by the system to track when it does certain things (for example, the Software Update system application can be set to automatically check for new software every Sunday night). This task shows you where and how to set the date and time, where to change the format of the date and time, and how to set the system to use a network time server. 1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences to show the System Preferences
window.
2. Click the Date & Time icon in the System row to show the Date &
Time pane of System Preferences, as shown in Figure 4-1.
An application called Clock is included with OS X in the Applications folder. You can set it to display as a digital or analog (with hands) clock in the Dock or in a floating window. When a file is created or edited, it uses the system date and time to time stamp the creation or editing time.
Figure 4-1: The Network Time is set on the Date & Time tab of the Date & Time pane
with the checking of a box. 3. To change the date, click the portion of the date you would like to adjust (month, day, or year). You may also use the calendar below the date to select the day. 4. To start using a network time server, click the checkbox next to “Set Date & Time automatically.” Choose a server from the drop-down box, as shown in Figure 4-1. The time will be set automatically whenever the system is restarted or awakened and connected to the Internet. 5. Click the Time Zone tab in the Date & Time pane. The correct time zone must be indicated so that the correct network time is set. 6. Click on the area closest to where you are on the map to set the correct time zone, as shown in Figure 4-2.
Mac OS X Basics
9
Task
4
Figure 4-2: The Time Zone is set using the map or the drop-down list.
7. The formats for display of the date and time are not set in the Date & Time pane of System Preferences, but in the International pane. To switch to the International pane, choose View ➪ International. 8. Click the Formats tab to change the date format, as shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3: The Formats tab of the International pane of System Preferences sets the
format to use to display dates, times, and numbers. 9. Choose the format you want the system to use to display the date, time, and numbers by choosing the region in the Region drop-down list at the top of the Formats tab. You may customize the default settings for the chosen region by clicking on the Customize button for the date, time, or numbers.
cross-references
• • •
The OS X Software Update system application is pre sented in Task 240, “Running Software Update.” Adding an application to the Dock is presented in Task 18, “Setting the Dock Preferences.” For more information about setting up the System Administrator account, see Task 54, “Enabling the System Administrator Account.”
10
Task
5
Part 1
Setting the Volume
O
S X provides several ways to control audio volume. If the volume is set too high, a system beep for a common action such as receiving email may startle you. Also, having the system volume too loud may distract others who might be around in a home or work environment. This task explains how to set the volume to your preferred level.
notes
• •
The Output volume bar is visible no matter which of the three tabs of the Sound pane you select.
1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences, as shown in Figure 5-1.
Applications have their own volume controls, but the maximum application vol ume is limited to the maxi mum system volume.
Figure 5-1: Open System Preferences from the Apple menu.
2. Click the Sound icon in the Hardware row to open the Sound pane, as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2: The Sound pane of the System Preferences window.
Mac OS X Basics 3. Adjust the sound volume by moving the slider in the Output volume bar at the bottom of the Sound pane.
11
Task
5
4. Click the Mute checkbox to mute the output volume completely. Uncheck the Mute checkbox to use the setting of the Output volume bar. 5. You can also mute the output volume by dragging the slider in the Output volume bar to the far left. 6. Click the Output tab. Check the checkbox to the left of “Show volume in menu bar” to show a small volume icon in the menu bar of the screen. Clicking the volume icon displays an icon, as shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3: The volume icon in the menu bar allows volume
tips
• •
adjustment without having to open System Preferences.
7. Adjust the volume by clicking the volume icon in the menu bar and adjusting the slider. The number of curved bars to the right of the volume icon changes to represent the level of sound output you’ve chosen, from three bars at near full volume up to no bars at low-tomuted volume. Look at the volume icons in Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4: The volume icon in Figure 5-3 is at medium volume as shown by two bars, and the volume icon with no bars in Figure 5-4 shows that the volume is muted. Figure 5-4: The menu bar volume icon adjusts
to show the output volume.
•
• •
You can mute certain appli cations with their volume control and still have the system volume be audible for other applications. For extra volume (for exam ple, to make playing games more interesting), external speakers can help a great deal. Again, you might consider what effect the louder volume might have on others in the area. Most Macintosh keyboards will have keys for muting (silencing), decreasing, and increasing the system vol ume. If these keys are pre sent on your keyboard, they will most often be located along the top edge of the keyboard and marked with a speaker icon. If the system volume is muted, then no sound comes out of the speaker. If you have the volume icon visible in the menu bar, you can Ô-click the icon and drag it to rearrange its position in the menu bar.
cross-reference
•
For more advice on audio usage, see Part 14, “Audio with iTunes.”
12
Task
6
Part 1
Viewing a Contextual Menu
O
S X provides many useful shortcut actions by way of a contextual menu. A con textual menu is a set of commands for a given item or situation, and contains only selected commands. This task shows you how to use a contextual menu.
notes
• • •
Contextual menus are also present in almost all thirdparty applications, not just within OS X itself. Menus are translucent in OS X so you can see through them to the desk top, windows, and icons underneath.
1. To view a contextual menu, you can start on the desktop. Move the
cursor to a blank area of the desktop on your OS X screen.
2. Press and hold the Control (Ctrl) key while moving the cursor. The
cursor changes to include a small rectangle to the lower right of the
cursor. Click the cursor to show the contextual menu for the desktop,
as shown in Figure 6-1. (This action will be referred to throughout
this book as a “Ctrl-click” or “Ctrl-clicking.”)
Figure 6-1: Contextual menus are available for almost every
object on the OS X desktop.
Preferences for applica tions are separate for each user.
3. Ctrl-click the icon of your OS X system’s hard disk. A different con textual menu appears, as shown in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2: Contextual menus change to show only
appropriate actions for objects.
4. Ctrl-clicking a file (such as a text document or a graphic) brings up a different contextual menu. Figure 6-3 shows the contextual menu displayed when you Ctrl-click a PDF file created and then saved in Adobe Acrobat file format. As you can see, the contextual menu for the file gives you the option of opening the file either with Preview, Adobe Reader 6.0, Adobe Photoshop 7.0, ColorSync Utility, or Freehand 10. These are the applications on this OS X system that are identified as being able to open files in the Adobe Acrobat format.
Mac OS X Basics
13
Task
6
tip Figure 6-3: Contextual menus for files can provide alternate applications to work with
•
the chosen file. 5. Ctrl-clicking the Finder icon in the Dock provides a quick way to choose between multiple windows on the desktop. As shown in Figure 6-4, the Applications window is checked in the Finder’s contextual menu because it is in the foreground. To move one of the other windows to the front, choose it from the list in the Finder’s contextual menu.
If you are using a multibut ton mouse, trackball, or other input device, you may be able to program it to send a Ctrl-click pair when you use a specific mouse or trackpad button.
cross-references
•
Figure 6-4: The contextual menu for the Finder provides a fast way to choose one open
window among many and move it to the front.
• •
Browsing the contents of the hard disk on your OS X system is presented in Task 7, “Browsing the System.” More help with files is pre sented in Part 4, “Finding and Working with Files.” Customizing the Finder is discussed in Task 21, “Setting Finder Preferences.”
14
Task
7
Part 1
Browsing the System
O
S X introduced several important changes from OS 9, from the Unix-based foundation of the operating system to the new look of the desktop. This task helps you use some of the new desktop features to navigate through multiple windows on the OS X desktop, as well as customize how you view the contents of the windows.
notes
• •
A view stays the same for a given folder. If you set the Application folder to List View, that folder will be dis played in List View the next time you open it. Starting from the left end, the title bar of a window has a close button, a mini mize button, a resize but ton, the title of the folder and the small icon as used in List View, and the lozenge button used to show and hide the toolbar.
1. Close all windows. Press Ô-N to create a new window. 2. Click the hard disk icon in the sidebar to show the window in Figure
7-1. This is the top level of your OS X hard disk. Notice the Back arrow
in the upper left is now usable. You’ve gone from the first view of the
window to a different view, so now you have somewhere to go back to.
The Forward arrow is grayed out and unusable because you haven’t gone
back yet, so there’s no forward path yet for the window to remember.
Figure 7-1: A new window, using the Icon View setting.
3. Click the Back button, and you’ll see the same image, except that now the Forward button is usable. The Back button is now grayed out again, because you’re back to where you began and there’s nowhere further back for you to go. 4. Click the Forward button to return to the view shown in Figure 7-1. 5. As you can see, the icons are scattered about in the window. Sometimes it’s easier to find an item you’re looking for if you don’t have the icons. Find the three view buttons next to the Back and Forward arrows in the toolbar of the window. Click the middle button (the button with four horizontal straight lines on it). The window changes to the List View mode shown in Figure 7-2.
Mac OS X Basics
15
Task
7
tips
•
Figure 7-2: In List View, folders and items can be easier to find.
6. In List View mode, you can sort the items in the window in several different ways. In Figure 7-2, the items are sorted by name in ascending order. This is shown by the Name column header being highlighted, and the upward-pointing arrow at the end of the column header. Click the Name column header to reverse the arrow pointer. The sort order is now descending (Z . . A).
•
In the List View, click a file and use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to scroll up and down through the list of files. In Column View, use the up and down arrows to scroll through files and folders in the current folder column, and use the left and right arrows to scroll through the directory structure.
7. Click the Name header a second time to restore the order, as shown in Figure 7-2. 8. Click the Date Modified header to switch the sorting of the items in the window from alphabetical by name to most recently modified. Click the Name header again to restore the view to the one shown in Figure 7-2. 9. Click the right button of the view choices in the window toolbar to show the Column View, as shown in Figure 7-3.
cross-reference
•
Figure 7-3: Column View shows you the folders and files in a kind of file browser view.
More help with files is pre sented in Part 4, “Finding and Working with Files.”
16
Task
8
Part 1
Closing, Hiding, and Exposing Windows
A
s with a physical desktop, you can have so many windows, files, and icons on your OS X desktop that you have trouble finding what you want to work with at any given time. OS X has several ways to unclutter a desktop with multiple windows. This task discusses how to simplify your view of the OS X desktop.
notes
• • •
When the window is mini mized it is just an incredi bly small representation of the exact same window. When you open a new Finder window by using Ô-n, the window opens to show your home directory.
1. You’ll need some objects to work with. Double-click the hard disk
icon on the desktop to create a single Finder window. Press Ô-n to
create a second window.
2. Click the Safari icon in the Dock to open a third window, as shown in Figure 8-1. Safari is Apple’s Web browser.
Starting from the left end, the title bar of a window has a Close button, a Minimize button, a Zoom button, the title of the folder, the small icon used in List View, and the oval button used to show and hide the toolbar.
Figure 8-1: It can get messy when there are three or more windows on the desktop.
caution
•
The Finder opens a window to the last place it was before it was minimized to the Dock.
3. Now the desktop is cluttered with three windows. Press the F11 key to expose your desktop. 4. Press F11 again to return your desktop to the way it was. 5. Click the yellow window button in the upper-left corner of the Safari window, as shown in Figure 8-2. The window is minimized on the right side of the Dock. Click the button in the Dock representing the window to restore it. Figure 8-2: These three buttons are the window controls.
Mac OS X Basics
17
6. Press the F9 key. Now you can see all the windows that you have open on the desktop, as shown in Figure 8-3. Click the Finder window for your hard disk to make it your active window.
Task
8
tips
•
• • Figure 8-3: All of the windows appear as if by magic thanks to Exposé.
•
7. Press the F10 key. You can see all the Finder windows you have open on the desktop. Notice that the Safari window looks grayed out in the background. Press the F10 key again to return the hard disk Finder window to the foreground.
Look at the Dock and you’ll see some of the icons in the Dock have small triangles underneath them, pointing upward. These arrows show which applications in the Dock are currently running and have open windows. The Finder icon is always the icon on the far-left end of the Dock. Exposé is a new feature in OS X that allows you to easily see all the windows you have open, choose one, or move them all out of the way. In the List View, click a file and use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to scroll up and down through the list of files.
8. Click the Red button in the upper-left corner of the window to close the hard disk Finder window. 9. Click the Safari icon in the Dock to bring the Safari window to the foreground. Click Safari ➪ Hide Safari in the menu. Safari completely disappears. It’s not minimized, but there is still an arrow under the icon in the Dock, as shown in Figure 8-4.
cross-reference
•
Figure 8-4: The Dock shows what programs are running even if the windows are hidden.
10. Click the Safari icon with the arrow beneath it. Now, click the green button in the upper-left corner of the window. This Zoom button toggles between the standard window size and the last size you manually set for the window.
Taking a snapshot of your desktop is explained in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.”
18
Task
9
Part 1
Creating Aliases and Utilizing the Sidebar
O notes
• • •
•
An alias icon always dis plays the small arrow in the lower-left corner of the icon. However, you can edit the name and remove “alias” from the name. You can also Ctrl-click an icon and choose the Make Alias command from the contextual menu to make an alias. When an alias is created, its name is automatically selected. Type a name to replace the selected text with your preferred name for the alias, or click the desktop to accept the default name.
ne of the goals of OS X is to help you save time by simplifying the task of getting to the things you access the most. The sidebar in the Finder windows enables you to list your most commonly accessed files, folders, programs, and disks for quicker access. The sidebar list contains aliases, which are “shortcuts” that tell the system to go to another location to access the source of the alias. This task shows you how to make aliases, and place them in the sidebar. 1. Start with an empty desktop. Double-click the hard disk icon to open
a new Finder window.
2. Click the Applications icon in the sidebar to display the Applications
window.
3. Click the Utilities folder within the first Applications folder. 4. Click File ➪ Make Alias in the menu bar. Another Utilities folder
now points to the original, as shown in Figure 9-1.
The arrow on the alias icon is required, but you can change the name of the alias icon.
Figure 9-1: One way to create an alias is by using the menu.
5. Drag the Utilities alias to the sidebar under Pictures, and drop it. Now close all of the windows you have open by pressing Ô-Q on your keyboard. 6. Click the Finder icon in the Dock. A Finder window opens and displays your Home folder. Notice the Utilities icon in the sidebar, as shown in Figure 9-2.
Mac OS X Basics
19
Task
9
tips
•
Figure 9-2: The Utilities alias will appear in every Finder window now that it has been added to the sidebar.
•
7. Click the Applications icon in the sidebar. Point to the Calculator application. Press and hold the Option and Command keys and drag the Calculator Icon onto the desktop. An alias for the Calculator now appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 9-3
The Dock can be a good place to store aliases, but be careful that the Dock doesn’t get too crowded. A Dock alias is different from a normal alias. To add an alias to the Dock, just drag the icon from the desk top to the Dock and drop it. The Dock icon created in this way has no arrow.
cross-references
•
Figure 9-3: An alias has an arrow on the icon when it is created.
•
If you have trouble seeing the Utilities folder, you may want to switch to List View and sort by name, as dis cussed in Task 7, “Browsing the System.” For more options OS X has for using the Dock, see Task 18, “Setting the Dock Preferences.”
20
Task
10
Part 1
Ejecting a Removable Disc
A
CD-ROM is one of several kinds of volumes OS X can work with. A volume is a hard disk (or a portion of a hard disk acting as a separate disk), a CD-ROM, or an external drive connected by SCSI, USB, or FireWire. OS X has several ways to manipulate volumes. This task describes how to eject a removable disc.
notes
• • •
In general, a mounted disk or volume is a separate icon that appears on the OS X desktop when it is mounted. A removable disk can be ejected using the contex tual menu. When you are ejecting a removable disk, a large ejection symbol appears in the middle of the screen.
1. Find a CD somewhere, such as the Mac OS X Install discs that likely came with your OS X system, or even a music CD. 2. Insert the CD into the CD drive on your OS X system. The icon for the CD should appear on the desktop. Figure 10-1 shows the Down with Love DVD/CD (digital video disc) on the desktop. If any applications start up automatically, quit them by Ctrl-clicking the application’s icon (or just click the icon and hold the mouse button down until the contextual menu pops up) in the Dock, and choosing Quit from the application’s contextual menu. Figure 10-1: CDs appear on the desktop.
3. Click the CD icon to select it. The disc darkens when it is selected. 4. From the menu bar, select File ➪ Eject to eject the CD, as shown in Figure 10-2.
caution
•
Always eject a disc before removing it from a drive. Always eject a removable volume (such as a FireWire hard disk) before discon necting the cable.
Figure 10-2: Removable discs can be ejected using the menu bar.
Mac OS X Basics 5. Reinsert the CD into the CD drive on your OS X system, and click the icon again to select it.
21
Task
6. Eject the CD with the keyboard shortcut Ô-F12.
10
7. Reinsert the CD into the CD drive on your OS X system. 8. Double-click the CD icon to open it in a Finder window. The CD is now in the sidebar with an eject icon to the right of it. Close the Finder window. 9. Click the CD icon to select it, and drag it to the Trash to eject the CD. Notice that, while you are clicking and dragging the CD, the Trash icon has changed to a triangle above a horizontal line, as shown in Figure 10-3. If you have a key on your keyboard with that symbol, pressing that key should also eject the CD.
Figure 10-3: Dragging a removable disc icon to the Trash ejects the disc.
cross-references
• •
•
The OS X system can be set to display or not display cer tain types of volumes, as discussed in Task 21, “Setting Finder Preferences.” Inserting a blank CD-ROM causes OS X to prompt you with a dialog asking what to do with it. See Task 43, “Transferring Files by Physical Means,” for more information. You can set an application to start automatically, as dis cussed in Task 20, “Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login.”
22
Task
11
Part 1
Taking and Printing Screen Shots
S
creen shots are snapshots of your desktop. You might take screen shots for a variety of reasons, from saving an error message in an application to saving your high score in a game. This task explains how to take screen shots, sometimes called screen captures.
notes
• • •
The screen capture in Step 1 captures the entire desktop. The 10-second delay can be useful to position icons and objects on the desk top, or to get a capture of an application screen while doing something else.
1. Simultaneously press Ô-Shift-3 on your keyboard. A PDF file
appears on your desktop named “Picture 1.”
2. Double-click the file icon to view the picture, as shown in Figure
11-1. Notice the screen shot doesn’t show the Picture 1 PDF file.
The Selection Grab dialog in Step 10 will not be included in the selection grab.
Figure 11-1: Ô-Shift-3 saves the screen as a PDF file.
3. Close the Preview window showing the screen capture. 4. Press Ô-Shift-4. Your cursor changes to large crosshairs. This lets you choose a section of the desktop to capture. 5. Move the crosshairs to the left of and below the Picture 1 icon, and press and hold the mouse or trackpad button as you drag the crosshairs to the right and above the hard disk icon. A second PDF file named “Picture 2” appears on the desktop. 6. Double-click “Picture 2” to see the selection of the desktop as your second screen capture, as shown in Figure 11-2. 7. Close the Preview window showing Picture 2.
Mac OS X Basics
23 Figure 11-2: Ô-Shift-4 saves your chosen selection of the screen as a PDF file.
Task
11
tips
•
8. Open the hard disk, open the Application folder, then open the Utilities folder. Double-click the Grab icon shown in Figure 11-3 to start the Grab screen capture application included with OS X.
•
• •
Ô-Shift-4 changes the cur sor to crosshairs and acts as the Grab selection by default. Pressing the spacebar toggles the crosshairs to a camera icon, and allows you to take a snapshot of only the window the camera is over. You can also take screen shots from the command line. Open a Terminal win dow and type screencap ture at the prompt to see the help information for the screencapture command. You can also use the Go ➪ Applications command in the menu bar to open the Applications folder. The screen capture keys in this task save the graphic as a PDF file. The Grab application saves files as TIFF format files.
Figure 11-3: The Grab application menus offer more options for screen captures.
9. Choose Capture ➪ Timed Screen from the menu bar. A dialog shown in Figure 11-4 appears and explains you have 10 seconds after clicking the Start Timer button before the screen shot is taken. Figure 11-4: If Grab is running, Ô-Shift-Z saves the
screen after a 10-second delay.
10. From the menu bar, choose Capture ➪ Selection. A dialog appears that explains you should drag a rectangle with the cursor of the area of the screen you want to capture. When you do so, only the selected area is saved as a screen capture.
cross-reference
•
Part 15, “Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto” dis cusses how to crop, edit, and modify pictures such as screen shots.
24
Task
12
note
•
Some applications will require you to quit all other active applications when installing them. Sometimes the application’s installer will provide an easy way to quit all applications from within the installer, or you may have to go to the desktop and quit the other applications yourself.
Part 1
Installing New Software
I
nstalling new software can differ from program to program. For some programs, installation is a matter of copying the compressed file to your OS X system, double-clicking on the compressed file to uncompress it, and copying the folder or application to your hard disk (normally to the Applications folder). This task uses the Apple QuickTime application as an example to discuss the process of installing software using the Apple Installer. 1. Download the QuickTime installer from Apple Computer. Use your Web browser and go to www.apple.com/quicktime/download/. Select the correct operating system, and click on the Download QuickTime button. The file downloads to your OS X system as a compressed disk image, with a .dmg extension. 2. The compressed image will automatically decompress. The disk image is opened and begins to install automatically. The disk image appears on the desktop as a virtual volume or disk. Close all opened windows, and cancel the installation that began. 3. Double-click the QuickTime disk image to open the volume window. You can see the package file named QuickTime.pkg, along with the icons for the compressed and uncompressed disk images in the window, as shown in Figure 12-1.
caution
•
Some applications may require you to enter a serial number before use, and some applications may require a separate serial number for each individual who installs the software.
Figure 12-1: Disk images appear on the desktop as mounted volumes.
4. Double-click the QuickTime.pkg icon to start the QuickTime installer. 5. Click the Continue button to display the Important Information window. You should read this over to see what the new software will do,
Mac OS X Basics
25
and what the system requirements for installation are. You can often save this to a separate file, or print it, for later reference.
Task
6. When you’re finished reading, click the Continue button to display the Software License Agreement. Again, you can save or print the license for later reference. 7. When you click the Continue button on the Software License Agreement window, a window prompts you to agree or disagree, as shown in Figure 12-2. If you click Agree, the next screen appears.
12
tips
•
• • Figure 12-2: You must agree to the Software License terms before installation can proceed.
Sometimes the software Installer will prompt you to restart your OS X system after installation. You may want to keep the down loaded compressed installers available in a download folder, or perhaps copy them to a CD-ROM, in case you want them again. Some software uses its own installer, which may behave much differently than the Apple Installer does. To reserve software for your own use, install the appli cation into your user account’s Home folder.
8. On the next screen, you choose a destination disk to install the software to. The Installer searches for available disks and scans them for the requirements of space and correct versions of any related software. Click a destination disk. 9. Click the Install button to install the software. You are prompted to enter your password, as shown in Figure 12-3.
cross-references
• •
Figure 12-3: The OS X system prompts you to enter your password (or phrase) before
installing. 10. Enter your password. QuickTime then begins the installation. There will be a prompt to restart the computer when the installation is complete.
You can add applications to the Dock as shown in Task 18, “Setting the Dock Preferences.” You can set an application to start automatically as shown in Task 20, “Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login.”
Part 2: Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account Task 13:
Changing Your Password and Icon
Task 14:
Setting Keychain Preferences
Task 15:
Setting a Background Image
Task 16:
Setting a Screen Saver
Task 17:
Customizing the Appearance of Windows and Setting Folder Options
Task 18:
Setting the Dock Preferences
Task 19:
Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock
Task 20:
Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login
28
Task
13
notes
•
•
•
In general, you should avoid obvious passwords, such as your name, your pet’s name, or the name of any one you live with; your birth day; common words found in the dictionary; or other obvious choices. You could take two or more words and type them together, with mixed capitalization (such as TwoOrMore). Or, take a sentence you’ll remember and use the first letter of each word as your pass word. A password should be easy for you to remember without writing down, but hard to guess. For a privately owned OS X system, you should change the password occasionally, especially if you think you’ve given away your password. For a business system, you should consult with your system administrator about password policies. The picture you choose as your user icon is the picture that is displayed for you in the Address Book.
Part 2
Changing Your Password and Icon
S
ometimes you may want to change the password on your account. Maybe you think someone might have figured out your password, or maybe you’re being cautious and want to change your password every once in a while for improved security. This task shows you how to change your password and your user icon (Task 47, “Changing a User’s Password,” shows how to change another user’s password if you are acting as the administrator of the system). 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts
pane shown in Figure 13-1.
Figure 13-1: The Accounts pane in System Preferences.
3. Click the Password field and delete the old password. A sheet drops down, as shown in Figure 13-2.
caution
•
An administrator can change anyone’s password on the machine. If you have multiple users of a com puter set, only one acts as the administrator.
Figure 13-2: Enter your current password to change your password.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account 4. In the Current Password field, enter your current password, and press Return.
29
Task
5. In the New Password field, enter your new password.
13
6. In the Verify field, retype your new password. This step ensures that you can type your new password the same way at least twice. 7. In the optional Password Hint field, type a reminder of your password. The OS X login screen can be set to show a password hint (if one is available) after a given number of tries. The hint should help you, but be cryptic enough to not help anyone else. 8. Your user icon is the picture next to your name on the Accounts pane and is displayed by OS X on the login screen (if OS X is configured to show a list of users at login). To change your user icon, click the Picture tab and click on one of the icons shown on the right side of the window. 9. You can also choose from your own pictures by clicking the Edit button next to your current picture near the top of the window and clicking the Choose button, which displays a file browser shown in Figure 13-3.
Figure 13-3: Use the file browser to choose a picture of your own as a user icon.
cross-reference
•
If you have forgotten your password, see Task 249, “Resetting Your Forgotten Password.”
30
Task
14
notes
•
• • • •
You won’t have to create a new keychain for every password. Often you can just add a new password to your user account keychain. Create a new keychain if you want an additional layer of security for the password or passwords in the new keychain.
Part 2
Setting Keychain Preferences
T
he new Keychain Access feature provides users with a means to store passwords within the system. When a user logs in, keychain access is unlocked, so the passwords contained therein are automatically available when required to access secured files and sites. You should already have a keychain created for you as part of your account. OS X can store passwords to Web sites, applications, or network servers and the like, in your keychain. This task shows you how to create a new keychain that you can keep separate from your other stored passwords. 1. Open the hard disk, then the Applications folder, then the Utilities
folder. Find the Keychain Access icon in the Utilities folder, as shown
in Figure 14-1.
Your default keychain pass word is your OS X login password. A keychain is created in OSX for each user account. The default keychain user name is the user account short name. You can create additional keychains for different types of information (such as all passwords you use at work, as opposed to the ones you use for personal use). An application must be keychain-aware to interact correctly with the keychain.
Figure 14-1: The Keychain Access application is located in the Applications/Utilities
folder. 2. Double-click the Keychain Access icon in the Utilities folder to start the Keychain Access application shown in Figure 14-2.
Figure 14-2: The Keychain Access application window.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account 3. Choose Edit ➪ Change Settings for Keychain “login” to show the settings for your keychain, as shown in Figure 14-3. Here you can set automatic lock conditions for your keychain. Close the Change Keychain Settings dialog.
31
Task
14
tips
•
Figure 14-3: The Change Keychain Settings dialog.
4. Click the Edit ➪ Change Password for Keychain “login” to change your keychain password.
•
5. As shown in Figure 14-4, you’ll be prompted to first enter your current password and then enter your new password.
•
OS X will ask you whether to add a given password to your default keychain when you use one in a Web form. After performing some sys tem updates, you will be prompted each time the keychain needs to be accessed in an application (such as Mail). Click the Always Allow button so that you will not be prompted each time you check your mail. You can store personal information such as bank account information and personal Identification numbers (PINs) in the keychain.
Figure 14-4: Enter a new password and verify it to change your keychain access
password. 6. Enter your new keychain password a second time in the Verify field. 7. Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to exit this pane without changing your password.
cross-references
• •
You can add the Keychain Access application to the Dock as discussed in Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock.” You can control access to additional information using the keychain by fol lowing the steps in Task 252, “Controlling Access with Keychain.”
32
Task
15
Part 2
Setting a Background Image
O
ne of the most common changes people make with their computers is to change the screen background. With Mac OS X, you can choose to use your own pictures or choose from a collection of pictures that come with the system. This task shows you how to change the background image on the desktop.
notes
•
•
•
•
Several of the included background images take time to evolve and appear. If you’re testing to see what you like, allow a few moments for the picture to change.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window.
2. In the Personal row, click the Desktop & Screen Saver icon to show
the Desktop & Screen Saver pane shown in Figure 15-1.
OS X has several collections of images available for use as backgrounds. The collec tion name is shown on the Collections list, and the images in the current col lection are shown on the right of the pane. The Pictures Folder com mand on the Collections list is a shortcut that dis plays the contents of your Pictures folder of your user directory in the field of the Desktop Preferences win dow. However, the Pictures Folder does not display images in subfolders of the Pictures Folder. If using an image you created or downloaded, a pop-up menu allows you to choose whether to tile the image to fill the screen or to stretch the image to fill the screen.
Figure 15-1: The Desktop & Screen Saver pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Scroll the images field (on the right) to see the images in the current collection. 4. To choose a different image in the current collection, click the image in the field. The image replaces the one shown in the current desktop picture at the top of the pane, and the desktop changes to display the background, as shown in Figure 15-2.
caution
•
Consider where and when you use your OS X account. A given third-party back ground image may be inap propriate for all contexts, especially in a business environment.
Figure 15-2: Desktop background changes take effect immediately.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account 5. Click Nature in the list on the left to view the available options, as shown in Figure 15-3.
33
Task
15
tips
•
• Figure 15-3: The Nature collection.
6. Choose the Choose Folder option from the Collections list. A sheet appears to let you browse through the files on the OS X system, as shown in Figure 15-4. You can browse to find a specific picture and use it as a background image.
Saving pictures from your camera or other source to the Pictures Folder in your user directory makes it easy to use those pictures as desktop background images. Ctrl-clicking the desktop and selecting Change Background Picture is another way to open the Desktop and Screen Saver pane of System Preferences.
cross-references Figure 15-4: You can browse files to find a background image on the OS X system.
7. You can cycle through multiple pictures over time in a slide show effect by checking the Change Picture checkbox at the bottom of the Desktop & Screen Saver pane. You can then choose the rate of change of the desktop image and other special conditions from the pop-up menu.
• •
See Task 23, “Setting Display Preferences,” for information on adjusting screen display settings. See Task 194, “Using Photos as Desktop Pictures and Screen Savers,” for information on changing your desktop picture while in iPhoto.
34
Task
16
notes
•
•
• • •
Screen savers became a recognizable subset of the software industry as the use of personal computers grew over time. In the Mac world, the Berkeley Systems After Dark collec tion (including the “flying toasters” screen saver) is one of the best known.
Part 2
Setting a Screen Saver
S
creen savers were originally called such because older display screens were more susceptible to “burn-in.” This was caused by leaving an image (or part of an image such as a menu bar) unchanging on a screen, which would eventually cause the screen to permanently show a ghosted image in that area. To change the image on the screen, people developed screen savers that, after a period of time, showed a changing image on the screen. This task shows you how to choose, test, and configure a screen saver while using Apple’s built-in Screen Effects. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window.
2. In the Personal row, click the Desktop & Screen Saver icon. Click
the Screen Saver tab, as shown in Figure 16-1. Here you see a list of
Screen Savers on the left, a Preview field on the right (showing the
screen saver in operation), an Options button, and a Test button.
Screen savers should be considered for appropriate ness in the same way as background images. Not all screen savers from all sources may be suitable for work or other environments. The options in Step 3 only affect the specific screen saver chosen in the Screen Saver list, which is dis played in the Preview field. When the Options sheet is displayed as in Step 3, it hides the preview. You must click the OK button on the configuration to see the updated preview. In Figure 16-4, you’ll notice that the pop-up menu has choices not only for the behavior of the screen saver when a corner is moused over, but also for how Exposé can be activated.
Figure 16-1: The Screen Saver tab of the Desktop & Screen Saver pane of System
Preferences. 3. Click the Options button to show the configuration options for the visual display, as shown in Figure 16-2. Click the Cancel or OK button when you’re finished with the configuration for the selected screen saver. 4. Click the Test button. The screen effect is displayed on the entire screen. 5. Press any key, or move the cursor with the mouse or trackpad, to wake up the system. 6. Adjust the sliding bar at the bottom of the Desktop & Screen Saver pane to determine how long the computer should be idle before the screen saver begins.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account
35
Task
16
tip
•
You can download screen savers from the Download section of the Apple OS X Web site. Go to www. apple.com.
Figure 16-2: Configuration of the visual effect is separate for each effect.
7. Set the time the system will wait before starting the screen effect with the slider. 8. Click the Hot Corners button to display the screen shown in Figure 16-3.
Figure 16-3: Hot corners are where you got to activate a system setting.
cross-references
•
9. Click the pop-up menu for the lower-right corner of the screen and choose Start Screen Saver, as shown in Figure 16-3. Moving your cursor into a hot corner starts the screen saver immediately, without needing to wait the amount of time set on the Desktop & Screen Saver pane.
•
Using screen effects is one way to prevent your display from wearing out. Using the Energy Saver to turn off the display when the system is idle is another way to extend system life and con serve power. The Energy Saver pane is discussed in Task 27, “Adjusting Sleep and Energy Saving Settings.” See Task 8, “Closing, Hiding, and Exposing Windows,” for more about Exposé.
36
Task
17
Part 2
Customizing the Appearance of Windows and Setting Folder Options
T notes
•
•
•
• •
In Figure 17-2, you can see that the Close, Minimize, and Expand buttons in the upper left are still visible in the title bar of the window, along with the name of the volume or folder, and the Open/Close toolbar button.
ask 7, “Browsing the System,” discussed how to change Finder windows from Icon View to List View and Column View. Mac OS X contains a few other features that simplify navigation among several windows on the desktop. This task shows some of the other options you have for displaying windows on the desktop. 1. Double-click the hard disk icon on your OS X system to open a new
Finder window. The window should look similar to the one shown in
Figure 17-1.
In Mac OS 9, clicking a folder in a window opened a new window. In OS X, clicking a folder opens the folder in the same window, which is one of the reasons that the Forward and Back buttons are included on the window toolbars. If the window toolbar is visible, double-clicking a folder in the window opens the folder in the existing window. If the toolbar is hidden, double-clicking a folder opens the window in a new window. Ô-double-click a folder to open it in a new window.
Figure 17-1: A new Finder window.
2. Click the small oval in the upper-right corner of the window toolbar. The toolbar collapses to hide the row of Back, Forward, View, and action menu buttons, as shown in Figure 17-2.
Labels were a feature that was part of OS 9 and have just been brought back to OS X in version 10.3.
Figure 17-2: The toolbar can be hidden to enlarge the window content area.
3. Click the oval button to reexpand the toolbar. The window now appears as shown in Figure 17-1.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account 4. From the menu bar, choose Finder ➪ Preferences. The Finder Preferences window appears, as shown in Figure 17-3.
37
Task
17
tips
•
Figure 17-3: The Finder Preferences window.
5. By default, OS X opens a folder in the same window, instead of opening a new window as in OS 9. If you want to have the Mac OS 9-like behavior back, click General and then click the checkbox next to “Always open folders in a new window.”
• •
6. If you like the Column View discussed in Task 7, “Browsing the System,” click the checkbox next to “Open new windows in column view.”
You can set the delay time that an icon can be over a folder before the folder “pops” open by adjusting the Delay slider or pressing the spacebar to open the folder immediately. Ô-clicking the folder name in the window’s title bar shows the path. By moving the mouse over the folders of the path, you can switch to those folders. You can set names for each label color in the Finder preferences. This allows you to categorize files and folders.
7. If the “Spring-loaded folders and windows” checkbox is checked, dragging an icon over a folder will pop open that folder. This behavior can let you almost fly through the system when using Icon View the way you travel through the system directories in the Column View. Check or uncheck the checkbox as you prefer, and close the Finder Preferences. 8. Labels are a feature that has been added to OS X 10.3. Click the Users folder. Click the Action Menu button in the toolbar, and click the Purple label, as shown in Figure 17-4.
cross-references
• •
Figure 17-4: Labels allow you to mark a folder so that is stands out in the Finder.
To learn about using aliases and the sidebar, see Task 9, “Creating Aliases and Utilizing the Sidebar.” Task 7, “Browsing the System,” discusses the List View and Column View of windows.
38
Task
18
Part 2
Setting the Dock Preferences
A
s one of the major changes from OS 9 to OS X, the Dock provides icons for several of the applications that Apple ships with OS X. One of the most important functions of the Dock is its accessibility to applications, documents, and folders virtually all of the time. This task shows how to set preferences for the Dock.
notes
• •
•
At the far left (Small) end of the slider, the Dock is roughly one-half the width of the screen. At the far right (Large) end, the Dock fills the width of the screen.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window.
2. In the Personal row, click the Dock icon to open the Dock window
shown in Figure 18-1.
The Dock can take up screen space, which can be problematic on smaller dis plays or displays set to lower resolutions. Having the Dock hide itself gives you back that screen space. The Scale Effect uses fewer system resources than the Genie Effect. If you are run ning OS X on an older sys tem, using the Scale Effect may improve the system response.
Figure 18-1: The Dock pane.
3. Move the Dock Size slider to adjust the size of the Dock. Moving the slider will change the Dock size as you move the slider, so you can adjust the size to what suits you. 4. With the Magnification checkbox checked, move the cursor over an icon in the Dock. This magnifies that icon, as shown in Figure 18-2.
Figure 18-2: Icons in the Dock can be set to magnify when the cursor is near them.
5. You can choose to show the Dock on the left, right, or bottom of the screen by clicking the corresponding radio button. Click the Left radio button to move the Dock to the left side of the screen, as shown in Figure 18-3. 6. Click the Bottom radio button to move the Dock back to the bottom edge of the screen. 7. When you minimize a window, the window shrinks and an icon of that window appears in the Dock. You can choose whether to shrink and expand the window by using either the Genie Effect (which looks sort of elastic) or the Scale Effect (which shrinks and expands the window in a straight-line manner). Click the “Minimize using” popup menu and select Scale Effect.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account
39
Task
18
tips
•
Figure 18-3: The Dock can be placed on the left, bottom, or right edge of the screen,
but not the top. 8. When you start an application, the application’s icon appears in the Dock, bounces up and down a few times while it is starting, then stops bouncing when the application is ready for use. If the bouncing annoys you, uncheck the “Animate opening applications” checkbox.
•
9. To see the view shown in Figure 18-4, click the checkbox next to “Automatically hide and show the Dock.” Move the cursor over the area in which the Dock should be visible to pop it out from the edge of the screen.
• •
If you set the Dock to hide itself, you may want to change the size of the Dock to less than the width of the screen. If the Dock is as wide as the screen, moving your cursor into the area of the Dock will cause the Dock to pop out from its hiding place. This can be inconvenient if you have several windows or items on the desktop and the easiest access to the window you want is to one side of the Dock. Lowering the amount of magnification of the Dock icons can also help. You can use the Apple ➪ Dock menu to set prefer ences without having to open the Dock Preferences window. You can scale the amount of magnification the Dock uses. One way to save screen space is to make the Dock smaller, but the magnification larger. Scale the size of the Dock using the separator. Place your cursor over the sepa rator and it becomes a horizontal double arrow. Drag up or down to enlarge or decrease the size of the Dock.
cross-references
•
Figure 18-4: The Dock can be set to hide itself when not in use.
•
Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock,” dis cusses how to add items to the Dock. Task 17, “Customizing the Appearance of Windows and Setting Folder Options,” discusses how to customize the appearance of windows.
40
Task
19
Part 2
Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock
O notes
• • •
You can rearrange or remove every Dock icon except for the Finder in the far left and the Trash in the far right. If you move an application icon in the Dock, it is auto matically kept in the Dock when the application closes. As with most Preference settings, this only affects your account. Other accounts won’t be affected by your changes.
S X provides a number of default applications in the Dock. Because the Dock is accessible virtually all of the time, customizing what appears in the Dock takes on added importance. This task shows you how to add applications, files, and folders to the Dock, and explains what you can do with the items in the Dock. 1. Press Ô-N to open a new Finder window. 2. Click the Applications folder icon in the sidebar. 3. Click once on the Chess application icon to select it, then drag it
down over the Dock. The icons in the Dock separate and make a
space wherever you position the Chess icon.
4. Drop the icon by releasing the mouse or trackpad button. For this
task, drop the Chess icon between the QuickTime Player icon and the
System Preferences icon. The Chess icon now appears in the Dock,
and your Dock should now look like the dock shown in Figure 19-1.
Clicking any application icon in the Dock will start that application.
Figure 19-1: The Chess icon added to the Dock.
cautions
•
•
The Dock shows the default application icons, the icons of any running applications, and any minimized files, folders, or windows. Adding too many applications may clutter your Dock to the point where the Dock icons are too small to distinguish between them. If this hap pens, remember that the Hide Others command in the Application menu of your active application can reduce the clutter. When applications are hid den, the application icon appears on the left side of the Dock, but the window of the application does not appear to the right of the separator.
5. If you look carefully at the Dock, there is a narrow dividing line between the System Preferences icon and the Apple bookmark (@) icon. This dividing line marks the separation between applications to the left of the dividing line, and folders and files to the right of the dividing line. To see how this works, click the Back button of the Applications window. 6. Click and drag the Applications folder to the Dock, next to the Chess icon. It won’t appear in the Dock when you drop it. 7. Click and drag the Application folder to the right of the dividing line, and it will appear in the Dock, as shown in Figure 19-2.
Figure 19-2: Folders can be added to the Dock.
8. Ctrl-click the Chess icon in the Dock, and choose the command “Show in Finder” from the contextual menu. A new Finder window opens, showing the folder the Chess icon is in and the Chess application selected in the window, as shown in Figure 19-3.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account
41
Task
19
tips
•
Figure 19-3: An application’s contextual menu lets you find the application in the
Finder. 9. Click and drag the Chess icon from the Dock to the desktop and
drop it. It vanishes from the Dock with a little puff of smoke.
•
10. Ctrl-click the Application folder icon in the Dock. The contextual menu for a Docked folder shows the contents of the folder. You can move the cursor and navigate into subfolders, as shown in Figure 19-4.
•
You can rearrange the icons in the Dock simply by click ing and dragging them. The other icons in the Dock will make space between them to allow you to drop an icon into its new position. If you have an application active (running), an icon for that application is visible in the Dock. Ctrl-click on the icon and choose “Keep in Dock” to add that applica tion to the Dock. To open a file with an application on the Dock, drag the file icon and drop it on the application’s Dock icon to open the file with the application.
cross-references
• •
Figure 19-4: A folder’s contextual menu shows its contents.
For more information on the Dock, see Task 18, “Setting the Dock Preferences.” Task 20, “Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login,” discusses how to begin useful applications on startup.
42
Task
20
Part 2
Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login
O notes
•
•
As with Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock,” these and other Preference set tings only affect your usage. Other accounts won’t have these applica tions automatically start up unless they also set these preferences for their accounts.
S X provides the capability to add applications to the Dock, so you can start them with a single click on the desktop. Sometimes even that’s not fast enough or convenient enough. OS X also provides the capability to set applications to start automatically on login so that the applications are running and available when you first see the desktop. This task shows how to set applications to start up automatically on login. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon and the Startup Items tab
to display the Startup Items pane shown in Figure 20-1.
The Hide checkbox, if selected, makes the appli cation hide itself after it launches. The application’s icon appears in the Dock as Active.
Figure 20-1: The Startup Items pane of System Preferences.
3. Click the Add button (the plus symbol at the bottom of the pane) to show the file browser, as shown in Figure 20-2.
cautions
•
•
Setting applications to start automatically can increase your login and startup time. Some applications may need to start before others, and other applications that control external devices may need to have the external device powered on before the application will start. If you want to automatically start a Classic application, make sure that you start the Classic environment first.
Figure 20-2: Use the file browser to choose applications for startup.
Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account
43
4. Click the Applications folder in the left column.
Task
5. Click the Grab icon in the right column. The contents of the Utilities folder move to the left column, and the right column fills with the icon and information for the Grab icon, as shown in Figure 20-3.
20
tips
• • •
Figure 20-3: The file browser shifts to allow moving through the OS X directories.
6. Click the Add button. The file browser window disappears, and the Startup Items window displays the Grab application in the central field.
•
7. Log out by selecting Apple ➪ Log Out. Click the OK button in the “Are you sure” dialog.
You can set a file or a folder as a login item, not just an application. To remove a login item, select the item name in the Login Items pane and choose the minus sign (–) at the bottom of the pane. If you are in a hurry and don’t want the startup applications to start on login, hold down the Shift key when you click the Login button or when you see the progress bar in the startup window. Hold down the Shift key until the desk top is shown. Virus detection is a great program to start automati cally. You can protect your Mac without thinking about it.
8. Log in again, and open the Startup Items in the Accounts pane of System Preferences. Your Dock should look like the Dock shown in Figure 20-4. You can see the Grab application icon in the Dock with a triangle under it showing that Grab is an actively running application.
Figure 20-4: The Grab application is visible in the Dock after logging out and back in.
9. Add another application to the Startup Items (for example, Adobe
Acrobat Reader) in the Applications directory.
10. Click the Grab application in the Items field of the Login Items pane, and drag it to below Adobe Acrobat Reader. Now when you log in again, Acrobat will start first, and Grab will start after Acrobat, which means Grab will be the active application.
cross-reference
•
The Classic environment that OS 9 legacy applica tions run in can also be set to start up automatically on login. This is discussed in Task 28, “Starting, Stopping, or Restarting the Classic Environment.”
Part 3: Utilizing Preferences and Customizing Task 21:
Setting Finder Preferences
Task 22:
Setting the Startup Disk
Task 23:
Setting Display Preferences
Task 24:
Setting CD and DVD Preferences
Task 25:
Setting QuickTime Connection Speed
Task 26:
Setting Up Handwriting Recognition with Inkwell
Task 27:
Adjusting Sleep and Energy Saving Settings
Task 28:
Starting, Stopping, or Restarting the Classic Environment
Task 29:
Setting Mouse and Keyboard Options
Task 30:
Setting Language and Regional Preferences
Task 31:
Setting Speech Preferences
Task 32:
Using the Font Book
46
Task
21
Part 3
Setting Finder Preferences
T
he Finder is the application that is the desktop. The Finder controls the presence and absence of mounted volumes and the behavior of windows in general. This task shows how to change several aspects of the Finder’s behavior and how to restart the Finder if necessary.
notes
•
• • •
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu in the upper left of the screen’s menu bar. The application menu name changes depending on which application is the active one. The Finder preferences also allow you to customize the sidebar. You may choose what items to show in the sidebar. Applications sometimes stop responding and must be quit. If you cannot do this from the application, click the desktop to make the Finder active.
1. Log into your OS X system and look at the screen, which should
resemble Figure 21-1. Note that the application menu shows the
application name as Finder.
Figure 21-1: The Finder application controls the desktop and every part of the OS X
screen. 2. From the menu bar choose Finder ➪ Preferences. The Finder Preferences window appears, as shown in Figure 21-2. Figure 21-2: The Finder Preferences window.
Colors can be assigned to different labels using the Finder Preferences ➪ Labels dialog.
3. Locate your OS X Install CD 1, and insert it into the CD/DVD drive of your OS X computer. The CD appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 21-3. 4. Uncheck the checkbox next to “CDs, DVDs and iPods.” The CD icon disappears from the desktop. 5. Press Ô-N to open a new window; while you do not see the CD on the desktop, it is in the sidebar. Close the new window. 6. In the Finder Preferences window, click the checkbox next to “CDs, DVDs and iPods.” The CD reappears on the desktop.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
47
Task
21
tips
•
Figure 21-3: CDs are visible on the desktop by default.
•
7. Click the Advanced button at the top of the Finder preferences window. Click the Select button at the bottom of the Finder Preferences window, below the line “Languages for searching file contents.” A dialog appears, as shown in Figure 21-4. Figure 21-4: The Languages dialog.
• •
OS X indexes the entire con tents of your hard disk and other attached disks — not only file and folder names, but also the contents of several kinds of files that OS X uses to read text. By default, OS X is installed with support for several lan guages. To speed up index ing and to make the index use less disk space, uncheck the boxes next to languages you don’t use. You can quickly hide all application windows and get back to the desktop by pressing Option-Ô and clicking the desktop. This keystroke shortcut brings the Finder to the front and hides all windows of run ning applications. Force-quit applications or relaunch the Finder with the option-Ô-Esc keyboard shortcut. Click the desktop to make the Finder the active application.
cross-references
•
8. Check the languages you want the OS X system to use while indexing. When you’re finished, click the Cancel or OK button to close the Languages window. 9. Close the Finder Preferences window, and choose Apple ➪ Force Quit from the Apple menu in the menu bar. The Force Quit dialog appears, showing a list of all running applications including the Finder. 10. Select any application in the list except the Finder, and notice that the button in the lower-right shows “Force Quit.” Select the Finder and notice the button now shows “Relaunch.”
•
Several aspects of the Finder Preferences are discussed in Task 17, “Customizing the Appearance of Windows and Setting Folder Options.” Learn more about the power of indexing by refer encing Task 41, “Indexing the Hard Drive.”
48
Task
22
Part 3
Setting the Startup Disk
Y
our computer must know where the OS X operating system is. When you turn on the computer, OS X searches for a disk containing a System folder (known as a startup disk). This task shows how to set the startup disk.
notes
•
•
•
When running in Classic mode, OS X does limit the access given to OS 9 appli cations to some of the hardware of the physical computer. Restarting in OS 9 can be helpful to fully use a legacy application that runs poorly (or not at all) under Classic mode in OS X.
1. Locate your OS X Install Disk 1, and insert it into the CD/DVD
drive of your OS X computer. The CD appears on the desktop.
2. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in
the menu bar to display the System Preferences window shown in
Figure 22-1.
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu in the upper left of the screen’s menu bar. The Application menu’s name will change depending on which application is the active one. A volume on which an OS can be installed is not necessarily a separate hard drive. It can be one of several partitions on a hard drive.
Figure 22-1: The System Preferences window.
3. In the System row, click the Startup Disk icon to display the Startup Disk pane shown in Figure 22-2. 4. The system shown in Figure 22-2 has three choices available. To restart the system using the OS X CD, click the folder in the window showing “Mac OS X, 10.3 on Mac OS X Install Disc 1.” The Startup Disk pane shows text below the folder that reads something like “You have selected Mac OS X, 10.3 on the volume ‘Mac OS X Install Disc 1,’” as shown in Figure 22-3. 5. Click the Restart button to restart the computer immediately. A sheet drops from the title bar of the Startup Disk pane to confirm that you’re sure you want to do this, as shown in Figure 22-4. 6. Click the Cancel button in the confirmation sheet shown in Figure 22-4. The sheet closes, and the system will not restart. 7. To restart from the OS X Install Disk CD, click the CD icon to highlight it, then click the Restart button.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
49
Task
Figure 22-2: The Startup Disk pane of the System Preferences window.
22
tips
• •
Figure 22-3: The Startup Disk pane of the System Preferences window displays your
changes.
•
If you don’t have a folder displaying an icon referring to “OS 9” in the Startup Disk pane, the OS X com puter doesn’t have OS 9 installed. To start up from a CD or DVD with a valid system without using the Startup Disk pane, insert the sys tem CD or DVD into the CD/DVD drive. Press and hold down the C key when restarting or powering up the system. To choose what drive or vol ume you would like to use upon startup, hold down the Option key when start ing the computer. This will give you a choice of all volumes with a valid OS.
Figure 22-4: A prompt requests that you confirm a restart.
8. When you’re finished, select the original startup disk folder that was selected when you opened the Startup Disk pane. 9. Close System Preferences by choosing System Preferences ➪ Quit System Preferences from the application menu in the menu bar.
cross-references
• •
For more about OS 9 and the Classic environment, see Task 28, “Starting, Stopping, or Restarting the Classic Environment.” For additional information about what physical drives your computer has that can have an OS on them, see Task 237, “Finding Detailed Information about Your System.”
50
Task
23
Part 3
Setting Display Preferences
T
he resolution and color settings of your system determine how the system displays objects and information on your screen. Your OS X system is probably capable of showing the desktop on the monitor or physical screen in a variety of resolutions and color settings. This task shows how to work with the Displays pane of Systerm Preferences.
notes
• • •
• •
The Displays icon is one of the five default icons in the toolbar at the top of the System Preferences window, along with Show All, Sound, Network, and Startup Disk.
1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show the System Preferences window.
2. In the Hardware row, click the Displays icon to display the Displays
pane shown in Figure 23-1.
The Color tab will normally have selected the best general-use color profile for your display. A liquid crystal display (LCD) monitor (as found on a laptop or one of those “flat screens”) has a physi cal resolution at which it is optimized. An LCD monitor has a set number of pixels. Therefore, the highest reso lution uses all of the pixels and is usually known as the “native resolution.” If you change the monitor’s resolution, it can result in a blurry image caused by pixel doubling. A cathode ray tube (CRT) monitor is not confined by a set number of pixels. Therefore, it can show sev eral different resolutions at the same clarity. A CRT monitor will also have a refresh rate option in the display preferences. This is how quickly the monitor redraws the lines. The higher the refresh rate, the less flicker you will notice on the monitor.
Figure 23-1: The Displays pane of the System Preferences window.
3. In the Resolutions field of the Displays pane, you should have at least two resolutions in dark print. In Figure 23-1, there are three selectable resolutions: 640x480, 800x600, and 1024x768. One resolution should appear as selected. (In Figure 23-1 that is the 1024x768 resolution.) Click each of the other selectable resolutions, and watch the display change size. 4. Click the original resolution to return your display to the original setting. 5. Some resolutions display more information than others. If a resolution will truly inhibit your computer use, you will see the dialog shown in Figure 23-2.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
51
Task
23
tips
•
Figure 23-2: A resolution not recommended by the display, but possible with the
system’s video card, is tested. 6. Check the “Show displays in menu bar” checkbox to display the options of the Displays pane in a drop-down menu on the menu bar, as shown in Figure 23-3. Figure 23-3: The Displays pane settings can be accessed from the
• •
menu bar through an optional drop-down menu.
• 7. Click the Color tab to display the Color tab of the Displays pane, as shown in Figure 23-4.
If the screen goes black, or is otherwise unusable, wait 15 seconds and your original resolution will be restored and reselected. You may want to adjust the display size to be smaller to have more desktop space on the same screen, or you may want to adjust the dis play size to be larger. Color profiles enable you to display colors on the screen as they will appear when printed. If you are using more than one monitor at the same time on your computer, you can use the Displays pref erences to choose how your computer treats those monitors.
cross-reference
•
Figure 23-4: The Color tab of the Displays pane.
8. Click the “Show profiles for this display only” checkbox and you only see profiles pertinent for your display. 9. If you would like to calibrate the color of the display, click the Calibrate button. The Display Calibrator Assistant appears and directs you on how to calibrate the color of your display for individual tasks.
For more information on customizing your system, see Task 17, “Customizing the Appearance of Windows and Setting Folder Options.”
52
Task
24
Part 3
Setting CD and DVD Preferences
M
any OS X systems are equipped with CD “burners” that can “burn,” or write data to, a blank CD. Many recent OS X systems are now equipped with drives that can also write to blank DVDs. This task shows you how to set up your OS X system’s responses to CDs and DVDs of various kinds (whether blank, music, or another type).
notes
•
• •
• • •
CDs and DVDs that are used for data storage (and not for music or video) are treated as new volumes, and are displayed on the desktop. You saw this when you loaded the OS X Install Disk into the CD or DVD drive in Task 21, “Setting Finder Preferences.”
1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show the System Preferences window.
2. In the Hardware row, click the CDs & DVDs icon to display the
CDs & DVDs pane shown in Figure 24-1.
A script is a short program you write or download. OS X ships with the scripting languages AppleScript, Perl, PHP, Python, Ruby, and Tcl included. If your system is equipped with a DVD drive, OS X allows you to play DVD movies on the Mac. When the DVD is inserted, the DVD Player program auto matically launches.
Figure 24-1: The CDs & DVDs pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the pop-up menu to the right of “When you insert a blank CD” to display the drop-down menu shown in Figure 24-2.
If the machine is equipped with a Super Drive, you can write to DVDs as well as CDs. If you primarily edit movies and save them to DVD, you may want to have the default for inserting a DVD be the iDVD application. The preference for what will happen when a blank CD or DVD is loaded can be changed in the dialog that appears and the system will default to the choice you make.
Figure 24-2: The pop-up menu to select what to do when a blank CD or DVD is
inserted. 4. Choose the “Open other application” command from the drop-down menu. A file browser sheet appears, as shown in Figure 24-3.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
53
Task
24
tips
•
Figure 24-3: Use the file browser to select an application to start when a given type of
CD or DVD is inserted.
•
5. Click the Cancel button to close the file browser. Since you didn’t choose an application, the drop-down menu keeps its default setting of “Ask what to do.”
The two pop-ups for “When you insert a blank CD” and “When you insert a blank DVD” are the same. Formats for disks are differ ent for PCs and Macs, except for CDs and DVDs. These share a common for mat compatible with both platforms.
6. Click the drop-down menu and choose “Run script” to see the same file browser. Click the Cancel button to close the file browser sheet. 7. Set your preference for OS X’s response when you load a music CD into the CD/DVD drive, as shown in Figure 24-4. The default, as shown in Figure 24-1, is to open iTunes.
Figure 24-4: Set the OS X system’s response to music CDs with the drop-down menu.
8. Set your preference for OS X’s response when you load a picture CD into the CD/DVD drive. The default, as shown in Figure 24-1, is to open iPhoto. 9. Set your preference for OS X’s response when you load a video DVD into the CD/DVD drive. The default, as shown in Figure 24-1, is to open the DVD Player application.
cross-references
• •
More information on script ing can be found in the Mac OS X Bible, Jaguar Edition by Poole, Cohen, and Burnett (Indianapolis: John Wiley & Sons, 2003). For more information on using DVDs and CDs, see Task 43, “Transferring Files by Physical Means.”
54
Task
25
notes
• • • •
When selecting a connec tion speed for QuickTime, make sure you select the maximum speed your Internet connection can receive. Finding QuickTime media to view is easy. Go to www.apple.com/ quicktime. There you can find movie trailers, music videos, and more. The QuickTime player will prompt you to update to QuickTime Pro each time you start it. QuickTime compresses video in an MPEG-4 file format, which was adopted as a standard by the ISO (International Organization for Standardization) MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) committee and is one of the most popular formats for viewing video on the Web.
Part 3
Setting QuickTime Connection Speed
O
ne of the great things about the Internet is that you can usually find any piece of information you want at anytime. This includes sound clips, photographs, and even video clips. QuickTime is a media player that allows you to play video or audio, and to work in 360-degree virtual reality (VR) environments. To use QuickTime on either a Mac or a Windows machine, you must be aware of your connection speed and how to change it. This task shows you how to set the QuickTime connection speed in OS X. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the QuickTime icon in the Internet and Networking row, as
shown in Figure 25-1.
Figure 25-1: QuickTime preferences are found with other Internet and networking
preferences. 3. Click the connection tab shown in Figure 25-2 to configure your QuickTime connection speed.
Figure 25-2: QuickTime connection speed is set in the preferences.
4. Click the Connection Speed pop-up menu and select how fast your connection to the Internet is so that QuickTime can determine how to play media. Figure 25-3 shows the different connection choices.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
55
Task
25
tips
•
Figure 25-3: Connection speeds range from slow to fast.
5. Click the Update tab to show when your QuickTime software will be updated. By default, the QuickTime checks for updates automatically, as shown by the checkbox in Figure 25-4.
•
If your connection speed is 56 Kbps or slower, you can choose whether you would like to allow multiple simul taneous streams. If you do allow multiple streams, the integrity of the media may not be as good at such a low bandwidth. QuickTime Pro will not only allow you to watch movies from the Web, but also let you save them and edit them. QuickTime pro is an easy way to edit your home movies and prepare them to stream from the Web.
Figure 25-4: QuickTime will update itself as you use it.
cross-references
• • •
See Task 12, “Installing New Software,” for instructions on how to install QuickTime on your computer. For more information regarding finding QuickTime movies on the Web, see Part 11, “Surfing the Web with Safari.” To make your own movies that may be viewed in QuickTime, see Part 16, “Video Editing with iMovie.”
56
Task
26
Part 3
Setting Up Handwriting Recognition with Inkwell
S notes
•
• •
Like the Ink icon in System Preferences, the Ink win dow and the InkPad appli cation are only present when a Wacom or other Inkwell-compatible tablet is plugged into the system’s USB port, and handwriting recognition is turned on in the Ink pane. Using a graphics tablet takes some practice. Don’t give up; just keep practic ing and adjusting the options to suit your style. Using the Inkwell program is not about you learning its gestures so much as about its learning your handwriting. It is true hand writing recognition.
everal years ago Apple introduced a personal data assistant (PDA) called the Newton. The Apple Newton was notable for being able to recognize your handwriting by using a touch-sensitive screen, and being able to convert penlike writing to graphics and text. Now, Apple has introduced handwriting recognition to OS X with Ink. This task explains the options available with Inkwell handwriting recognition. 1. Plug a Wacom or other Ink-compatible USB graphics tablet into the
USB port of your OS X computer.
2. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show the System Preferences window. With an Inkwell-
compatible graphics tablet plugged in to the USB port, the Ink icon
is visible in the Hardware row, as shown in Figure 26-1.
Figure 26-1: The Ink icon is present in the System Preferences window only when an Ink-compatible graphics tablet is plugged into the OS X system.
3. In the Hardware row, click the Ink icon to show the Ink pane of System Preferences. 4. Click the radio button to turn handwriting recognition on. The Ink window appears, as shown in Figure 26-2.
cautions
• •
The Ink icon in System Preferences is present only if you have a Wacom or other Inkwell-compatible tablet plugged in to the USB port of your OS X computer. If you are accustomed to the gestures used on a Palm Pilot or Pocket PC, the Ink tablet could require some behavioral adjust ments on your part.
Figure 26-2: The Ink pane of the System Preferences window, with the Ink window showing.
5. Click the “Allow me to write anywhere” checkbox to allow you to use the InkPad in any application, not just the Inkwell application.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
57
6. Set the slider to the appropriate spacing for your handwriting style.
Task
7. Click the “Ink pad font” pop-up to set a preferred font for use with InkPad.
26
8. Click the Options button to set several settings dealing with the responsiveness of the handwriting recognition, as shown in Figure 26-3. Click the Cancel or OK button when you’re finished.
tip
•
If you want to use com mands that use the Shift, Ô, option, or Ctrl keys, you can do so by choosing the correct icon in the Ink window.
Figure 26-3: Handwriting recognition can be customized to your personal writing style.
9. Click the Gestures tab to display the window shown in Figure 26-4. Gestures allow you to perform menu commands with certain gestures of the pen.
cross-references
•
Figure 26-4: The Gestures tab of the Ink pane.
10. Click the Word List tab. The word list allows you to add generally uncommon words that you often use to improve the accuracy of the handwriting recognition.
•
For more information on Inkwell, look at the Apple Web site for Inkwell at www. apple.com/macosx/ features/inkwell/. The responsiveness set tings for Inkwell are similar to the mouse and keyboard sensitivity settings dis cussed in Task 29, “Setting Mouse and Keyboard Options.”
58
Task
27
Part 3
Adjusting Sleep and Energy Saving Settings
O
S X provides several options for power use and conservation. These options help prolong the life of your monitor, as well as cut down on electricity costs. This task shows the amount of flexibility OS X provides for power usage.
notes
• •
•
• •
This task uses a notebook computer. A desktop OS X system has a simpler Energy Saver pane because the desktop system lacks a battery.
1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show the System Preferences window.
2. In the Hardware row, click the Energy Saver icon to display the
Energy Saver pane shown in Figure 27-1.
If you edit Energy Saver settings to implement a custom setting, choosing the original option in the Optimize Energy Settings pop-up menu will reset the details. Energy Saver does not con trol or affect an external uninterruptible power sup ply (UPS). A UPS (or at least a surge suppressor) is highly recommended for any computer.
Figure 27-1: The Energy Saver pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the Show Details button to expand the Energy Saver pane, as shown in Figure 27-2.
Energy Saver is especially useful for notebook com puter users who run off battery power. If you would like to back up your hard disk or run a virus scan in the middle of the night when no one is using the computer, you could use the Schedule tab to turn the computer on and then to shut the computer down after a couple of hours.
Figure 27-2: The Energy Saver pane expanded to show details.
4. Click the Optimize Energy Settings pop-up menu, and choose DVD Playback. The details in the Sleep tab of the Energy Saver pane change. Figure 27-3 shows the Energy Saver pane set to DVD Playback, with the Optimize Energy Settings pop-up menu shown. 5. Click the Optimize Energy Settings pop-up menu, and choose Automatic again.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
59
Task
27
tips
•
Figure 27-3: The Energy Saver pane details change depending on the settings chosen.
6. Drag the slider below “Put the computer to sleep” from 1 hour to 15 minutes. The Optimize Energy Settings pop-up selection changes to Custom when you do so. 7. Click the Optimize Energy Settings pop-up menu, and choose Highest Performance, and notice the changes.
• • •
8. Click the Optimize Energy Settings pop-up menu, and choose Longest Battery Life, and notice the changes in the details. 9. Click the Options tab to show the Options tab of the Energy Saver pane, as shown in Figure 27-4.
• •
As an Administrator, you can lock settings in System Preferences. A nonadminis trator is prompted to enter an administrator’s account name and password before being allowed to change System Preferences. Pressing any key on the keyboard wakes the com puter when it’s sleeping. The time interval for display sleep cannot exceed the time interval set for system sleep. For notebook users, Energy Saver provides a better means to protect flat-panel displays than the screen saver invoked through the Desktop & Screen Saver preferences. You can make sure that your computer starts after a power failure by checking the “Restart automatically after a power failure” checkbox on the Options tab. You can set your computer to start up or shut down every day by using the Schedule tab in the Energy Saver pane.
cross-reference
•
Figure 27-4: The Options tab of the Energy Saver pane.
10. Check or uncheck the option to “Wake when the modem detects a ring,” as shown in Figure 27-4, depending on if you want your OS X system to respond to an incoming call when a telephone line is plugged into the modem jack of the system.
For more information on starting up or shutting down your system, see Task 3, “Shutting Down, Restarting, or Putting the Computer to Sleep.”
60
Task
28
Part 3
Starting, Stopping, or Restarting the Classic Environment
T notes
•
•
• • •
When running in Classic mode, OS X does limit the access given to OS 9 appli cations to some of the hardware of the physical computer. Restarting in OS 9 can be helpful to fully use a legacy application that runs poorly (or not at all) under Classic mode in OS X.
he Classic Environment is Apple OS 9 running as an application within OS X. Older applications that have not been ported to run under OS X can almost always run normally (or close to it) under OS X. This task shows you how to start, stop, and restart the Classic environment. 1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show the System Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Classic icon to display the Classic pane
shown in Figure 28-1.
One problem with OS 9 was corruption of the desktop database. The Rebuild Desktop button rebuilds the Classic desktop database in case applications begin to run erratically in Classic. While Classic is starting up, its icon will be visible in the Dock. When Classic is fin ished launching, its icon will vanish from the Dock. One of the ways that you can tell you are in a Classic application is by the menu bar. It will have the rainbow Apple on the left and the old Finder on the right. Classic can only be run by one user at a time. If you are logged in as User A with Classic running and you “fast switch” to User B, User B will not be able to run Classic or any Classic applications.
Figure 28-1: The Classic pane of the System Preferences window.
3. If you want Classic to start up automatically when you log into OS X, click the checkbox next to “Start Classic when you login” shown in Figure 28-1. 4. Click the Start button to start Classic. Classic will start up and show the OS 9 startup screen in a window on the OS X desktop. 5. Click the Stop button to stop Classic. 6. Click the Advanced tab to display the Advanced tab shown in Figure 28-2. 7. To restart Classic, click the Start Classic button. If you want to restart it with or without extensions, or with a specific key combination during Classic startup, use the drop-down menu next to the Start Classic button.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
61
Task
28
tips
•
Figure 28-2: The Advanced tab of the Classic pane.
8. Set Classic’s sleep preferences using the slider on the Advanced tab. 9. Click the Memory/Versions tab to display the Memory/Versions tab of the Classic pane, as shown in Figure 28-3. This tab shows the exact version numbers of the Classic environment and the OS X support for Classic, as well as any applications running inside the Classic environment.
• •
•
If you start an application that can run only in Classic, Classic will be triggered to start. Sometimes the delay in starting Classic can inter fere with the application’s starting properly. If this hap pens, quit the application and restart it after Classic has finished launching. If Classic applications start responding incorrectly, restart Classic. To run Classic as a stand alone operating system, you should partition your hard drive and install OS 9.2.2 on one of the parti tions. This way you can boot into OS 9 as if OS X never existed. The Mac OS Setup Assistant is the easiest and safest way to configure Mac OS 9.2 and helps prevent con flicts with Mac OS X.
cross-references Figure 28-3: The Memory/Versions tab of the Classic pane.
• •
To learn more about pro grams that run at login, see Task 20: “Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login.” For more information about Fast User Switching, see Task 52, “Switching Users Quickly.”
62
Task
29
Part 3
Setting Mouse and Keyboard Options
M
ost interaction with an OS X system will be done through the keyboard and mouse, or often a trackpad if the OS X system is a notebook computer. This task shows you how to adjust the responsiveness of the keyboard and mouse to suit your personal typing style.
notes
•
• •
•
Many people use a mouse, trackball, or graphics tablet with notebook computers, but many also choose to carry one less item with them as a matter of per sonal preference. The keyboard and mouse settings are not global for all users. Each user can adjust the OS X system’s responsiveness to suit his or her individual preference.
1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show System Preferences. In the Hardware row, click
the Keyboard & Mouse icon, as shown in Figure 29-1.
Figure 29-1: The System Preferences window.
2. Click the Keyboard tab to display the Keyboard & Mouse pane, as shown in Figure 29-2.
“Full keyboard access” helps you access parts of the desktop through the key board without using a mouse. If you lack the ability to use a mouse or access to one at a given time, turning on “full keyboard access” can help you accomplish whatever you want. If the OS X system does not have a trackpad, the “Use trackpad for” section of the Mouse pane will be absent.
Figure 29-2: The Keyboard tab of the Keyboard & Mouse pane.
caution
•
If you set your trackpad to click or to drag, you may find yourself in windows you were not expecting. You must not rest a finger on the trackpad.
3. Adjust the Key Repeat Rate slider to set the speed you want a key that is held down to repeat that character. 4. Adjust the Delay Until Repeat slider to set how long you want the keyboard to delay before it starts repeating the key’s character. 5. Click in the “Type here to test settings” field and test the settings by holding down a key on the keyboard. 6. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab to display the window shown in Figure 29-3.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
63
Task
29
tips
•
Figure 29-3: The Keyboard Shortcuts tab of the Keyboard & Mouse pane.
7. Click the checkbox next to “Turn on full keyboard access.” This allows you to use your keyboard to do practically everything you can do with your mouse.
•
8. Look at the list of keyboard shortcuts. These can be removed or changed, and additional ones can be created.
The Custom Keys setting of Full Keyboard Access can be helpful if you are using Full Keyboard Access with an application that already has many keyboard short cuts. You can choose cus tom keys that don’t interfere with the way you work. When looking at the list of keyboard shortcuts, you may be slightly confused as to what all of those sym bols represent. For exam ple, ^ means Ctrl; Ô means command; and ↑ means shift.
9. Click the Mouse (or Trackpad) tab to see the preferences for your mouse, or if you have a laptop, your trackpad, as shown in Figure 29-4.
cross-references
•
Figure 29-4: The Trackpad tab of the Keyboard & Mouse pane in System Preferences.
10. Set your preferred tracking and double-click speeds with the sliders. If you have a trackpad, you have the option to choose what mouselike actions to use the trackpad for.
•
See Task 234, “Adjusting Mouse Usage,” for more information about changing how the mouse reacts. See Task 235, “Changing Keyboard Settings,” to learn how to control things such as sticky keys.
64
Task
30
Part 3
Setting Language and Regional Preferences
P notes
•
• • •
In Figure 30-2, the region pop-up shown is for the U.S. If your region is U.S., switch to Sweden for the example. If your OS X sys tem default region is Sweden, switch to the U.S. The Input Menu changes the input behavior of the keyboard. It allows you to show a keyboard viewer and a character palette.
revious operating systems on the Mac have always been able to run software in different languages. Mac OS X, however, provides the capability to shift languages in certain programs on the fly. This capability extends to not having to reinstall the operating system or even restart the computer. This task shows you how to set language and regional preferences (which determine how dates and times are displayed by the system). 1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show the System Preferences window.
2. In the Personal row, click on the International icon to display the
International pane shown in Figure 30-1.
The Formats tab of the International pane also allows you to set the units of measurement you would like to use: metric or U.S. You can customize the dates, times, or numbers to your liking and make a customized region.
Figure 30-1: The International pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Choose your preferred language, script, and text behavior from the Language tab shown in Figure 30-1. 4. Click the Formats tab to display the window shown in Figure 30-2. 5. Click the Region pop-up menu, and change the region from its default setting. Notice the three fields in the bottom of the Formats pane. 6. Observe the Dates, Times, and Numbers fields. This single change of region changes each of those fields. Compare Figures 30-2 and 30-3.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
65
Task
30
tips
•
Figure 30-2: The Formats tab of the International pane.
• • •
When you’re finished with this task, be sure to set the regions back to their original settings, or your system’s display formats may be confusing. You can adjust the order of which languages will appear for the menu bar by going to the Language pane and dragging the languages into the order you would like. Pressing and holding Ô-Option and typing a space will cycle through all of the items in the input menu. If you would like to easily see all the input languages you have selected, you can turn on the input mode palette. It shows a palette with a small flag represent ing each input language.
Figure 30-3: The Formats tab of the International pane with a new region.
7. Click the Input Menu tab. 8. Click any of the checkboxes next to any of the alternate input layouts. A new menu appears in the menu bar, to the right of the Help menu, as shown in Figure 30-4. From the desktop, this menu lets you switch between the different keyboard layouts you choose in this pane.
Figure 30-4: The Input Menu for languages in the menu bar.
cross-reference
•
The International pane adjusts how the date and time are shown. The Date & Time pane of System Preferences adjusts the value of the date and time. Setting the date and time is discussed in Task 4, “Setting the Clock and Date.”
66
Task
31
Part 3
Setting Speech Preferences
A
pple’s Speech interface is helpful for people who have difficulty reading screen elements, or who may not be looking at the screen all the time. With Speech, your OS X system can listen to your voice commands and speak system alerts and dialog text contents back to you. This task explains how to turn on speech recognition, as well as some of the available configuration options.
notes
• • • •
•
Turning on speech recogni tion makes a microphone appear on the OS X desktop. Go to the Default Voice tab and change the speed at which the computer speaks if you are having trouble understanding the computer when it is talking to you.
1. Choose Apple ➪ System Preferences from the Apple menu in the
menu bar to show the System Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Speech icon to show the Speech pane.
Click the Speech Recognition tab and the On/Off subtab to see the
window shown in Figure 31-1.
To prevent the computer from interpreting back ground noise and conversa tion as commands, set the Listening method to “Listen only while key is pressed.” If you must have your hands free while giving commands, you can simply use the Esc key to toggle listening on and off. You can also require the computer name to be used before each command to prevent the misinterpretation of the sounds around you. By default, you must say the command exactly as noted in the Speech Commands list. You can add some flexibility in the command protocol used on the Commands subtab of the Speech Recognition tab. Click the Global Speakable Items command set and then the Configure button. Remove the check from the checkbox “Speak commands names exactly as written.”
Figure 31-1: The Speech pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Turn on Speakable Items by clicking the appropriate radio button. A microphone appears on the desktop. 4. Click the arrow on the bottom of the microphone on your screen, and select Open Speech Commands Window. 5. Click the Listening subtab of the Speech Recognition tab of the Speech pane shown in Figure 31-2. The Listening tab controls when OS X listens to your voice commands. 6. Press and hold down the Escape key. Say, “What time is it?” The OS X system replies with the current time. 7. Click the Commands subtab of the Speech Recognition tab of the Speech pane. The Commands subtab controls which groups of commands are listened for when speech recognition is turned on.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
67
Task
31
tips
•
Figure 31-2: The Listening subtab of the Speech pane, with microphone.
8. Click the Default Voice tab to show the screen in Figure 31-3.
• • • Figure 31-3: The Default Voice tab of the Speech pane.
While the speech interface can be helpful if needed, and can be fun if not needed, it can also be dis tracting for people within earshot. Using headphones rather than the built-in speakers or an external speaker system can be a polite gesture. You can set the Speakable Items to start up when you log in by clicking the checkbox on the On/Off subtab of the Speech Recognition tab. For helpful advice on using Speakable Items, click the Helpful Tips button on the On/Off subtab of the Speech Recognition tab. If you’re not hearing any speech, check to make sure that the sound on the OS X system is not muted.
9. Set the preferred voice for OS X to use by clicking it. 10. Click the Spoken User Interface tab to display the window shown in Figure 31-4. On this tab, you can set what screen elements OS X speaks aloud.
cross-reference
•
Figure 31-4: The Spoken User Interface tab of the Speech pane.
For people with difficulty reading elements on the screen, the Universal Access pane provides other aids. These and related options are discussed in Part 18, “Speech and Accessibility.”
68
Task
32
notes
• • • • •
Fonts can be in multiple collections and still only be stored in one place on the hard drive.
Part 3
Using the Font Book
O
ne of the most anticipated features of OS X Panther is the Font Book. The Font Book is an application that organizes your fonts into collections and allows you to see each individual character of a font, create font collections, and control what fonts are active for each user. This task shows you how to use the font application to add fonts to a collection, disable fonts, and enable them when needed. 1. Press Ô-N to open a new Finder window. Click Applications in the sidebar and double-click the Font Book to open the Font Book application, as shown in Figure 32-1.
While the Font Book is useful for many Apple pro grams, most third-party programs are not designed to take advantage of the Font Book’s capabilities. Fonts can be used by any one who operates the com puter or by a single user. To make a font only usable by you, drag it to the User col lection under All Fonts. Fonts are stored in the Fonts folder of the Library folder on the hard drive. The Font Book contains more than 100 different fonts.
Figure 32-1: The Font Book.
2. Click the All Fonts collection and the Arial font to see a preview of the Arial font. 3. Fonts are organized as collections in the Collection column of the Font Book, and also in font families in the Font column. Click the arrow next to the Arial font to see all of the Arial font family, as shown in Figure 32-2.
Figure 32-2: The Arial font family with different font types.
Utilizing Preferences and Customizing
69
4. Click the Arial font family and click the Disable button at the bottom of the column to disable the entire font family. Notice the word “off” to the right of the name Arial. Click Enable to turn the Arial font family back on.
Task
32
5. Click the add button (+) at the bottom of the Collection column, as shown in Figure 32-3. Name the collection Cool Fonts.
tips
•
• Figure 32-3: Adding a collection is easy.
•
6. Click the All Fonts collection and, from the Fonts column, drag Baskerville to the Cool Fonts collection and drop it. Click the Cool Fonts collection; it only has Baskerville. 7. Drag three more fonts on to the Cool Fonts collection. Click the Baskerville font in the Fonts column of the Cool Fonts collection and press the Delete key on your keyboard. You will see the warning box in Figure 32-4. Click Remove, and you have removed the font only from that collection, not from your hard drive.
• •
Place each font you install in a collection to make your font management easier. You may want to group your fonts by style or by the project of which they are a part. Add a font to the Font Book by clicking on File ➪ Add Fonts and select where the font is located on your hard drive. To see where a font is installed from within the Font Book, select the font in the Font column and select File ➪ Show Font File from the menu bar or press Ô-R. Search all fonts by select ing All Fonts in the Collection column and using the Search field in the upper-right corner of the Font Book window. Fonts are disabled for a sin gle user, not for the entire computer. If you disable Arial, another user on the computer can still use it.
cross-reference
•
Figure 32-4: You are given the opportunity to rethink removing a font from a collection.
8. Click the Classic collection and select the Baskerville font. By default, you will see a sample of the font. Click Preview ➪ Repertoire to see all the characters in the Baskerville font.
To see the Font Book at work, take a look at Task 60: “Setting Font Appearance.”
Part 4: Finding and Working with Files Task 33:
Using the Home Folder and Customized Navigation
Task 34:
Working with a File
Task 35:
Creating and Selecting Files and Folders
Task 36:
Deleting and Undeleting Files and Folders
Task 37:
Opening Files in Preview
Task 38:
Searching for Files
Task 39:
Searching for Aliases
Task 40:
Searching for Folders and Applications
Task 41:
Indexing the Hard Drive
Task 42:
Searching by Visibility and Content
Task 43:
Transferring Files by Physical Means
Task 44:
Transferring Files Using an iPod
72
Task
33
Part 4
Using the Home Folder and Customized Navigation
O notes
•
•
• •
• •
The Go menu contains shortcuts for Computer, Home, iDisk, Network, Applications folder, and the Utilities folder. Keyboard shortcuts are also defined for all of these. For example you can display the Home folder in any active desktop window by pressing Ô-Shift -H on the keyboard.
S X provides several shortcuts for navigating the system and for customizing the appearance of windows on the desktop. Each OS X user has an individual Home folder, which provides an area in which to store customized folders and files. Knowing your way around the system in general and the Home folder in particular, will save you time. This task presents some of these navigational shortcuts and also shows how to customize window toolbars. 1. Press Ô-N to open a new window in the Finder, as shown in
Figure 33-1. By default, the new window is your Home folder.
If the window is not wide enough to show all the but tons on the toolbar, the >> symbol appears at the right end. Clicking the >> shows a menu of the hidden but tons on the toolbar. The sidebar contains aliases to several of the folders inside your Home folder (such as pictures, music, and movies). Each user’s Home folder contains both a Documents and a Library folder. If that user installs software appli cations, an Applications folder also appears in the Home folder. The concept of the Home folder is a good example of Apple’s emphasis on func tionality suited to multiuser environments.
Figure 33-1: A new window on the Finder desktop, showing the Computer view.
2. Click the hard disk icon on the sidebar to open it. 3. Double-click the Users folder to open it. 4. Double-click the icon that looks like a house to open your Home folder. You should see a set of folders similar to those shown in Figure 33-2.
While all users can see the Home folders of other users, they cannot access the majority of the contents.
Figure 33-2: Your Home folder is where OS X stores many files you create.
Finding and Working with Files 5. In the sidebar, click the Macintosh HD icon to return to the view in Figure 33-1.
73
Task
6. Click the Home icon in the sidebar to take you immediately to your Home folder.
33
7. Click Go in the menu bar, and choose computer to show the drives and network devices attached to your computer. 8. Ctrl-click anywhere in the window toolbar to display the contextual menu shown in Figure 33-3.
tips
•
• • Figure 33-3: The contextual menu for a Finder window toolbar.
9. Choose the Customize Toolbar command. The Customize Toolbar pane appears, as shown in Figure 33-4.
•
If the toolbar is hidden, click the oval button in the right end of the title bar to show the window’s toolbar. Also, the keyboard shortcut Ô-B toggles the display of the window toolbar. By default, many applica tions save files, graphics, pictures, text files, and many other kinds of files to folders in your Home folder. To hide the sidebar, doubleclick the right border of the sidebar where there is a small dot. To unhide it, double-click that dot again. The Customize Toolbar com mand also appears on the View menu in the menu bar.
cross-references
•
Figure 33-4: The Customize Toolbar pane.
10. Choose different icons as buttons to include in your Finder window toolbars, or choose the row at the bottom to restore the default set. When you are finished editing the toolbar, click the Done button to return to your window. The toolbar now shows any changes you might have made.
• •
You may also want to check out Task 7, “Browsing the System,” and Task 17, “Customizing the Appearance of Windows and Setting Folder Options,” for more navigational advice. For more information about the sidebar, see Task 9, “Creating Aliases and Utilizing the Sidebar.” To see how the Home fold ers are set up and the dif ferent accounts, see Part 5, “Managing Users.”
74
Task
34
Part 4
Working with a File
O
S X uses the metaphor of files and folders on a desktop. As you work with OS X, you will invariably create files and folders, which will be combined with an array of files and folders created automatically by the system. This task explains some of the ways that you can manipulate a file (learn about its settings, rename it, lock it so no one can edit it, and so on).
notes
•
•
•
By default, files you create have the permissions shown in Figure 34-4. You can read and edit a file, but everyone else can only read a file. You can share this file for editing by changing the file’s permis sions here.
1. To create a new file that you can work with, take a screen shot of
your desktop. An icon appears on your desktop named Picture 1.
2. Click the Picture 1 icon on the desktop once to select it, then press
Ô-I to show the Get Info window displayed in Figure 34-1.
File permissions can be changed on a user basis or on a group basis. If you are working in an environment with groups, you should give permission to files by setting up user groups. Any file can be made a “template” by checking the Stationary Pad checkbox. When the Stationary Pad option is selected, an untitled copy of the file is opened.
Figure 34-1: The Get Info window.
3. Click the triangle next to Name & Extension to open the Name &
Extension pane of the Info window.
4. To rename the file, click and select “Picture 1” in the Name & Extension field, then type a new name such as mydesktop. Press Return, and the new name appears both in the field and on the desktop, as shown in Figure 34-2. 5. Click the triangle next to Name & Extension to close the pane, then click the triangle next to “Open with” to show that pane. 6. Click the drop-down menu on the “Open with” pane to see the pop-up shown in Figure 34-3. 7. Close the “Open with” pane. 8. Check the Locked checkbox to lock a file from editing and make it
read-only.
9. Uncheck the Locked checkbox to permit editing of the file. 10. Click the triangle next to Ownership & Permissions to see the Get Info window shown in Figure 34-4.
Finding and Working with Files
75
Task
34
tips
• •
Figure 34-2: Renaming a file in the Get Info window.
•
Figure 34-3: The “Open with” pane and the default application pop-up menu.
If you are either saving or opening a file, press the Ô-D keyboard shortcut to set the file browser to the desktop. Use the “Open with” pane of the Get info window to change the default applica tion to use with a specific file. Clicking the Change All button changes the default application for all files of that type. You can also change the name of a file by clicking the name of a file on the desktop or in the Finder to select the name, clicking a second time in the selected name to insert a cursor, and typing to edit or replace the filename.
Figure 34-4: The Ownership & Permissions pane.
cross-references
• •
Taking a snapshot of your desktop is explained in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.” The contextual menu shows the default application as the first option to open a file with. The menu on the Get Info window lets you change the default applica tion shown in the contextual menu. For more information on contextual menus, see Task 6, “Viewing a Contextual Menu.”
76
Task
35
Part 4
Creating and Selecting Files and Folders
T notes
• • •
The keyboard shortcut for the Select All command is Ô-A. Use this key combi nation to select all items in the active window. Like files, folders have per missions that can be set in the Get Info window. Folders can also be labeled with different colors, as can files for ease of organization.
he graphical interface of OS X certainly provides ease of use. However, a key to efficient use of the system is the ability to maintain a growing set of files and folders, as well as manipulate multiple files simultaneously. This task explains how to create and name new folders in which you can store files, and how to select groups of files. 1. Create a new folder on the desktop by choosing the command File ➪
New Folder from the File menu of the menu bar.
2. The new folder appears on the desktop with the name “untitled
folder.” The name of the folder is highlighted and boxed.
3. Type a name for the folder and press the Return key to name the new
folder. For this task and the accompanying figures, the name of the
folder is “example folder.”
4. Double-click the folder icon and the folder window opens, as shown
in Figure 35-1.
5. For some files to work with, press Shift-Ô-3 three times to take three
snapshots of the desktop, and save them as PDF files. Three icons
appear on the desktop named Picture 1, Picture 2, and Picture 3.
6. Select the three PDF files by clicking the cursor to the upper left of
the top icon and dragging diagonally across the three figures to select
them. All three picture icons will be darkened to show that they are
selected, as shown in Figure 35-1.
Figure 35-1: Selecting multiple icons with the cursor.
Finding and Working with Files 7. Click one of the Picture icons, and drag the set of three into the example folder window. The icons appear in the window, as shown in Figure 35-2.
77
Task
35
tips
• •
Figure 35-2: Multiple icons can be moved with a single action.
8. Ô-click on the first picture icon, then the third, then the second. All three are selected again. 9. Ô-click the middle of the three picture icons. The middle icon is unselected, but the other two icons are still selected, as shown in Figure 35-3.
• •
•
• Figure 35-3: Individual icons can be selected or unselected by Ô-clicking.
10. From the Edit menu in the menu bar, choose the command Select All. This selects all three icons again.
•
You can create a new folder with the keyboard shortcut Ô-Shift-N. You can select a set of adjacent files in a window in List View the same way as in Icon View by dragging the cursor to highlight and select the small icons of the files or folders. Ô-clicking enables you to select files that are not next to each other and to skip files. Shift-clicking allows you to select adjacent files. Click the first file you would like and then Shift-click the last, and all of the files between them are selected. This works best in List View. With a window open in Icon View, you can also select a file or folder simply by typing the first few letters of the name. Pressing the Tab key selects the next alphabetical name. Pressing the Shift-Tab key combination selects the previous alphabetical name. Selecting groups of files or folders is especially helpful when backing up data to a different medium. When a group of files or fold ers is selected, commands in the File and Edit menus apply to all selected files.
cross-reference
•
Taking a snapshot of your desktop is discussed in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.”
78
Task
36
Part 4
Deleting and Undeleting Files and Folders
W notes
•
•
An empty Trash icon in the Dock looks empty. A Trash icon with anything in it changes to appear full. There’s no relationship between the amount of data in the Trash folder and the appearance of the icon, though. If it’s empty, it looks empty, and if the Trash has even a single empty folder icon in it, the Dock icon looks full.
hile getting rid of unneeded files and folders is a good way to reduce clutter on your desktop and to make finding wanted items easier (as with a real desktop), you might get rid of something you later realized you didn’t want to. This task discusses how to delete files and how to recover them from the Trash. 1. Press Ô-Shift-3 to take a snapshot of the desktop and save it as a
PDF file. An icon appears on the desktop named Picture 1, as shown
in Figure 36-1.
After emptying the Trash, you may be able to retrieve those files by using a thirdparty file utility such as Data Recycler X. While these utilities are great for an emergency, the best way to make sure that you don’t delete files you need is to always open the trash and review what’s in it before emptying it.
Figure 36-1: A file icon on the desktop.
cautions
•
•
Uncheck the checkbox next to “Show warning before emptying the Trash” only if you’re confident that you’ll never choose the “Empty trash” command and immediately panic. If you use the shortcut menu in the Dock to empty the trash, you will not receive a warning before the trash is empty.
2. Click the Picture 1 icon to select it. 3. Drag the icon to the Trash. The file icon disappears from the desktop, and the Trash icon in the Dock changes its appearance to indicate that it is not empty, as shown in Figure 36-2. 4. To retrieve the file, click the Trash icon in the Dock to open the Trash folder.
Finding and Working with Files
79
5. Click the Picture 1 icon in the Trash folder, and drag it back to the desktop.
Task
6. To use the keyboard shortcuts, click the Picture 1 icon to select it, and press Ô-Delete to move the selected file to the Trash.
Figure 36-2: The Trash icon in the Dock shows the Trash folder contains at least one file.
tips
•
7. Retrieve the file from the Trash by choosing Edit ➪ Undo Move of “Picture 1” from the Edit menu in the menu bar. 8. Click the Picture 1 icon to select it, and choose File ➪ Move to Trash to throw the file away again.
•
9. From the Application menu, choose Finder ➪ Empty Trash. A dialog, shown in Figure 36-3, appears to ask if you’re sure. Click the OK button on the Trash dialog to delete the items in the Trash.
•
Figure 36-3: The Trash warning.
10. To make the warning dialog in Figure 36-3 never appear again, from the Application menu choose Finder ➪ Preferences, and click Advanced to show the Finder Preferences window in Figure 36-4. Uncheck the checkbox next to “Show warning before emptying the Trash.”
Figure 36-4: The Finder Preferences window.
36
•
Multiple files can be han dled with a mouse drag, menu command, or key board shortcut as easily as one file. The keyboard shortcut for undoing a move of a file or files is Ô-Z. If you see a dialog explain ing that you can’t empty the Trash because some items are locked, first empty the Trash of the items you can get rid of. Then open the Trash folder, select the locked items, and show the Get Info win dow. Unlock the file, and then empty the Trash again. Press and hold your mouse button with the cursor over the Trash icon in the Dock to bring up the shortcut menu for trash. This is another way to empty the trash.
cross-references
• •
Another way to reduce visi ble clutter without deleting anything is to use the Hide Others command, presented in Task 8, “Closing, Hiding, and Exposing Windows.” Taking a snapshot of your desktop is discussed in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.”
80
Task
37
Part 4
Opening Files in Preview Having the correct application to open a file has always been a problem for people exchanging files. Preview allows you to open image files of many types without having the program that created them. Preview doesn’t open all files, but it does open many. This task shows you how to use the Preview application to view files automatically, and how to choose another application to open a file.
notes
• •
Preview will open the fol lowing types of files: JPG, GIF, TIF, PSD, PICT, PNG, BMP, and SGI.
1. Press Ô-Shift-3 to make a PDF file of the desktop. 2. Double-click the Picture 1 file you’ve created to open it, as shown in Figure 37-1.
When opening PostScript or EPS files, Preview will save them as a PDF file. This is especially helpful when working with someone who does not have a PostScript printer.
Figure 37-1: Preview opens a PDF file.
3. Click the Zoom Out button in the Preview toolbar. Now you can see the entire desktop file, as shown in Figure 37-2. 4. Select File ➪ Export from the menu bar. 5. Type the name of your file as “Desktop as QT.” 6. Click the format pop-up menu and choose QuickTime Image, as shown in Figure 37-3.
Finding and Working with Files
81
Task
37
tips
• •
Figure 37-2: Preview with a smaller version of your desktop.
•
Preview opens much faster than Adobe Acrobat Reader. By default, you will want to use Preview to open PDFs. To make Preview the default application for PDFs or other image files, you can use the Get Info window to change the Open With application selection. You can crop and rotate files in Preview as well as export them to a different file type.
Figure 37-3: Saving a file as another format using Preview.
7. Select the desktop as where the file will be saved, and click the Save button. 8. Close Preview by selecting the Preview application menu, and then choose Quit Preview. 9. Ctrl-click the “Desktop as QT” file, and select Open With in the menu, as shown in Figure 37-4.
cross-references
• •
Figure 37-4: You can open the file with different applications.
10. Select whichever application you would like to open this QuickTime image with.
For more information on changing the default appli cation for opening files, see Task 34, “Working with a File.” For more information about screen captures, see Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.”
82
Task
38
Part 4
Searching for Files
O
ne of the problems many people experience is remembering where they put something. Previous versions of the Mac operating system provided limited capabilities to search the computer hard disk (albeit rather slowly at that). OS X provides extensive capabilities for searching for files and folders. This task explains how to use Apple’s Find functions included in OS X.
notes
•
•
•
•
• • •
The “Search in” drop-down list defaults to search your Home folder. You may choose to add specific folders and disks to the drop-down list with the Specific places option, or search Everywhere, which includes any networked disks or servers currently visible on the desktop. Searching for Date Modified helps you find all files you changed in reference to a specific date. This is helpful if you write many letters and want to find one that you know you wrote last Tuesday, for example. The “Extension is” search field is useful for filtering to show only files with a cer tain file extension (such as .doc for Microsoft Word, .html for HTML Web files, .pdf for Adobe Acrobat files, and so on). Changes you make to the Find window are preserved. If you add the “extension is” field to your Find dialog and close the Find window, the next time you open Find, the “Extension is” field is still present. When searching using multi ple criteria, a file must meet all of the criteria to be found, not just one part of it. Searching using the Search field in a Finder window searches the local disks. The Label’s Search field is useful if you have organized your files and folders using the Finder Labels to colorcode them.
1. Press Ô-F to display the Find dialog shown in Figure 38-1.
Figure 38-1: The Find dialog.
2. Click the “Search in” pop-up menu at the top of the Find window, and view the options. 3. Click the Name pop-up menu, and view the options. 4. Click the plus (+) button to the right of the Name field to add a second filename search field. 5. Click the second Name pop-up menu, and choose the “starts with” option. Your Find window should now resemble Figure 38-2.
Figure 38-2: The Find dialog with an additional search option.
6. Click the minus (-) button to the right of the second filename search field. Your Find window should now look like Figure 38-1 again. 7. Click the “Add criteria” pop-up menu to show the options in that menu, as shown in Figure 38-3. By default, this pop-up menu contains the “Content” criteria.
Finding and Working with Files
83
Task
38
tips Figure 38-3: The Find dialog shows additional search criteria.
• •
8. Using the add button at the end of the current criteria, add search
fields for date modified, date created, size, and extension.
9. Click the Date Created drop-down menu, and choose “is after.”
A date field appears with today’s date in the field.
•
10. Click the month of today’s date in the Date Created field, and use the small arrows to the right of the date field to change the month to 2 months ago. Your Find dialog should now resemble Figure 38-4.
You can have up to three Name search fields. Clicking the minus (-) button to the right of the second Name search field removes the extra search field. All search criteria must be met for a file to appear. If the file has the correct name, but was labeled a different color, then it will not appear. It is a Boolean AND condition, not an OR condition.
Figure 38-4: The Find dialog can search for many different criteria at once to narrow the results more effectively.
cross-reference
•
To search for different kinds of items, see Task 39, “Searching for Aliases,” and Task 40, “Searching for Folders and Applications.”
84
Task
39
Part 4
Searching for Aliases
O
S X introduces the Unix operating system as the core of OS X. In the Unix computing world, a truism is that everything is a file. However, there are different kinds of files: word-processing documents, folders (which, to the system, are a list of files and not an actual folder), sounds, and so on. This task explains how to refine your searching to find a specific type of file called an alias.
notes
• •
•
You can search for the fol lowing kinds of files: alias, applications, folder, docu ment, audio, image, and movie. You can search for kinds of files that are the same or are not the same as the type of file selected in the second drop-down list. Setting the first “Kind” drop-down list to “no value” causes the second drop-down list to vanish. Changes you make to the Find window are preserved. If you add the “Extension is” field to your Find dialog and close the Find window, the next time you open Find, the “Extension is” field is still present.
1. Press Ô-F to show the Find dialog shown in Figure 39-1.
Figure 39-1: The Find dialog.
2. Click the “Add criteria” button to the right of the Name row in the Find window and choose “Kind.” A pair of pop-up menus appears beneath the filename row, as shown in Figure 39-2.
Figure 39-2: The Find dialog showing the ability to search by kind of file.
3. Click the second (far right) “Kind” pop-up menu to see the types of files you can search for. Choose “alias.”
caution
•
By moving or changing the name of a file, you may “break” an alias. The alias will no longer know where the file is or what it is named and, therefore, will not function properly.
4. Click the first “Kind” pop-up to see the logical option for the search: “is” or “is not.” 5. Click the hard disk icon on the desktop. 6. Choose Ô-L to make an alias of the hard disk. An alias of the hard disk appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 39-3.
Finding and Working with Files
85
Task
39
tips
•
• Figure 39-3: The Find dialog set to search for aliases, and an alias on the desktop.
7. Click the Name field (the first row), and type all or part of the hard disk icon name. 8. Press the Return key or click the Search button. A Search Results window appears showing the result.
• •
9. Click the alias shown in the Search Results field. The bottom pane of the Search Results window shows the path to the alias, as shown in Figure 39-4.
Double-clicking an icon in the Search Results window will have the same effect as double-clicking the icon on the desktop: A file opens with its default application, an application launches, and so on. Use the Search “Kind” cri teria to find all files, such as movies, that take up valuable disk space. Once found, you can then move or delete them to clean up the hard disk. You can minimize the amount of time taken for a search by being as specific as possible in selecting search criteria. You can delete files, copy files, move files, rename files, or make aliases from the Search Results window on files of any kind.
cross-reference
•
Figure 39-4: The Search Results window.
10. Ctrl-click the alias in the Search Results window to see the available contextual menu options.
For an introduction to searching on OS X, see Task 38, “Searching for Files.”
86
Task
40
Part 4
Searching for Folders and Applications
O
S X provides the capability to search for items on the system in several different ways. As you use your system more and more, you may add applications that you use infrequently. You may even forget where those applications reside. This task explains how to search for folders and applications.
notes
• •
1. Press Ô-F to display the Find dialog shown in Figure 40-1.
When users install applica tions, these are located in an Applications folders inside the user’s Home folder, and may not be accessible by other users. A user can install an Application anywhere on the hard drive, not just in one of the many Applications folders.
Figure 40-1: The Find dialog.
2. Click the “Add criteria” button to the right of the Name row in the Find window, and choose “Kind.” A pair of pop-ups appear beneath the filename pop-up field, as shown in Figure 40-2.
Figure 40-2: The Find dialog showing the ability to search by kind of file.
3. Click the second (far right) “Kind” pop-up menu to see the types of files you can search for. Choose “folder.” 4. Click the Name field and type Applications. 5. Press the Return key. A Search Results window appears, similar to the one shown in Figure 40-3.
Finding and Working with Files
87
Task
40
tips
•
Figure 40-3: The Search Results window showing folders
whose name contains the word “Applications.”
•
6. Close the Search Results window. 7. In the Find window, delete the Name field by clicking the minus sign (-) to the right of the row.
•
8. On the second (far right) “Kind” pop-up menu, choose “application.” 9. Press the Return key on the keyboard. A search window displays applications, as shown in Figure 40-4.
•
• Figure 40-4: The Search Results window showing applications.
•
10. Click the small (tiny) X button in the upper-right corner of the Search Results window to stop the search.
If you do another search, the new search Results appear in a new Search Results window. A search may take a long time, depending on what you are searching for. The more disks on which you are searching, the longer a search will take. If you have a large hard disk, or several external disks, it is best to narrow down the search as much as you possibly can. Searching for an applica tion may help you find associated folders. For example, you may want to know where wordprocessing templates are located by default. You can access the Applications folder quickly by pressing Ô-Shift-A. Similarly, you can access the Home folder easily by pressing Ô-Shift-H. You can drag an applica tion from the Search Results window to the Dock to make it easier to launch in the future.
cross-references
• •
For more on searching on OS X, see Task 38, “Searching for Files,” and Task 39, “Searching for Aliases.” For more about adding files to the Dock, see Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock.”
88
Task
41
notes
• •
OS X can’t index a folder or volume that it lacks write access to (such as a CD-ROM). OS X no longer stores the system index in one file, but rather every folder con tains its own index. This means the index travels with the folder when copied or moved.
Part 4
Indexing the Hard Drive
O
S X can read the contents of several types of files, including text, RTF, and Adobe Acrobat files. OS X can create an index, not only of filenames and types, but of the contents of several types of files. While the system automatically and continuously indexes file contents, you may run into a situation where you want access to information that the system has not yet indexed. This task explains how to create and update these indexes. 1. Click the hard disk icon on the desktop. 2. Press Ô-I to open the Get Info window. 3. Click the triangle next to Content Index to open the Content Index pane of the hard disk volume’s Get Info window, as shown in Figure 41-1.
Figure 41-1: The Content Index pane of the Get Info window.
4. Click the Index Now button to create the index. A progress bar appears, as shown in Figure 41-2.
Figure 41-2: A progress bar shows how far along the index is.
Finding and Working with Files 5. When the index process is completed, the Status field changes to Indexed, as shown in Figure 41-3.
89
Task
41
tips
•
Figure 41-3: A completed index.
•
6. Click the Delete Index button to delete the index. A dialog appears, as shown in Figure 41-4.
• Figure 41-4: A warning dialog asks you to confirm the index deletion.
7. Click the OK button to delete the Index for that volume. 8. To update an index, follow the same procedure outlined in Steps 1 to 5 to create the index.
If you stop the indexing of a volume or folder before OS X finishes indexing that vol ume or folder, the status changes to Indexed, but with no hint that the index is incomplete or unfinished. The Finder indexes only the first 2,000 words of any sin gle document or file. Longer documents are, therefore, not fully indexed, and may not appear when you search for them by content if the search terms don’t appear in the first 2,000 words of that document. Searching a volume or folder causes OS X to check if the index for that volume or folder is out-ofdate. If the index is out-ofdate, the index is updated before the search is per formed. Updating an index normally takes very little time in comparison to that required for the original creation of the index.
cross-references
•
• •
Indexes can take less time to create and update if the number of languages used to create the index is reduced. This is discussed in Task 30, “Setting Language and Regional Preferences.” For searching by index, see Task 42, “Searching by Visibility and Content.” For more information about searching, see Task 38, “Searching for Files,” and Task 40, “Searching for Folders and Applications.”
90
Task
42
Part 4
Searching by Visibility and Content
O
S X can search for files and folders that are invisible to the user. Another useful feature of OS X is the ability to create an index of the contents of text files and to search for a file based on the words in the document, not simply the filename. This task discusses how to perform both of these searches.
notes
•
•
Included with invisible files in OS X is the multitude of Unix files. Unix-knowledgeable people should recog nize standard directories such as etc, var, and tmp in the private folder.
1. Press Ô-F to show the Find dialog. 2. Click the “Add criteria” pop-up menu in the first row of the Find
window and choose “Visibility.”
3. Click the “Visibility” pop-up menu and choose the “invisible items”
value. Your Find window should look like the window shown in
Figure 42-1.
You can have thousands of invisible files on your com puter. Each has a purpose.
Figure 42-1: The Find dialog showing the ability to search for invisible files.
4. Click the Search button on the Find window to search for invisible files. A Search Results window now displays a list of invisible files, as shown in Figure 42-2.
caution
•
If you don’t know what an invisible file does, do not delete it.
Figure 42-2: Invisible files in OS X are hidden from the general view.
5. Another way to get to many of the invisible files is through the Go menu. From the Go menu in the menu bar, choose Go ➪ Go To Folder. 6. In the Go To Folder dialog, type /private, and click the Go button. The private folder appears, as shown in Figure 42-3.
Finding and Working with Files
91
Task
42
tips
•
Figure 42-3: The private folder is an invisible folder that can be accessed through the Go menu.
7. Click the red button in the upper left of the private folder title bar to close the window. 8. Press Ô-F to show the Find window. 9. Click the “Add criteria” pop-up menu at the end of the first row. Choose “Content” from the pop-up menu of criteria. A field to enter content words to search for appears, as shown in Figure 42-4.
Figure 42-4: The Find dialog showing the ability to search for files by content.
10. Enter words to search for, and click the Search button. A Search Results window appears, similar to that shown in Figure 42-2, but this one shows all files that contain the keywords you entered in the “content” search field in the Find window.
• • •
•
In Unix, files are generally treated as invisible or made invisible by starting the filename with a period. Clicking the minus (-) button to the right of the “Visibility” search field removes the “Visibility” search field from the Find window. To stop a search that is taking longer than you want, click the small X but ton in the upper right of the Search Results window. OS X hides many files and folders, making them invisi ble to general access, because most people will almost never need to see or work with these files. Be careful when working with invisible files. If you need to ask why you need this access, you probably don’t. If searching by content does not produce the expected results, consider manually forcing the system to index. It is possible that the index is not up-to-date.
cross-references
• •
To see if your hard disk is indexed, and to create an index if you don’t have one, see Task 41, “Indexing the Hard Drive.” For more Terminal usage with OS X, see Part 17, “Terminal Tricks.”
92
Task
43
notes
• • • • •
Transferring files by floppy disk was once called “sneakernet” as a pun on the Ethernet network design that is still in use today.
Part 4
Transferring Files by Physical Means
T
he networking of computers is becoming more and more common, even in the home. The ability to connect computers over a network (either by cable or through a wireless Ethernet network such as Apple’s Airport) is widespread and growing. However, there are times when using a network isn’t possible or practical. This task shows you how to transfer files to a data CD-ROM, which you can then take to another system with a CD drive and copy the files from the CD-ROM to the other system. 1. Insert a blank CD-ROM into the CD-R drive. A dialog appears and
asks what to do with this CD, as shown in Figure 43-1.
For this task, you will need an OS X system with a CD RW drive, and a blank data CD-ROM. The CD-ROM is a volume on the desktop, similar to a hard disk attached to the OS X system. While some media are spe cific to the Mac or Windows platforms, CDs can be read by both platforms without special formatting. The two types of CDs are CD-R (on which you may copy data once) and CD RW (which are rewritable, meaning you can copy data over and over).
Figure 43-1: A dialog prompts you to choose how to treat a blank CD-ROM.
2. Click the OK button. The CD-ROM icon appears on the desktop. 3. Double-click the CD icon to open the window of the CD icon. The untitled window appears on the desktop. In the status bar at the bottom of the empty window, you should see a status similar to “0 items, 660.7 MB available.” 4. Press Shift-Ô-3 to take a screen shot of the desktop. 5. Drag the Picture 1 icon from the desktop onto the CD icon. The Picture 1 icon appears, as shown in Figure 43-2.
Figure 43-2: A file copied to a blank CD-ROM.
Finding and Working with Files 6. Close the untitled CD window.
93
Task
7. Click the CD icon on the desktop and drag it. The Trash icon changes to a yellow-and-black icon, as shown in Figure 43-3.
43
tips
• • • •
Figure 43-3: The Trash icon changes to a Burn Disc icon when you have a blank CD-ROM with data ready for burning.
8. Drop the CD-ROM onto the yellow-and-black icon. A dialog appears, as shown in Figure 43-4.
Figure 43-4: A dialog asks if you’re ready to burn the data to the CD-ROM.
9. Click the Burn button to burn the data to the CD. A Burn Disc status window appears, showing a progress bar as the data is “burned” into the CD-ROM. 10. When the Burn Disc status window vanishes, the process is complete. Click the CD icon on the desktop, and eject the CD by pressing Ô-E.
As of this writing, Apple includes two blank CD-ROMs with every OS X system that has a CD-RW drive. The screen shot instruction is just to give you a new file to work with. If you already have files on your OS X sys tem that you want to copy, use those files instead. iTunes allows you to copy music from audio CDs into MP3 files on your hard drive, which is called “rip ping a CD.” You can make a data CD of your MP3 files using the technique described in this task. This is useful if you have a CD player that rec ognizes the MP3 format, or if you want to take your music from one computer to another.
cross-references
•
•
You can set OS X’s response to blank and other kinds of CDs and DVDs in the CDs & DVDs pane of System Preferences. See Task 24, “Setting CD and DVD Preferences.” For more information on audio CDs, see Part 14, “Audio with iTunes.”
94
Task
44
notes
• • • •
A 20 GB iPod can hold more than 4,000 songs. As of this writing, iPods are available in 10, 20, and 40 GB configurations.
Part 4
Transferring Files Using an iPod
A
pple’s iPod is an MP3 music player that works with the iTunes music application in OS X. However, the iPod is also a portable hard disk that connects to an OS X system through the FireWire port. Current iPods can store the equivalent of many data CDs, making this a very efficient data-transfer method. You can also use your iPod to store backup copies of your important documents, in case of a problem with your OS X system. This task explains how to use an iPod to copy files from one OS X system to another. 1. Choose the command Finder ➪ Preferences from the Application
menu to show the Finder Preferences window shown in Figure 44-1.
While you use the iPod as a hard disk, you are also charging the battery of the iPod through the FireWire port. Now that’s multitasking! In addition to being used for music and data storage, the iPod also has several appli cations on it including a cal endar, a to-do list, and four games (including solitaire).
Figure 44-1: The Finder Preferences window.
2. Click the checkbox next to a removable medium (such as CDs). If the checkbox has a check in it already, as shown in Figure 44-1, leave it as is. 3. Click the red button in the upper left of the Finder Preferences window to close the window. 4. Connect one end of a FireWire cable to your iPod, and the other end to a FireWire port on your OS X system. iTunes starts up automatically when an iPod is connected to a FireWire port. If the iPod is not associated with the iTunes on this OS X system, the dialog, shown in Figure 44-2 appears. 5. Click the Cancel button on the dialog shown in Figure 44-2 if it appears, and the dialog will vanish. Any music on your iPod will not be affected. 6. Since you are using the iPod to transfer files in this task, you don’t need iTunes. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to bring the application to the foreground, and press Ô-Q to quit iTunes.
Finding and Working with Files
95
Task
44
tips
•
Figure 44-2: iTunes dialog prompting you to delete the music on the iPod.
•
7. Double-click the iPod icon in the desktop to open the iPod removable hard disk window. 8. Drag a file to the iPod window. The file appears in the iPod window, as shown in Figure 44-3.
• •
Although an iPod is a FireWire-connected hard disk, OS X considers it removable media instead of a hard disk in the Finder Preferences. Dragging a file from the system hard disk to a removable hard disk copies the file, but doesn’t delete the file on the hard disk, so you can use any file in this task as an example. If you don’t want to do that, you can create a new screen shot of the desktop as a file to use for this task. Dragging a music or data CD to the Trash will also change the Trash icon to the Eject icon and eject the disk. This also works with attached network drives. In addition to storing back ups of your important files on an iPod, you can even install a copy of OS X on an iPod and use the iPod as a system disk to restart from in an emergency, or for test ing a new operating system.
Figure 44-3: The iPod removable hard disk window.
9. Close the iPod window, and drag the iPod icon to the Trash in the Dock. The Trash icon changes to an Eject icon, as shown in Figure 44-4. Figure 44-4: Eject a removable hard disk by dragging the disk icon to
the Trash.
10. Disconnect the iPod and connect it to another OS X system, and copy the file to the other OS X hard disk.
cross-references
• •
Taking a snapshot of your desktop is discussed in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.” For more information about syncing your iPod with iTunes, see Part 14, “Audio with iTunes.”
Part 5: Managing Users Task 45:
Viewing and Setting Your Account Information
Task 46:
Adding a User Account
Task 47:
Changing a User’s Password
Task 48:
Changing a User’s Icon
Task 49:
Setting and Changing a User’s Permissions
Task 50:
Deleting a User’s Account
Task 51:
Setting Automatic Login
Task 52:
Switching Users Quickly
Task 53:
Setting Login Options for Users
Task 54:
Enabling the System Administrator Account
98
Task
45
Part 5
Viewing and Setting Your Account Information
W notes
• • • •
OS X requires passwords to be at least four characters long. You must authenticate yourself using your account’s current password to unlock the other fields on the Password tab of the Accounts pane.
hether your OS X is set up for you as the sole user or set up for multiple users, you must be familiar with how your individual account is set up. You can examine your account information in more than one way and make changes to it as well. This task discusses how to view and set your account information through the Accounts pane of the System Preferences window. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System Preferences window. 2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts pane, shown in Figure 45-1.
Previous versions of Mac OS X called the Accounts preferences pane the Users preferences pane. To lock the Accounts pane so that you must authenti cate yourself again to change anything, click the open lock in the lower-left corner of the screen and it will lock.
Figure 45-1: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click your account icon labeled My Account at the top of the Accounts column. 4. Click the Password tab to display the Password pane. 5. In the Password Hint field, enter a hint that will remind you of what your password is. 6. Press the Return key. The system must authenticate your password and prompts you with a dialog for your current password, as shown in Figure 45-2.
Managing Users
99
Task
45
tips
•
Figure 45-2: Authenticate yourself using your current password.
•
7. Change your “long” name by editing the name in the Name field. 8. Change your password by entering the new password in the New Password field. Confirm the new password by entering it a second time in the Verify field. 9. Enter a password hint that can help you remember your password. 10. When you are finished, click the lock in the lower-left corner of the pane, as shown in Figure 45-3.
• • • •
To check which account is currently logged in to the OS X system, look for the My Account section in the column of names in the Accounts pane of System Preferences. A way to check your current user account from the command line is to open a Terminal window and type whoami at the system prompt: The response is the current user account’s short name. The Terminal application is in the Applications/Utilities folder. You cannot change your short name. If you must have a different short name, then you should create another user account with that name. If you are an administrator on the OS X system, you can edit someone else’s account with the Edit User button and change that user’s long name, reset that user’s password, change the user icon, and so on.
cross-references
•
Figure 45-3: Lock the pane so that you must authenticate yourself to make changes
•
Changing your password and icon is discussed in Task 13, “Changing Your Password and Icon.” To add a user to your sys tem, see Task 46, “Adding a User Account.”
100
Task
46
notes
• •
•
OS X requires passwords to be at least four characters long. In general, you should avoid obvious passwords, such as your name, your pet’s name, or the name of anyone you live with; your birthday; words found in the dictionary; or other obvious choices. You could take two or more words and type them together, with mixed capitalization (such as TwoOrMore). Or, take a sentence you’ll remember and use the first letter of each word as your password. A password should be easy for you to remember without writing it down, but hard to guess. The Mac OS X 10.3 system does not set a maximum number of characters for a password. Therefore, you can make a password as long as you would like; just be sure you can remember it.
Part 5
Adding a User Account
W
hen OS X is first installed, one user account with administrator permission is created during the installation process. Other normal users on the system do not have exclusive administrator privileges. These privileges are assigned through various settings throughout the system that can be changed only by an administrator, including adding new user accounts. This task shows how to create a new account. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts
pane, shown in Figure 46-1.
Figure 46-1: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the New User button to display a New User, as shown in Figure 46-2.
cautions
•
•
Not all users need to have administrator privileges. Administrators can install software, delete files belonging to other users, change global system set tings, and edit or delete other users. OS X uses the short name to identify the user on the system, and to name the new user’s Home folder. The short name cannot be changed.
Figure 46-2: The New User Password sheet of the Accounts pane.
Managing Users
101
4. Click the Name field, and enter a name for the user.
Task
5. Click the Short Name field, and enter a short name for the user.
46
6. Enter a password for the user in the Password field, and reenter the password in the Verify field. 7. Enter a password hint in the Password Hint field. 8. Click the Picture tab, and choose a picture to use as an icon. The default icon for the user is shown in the Picture preview field, shown in Figure 46-3.
tips
•
• • • Figure 46-3: The Picture tab of the Accounts pane.
9. To allow the user administrator privileges on the OS X system, select the Security tab and check the “Allow user to administer this computer” checkbox at the bottom of the screen, as shown in Figure 46-4.
When you enter the Name, press the Tab key on the keyboard, and the OS X system will create a short name formed from the user’s long name. You can edit the short name in this sheet before you save and create the account. The Password Hint field is optional, so you don’t have to enter a hint. Either the short name or the long name can be used when logging onto the computer. Even if you are the only user for your system, you can still set up different accounts for different activ ities. For example, you can create one account for work and one for recreation. That way, you have a Home folder for each type of activity.
cross-reference
•
Figure 46-4: The Security tab in the Accounts pane is where the administrator access is set.
10. When you’re finished entering the information, click the Login Options icon at the bottom of the user’s column. Click the radio button for List of Users in the field “Display Login Window As.”
For more information on customizing accounts, see Part 2, “Setting Up Your Desktop and Your Account.”
102
Task
47
Part 5
Changing a User’s Password
C
hoosing a good password provides security for your system to prevent unauthorized access. However, users may inadvertently give away their passwords, or even forget their passwords. Sometimes you may need to change an existing user’s password. If you have administrator access to the OS X system, you can do so. This task shows you how to change a user’s password.
notes
• • •
•
It doesn’t matter if the other user is an administra tor or not. You can change that user’s password. OS X does not require that you assign a password. If you do not assign a pass word, you will receive a warning, but OS X will not stop you from proceeding.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts
pane, as shown in Figure 47-1.
When you change a user’s password, it does not change the user’s keychain password. If a user wants to change a keychain pass word, the user must use the Keychain preferences. When you change your own password, your keychain password is changed to match that of your login password.
Figure 47-1: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click a user’s account name in the column on the left. 4. Click the lock in the lower-left corner of the Accounts pane to authenticate yourself so that you can make changes, as shown in Figure 47-2.
Managing Users
103
Task
47
tips
• •
Figure 47-2: Password tab on the Accounts pane when authentication is complete.
5. Change the user’s password by entering the new password in the Password field.
You cannot change the short name of an existing account, not even your own. If you are an administrator on the OS X system, you can edit someone else’s account in the Accounts pane and change the long name, reset the password, change the user icon, and so on.
6. Confirm the new password by entering it a second time in the Verify field. 7. If you think it will help, enter a password hint that can help the user remember the password. 8. Close the Accounts pane when you are finished. All information is saved automatically.
cross-references
• •
Changing your own pass word is discussed in Task 13, “Changing Your Password and Icon.” For more information about passwords and the Keychain, see Task 14, “Setting Keychain Preferences.”
104
Task
48
notes
• • • •
It doesn’t matter if the other user is an administra tor or not. You can change that user’s icon, and any administrator can change your icon as well.
Part 5
Changing a User’s Icon
T
aking advantage of the graphical capabilities of OS X allows you to personalize not only your experience, but that of others as well. One example of this is the use of individual icons to identify users. At times, you may want to change an existing user’s icon, either your own or another’s. If you have administrator access to the OS X system, you can change other users’ icons. This task shows you how to change a user’s icon. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts
pane, as shown in Figure 48-1.
The default location for the Open file browser is that user’s Home folder. OS X recognizes most graphic file formats (includ ing JPEG, PNG, GIF, PSD, and TIFF). The photo you choose for yourself is the same photo that represents you in the Address Book, as well as the default picture in iChat.
Figure 48-1: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click a user’s account in the column on the left. 4. Click the Picture tab to show the picture information for the account, as shown in Figure 48-2.
caution
•
When working in a profes sional environment, be sure to choose an appropriate picture.
5. Click one of the default icons presented in the vertical list on the right. The new icon appears in the Picture preview, as shown in Figure 48-3. 6. Click the Edit button. An edit dialog, shown in Figure 48-4, allows you to edit the existing picture or to choose another from the OS X system. 7. Click the Choose button at the bottom of the Images dialog to open a file browser and choose a picture from the hard drive. 8. Use the file browser dialog to navigate through the system and choose a picture to use as that user’s new icon. When you find a picture, click it and click Open. 9. Click the Set button in the Images dialog to set the picture to the one you have chosen.
Managing Users
105
Task
48
tips
• •
Figure 48-2: The Picture pane of the Accounts window.
• •
You can change your own user icon in the Accounts pane of the System Preferences window. To use a picture located elsewhere on your system, locate the file using a file browser. You can then drag the file from its location into the Picture well to make it active. When using an image of your own, use a graphics program to ensure a proper representation. You can capture a picture of yourself or someone else using a Web cam attached to your computer. Apple makes an iSight camera that works seamlessly with OS X.
Figure 48-3: Choosing a new icon displays the new choice in the Picture field. Figure 48-4: The Images dialog allows you to edit a picture in OS X to fit the default size or to choose another from a volume.
cross-references
• •
Changing your own user icon was discussed in Task 13, “Changing Your Password and Icon.” For more information about using pictures, see Part 15, “Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto.”
106
Task
49
Part 5
Setting and Changing a User’s Permissions
U notes
• •
• • • •
•
You must be logged in to the OS X system as an administrator to set limits on the accounts of others. The user shown in Figure 49-3 has the standard capabilities: being able to remove items from the Dock, to open all System Preferences, to change the user’s own password, and to burn CDs or DVDs. Unchecking the checkbox next to a folder or applica tion in the listbox means that the user cannot launch or run the application, or any applications in the folder. Removing items from the Dock only affects the Dock as it appears with this user’s account.
sers can be set to have different kinds of permissions, and these can be quite narrowly defined. For example, you could create a user who can only log in and use the Mail program to check email or create a child’s account that is limited to running only applications in a specific folder. This task shows how to limit a user’s settings. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts
pane, as shown in Figure 49-1.
3. Click a user’s account icon. 4. Click the Limitations tab to display the Limitations pane shown in
Figure 49-1.
5. To give the user the Simple Finder view of OS X, click Simple Finder
in the segmented control.
6. To remove any of the standard capabilities of the user, click the
“Some Limits” control and uncheck any or all of the four checkboxes
in the “This user can” section of the Limitations pane.
7. To limit the applications that a user can run, click the “The user can
use only these applications” checkbox. The list then becomes selec table, as shown in Figure 49-2.
The default setting is for all checkboxes under “The user can” to be selected. In other words, by default, the normal users can perform all of these capabilities. The Use Simple Finder checkbox enables a generic version of the Finder. This version is suitable for com puter novices with limited knowledge of the system, even kids whose parents want control over their experience. While the Accounts Limitations sets limitations on Applications and System Preferences that can be uti lized or changed by the user, No Limits does not give a user control over everything. There are still file permissions and groups into which a standard user falls.
Figure 49-1: The Limitations pane for an account.
Managing Users
107
Task
49
tips
• •
You cannot limit an administrator’s capabilities. The “Change password” option only takes effect if the “Open all System Preferences” checkbox has been selected.
Figure 49-2: The Limitations pane enables you to limit the applications that a user may run.
8. Open the Applications list in the listbox by clicking the triangle to the left of Applications. A list of the applications in the Applications folder appears. 9. Click the Locate button to display the Open file browser dialog, shown in Figure 49-3.
cross-references
•
Figure 49-3: The Open file browser dialog lets you choose applications that the user
may not run. 10. Click the Cancel button to close the Open file browser dialog in Figure 49-3, then click the Cancel or OK button on the Capabilities sheet to close the sheet.
•
For more on using CDs, see Task 24, “Setting CD and DVD Preferences.” Task 45, “Viewing and Setting Your Account Information,” should be reviewed before setting limitations.
108
Task
50
Part 5
Deleting a User’s Account
O
ver a period of time, you may find it necessary to continually provide access to your OS X system to more and more users. However, you may discover that not all these users require access any longer because of changing conditions. Just as new user accounts are useful, sometimes a user account is no longer needed and must be deleted. This task discusses how to delete user accounts.
notes
• • •
You cannot delete the account you used to log into the OS X system. Deleting an account actu ally converts the user’s Home folder to a disk image file. This file is stored in the Deleted Users folder.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts
pane, as shown in Figure 50-1.
Disk image files use the extension .img or .dmg.
Figure 50-1: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the chosen user’s name and icon. 4. Click the Delete User button (-) at the bottom of the user column. A warning dialog appears, as shown in Figure 50-2.
caution
•
The deleted user account contains many private things such as the users email and possibly iChat transcripts. It would be a good idea to have a com pany policy in place on how this information is to be protected.
Figure 50-2: A warning dialog prompts you to confirm the account deletion.
Managing Users
109
5. Click the OK button to delete the account.
Task
6. Close the System Preferences window.
50
7. Open the hard disk window, and then open the Users folder. 8. Click the Deleted Users folder. Press Ô-I for the Get Info window, and then click the triangle in the Get Info window next to Ownership and Permissions to display the screen shown in Figure 50-3. Figure 50-3: The Deleted Users folder is readable only by
administrators.
tips
• • •
9. Double-click the Deleted Users folder to open the folder and display the window shown in Figure 50-4.
•
You must be logged in to the OS X system as an Administrator account to delete another user’s account. The warning dialog in Figure 50-2 has Cancel as the default response to reduce the risk of acciden tally deleting an account. The warning dialog in Figure 50-2 also has a Delete Immediately button that will allow you to delete the user’s Home folder immediately and not have it lingering on the hard drive to take up space and become a privacy issue. To reinstate a deleted account, create a new account and then copy the contents from the expanded disk image file into the cor responding folders of the new Home folder.
cross-references
•
Figure 50-4: Home folders of deleted users are stored in the
Deleted Users folder as a disk image.
10. To recover a file from a deleted user’s Home folder, double-click the deleted user’s stored data. The compressed disk image of the deleted user’s Home folder expands and is mounted as a volume on the OS X desktop.
•
You may want to create a new account to walk through the steps in this task. You can create a new user by following the steps in Task 46, “Adding a User Account.” If you don’t want the deleted user accounts taking up room on your hard drive, you could burn the deleted users’ images to a disk. See Task 43, “Transferring files by a Physical Means.”
110
Task
51
Part 5
Setting Automatic Login
O
S X provides the capability to set up the system to allow specific users to log in automatically. If you have an OS X system you use often, you may want to set up the system to automatically log you in every time the machine restarts. This task explains how to set a user’s account to automatically log in.
note
•
You may not want to set automatic login for your account if the OS X system is somewhere others can access it without your knowl edge. If so, they could sim ply turn the system off, turn it back on, and be automati cally logged in as you.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts
pane, as shown in Figure 51-1.
Figure 51-1: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the Login Options at the bottom of the column of user names. 4. Click the “Automatically log in as” checkbox on the Login Options pane, and then choose a user from the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 51-2.
cautions
• •
You may not want to set up automatic login if you have children around your com puter and would like to control what they have access to on the computer. If automatic login has been set up for one user, no other user will be able to log into another account. Each time the system restarts, it will automati cally log in as the one spe cific user.
Figure 51-2: A pop-up menu allows you to choose which user will automatically log in.
Managing Users 5. A dialog appears asking for the user’s password, as shown in Figure 51-3. Enter the user’s password to set the account to automatically log in.
111
Task
51
tips
•
• Figure 51-3: You must know the password of the user to set an automatic login.
6. Click the OK button to confirm your settings, and the dialog vanishes. The checkbox on the Log In area of the Accounts pane is checked, and the window now displays the user’s account name, as shown in Figure 51-4.
• •
The password must be that user’s password. If you’re logged in as another account, you’ll need to know the password for the user account you’re setting to automatically log in. To log in as a user who has not automatically been logged in, first log out of the system. This is the only means of displaying the login window. If you need to log in as another user who is not automatically logged in, you can do so with Fast User Switching. By default, when you set up your computer with OS X 10.3, it will automatically log into the account you used when setting it up.
cross-references
•
Figure 51-4: The Accounts pane shows the user’s name next to the checkbox.
7. To disable automatic login, uncheck the checkbox next to “Automatically log in as.”
•
You may want to create a new account to walk through the steps in this task. You can create a new user by following the steps in Task 46, “Adding a User Account.” You can log in to a user account without logging out of the account you are using. To learn more about Fast User Switching, see Task 52, “Switching Users Quickly.”
112
Task
52
notes
• • •
•
Fast User Switching is enabled on all accounts. However, it is worthless if users do not know the passwords. The name of the current user is always displayed in the upper-right corner when Fast User Switching is turned on. Only one logged-in user can use iSync or the Palm Hotsync applications. If you need to sync your machine with your Palm, you will want to disable Fast User Switching.
Part 5
Switching Users Quickly
H
aving the flexibility of multiple users is one of the strongest features of the Macintosh and Unix marriage we call OS X. While most of the time you just want to be yourself, there are times when you may want to be two different people. You may have processes you can’t shut down, but would like to check your mail. Even if you don’t need to be two different people, many times two different people may want to be logged into one computer. Mac OS X has made this possible with a new feature in the Aqua Interface entitled Fast User Switching. 1. Click the System Preferences in the Dock to open the Systems
Preferences pane.
2. Click the Accounts icon in the System row of the System Preferences
pane to open the Accounts pane.
3. Click the Login Options at the bottom of the Accounts column. 4. Place a check in the box next to “Enable fast user switching,” as
shown in Figure 52-1. Be sure the lock at the bottom left of the win dow is open (unlocked), and then enter your administrative password.
Only one user can have access to a camera at a time. If two different users are logged in and one is using the camera, and the system switches to the other user account, the second user account will not be able to access the camera.
Figure 52-1: You can enable Fast User Switching in the Login Options.
cautions
• •
Classic Mode can only run on one account at a time. If you are going to use Classic on a regular basis, you may want to disable Fast User Switching. iTunes will stop importing songs if you switch users in the middle of the action.
5. Press Ô-Q to close the Systems Preferences, including the Accounts pane. 6. Look at the upper-left corner of the menu bar, and you will see the long name of the account on which you are logged in. 7. Click your long name in the menu bar, and you will see the Fast User Switching menu, as shown in Figure 52-2.
Managing Users
113 Figure 52-2: Each user who has an account on your computer is shown in the Fast User Switching menu.
8. Click any user but the current user and log in on the screen, as shown in Figure 52-3.
Task
52
tip
•
Switch users if you are in the middle of an application and someone else in the office or household needs to use your computer ASAP.
Figure 52-3: You must log in when switching users.
9. There are now two users logged into your computer. Click the Fast User Switching menu, and you will see checkmarks beside each of them. 10. Click the Apple menu and log out. You will see a new login screen with the first user’s name preceded by a check, indicating that he or she is currently logged in.
cross-references
•
•
You may want to create a new account to walk through the steps in this task. You can create a new user by following the steps in Task 46, “Adding a User Account.” When you are finished with this task you may want to delete the additional account by following Task 50, “Deleting a User’s Account.”
114
Task
53
notes
• • • •
Logging out quits all the applications you are running.
Part 5
Setting Login Options for Users
W
hen you have a system that incorporates more than one user, the standard login screen appears whenever you start the system. For OS X systems that have a user account set to automatic login, the login screen will not appear often unless you intentionally log out. An administrator can set certain controls that provide different levels of security. This task shows how to set the options for the login screen. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window shown in Figure 53-1.
You can log in as a differ ent user without logging out of your current account by using the Fast User Switching option on the Log In Options pane. While the password hint may pop up after three unsuccessful tries, the sys tem allows a user to try an infinite number of times to enter a password. Each time a wrong pass word is entered, the dialog shakes from side to side, simulating the shaking of a head to indicate “no.”
Figure 53-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the System row, click the Accounts icon to display the Accounts pane, as shown in Figure 53-2.
Figure 53-2: The Accounts pane of the System Preferences window.
Managing Users 3. Click the Login Options at the bottom of the Users column of the Accounts pane to display the window shown in Figure 53-3.
115
Task
53
tips
•
• Figure 53-3: The Login Optons of the Accounts pane.
•
4. To see what the Login screen looks like with the settings shown in Figure 53-3, log out by choosing Apple ➪ Log Out from the menu bar. A dialog, shown in Figure 53-4, appears.
If the OS X system has an account set to automati cally log in, someone who doesn’t have an account can log in as that user sim ply by restarting the OS X system. Before logging out, be sure that you know your pass word so that you can log back in. If a user selects the wrong account at login, clicking the Go Back button on the password screen returns the user to the accounts list.
Figure 53-4: A dialog prompts you to confirm that you want to log out.
5. Click Log Out to log out. The login screen appears. 6. Click your user name, then enter your password in the Password field that appears. 7. Return to the Login Items of the Accounts pane by repeating Steps 1 to 3. To change the appearance of the login screen to just a pair of fields for name and password, click the radio button at the top of the Login Options pane next to “Name and password.” 8. To hide the Restart and Shut Down buttons normally present on the login screen, click the appropriate checkbox. 9. If you want to freeze these settings, click the Lock icon in the bottom left of the pane.
cross-references
• •
For information on setting an account to automati cally log in, see Task 51, “Setting Automatic Login.” You can log into a user account without logging out of the account you are using. To learn more about Fast User Switching, see Task 52, “Switching Users Quickly.”
116
Task
54
Part 5
Enabling the System Administrator Account
W notes
• • • •
You need to authenticate yourself even if you are already logged into the OS X system with an Administrator account. If the root user account has been enabled previously, you must enter the old root password before you can change the password.
hen OS X is first installed on a system, the installation process prompts you to create an account. That account is an administrator account. Using that account, you can install applications, add and remove users, set and alter system settings, and so on. However, there is a single account called “root” that readers with a Unix background will be familiar with. The root user can do anything at all. By default, OS X has the root account disabled. This task explains how to enable use of the root account. 1. Open the Application ➪ Utilities folder, and double-click the Netinfo
Manager icon. The Netinfo Manager application appears, as shown in
Figure 54-1.
If you are logged into the system as an administrator, it will have your short name listed in the authentication dialog. The root account may be known to Unix users as a superuser (su) account.
Figure 54-1: The Netinfo Manager application.
cautions
•
• •
Be certain to choose a well-designed password for the root account. Don’t use your name, the names of any family members or pets, or any word you might find in a dictionary. Enabling the root account should only be done if you need it. Most OS X users will never need root access to their systems. The root account holder can move, delete, and rename any file in the sys tem. Granting root user access should be done with caution.
2. From the menu bar, choose the command Security ➪ Authenticate. A dialog appears prompting you to enter the short name and password of an administrator account, as shown in Figure 54-2.
Figure 54-2: You must authenticate yourself as an administrator to use the Netinfo Manager application.
Managing Users
117
3. Enter the short name of an administrator account and that account’s password.
Task
4. Click the OK button.
54
5. From the menu bar, choose the command Security ➪ Enable Root User. An Alert dialog appears, as shown in Figure 54-3.
tips
•
Figure 54-3: The root account on OS X is disabled and set with a blank password by
default. 6. Click the OK button. A new Set Root Password dialog appears, as shown in Figure 54-4.
•
Figure 54-4: The Set Root Password dialog.
If the root user account has not been enabled before on this system, the alert box reading “The root pass word is currently blank. Please set a non-trivial root password for this machine” appears. To disable the root account, open Netinfo Manager, authenticate yourself, and choose Security ➪ Disable Root User from the menu bar. It may be a good idea to only enable the root user account when you need to use it and to disable it as soon as you are done with it.
7. Enter a password in the “Enter new root password” field. 8. Reenter the password in the “Retype new root password” field. 9. Click the OK button. An Alert dialog appears reading “You must re-authenticate to make additional changes.” 10. Quit the Netinfo Manager by pressing Ô-Q.
cross-reference
•
The root account becomes very important and very powerful when you are using the terminal. For more information, see Part 17: “Terminal Tricks.”
Part 6: Word Processing with TextEdit Task 55:
Starting and Stopping TextEdit
Task 56:
Saving a Document in TextEdit
Task 57:
Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit
Task 58:
Opening Documents and Saving Documents to New Locations
Task 59:
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text
Task 60:
Setting Font Appearance
Task 61:
Adding Special Characters
Task 62:
Making a Template
Task 63:
Printing Documents
Task 64:
Using Recent Documents and Applications
120
Task
55
Part 6
Starting and Stopping TextEdit
T
he TextEdit application is a simple (but powerful) word processor built into the Mac OS X system. You will find this application a useful tool to compose documents and to read documents such as README files that often accompany software. This task discusses how to start and stop TextEdit.
notes
• •
•
If you made no changes to the blank document before quitting, TextEdit will quit silently.
1. Double-click the hard disk icon. The Finder window shows the top
level of the system.
2. Click the Applications icon to open the Applications folder, as shown
in Figure 55-1, and locate the icon for the TextEdit application.
In Figure 55-2, you can see that a document window has some of the features of a folder/volume window (for example, the Close, Minimize, and Resize but tons in the upper left of the title bar). You can also quit TextEdit from the keyboard with the keyboard shortcut Ô-Q.
Figure 55-1: The TextEdit icon in the Applications folder.
3. Double-click the TextEdit application icon. The TextEdit icon appears in the Dock and a new blank TextEdit document window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 55-2. 4. From the Application menu on the menu bar, choose TextEdit ➪ Quit TextEdit, as shown in Figure 55-3. 5. If you made any change at all to the blank document window in Figure 55-2, a dialog appears, as shown in Figure 55-4. This dialog asks if you want to save your changes before closing the document window. To save your changes, click Save and specify a location in which to save your file before the program quits. 6. To close TextEdit without saving your changes, click the Don’t Save button.
Word Processing with TextEdit
121
Task
55
tips
• •
Figure 55-2: TextEdit opens a blank window on the startup of the application.
•
You can also start TextEdit by clicking the icon once to select it, then pressing Ô-O. The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right in the menu bar. Quitting an application closes all windows for that application.
Figure 55-3: One way to quit TextEdit is from the menu bar.
cross-reference
•
Figure 55-4: TextEdit asks if you want to save any unsaved changes to a document.
You can also open TextEdit by Ctrl-clicking the TextEdit icon in the Applications folder and choosing Open from the contextual menu that pops up. Using contex tual menus is discussed in Task 6, “Viewing a Contextual Menu.”
122
Task
56
Part 6
Saving a Document in TextEdit
A
fter you use TextEdit, you may want to save your document. This allows you to come back to the document at a later time or use the document in another application (such as another word processor, or even an email application). This task shows how to save a file in TextEdit.
notes
•
•
• •
By default, almost all appli cations will save a docu ment or file in a folder in your Documents folder. For more information on your Home folder, see Task 33, “”Using the Documents Folder and Customized Navigation.” TextEdit can save docu ments in two different for mats: plain text and rich text. Plain text documents contain no formatting (no font attributes and no other formatting, such as bold or colored text). Rich Text includes fonts, styles, col ors, and paragraph format ting (including tabs). Rich text format is denoted with an .RTF file extension, while plain text files have a .TXT extension. Both file formats can be opened in most other word-processing programs, such as Microsoft Word or AppleWorks.
1. Double-click the hard disk icon. The Finder window shows the top
level of the system.
2. Click the Applications folder to open it, as shown in Figure 56-1, and
locate the icon for the TextEdit application.
Figure 56-1: The TextEdit icon in the Applications folder.
3. Double-click the TextEdit application icon. The TextEdit icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank TextEdit document window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 56-2.
With its default settings, TextEdit can automatically reconcile different charac ter sets used by different operating systems. TextEdit replaces the SimpleText application featured in earlier versions of the Mac OS.
Figure 56-2: TextEdit opens a blank window on startup.
Word Processing with TextEdit 4. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Save. A sheet appears, as shown in Figure 56-3.
123
Task
56
tips
• •
Figure 56-3: Save a document with the File Save sheet.
5. Enter the name “practicetext” in the “Save As” field.
Pressing Ô-D on the key board in any Open or Save dialog in OS X sets the desktop as the selected location. If you already saved a file but now want to save it in a different file format or under a different filename, choose File ➪ Save As instead of File ➪ Save. TextEdit will prompt you to enter a new filename, format, and location.
6. Click the up arrow on the right of the Where drop-down list to show the file browser. 7. Click the up arrow to the right of the Where drop-down list to close the file browser. 8. Click the Where drop-down list to show the drop-down list. 9. Choose Desktop from the drop-down list. 10. Click the Save button. The save sheet disappears and the saved “practicetext” TextEdit document icon appears on the desktop.
cross-reference
•
Creating aliases is dis cussed in Task 9, “Creating Aliases and Utilizing the Sidebar.”
124
Task
57
Part 6
Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit
E
ntering text, selecting it, and editing it are skills you will find useful for more than word processors such as TextEdit or Microsoft Word. You use these skills when working with text in a text field in a Web browser or data in a database. This task discusses how to enter, select, and edit text in TextEdit.
notes
•
• •
The blinking vertical bar in the TextEdit Untitled docu ment window is called the insertion point. An insertion point is where text appears when you type on the key board. The insertion point moves as you type and delete.
1. Start TextEdit. A new blank untitled document appears, as shown in
Figure 57-1.
Clicking once on a line of text places the insertion point where you click. Double-clicking selects the nearest word. Triple-clicking selects the entire line of text. The four icons to the left of the point size indicate the type of paragraph align ment: left, centered, justi fied, or right.
Figure 57-1: TextEdit opens a blank window on startup.
2. Enter the following text (pressing the Return key at the end of each phrase to start each line on a new line): My name is I like I live in My address is My telephone number is The TextEdit window should now look like the window in Figure 57-2. The blinking cursor should be on the left edge of the TextEdit window, just below the “M” in “My telephone number is.” 3. Find the arrow keys on your keyboard and press the up arrow three times. The blinking insertion point should be to the left of the “I” in “I live in.” 4. Drag the cursor over the words “I like.” Stop the highlighting over the words themselves. Don’t drag the highlight to select the entire line out to the right margin. 5. To insert text in the middle of a line, click the cursor to set the insertion point. Click just to the left of “address” and type home (remember to add the space between home and address). Your text window should resemble the window shown in Figure 57-3.
Word Processing with TextEdit
125
6. Double-click the word “home.” The word “home” is highlighted.
Task
57
tips
• •
Figure 57-2: Typed text appears in the TextEdit window.
•
• Figure 57-3: Text changes as you edit it in the TextEdit window.
7. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the selected word. 8. From the menu bar, choose Edit ➪ Undo Typing (as shown in Figure 57-4) to undo your last edit (in this case, to replace the deleted word).
You can also move the insertion point by clicking once with the cursor posi tioned where you want the insertion point to go. You can also select text by clicking to the left of the text you want, pressing and holding the Shift key on the keyboard, and clicking on the right of the text you want to select. You can also undo typing with the keyboard combina tion Ô-Z. Many applications can undo your last action (or even the last several actions) if you decide that you’ve just made an error. Most OS X applications place an Undo command (if the application has one) in the Edit menu. To use spell-checking in TextEdit, select Edit ➪ Spelling ➪ Spelling. Or, you can use the shortcut Ô-Shift-;. To check the spelling of an individual word, you can highlight the word and Ctrl-click it. The resulting contextual menu provides spelling suggestions.
Figure 57-4: Using the Edit menu to undo your changes.
cross-reference
•
9. Save the file as “my_name_practice” to the desktop. 10. Press Ô-Q to quit TextEdit. (Save your changes by pressing the Return key on the keyboard, if prompted.)
Task 56, “Saving a Document in TextEdit” dis cusses how to save a file to the desktop.
126
Task
58
Part 6
Opening Documents and Saving Documents to New Locations
O notes
•
•
You cannot open standard Word documents (with the .doc extension) in TextEdit. Documents created in word-processing programs such as Microsoft Word must be saved in Rich Text Format (.rtf) to be opened in TextEdit.
nce you create a document, you will most likely want to save it. This allows you to come back to the document or even use it in another application. Often you need to open an existing document, either to read it or to edit it. This task shows how to open a document and then to save it to another location. 1. Follow Steps 1 to 8 in Task 57, “Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit” and choose File ➪ Save. Save the document as “task58” to the desktop. The document appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 58-1.
The Rich Text Format (RTF) file format is a universal file format recognized by most word processors.
Figure 58-1: Document icons appear where you save them.
2. Quit TextEdit by pressing Ô-Q. 3. Double-click the “task58” document icon to start TextEdit and open the document. The document appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 58-2. Quit TextEdit again by pressing Ô-Q.
Figure 58-2: An open document.
Word Processing with TextEdit 4. Click the document icon once to select it, and choose File ➪ Open from the menu bar, as shown in Figure 58-3. After it starts, quit TextEdit again by pressing Ô-Q.
127
Task
58
tips
•
Figure 58-3: A document may also be opened from the menu bar.
5. Ctrl-click the document icon on the desktop, and choose Open from the contextual menu. 6. Quit TextEdit by pressing Ô-Q. 7. Ctrl-click the document icon on the desktop, and choose Open With from the contextual menu. Choose the TextEdit (default) option. The document opens. 8. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Save As, as shown in Figure 58-4.
• • •
Selecting many icons at once and double-clicking the group opens all of them with their default applica tions, even if the docu ments are of different types and have different default applications. Saving a document to a new location doesn’t affect the original in the old location— it’s still there. You can open an HTML document in TextEdit and have it displayed either as a Web page or with the source code displayed on the document pane. If you have been working on a document in Plain Text mode, you can toggle to Rich Text mode by pressing Ô-Shift-T. Alternately, you can choose Format ➪ Make Rich Text.
Figure 58-4: Use the Save As command to save the file to a new location.
9. Choose Documents from the drop-down list. 10. Click the Save button to save a copy of the file to the new location.
cross-references
• •
To learn how to select mul tiple files, see Task 35, “Creating and Selecting Files and Folders.” Using contextual menus is discussed in Task 6, “Viewing a Contextual Menu.”
128
Task
59
notes
•
•
You can cut with the key board shortcut Ô-X, copy with the keyboard shortcut Ô-C, and paste with the keyboard shortcut Ô-V. These keyboard shortcuts are almost universal among OS X applications that work with content in a file or files.
Part 6
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text
O
ne of the greatest advantages of working with text on a computer (as opposed to doing so on a paper-oriented method such as a typewriter or notepad) is that you can select pieces of text and copy those pieces elsewhere or cut those pieces out. Electronic word processing allows the text to flow into spaces around the pieces and allows the pieces to be inserted into the middle of other text and moves the other text to accommodate the new placement. This task presents how to cut, copy, and paste text. 1. Follow Steps 1 to 8 in Task 57, “Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit,”
and choose File ➪ Save. Save the document as “task59” to the desktop,
as shown in Figure 59-1. The document then appears on the desktop.
When you “cut” text, it is copied to the clipboard so you can paste it some where else. Because the clipboard is used by all applications, you can cut text from TextEdit and paste it into another application, such as Mail.
Figure 59-1: Document icons appear where you save them.
caution
•
Remember that only one “thing” can be on the clip board at a time.
2. Open the document and select the entire second line, as shown in Figure 59-2. 3. From the menu bar, choose Edit ➪ Cut, as shown in Figure 59-3. The second line of text vanishes from the open TextEdit document window. 4. Click the cursor below the bottom line of text, so the blinking insertion point is below the “M” in “My telephone number is.” 5. From the menu bar, choose Edit ➪ Paste. The cut text appears below the last line, where the insertion point was, as shown in Figure 59-4.
Word Processing with TextEdit
129
Task
59
tips
•
Figure 59-2: Selecting the entire line of text. Figure 59-3: Cutting selected text removes the text from the screen, but saves it.
•
• •
The concepts of cut, copy, and paste are common in much of computing and not limited to just text. You can do these actions with many types of content in files, including forms on Web pages and emails. You can undo cutting, copy ing, or pasting with the key board combination Ô-Z. Many applications can undo your last action (or even your last several actions) if you decide that you’ve just made an error. Most OS X applications place an Undo command (if the application has one) in the Edit menu. Quitting an application closes all the windows of that application and prompts you to save changes made to any open files. You can add graphics to your TextEdit documents either by dragging the file icon onto the document, or by pasting the graphic at the insertion point in the document. TextEdit recog nizes the TIFF, PICT, JPG, and GIF graphic file formats.
cross-reference Figure 59-4: Cut text is inserted at the insertion point when you paste it.
6. Select the last line (the line you just pasted). The line is highlighted to show that it is selected. 7. Press Ô-C to copy the line. 8. Click below the bottom line, and press Ô-V to paste the line of text again. 9. Press Ô-Q to quit TextEdit. Save your changes by pressing the Return key on the keyboard, when prompted to do so.
•
Selecting text is discussed in Task 57, “Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit.”
130
Task
60
Part 6
Setting Font Appearance
A
fter you write a letter, article, or other item in a text editor or word processor, you may want to change the appearance of parts of the text. One of the easiest ways to dress up the appearance of your document is through the manipulation of fonts. This task shows how to change the appearance of text in TextEdit.
notes
•
• • •
• •
Many format and text options in TextEdit, as well as other text editors and word processors, have key board shortcuts. If you find yourself using the menus repetitively, look at the menus to see if a keyboard shortcut is defined for what you’re doing.
1. Follow Steps 1 to 8 in Task 57, “Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit,”
and choose File ➪ Save. Save the document as “task60” to the desktop.
The document appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 60-1.
Fonts are grouped into fam ilies, and font families are grouped into collections. The keyboard shortcut for the Font window is Ô-T. The default startup font for TextEdit is 12-point Helvetica. You can change the default font for TextEdit in TextEdit Preferences. You can actually specify two different fonts to be used for plain text and rich text documents. Font appearances are not saved in Plain Text mode. Only Rich Text mode retains font changes. The appearance and selec tion of fonts depends on which fonts have been installed on your system.
Figure 60-1: Document icons appear where you save them.
2. Open the document and select the entire first line, as shown in Figure 60-2. Figure 60-2: Selecting the entire line of text.
Word Processing with TextEdit
131
3. From the menu bar, choose Format ➪ Font ➪ Bold. The selected line changes to bold style.
Task
4. Press the keyboard shortcut Ô-Shift-+ twice (or choose Format ➪ Font ➪ Bigger). The selected line enlarges to a larger font size each time you press the keyboard shortcut or choose the menu option.
60
5. Select the entire fourth line (the line reading “My home address is”). 6. From the menu bar, choose Format ➪ Font ➪ Italic. The selected line changes its appearance to italicized text.
tips
8. Press Ô-A to select all the text on the page.
• •
9. From the menu bar, choose Format ➪ Text ➪ Center. The page is now centered, and the changes you’ve made should look much like those in the TextEdit window shown in Figure 60-3.
•
7. Press the keyboard shortcut Ô-U to underline the selected text.
Figure 60-3: Text appearance can be highly customized.
The TextEdit keyboard shortcut for bold is Ô-B. Ctrl-click selected text to access the contextual menu, which can also be used to further edit the text. The term “oblique” is often used synonymously with “italic” when referring to a typeface. Similarly, “black” is often used synonymously with bold.
10. Choose Format ➪ Font ➪ Show Fonts to display the Font window, as shown in Figure 60-4. Select a new font to apply to the selected text. From this window, you can also quickly edit other characteristics such as color and size.
cross-references
• •
Figure 60-4: The Font window provides easy access to plenty of text characteristics.
Using contextual menus is discussed in Task 6, “Viewing a Contextual Menu.” To browse installed fonts and font families, refer to Task 32, “Using the Font Book.”
132
Task
61
notes
• •
•
The Character Palette is also accessible from other Mac OS X applications in which you edit text. The blinking vertical bar in the TextEdit Untitled document window is called the insertion point. An insertion point is where text appears when you type on the keyboard.
Part 6
Adding Special Characters
S
ometimes you may want to use special characters that are not part of your standard character set. Mac OS X contains an old standby (Key Caps) familiar to Mac users for displaying special characters on-screen. A new feature introduced with Mac OS X called Character Palette provides similar functionality. These utilities enable you to see characters displayed in selected fonts. This task shows you how to use the Character Palette and the Key Caps applications to view, select, and write special characters. 1. Follow the steps in Task 60, “Setting Font Appearance.” Place the
insertion point at the end of line 5, and enter a space after “is.”
2. Choose Edit ➪ Special Characters to display the Character Palette,
as shown in Figure 61-1.
Add special characters you use frequently to the Favorites list to save time when writing.
Figure 61-1: The Character Palette window.
3. Click the Miscellaneous category on the menu on the left. 4. Click one of the telephone icons in the sixth row displayed on the right, as shown in Figure 61-2.
Figure 61-2: The telephone icon in the Miscellaneous category.
5. Click the Insert button to insert the selected character into the text at the insertion point. 6. Click the Add to Favorites button to add the selected character highlighted in the right pane to the Favorites list for the Character Palette.
Word Processing with TextEdit 7. Click the Favorites button of the Character Palette window to show the Favorites tab, as shown in Figure 61-3.
133
Task
61
tips
•
Figure 61-3: The Favorites tab of the Character Palette window.
8. Click the “by Category” button to return to the Category view in the Character Palette. Click the Punctuation category in the list on the left. 9. Select the first set of quotation marks in the third row in the display on the right. 10. Click the arrow next to “Font Variation” to display those quotation marks in a variety of different fonts, as shown in Figure 61-4. Select the set of quotation marks you like best, and click the Insert button to see them in your document.
Figure 61-4: Font variations of special characters.
• • •
Select from the View menu at the top of the Character Palette to view special characters in non-Roman languages. Click the arrow next to “Character Info” to reveal characters related to the one currently selected in the Character Palette. You can also insert a char acter from the Character Palette by double-clicking it. When you type accented characters (as opposed to inserting them from the Character Palette), you must first type the charac ter for the accent and then type the character to be accented. For example, to type an “e” with an acute accent, you must type Option-e and then the letter “e” again, because the shortcut for an acute accent is Option-e. To type an “a” with an acute accent, type Option-e and then the letter “a.”
cross-reference
•
Placing the insertion point is discussed in Task 57, “Entering and Editing Text in TextEdit.”
134
Task
62
Part 6
Making a Template
W
hen working with documents, you may have a need for a template—a special kind of document that is used as the basis for new documents. Opening a template opens a copy of the template, which can be edited and saved as a new file. This task discusses how to create and use a template.
notes
• •
•
When you close a Get Info window, the video effect traces back toward the document icon, if it is visi ble on the desktop.
1. Follow the steps in Task 60, “Setting Font Appearance,” if you haven’t
already done so. Save the document as “task60” on your desktop. Click
the document icon to select it.
2. Press Ô-I to show the Get Info window for the document, as shown
in Figure 62-1.
A template is a master pat tern or boilerplate that defines the appearance of a document. When a document is based on a template, it adopts the components of the template. If you have a Get Info win dow from a document icon open and you quit the application, the Get Info window stays open because it’s created by the Finder, not by the application.
Figure 62-1: The document’s Get Info window.
3. Click the checkbox next to Stationery Pad. 4. Press Ô-W to close the get Info window. 5. Click the name of the “task60” icon and rename it to “task62template.” 6. Double-click the “task62template” icon. TextEdit starts, makes a copy of the template as an editable document, and opens the copy in a new window, as shown in Figure 62-2. 7. Edit the document as you like. Press Ô-S to save your changes. 8. Press Ô-Q to quit TextEdit and close all windows. 9. Double-click the “task62template” document icon again. TextEdit
starts, makes a new copy of the template, and opens the new copy,
as shown in Figure 62-3.
10. Press Ô-Q to quit TextEdit and close all windows.
Word Processing with TextEdit
135
Task
62
tips
• •
Figure 62-2: A template is copied, and the copy is opened for editing.
Figure 62-3: A template is copied, and a new copy is opened for editing each time the template is opened.
You can define documents for many applications as templates. Using a template can save you from having to retype text or reapply font charac teristics. Similarly, you can save font characteristics in TextEdit as “styles” that can then be reapplied to any document, regardless of whether it’s based on a template. To do so, put the insertion point in the mid dle of the text whose for matting you wish to save and choose File ➪ Font ➪ Styles. Click “Add to Favorites” and specify a name to add the displayed formatting to your list of favorite styles. Then, choose your favorite style from the Styles menu in the TextEdit toolbar to apply the format ting to any selected text.
cross-reference
•
Renaming a file icon is dis cussed in Task 34, “Working with a File.”
136
Task
63
Part 6
Printing Documents
W
orking with text on the OS X system is useful, but sometimes you still need a paper copy of the document. This task shows you how to print a document, and how to create an Adobe Acrobat (PDF) file version of your document.
notes
•
•
•
If you click “Cancel” when previewing a print docu ment, the previewed docu ment closes, but the Preview application is still open. Press Ô-Q to quit the application.
1. Open a file created in another task in this part, or follow the steps in Task 60, “Setting Font Appearance,” and save the document as “task60” to the desktop. 2. Double-click the document icon on the desktop. TextEdit launches and opens the document in a new window. 3. Press Ô-P to show the Print pane for the document, as shown in Figure 63-1.
If your system is set up to use Acrobat Reader as the default application for PDF files, clicking Preview in the Print window causes Acrobat to launch instead of the Preview application. Previewed print documents are stored as PDF (Portable Document Format) files.
Figure 63-1: The Print pane for the document.
4. Click the Preview button (located next to the Help button in the bottom left of the window) to launch Preview and see how the TextEdit document will appear when printed. If you’re ready to print the document as it appears in the Preview window, click the Print button at the bottom of the window, as shown in Figure 63-2. 5. Press Ô-Q to quit Preview. 6. Click the TextEdit icon in the Dock to once again display the TextEdit window, if it isn’t already visible.
Word Processing with TextEdit
137
Task
63
tips
• • •
Figure 63-2: The Preview pane for the document in TextEdit.
7. Press Ô-P to show the Print pane for the document, as shown in Figure 63-1. 8. Click the PDF button and choose Save as PDF. The Save to File dialog appears, as shown in Figure 63-3.
•
Quitting an application closes all windows of that application. Pressing Ô-D on the key board in any Open or Save dialog in OS X sets the desktop as the selected location. PDF files are extremely common because of their portability to almost all computer platforms. For example, if you save a file as PDF, you can email it to a friend using a Windowsbased computer and your friend will be able to see the file almost exactly as you do on your computer. From the Print window, you can also easily fax a TextEdit document. To do so, click the Fax button next to the PDF button at the bottom of the window and follow the directions.
cross-references
•
Figure 63-3: The Save to File dialog.
9. Enter a new filename in the Save As field. 10. Choose a destination with the Where drop-down list. The PDF file is saved to the destination you choose.
•
Saving a sample TextEdit document is discussed in Task 56, “Saving a Document in TextEdit.” For more information on printing in Mac OS X, see Part 8, “Printing and Faxing.”
138
Task
64
Part 6
Using Recent Documents and Applications
O note
•
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying length, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right.
S X provides a helpful shortcut to get to the most recently used applications and files. By using this shortcut, you can save yourself valuable time that might otherwise be wasted looking all over your hard drive to locate a specific file. This shortcut also provides a handy way to launch commonly used applications. This task shows how to use the Recent Documents and Recent Applications lists. 1. Go through the steps in Task 60, “Setting Font Appearance,” and
save the document as “task60” to the desktop.
2. Press Shift-Ô-3 to take a snapshot of the desktop. A PDF file named
Picture 1 appears on the desktop.
3. Double-click the TextEdit document icon. TextEdit launches and
opens the document in a new window.
4. Press Ô-Q to close the TextEdit application and document window. 5. Double-click the Picture 1 icon to open the screen shot with the
Preview application.
6. From the Application menu of the menu bar, choose Preview ➪ Quit to quit the Preview application and the screen shot window. 7. From the menu bar, choose Apple ➪ Recent Items ➪ task60, as
shown in Figure 64-1.
Figure 64-1: The Recent Items menu shows recently used applications and documents.
8. From the menu bar, choose Apple ➪ Recent Items ➪ Preview. The application launches. 9. To clear the Recent Items menu, from the menu bar choose Apple ➪ Recent Items ➪ Clear Menu, as shown in Figure 64-2. The Recent Items list clears both recent applications and documents.
Word Processing with TextEdit
139
Task
64
tips
•
Figure 64-2: You can clear the Recent Items menu.
• •
•
•
If you’re trying to find a file and you know what folder it’s in, open the folder, set the folder to List View, and click the Date Modified col umn header to sort by last date modified. Quitting an application closes all windows of that application. You can specify the number of recent documents and applications to be dis played in the Recent menu. To do so, open System Preferences and click the Appearance icon. Then, edit the number of recent docu ments and applications using the appropriate dropdown lists. If you have recently worked on a document but cannot remember where you stored it, you can use the Recent Items list to find the file. Once it’s opened, when you select Save As, you will be shown the location of the original document. An open application is dis played in the Dock. If you want that application to always appear in the Dock, even when the application is not open, first click and hold the mouse button with the cursor on the Dock icon to see a menu. Next choose “Keep in Dock.”
cross-reference
•
List View is discussed in Task 7, “Browsing the System.”
Part 7: Networking Task 65:
Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection
Task 66:
Configuring an AirPort Network Connection
Task 67:
Configuring a Modem Connection
Task 68:
Working with Network Configurations
Task 69:
Working with Proxy Servers
Task 70:
Creating a Wireless Computer-to-Computer Network
Task 71:
Joining an AirPort Network
Task 72:
Joining a Closed AirPort Network
Task 73:
Browsing the Network
Task 74:
Connecting to a Local Server
Task 75:
Sharing an Internet Connection and Using the Firewall
Task 76:
Creating and Using Network Locations
Task 77:
Using Target Disk Mode
142
Task
65
Part 7
Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection
P notes
• •
•
Transferring files by floppy disk was once called “sneakernet” as a pun on the Ethernet network design that is still in use today. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is a suite of network protocols that facilitates communication between dissimilar comput ers across a network. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) dynami cally assigns IP addresses to computers on a network, sometimes selecting from a block of addresses assigned by the network administrator. BootP (which stands for Bootstrap Protocol) is used by the host computer to obtain an IP address.
revious parts of this book have covered configuring OS X in many ways and performing tasks on the OS X system. One of the great strengths of computers is the ability to network them: to connect one computer to another (or to many computers), share files, and launch and run applications, as well as copy files to and from other systems. This task explains how to configure your OS X system to connect to an Ethernet network. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the
Network pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the Show pop-up menu, and choose Built-In Ethernet. The
tabs of the Built-In Ethernet settings appear, as shown in Figure 65-1.
PPPoE is Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, a type of networking protocol.
Figure 65-1: The TCP/IP pane of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
4. Click the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu to see your options of “Manually,” “Using DHCP with manual IP address,” “Using DHCP,” and “Using BootP.” 5. Click the PPPoE tab to display the window shown in Figure 65-2.
caution
•
If your OS X system is already on a network, you should go through this task and simply view the panes and tabs. Don’t edit set tings unless you know what you’re doing.
6. To turn on PPPoE, click the checkbox next to Connect using PPPoE. 7. Click the AppleTalk tab to display the window shown in Figure 65-3.
Networking
143
Task
65
tips
•
Figure 65-2: The PPPoE pane of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
•
Figure 65-3: The AppleTalk tab of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
•
8. To turn on AppleTalk, click the checkbox next to Make AppleTalk
Active.
9. If you have made a change you wish to save, click the Apply Now
button.
10. Quitting System Preferences without clicking the Apply Now button makes a dialog appear. To quit System Preferences and not change anything, click the Don’t Apply button.
Some networks (wireless or otherwise) are secured against casual access. One way to secure a network is to have the network hub store the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the Ethernet cards that are permitted access. MAC addresses look like six pairs of letters and num bers, each pair separated by a colon (such as 00:31:43:04:ba:7b). If you are ever asked for your system’s MAC address, this MAC has nothing to do with Macintosh and everything to do with networking. To find your Ethernet card’s MAC address, use the Show dropdown list to show the BuiltIn Ethernet settings, and look on the TCP/IP tab of the Network pane of System Preferences. The Ethernet Address at the bottom left of Figure 65-1 is the MAC address of the Ethernet card. If you are unsure about how to set up your Network connection, click on the Assist Me button in the lower-right corner of the Network Status pane, and The Network Set-up Assistant will walk you through the process.
cross-reference
•
Configuring proxy servers is discussed in Task 69, “Working with Proxy Servers.”
144
Task
66
Part 7
Configuring an AirPort Network Connection
A notes
• • •
•
A subnet mask is a group of selected bits that identi fies a subnetwork. The Domain Naming System (DNS) provides information about IP addresses and domain names for all com puters on a network.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
There are three types of 802.11 wireless networks: 802.11a, b, and g. The original AirPort and AirPort cards were 802.11b and have a transfer rate of 11 Mbps. The AirPort Extreme and AirPort Extreme cards are 802.11g and transfer data at 54 Mbps.
3. Click the Show pop-up menu and choose AirPort. Click the TCP/IP
tab. The tabs of the AirPort settings appear, as shown in Figure 66-1.
•
2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the
Network pane of the System Preferences window.
The 802.11g networks are backward-compatible and work with 802.11b networks.
cautions
•
pple’s support of the 802.11 wireless Ethernet standard means that networking is easier than ever before. Previously, you had to run cables everywhere you wanted a computer to be in a building, but now you can connect computers together without the cables. With the installation of an AirPort wireless networking card, you can now create a wireless network. This task shows how to configure an OS X system to use an 802.11 wireless Ethernet network.
A 2.4-GHz cordless tele phone uses the same range of the radio fre quency spectrum as the 802.11 wireless Ethernet network. If you have prob lems with losing wireless connections, you may want to see if there’s a 2.4-GHz cordless phone in the area. If your OS X system is already on a network, you should go through this task and simply view panes and tabs. Don’t edit settings unless you know what you’re doing.
Figure 66-1: The AirPort pane of the Network window in Systems Preferences.
4. Click the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu to see your options of “Manually,” “Using DHCP with manual IP address,” “Using DHCP,” and “Using BootP.” 5. Click the AppleTalk tab to display the window shown in Figure 66-2. 6. To turn on AppleTalk, click the checkbox next to Make AppleTalk Active. 7. Click the AirPort tab to show Figure 66-3.
Networking
145
Task
66
tips
•
Figure 66-2: The AppleTalk tab of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
•
Some networks (wireless or otherwise) are secured against casual access. One way to secure a network is for the network hub to store the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the Ethernet and AirPort cards that are permitted access. MAC addresses look like six pairs of letters and num bers, each pair separated by a colon (such as 00:31:43:04:ba:7b). If you are ever asked for your system’s MAC address, this MAC has nothing to do with Macintosh and every thing to do with networking. To find your AirPort card’s MAC address, use the Show drop-down list to show the AirPort settings, and look on the TCP/IP tab of the Network pane of System Preferences.
Figure 66-3: The AirPort pane of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
8. Put a check in the boxes “Show AirPort status in menu bar” and
“Allow this computer to create networks.”
9. If you have made a change you wish to save, click the Apply Now
button.
10. Quitting System Preferences without clicking the Apply Now button makes a dialog. To quit System Preferences and not change anything, click the Don’t Apply button.
cross-references
• •
Configuring proxy servers is discussed in Task 69, “Working with Proxy Servers.” When there is no AirPort connection available, you may have to use an Ethernet connection. Setting up an Ethernet connection is discussed in Task 65, “Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection.”
146
Task
67
Part 7
Configuring a Modem Connection
W
hile broadband Ethernet connections are becoming increasingly common, until recently, the predominant way of connecting to the Internet was to use a modem and a telephone line to dial up to an Internet service provider (ISP). This task shows how to configure an OS X system to use its internal modem, if one is present.
notes
• •
Almost all OS X systems include an internal modem as standard equipment. The account name and password fields under the PPP (Point-to-Point) tab are filled in with information provided by your ISP.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the
Network pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the Show pop-up menu and choose Internal Modem. Click the
TCP/IP tab. The tabs of the Internal Modem settings pane appear,
as shown in Figure 67-1.
Figure 67-1: The TCP/IP pane of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
4. Click the Configure IPv4 pop-up menu to see your options of
“Manually,” “Using PPP,” and “AOL Dialup.”
5. Click the PPP tab to display the window shown in Figure 67-2. Enter
the appropriate information in the fields as shown by the examples
provided by your ISP.
caution
•
If your OS X system is already on a network, you should go through this task and simply view panes and tabs. Don’t edit settings unless you know what you’re doing.
6. Click the PPP Options button to display the window shown in
Figure 67-3.
7. Click the OK button to close the PPP Options sheet. 8. Click the Modem tab to show Figure 67-4. 9. Click the appropriate radio buttons to dial using a tone dial or pulse
dial, and to turn the sound on and off.
10. Click the Apply Now button to save your changes, if you’ve made any. If you don’t want to save your changes, quit System Preferences and click the Don’t Apply button in the dialog that appears.
Networking
147
Task
67
tips
•
Figure 67-2: The PPP pane of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
• •
Figure 67-3: The PPP dialog of the Modem configurations.
•
If you are going to be trav eling, and you have a note book computer, it can help to configure your notebook’s modem dial-up before you go. Check with your Internet service provider (ISP) to see if you have a dial-up access point within local calling distance of where you’ll be. At a minimum, have your ISP’s customer service telephone number with you so you can ask them when you’re there. If you must first dial a num ber to get an outside line, add that number (usually 9 or 8) to the beginning of the Telephone Number field, followed by a comma. If you select the PPP option, “Connect automatically when needed,” your Mac will dial the Internet automati cally. Selecting this option means you do not have to manually connect to the Internet each time you want to check email or open a Web browser. If your ISP is America Online, you have a separate setup program. You will not use settings in System Preferences.
cross-references
• •
Figure 67-4: The Modem pane of the Modem configuration.
Configuring proxy servers is discussed in Task 69, “Working with Proxy Servers.” For information about TCP/IP, see Task 65, “Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection.”
148
Task
68
Part 7
Working with Network Configurations
E
nsuring that your network is properly configured saves you from irritating problems that result in inevitable miscommunication. OS X makes it relatively easy to configure your network. This task shows you how to set up the proper port configurations for your network.
notes
• •
•
If you check network port configurations in the listbox, they appear in the Show drop-down list. Having multiple network configurations also allows your Mac OS X system to use multihoming. This means the system can autodetect which Internet con nections are available and then automatically select the fastest connection. If you are curious as to why you may have more than one of any connection, consider a laptop you use on an Ethernet connection at home and at work. The connection you use at home automatically finds an IP address via DHCP, but the one you use at work may require a static IP address.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System Preferences window. 2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the Network pane of the System Preferences window. 3. Click the Show pop-up menu, and choose Network Port
Configurations. The Network Port Configurations settings pane
appears.
4. Click the Built-In Ethernet line to highlight it. 5. Click the New button. A dialog displays, as shown in Figure 68-1. 6. Enter a new name in the Name field. For this example, leave the
name “Untitled.”
7. From the Port pop-up menu, choose the Built-in Ethernet port. 8. Click the OK button. The sheet vanishes and the new configuration appears in the list box, as shown in Figure 68-2.
Figure 68-1: The New configuration dialog.
Networking
149
Task
68
tips
•
Figure 68-2: New configurations appear in the list box.
9. To make the new Untitled configuration the first one that the OSX system tries to use to connect to the network, click it and drag it to the top of the list. 10. Click the Delete button to delete the Untitled configuration. A dialog shown in Figure 68-3 warns you this can’t be undone. Click the Delete button.
• • •
You can uncheck network configurations that you don’t use. Remember that you’ve unchecked the con figuration before trying to use it, and then wondering why it failed. You can also rename an existing connection. Simply double-click the connection, and enter a new name. If you have a computer with a connection that is always on (such as a cable modem or DSL), you may want to turn off the internal modem connection. If you are using a laptop and travel frequently for business, create a connec tion called No Connection. In the Active Ports selection area, deselect all network connections. When you are on an airplane, you can select this configuration to prevent the system from wasting your time looking for a connection that does not exist.
cross-reference
•
Figure 68-3: Deleting a configuration.
You will need a network connection, like that estab lished in Task 65, “Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection.”
150
Task
69
Part 7
Working with Proxy Servers
A
proxy server is a server that acts on behalf of another server. Some networks have proxy servers as part of their network. These proxy servers are local servers for given services. This task will show you how to set proxy servers for these services.
notes
• • • • • •
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 69-1.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is part of the TCP/IP suite of protocols and is used primarily to transfer infor mation directly between computers. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is a set of rules dic tating how information is exchanged across the Internet. Streaming refers to the continuous transmission of bits, bytes, or other data. Gopher refers to an Internet service providing access to a database, catalog, news group, or other system. SOCKS is a proxy protocol that provides added secu rity for transmissions across a network. Proxy servers can be used to filter requests such as certain Internet sites that are not appropriate. An example is a University using a proxy server to restrict the employees and students from using a music-download Web site.
Figure 69-1: The System Preferences window.
2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the Network pane of the System Preferences window. 3. Click the Show pop-up menu and choose Built-In Ethernet. The tabs of the Built-In Ethernet settings appear, as shown in Figure 69-2.
caution
•
If your OS X system is already on a network, you should go through this task and simply view the panes and tabs. Don’t edit set tings unless you know what you’re doing.
Figure 69-2: The TCP/IP pane of the Network configurations of the System Preferences
window.
Networking
151
4. Click the Proxies tab to display the window shown Figure 69-3.
Task
69
tips
•
Figure 69-3: The Proxies pane of the Network configurations of the System Preferences
window.
• 5. Click the checkbox to the left of every type of proxy you need. 6. Enter a name for the proxy server. 7. Enter the port if there is a nonstandard port number for the particular kind of Internet traffic.
A proxy server is a local server for a given kind of network traffic (such as that of the World Wide Web) that you instruct your OS X system to use instead of the actual server out on the Internet. If you enter the wrong information here, you will not be able to connect to the Internet for the selected kinds of Internet traffic. Some companies use proxy servers to filter Internet traffic flow to and from the office. In these instances, contact your network administrator before making any proxy server changes.
8. In the “Bypass proxy settings for these Hosts & Domains” box, enter host (server) names and Internet domain names for servers and domains that will not use the previously defined proxy servers. 9. Click the Apply Now button to save your entered information, or Close the window without clicking Apply Now to see a dialog that will allow you to not apply your changes, as shown in Figure 69-4.
cross-reference
•
Figure 69-4: Do not apply your changes if you do not want a proxy server.
You will need a network connection, like the one established in Task 65, “Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection.”
152
Task
70
Part 7
Creating a Wireless Computerto-Computer Network
Y
ou can connect one OS X system with an AirPort wireless Ethernet card to another OS X system that also has an AirPort wireless Ethernet card, without needing a hub and cables, or even an AirPort base station. This task shows how to create a wireless computer-to-computer network. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the
Network pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the Show pop-up menu, and choose AirPort. The tabs of the
AirPort settings appear, as shown in Figure 70-1.
Figure 70-1: The TCP/IP pane of the Network configurations of the System Preferences
window.
cautions
•
•
A 2.4-GHz cordless tele phone uses the same range of the radio fre quency spectrum as the 802.11 wireless Ethernet network. If you have prob lems with losing wireless connections, you may want to see if there’s a 2.4-GHz cordless phone in the area. If you create a network without a password, you could be opening your computer up to other users who are in your proximity and have wireless access.
4. Click the AirPort tab to show Figure 70-2. 5. Click the checkboxes next to “Allow this computer to create networks” and “Show AirPort status in menu bar.” Once the checkboxes are checked, press Ô-Q to quit System Preferences. The System Preferences window closes. 6. Click the AirPort status icon in the menu bar, and choose the Create Network command shown in Figure 70-3. The Computer to Computer window appears, as shown in Figure 70-4. 7. Click the Show Options button in the Computer to Computer window. 8. Edit the name if you want to, and set the channel appropriately.
Networking
153
Task
70
tips
•
Figure 70-2: The AirPort tab of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
•
Figure 70-3: Create a wireless network with the Create Network command.
•
• •
The Network icon is one of the default icons that are always available in the top row of the System Preferences window. The other default icons in the top row of the System Preferences window are Show All, Displays, Sound, and Startup Disk. Although the Computer to Computer window shows there to be 11 channels, because there could be interference from scatter to adjacent frequencies, you really only have 3: channel 1, channel 6, and channel 11. In a work environment, ask the network or system administrators about wire less broadcasting of net work traffic. The company may have policies regarding such use. If you are using a laptop, turning off AirPort from the menu bar will save battery life. To set up the AirPort Base station or an AirPort card, use the AirPort Assistant found in the Utilities folder of the Applications folder.
cross-references Figure 70-4: The Computer to Computer window.
•
9. If you want to have a password for the network, click the Show Options button and fill in the appropriate fields. 10. Click the OK button to create the network.
•
You join a computer to a computer wireless network the same way you join any wireless network, as dis cussed in Task 71, “Joining an AirPort Network.” For information about set ting up AirPort, see Task 66, “Configuring an AirPort Network Connection.”
154
Task
71
Part 7
Joining an AirPort Network
W
ireless Ethernet networks are increasingly common in homes, offices, and even coffee shops and other public spaces. You may find yourself in one of these environments with your Mac OS X laptop and decide that you want to hook into the network. This task shows you how to join an AirPort network.
notes
•
• •
The password types refer to encryption methods provided under Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) standards. The encryption process scrambles data to prevent the unauthorized hacking of passwords.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System Preferences window. 2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the Network pane of the System Preferences window. 3. Click the Show pop-up menu, and choose AirPort. The tabs of the AirPort settings appear, as shown in Figure 71-1.
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an encryption system avail able only on networking cards from Cisco and the Apple AirPort card. By default, your AirPort is set to connect to the strongest signal it can pick up automatically.
Figure 71-1: The TCP/IP tab of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
4. Click the AirPort tab to display the window shown in Figure 71-2. 5. Click the checkbox next to “Show AirPort status in menu bar.” Press Ô-Q to quit System Preferences. The System Preferences window closes. 6. Click the AirPort status icon in the menu bar, and choose the network name “two,” as shown in Figure 71-3.
Networking
155
Task
71
tips
•
Figure 71-2: The AirPort tab of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
•
Figure 71-3: Join a wireless network by selecting the network name.
7. If the network requires a password, the Enter Password dialog, shown in Figure 71-4, appears.
•
Figure 71-4: The Enter Password dialog.
8. Enter the password in the field. 9. Select the type of password from the Wireless Security pop-up menu. 10. Click the OK button to join the selected wireless network.
The Network icon is one of the default icons that are always available in the top row of the System Preferences window. The other default icons in the top row of the System Preferences window are Show All, Displays, Sound, and Startup Disk. Some AirPort networks are secured against casual access. One way to secure a wireless network is to have the base station store the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the cards that are permitted access. MAC addresses look like six pairs of letters and num bers, each pair separated by a colon (such as 00:31:43:04:ba:7b). If you are ever asked for your system’s MAC address, this MAC has nothing to do with Macintosh and everything to do with networking. To find your AirPort card’s MAC address, use the Show dropdown list to show the AirPort settings, and look on the TCP/IP tab of the Network pane of System Preferences. The AirPort ID at the bottom left is the MAC address they are asking for.
cross-references
• •
Configuring an OS X system to use AirPort is discussed in Task 66, “Configuring an AirPort Network Connection.” If you have an AirPort card with no connection, you can make your own network by following the steps out lined in Task 70, “Creating a Wireless Computer-toComputer Network.”
156
Task
72
Part 7
Joining a Closed AirPort Network
A
closed AirPort network is one that does not broadcast its presence: you need the name of the AirPort network (and a password, if one is set) in order to join it. This task shows how to connect to a closed AirPort network.
notes
• •
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System Preferences window.
The AirPort Setup Assistant cannot create a connection to a closed network.
2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to show the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
The password types refer to encryption methods pro vided under Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) standards. The encryption process scrambles data to prevent the unauthorized hacking of passwords.
3. Click the Show pop-up menu, and choose AirPort. The tabs of the AirPort settings appear, as shown in Figure 72-1.
Figure 72-1: The TCP/IP tab of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
4. Click the AirPort tab to display the window shown in Figure 72-2.
Figure 72-2: The AirPort pane of the Network pane of the System Preferences window.
Networking
157
5. Click the checkbox next to “Show AirPort status in menu bar.” Press Ô-Q to quit System Preferences. The System Preferences window closes.
Task
72
6. Click the AirPort status icon in the menu bar, and choose the Other command, as shown in Figure 72-3. The Closed Network dialog appears, as shown in Figure 72-4. Figure 72-3: Join a closed wireless network with the Other
command.
tips
•
• Figure 72-4: The Closed Network dialog.
7. Enter the network name in the Network Name field. 8. Enter the password in the Password field. 9. Select the type of password from the Wireless Security drop-down list. 10. Click the OK button to join the closed wireless network.
•
The Network icon is one of the default icons that are always available in the top row of the System Preferences window. The other default icons in the top row of the System Preferences window are Show All, Displays, Sound, and Startup Disk. Some AirPort networks are secured against casual access. One way to secure the wireless network is to have the base station store the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the cards that are permitted access. MAC addresses look like six pairs of letters and num bers, each pair separated by a colon (such as 00:31:43:04:ba:7b). If you are ever asked for your system’s MAC address, this MAC has nothing to do with Macintosh and everything to do with networking. To find your AirPort card’s MAC address, use the Show dropdown list to show the AirPort settings, and look on the TCP/IP tab of the Network pane of System Preferences. The AirPort ID at the bottom left is the MAC address they are asking for.
cross-references
• •
Configuring an OS X system to use AirPort is discussed in Task 66, “Configuring an AirPort Network Connection.” Connecting to an open AirPort network is dis cussed in Task 71, “Joining an AirPort Network.”
158
Task
73
Part 7
Browsing the Network
B
rowsing the network is an easy way to see what resources you have available to you that are not on your computer, but are connected to it via the network. You will see printers, servers, and personal file shares in the Browse Network windows, but they will all be referred to as servers. This task shows you how to browse your network.
notes
•
• •
•
The AppleTalk Service is not enabled under Directory Access by default in sys tem 10.3.2. Therefore, you will not be able to “see” traditional AppleTalk shares in the Network browser.
1. Press Ô-N to open a new Finder window, as shown in Figure 73-1.
The Network browser shows you resources within a Finder environment, which is different from the Connect to Server method for using a Network. The Connect to Server method for connecting to a network resource shows the resource as a mounted vol ume on the desktop. You should unmount those resources when you are fin ished using them.
Figure 73-1: The Finder window has a Network icon in the sidebar.
2. Click the Network icon in the sidebar of the Finder window to browse your network and you’ll see the window shown in Figure 73-2.
The Server Message Block (SMB) service is the ser vice that allows you to see resources shared from Windows computers.
cautions
• •
If you have a network and services set up at present, simply look at the screens in this task and do not make changes to the Directory Access. The Network browser can take several seconds and maybe even a minute to locate all Network resources. If you click a Server or a resource and it says 0 items available, wait a few seconds before call ing your IT department and complaining. The resources will probably show up.
Figure 73-2: Network browsing shows you the resources on your network.
3. Click the Servers icon to show all the servers in your subnet. 4. Click a server in your subnet that is not your computer, and you will see it appear in the next pane on the right, as shown in Figure 73-3.
Networking
159
Task
73
tips
•
Figure 73-3: You will have to connect to a server with the Connect button.
5. Click the connect button for the server you have selected and log in as either a registered user or a guest.
•
6. Click the Applications icon in the sidebar of the Finder window. 7. Open the Utilities folder, and then open the Directory Access application.
•
8. Click the Services tab to display the Directory services shown in Figure 73-4.
•
Use the Network browser when you don’t know the exact name of the com puter or network resource you want to access. Use the Connect to Server process to connect to the network resource when you know the exact address of the resource or when the resource is not within your subnet. If you are not a registered user on a system, you may want to try logging in as a guest. When you log in as a guest, you can put things in the user’s Drop Box folder on the other computer. All resources show up in the Network browser as Globe icons to begin with (even printers). If you are looking for a printer on the network, you must be able to identify it by name.
cross-references Figure 73-4: The services your network will detect.
9. Place a check in the box next to AppleTalk so that the Network browser will show AppleTalk shares. 10. Close the Directory Access window by pressing Ô-Q.
• • •
For more information on connecting to a server out side your subnet, see Task 74, “Connecting to a Local Server.” If you would like to share your resources, you may want to review Task 70, “Creating a Wireless Computer-to-Computer Network.” For another resource you have on the network, see Task 87, “Accessing your iDisk.”
160
Task
74
Part 7
Connecting to a Local Server
A
file server is a central computer that runs the network operating system software and stores files that can be accessed by client computers on the network. This task shows you how to configure your OS X system to act as a file server on the local network, and how to connect to a local file server.
notes
•
• •
•
•
Your OS X system appears on the network with the name shown in the Computer Name field at the top of the Sharing pane in Figure 74-1. You can edit this name to whatever you like.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the Sharing icon in the Internet & Network row to show the
Sharing pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the Services tab to display the window shown in Figure 74-1.
A guest user can only put items into another user’s Drop Box folder or open items that appear in Public folders. Rendezvous is an Apple net working technology intro duced with Mac OS X 10.2 that enables a computer to automatically recognize other Rendezvous-compatible network devices. The Choose a Recent Server button at the top of the Connect to Server window executes the com mand for listing Recent Servers. Selecting a com puter from the Recent Servers list takes you directly to the screen prompting you for your name and password. The Connect to Server dia log is not only for Personal File Sharing, but also for connecting to Windows shares and FTP servers.
Figure 74-1: The Services pane of the Sharing window of System Preferences.
4. Click the checkbox to the left of Personal File Sharing in the Services list. The tab changes to read “Personal File Sharing On” and the Start button changes to read Stop. 5. Press Ô-Q to quit System Preferences. 6. Click the desktop to switch to the Finder. 7. From the menu bar, choose Go ➪ Connect to Server, as shown in Figure 74-2. The Connect to Server window appears, as shown in Figure 74-3.
Networking
161 Figure 74-2: The Connect to Server command is in the Go menu.
Task
74
tip
•
The keyboard shortcut for the Connect to Server com mand is Ô-K.
Figure 74-3: The Connect to Server window.
8. Type the server name or IP address you wish to connect to, then click the Connect button. The Connect login window appears, as shown in Figure 74-4.
Figure 74-4: The Connect to Server dialog.
9. Choose whether to log in as a Guest (with limited privileges) or as a Registered User (if you have an account on the system you’re logging in to). If logging in as a registered user, enter your user name and password, and click the Connect button. 10. In the next window, choose the volume you wish to mount, then click the OK button. The chosen volume of the server appears on your desktop.
cross-references
• • •
You must have an account on the server for yourself to log in as a registered user. Adding a New User account is discussed in Task 46, “Adding a User Account.” If you don’t know the name of the computer you want to connect to, you can browse the network as explained in Task 73, “Browsing the Network.” The Keychain feature of Mac OS X provides an easy way to enter network pass words. For more informa tion about the keychain, see Task 14, “Setting Keychain Preferences.”
162
Task
75
Part 7
Sharing an Internet Connection and Using the Firewall
T notes
• •
• • • •
Connecting an OS X system to an Ethernet network and sharing its Internet connec tion over AirPort essentially turns your OS X system into an AirPort Base Station. Your OS X system appears on the network with the name shown in the Computer Name field at the top of the Sharing pane. You can edit this name to whatever you like.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the Sharing icon in the Internet & Network row to display
the Sharing pane of the System Preferences window, as shown in
Figure 75-1.
If you are connected to a network through your builtin Ethernet port, the shar ing will occur through your AirPort card. The Internet Sharing feature of Mac OS X is basically a software version of a router. A firewall is a routing mech anism (usually software) that allows or prevents incoming network access. Mac OS X is the first ver sion of the operating sys tem to offer a built-in firewall. While early ver sions of Mac OS X shipped with a built-in firewall, the graphical user interface had not yet been adopted.
caution
•
he Mac OS X system provides the capability to make the computer accessible from the Internet. Many OS X systems have both an Ethernet port and an AirPort card. This task shows how to share your OS X system’s Ethernet connection over AirPort, and vice versa, and also shows how to start and modify the built-in firewall in OS X.
Companies are developing policies concerning wire less access points attached to the company networks, mostly from fears about security. Before enabling sharing of your wireless Internet connec tion at an office, you should ask about any rele vant company policies.
Figure 75-1: The Services tab of the Sharing pane of the System Preferences window.
3. Click the Internet tab to display the window shown in Figure 75-2.
Click the Built-In Ethernet checkbox.
4. Click the Start button to start sharing your wireless network connec tion with systems linked to your system’s built-in Ethernet port.
5. Click the Firewall tab to show the screen in Figure 75-3. 6. To start up the built-in firewall, click the Start button. 7. Click the New button. The new sheet appears, as shown in Figure 75-4. 8. Choose a port by the service name from the Port Name drop-down
list.
9. Click the OK button to open the port in your firewall and allow net work traffic to reach your system through that port.
10. Press Ô-Q to quit System Preferences.
Networking
163 Figure 75-2: The Internet tab of the Sharing pane of the System Preferences window.
Task
75
tips
• •
Services you turn on in the Services tab are automati cally permitted through the firewall and are shown as active on the Firewall tab. If you don’t remember what ports a service uses, read the service’s description in the Firewall tab.
Figure 75-3: The Firewall tab of the Sharing pane of the System Preferences window.
Figure 75-4: Opening a port through your firewall.
cross-reference
•
For more information on using the Internet, see Part 9, “Using .Mac and Sherlock,” and Part 11, “Surfing the Web with Safari.”
164
Task
76
Part 7
Creating and Using Network Locations
O
S X includes a convenient way to define network settings with custom labels, such as having a network configuration for home using the Ethernet port and a network configuration for the office using a specific closed AirPort network. This task shows how to create network locations on an OS X system and how to switch between them.
notes
• • •
If you configured connec tions in Mac OS 9 and upgraded to Mac OS X, your settings should have translated to the new oper ating system.
1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the Network icon in the Internet & Network row to display
the Network pane of the System Preferences window, as shown in
Figure 76-1.
A subnet mask is a group of selected bits that iden tify a subnetwork. Domain Naming System (DNS) provides information about IP addresses and domain names for all com puters on a network.
Figure 76-1: The Network Status pane of the Network window of the System
Preferences. 3. Click the Location pop-up menu, and choose New Location. The New Location dialog appears, as shown in Figure 76-2. 4. Enter a name in the field. 5. Click the OK button. The New Location dialog disappears, and the Network pane changes to show the newly created location in the Location pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 76-3. 6. Edit the network configuration for the new location. Click the Location pop-up menu, and choose Edit Locations to display the window shown in Figure 76-4. 7. In the listbox on left, click the location to edit. 8. Click the Duplicate button to copy the location, the Rename button to rename the location, or the Delete button to delete the location. 9. Click the Done button.
Networking
165
Task
76
tips
•
Figure 76-2: Name the new location network configuration.
•
• Figure 76-3: Creating a new location switches to that configuration.
•
Locations are usable by everyone with an account on the OS X system. They aren’t personal to your account. If this machine is usable by many, you may not want to keep the AirPort password saved in a loca tion network configuration. OS X attempts to determine your location automatically by the network connections to which it has access. For example, if you have an AirPort connection at home and an Ethernet connection at work, you do not need to set a location because OS X will determine that there is no AirPort connection at work and automatically connect via Ethernet. A shortcut to switching locations is found in the Apple menu. Select Apple ➪ Location, and choose from the list. Be sure your locations are in the proper order. Mac OS X will try to connect to the locations in the order they are listed.
cross-references
• • •
Figure 76-4: The Edit Locations dialog.
Configuring an Ethernet connection is discussed in Task 65, “Configuring an Ethernet Network Connection.” Configuring an AirPort con nection is discussed in Task 66, “Configuring an AirPort Network Connection.” Configuring a modem con nection is discussed in Task 67, “Configuring a Modem Connection.”
166
Task
77
notes
• • •
SCSI is an abbreviation for Small Computer System Interface. Also know as IEEE 1394, FireWire is the new genera tion of SCSI and transfers data at 400 Mbps or 800 Mbps. The system being used in FireWire target disk mode boots into FireWire disk mode very fast (normally only a few seconds).
Part 7
Using Target Disk Mode
T
arget disk mode has been part of the Macintosh experience for a long time, starting with SCSI Target Disk Mode for Macintosh portable computers (which provided a way to connect a Macintosh portable computer to another Macintosh system as an external hard disk). With the dropping of SCSI as a common port of Apple systems, and the inclusion of FireWire on almost every Apple system in the last few years, the capability has been revised to use the FireWire port. Now any OS X system with a FireWire port may be connected as an external hard disk to another system with a FireWire port. This task discusses how to use target disk mode. 1. From the menu bar choose Apple ➪ Shut Down. The dialog shown
in Figure 77-1 appears.
Figure 77-1: The Shut Down dialog.
2. Click the Shut Down button. The system shuts down. 3. Using a FireWire cable, connect two systems together. 4. Press the Power key on the OS X system you shut down in Step 1 and hold down the T key on the keyboard. The shutdown system starts up and displays a FireWire logo as a screen saver. The hard disk of the target disk mode system appears on the desktop of the other system, as shown in Figure 77-2. Figure 77-2: The FireWire target volume on the desktop.
5. Double-click the hard disk icon to open the disk, as shown in Figure 77-3.
Networking
167
Task
77
tips
•
Figure 77-3: The opened FireWire target volume.
6. Copy files to and from the target FireWire drive as you feel
appropriate.
7. When you are finished, close all windows and quit any applications
or opened files that were on the target disk.
•
8. Drag the FireWire target disk icon to the Trash to unmount it from
the system. (The Trash icon changes to an eject symbol, as shown in
Figure 77-4.) The hard disk icon vanishes from the system’s desktop.
Figure 77-4: Dragging a mounted volume such as a hard disk or CD to the Trash changes the Trash icon to an Eject icon.
9. Press the Power button on the target disk system. The target disk
system shuts down.
10. Remove the FireWire cable, and press the target disk’s Power button again (without holding down the T key). That system restarts normally.
• •
FireWire is very fast com pared to most other net working speeds: much faster than wireless speeds, and faster then the majority of Ethernet speeds. If you have a great deal of data, it can be faster to copy the data over FireWire than to use the network. You can do anything with the contents of the mounted FireWire target disk you would do with any other external hard disk: copy files to and from it, run applications that are on it, or delete or reformat it. However, you can’t log into that system because it’s not running, and you can’t use any special hard ware attached to that sys tem. It’s just a hard disk. Be sure to use a 6-pin FireWire cable, which has the same large connector on both ends. If you are using a laptop computer, be sure it is turned off before discon necting the FireWire cable.
cross-references
• •
Shutting down an OS X sys tem is discussed in Task 3, “Shutting Down, Restarting, or Putting the Computer to Sleep.” You may want to use the Target disk as your startup disk for a system. Startup disks are discussed in Task 22, “Setting the Startup Disk.”
Part 8: Printing and Faxing Task 78:
Adding a Printer
Task 79:
Configuring Page Setup
Task 80:
Managing Print Jobs
Task 81:
Sharing a Printer
Task 82:
Exploring Print Options
Task 83:
Exploring Further Print Options
Task 84:
Faxing
Task 85:
Printing from Classic
170
Task
78
Part 8
Adding a Printer
W
hen Apple first introduced Mac OS X, some users complained that printer manufacturers had not yet created matching printer drivers. Today, all major printer manufacturers are working to improve the situation and, in fact, Mac OS X now ships with hundreds of preinstalled printer drivers. This task shows how to add a printer to your OS X system.
notes
•
• •
It’s impossible for us to know what printers, if any, are attached to your computer, so this task is a general guideline. Select different protocols from the drop-down list on the printer search sheet as appropriate for your network.
1. Double-click the hard disk icon. The Finder window shows the top
level of the system.
2. Double-click the Applications folder to open the Applications folder. 3. Double-click the Utilities folder to open the Utilities folder. Locate
the Printer Setup Utility, as shown in Figure 78-1.
The Application menu is just to the right of the Apple menu in the menu bar, and changes its name to show the name of the active application. The default protocol used for communication between the computer and a printer on a network is AppleTalk.
Figure 78-1: The Printer Setup Utility in the Applications ➪ Utilities folder.
4. Double-click the Printer Setup Utility icon. The Printer Setup Utility icon appears in the Dock, and the Printer List window appears. If you have no printers defined, the dialog shown in Figure 78-2 also appears.
Figure 78-2: The Printer Setup Utility’s Printer List window.
Printing and Faxing 5. Click the Add button. A sheet appears, as shown in Figure 78-3, searching for printers by the protocol shown in the drop-down list at the top of the sheet.
171
Task
78
tips
•
Figure 78-3: Searching for a printer to add.
6. Click the drop-down list and choose AppleTalk (if it hasn’t already been selected for you). As shown in Figure 78-3, the printer search has found a printer.
•
7. If you have a specification for the printer you’re adding, choose the model and make from the Printer Model drop-down list. 8. Click the Add button. The printer search sheet vanishes and the printer is added to the Printer List window, as shown in Figure 78-4.
•
• Figure 78-4: The newly added printer is shown in the Printer List window.
9. To make a printer the default printer, click the printer’s name in the Printer List window shown in Figure 78-4. From the menu bar, choose Printers ➪ Make Default. 10. Choose Print Center ➪ Quit Printer Setup Utility from the Application menu to quit the Printer Setup Utility.
If you have only one printer, that printer is automatically the default printer. You can delete the default printer, but you cannot delete shared printers because the profile for a shared printer is on another system. Since the actual work of printing is handled by OS X, you only need to add a printer in OS X—not in every application that has a print command. If you have a printer that is not supported by OS X, the printer may have shipped with OS X-compatible printer drivers, or OS X-compatible printer drivers may be down loadable from the printer manufacturer’s Web site. If you see a network zone, this is actually a subdivi sion of the network. A pop up menu will alert you to available zones, from which you must choose the proper zone before printer choices will appear.
cross-reference
•
For more information about working in a network envi ronment, see Part 7, “Networking.”
172
Task
79
Part 8
Configuring Page Setup
E
ach application has the ability to set its own options for printing. Using these options, you configure how the document will look when printed on a selected printer from a particular application. This task shows you how to work with the Page Setup window of an OS X application.
notes
• •
To change the current printer, choose Edit Printer List from the “Format for:” drop-down list. Options shown in Figure 79-2 may vary from printer to printer.
1. Press Ô-Shift-3. An icon named Picture 1 appears on the desktop. 2. Double-click the Picture 1 icon. The Preview application launches
and opens the screen shot in a window on the desktop.
3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Page Setup to display the Page
Setup sheet shown in Figure 79-1.
Figure 79-1: The Page Setup sheet.
4. From the “Format for:” drop-down list, choose a printer. An example is shown in Figure 79-2.
Figure 79-2: The “Format for:” drop-down list.
5. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and choose the correct paper size. 6. Click one of the three orientation icons to print the document in portrait or landscape mode.
Printing and Faxing 7. Set the Scale percentage if you want the document to print smaller or larger than its actual size.
173
Task
8. Click the Settings drop-down list, and choose Summary. The Summary of the document print formatting appears, as shown in Figure 79-3.
79
tips
• •
Figure 79-3: The Summary view of the Page Setup sheet.
9. Click the Settings list, and choose Page Attributes. The sheet returns to the window shown in Figure 79-1.
•
10. Click OK when finished.
•
•
Since the actual work of printing is handled by OS X, the Page Setup window is generally consistent from application to application. The Page Setup sheet can be viewed by pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-Shift-P. If you have only one printer, that printer is automatically the default printer. You can delete the default printer, but you cannot delete shared printers, because the profile for a shared printer is on another system. You can change the default paper size for all documents by opening the Printer Setup Utility and choosing Preferences from the Printer Setup Utility menu. Click the Printing button, and edit the settings as needed. The Scale option is particu larly useful when you’re using a spreadsheet pro gram and your data will not fit on one page. Rather than changing all column widths in the spreadsheet, alter the scale to fit all the data on a single page.
cross-references
• •
Taking a snapshot of your desktop is explained in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.” For more information on setting up documents in TextEdit, see Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit.”
174
Task
80
Part 8
Managing Print Jobs
W
hen you print a document using OS X, the document with the formatting instructions is taken from the application by the OS X printing subsystem and sent to the printer. This combination of the document and instructions for the formatting is called a print job. This task discusses how to manage print jobs.
notes
• •
You can control your printer queue for local printers, but you can’t delete print jobs on shared printers. The Printer Setup Utility replaces the Chooser and Desktop Printer utility from previous versions of the Mac OS.
1. Double-click the hard disk icon. The Finder window shows the top level of the system. Double-click the Applications folder to open the Applications folder. 2. Double-click the Utilities folder to open the Utilities folder. Locate the Printer Setup Utility application icon, as shown in Figure 80-1.
Figure 80-1: The Printer Setup Utility icon in the Applications ➪ Utilities folder.
3. Double-click the Printer Setup Utility application icon shown in Figure 80-1. The Printer Setup Utility icon appears in the Dock and the Printer List window appears, as shown in Figure 80-2.
Figure 80-2: The Printer Setup Utility’s Printer List window.
Printing and Faxing 4. Click the printer in the Printer List window.
175
Task
5. From the menu bar, choose Printers ➪ Show Jobs. The jobs list window for that printer appears, as shown in Figure 80-3.
80
tips
• •
Figure 80-3: The printer job list window.
6. Open a document. For this task, you can press Ô-Shift-3 to take a screen shot of the current window. 7. Double-click the “Picture 1” icon on your desktop to open the screen shot with the Preview application. 8. In Preview, choose File ➪ Print to show the print sheet, then click the Print button.
• •
9. In the job list window shown in Figure 80-4, the job is printing. Click the printing job.
The keyboard shortcut for showing the job list for a printer is Ô-O. The Printer Setup Utility window can be manipu lated just like any other Finder window. You can sort the list of print jobs in progress by clicking the different column headings. The list of documents wait ing to be printed is called the print queue. Options available for con trolling printouts include deleting them (which removes the print job from the print queue), pausing them (which halts all activ ity on one print job until you reactivate the print job), and halting them all (which halts all print jobs until you reactivate them).
Figure 80-4: An active printing list window.
cross-references 10. Click the Hold button to halt the job, then the Resume button to restart a halted job, or the Delete button to cancel the print job.
• • •
Taking a snapshot of your desktop is explained in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.” Creating a new document in TextEdit is explained in Task 56, “Saving a Document in TextEdit.” Sharing a printer is explained in Task 81, “Sharing a Printer.”
176
Task
81
notes
•
• •
The Printer List window in Figure 81-3 shows the same printer, but one is the locally defined printer, and one is a shared printer from another OS X system on the same network. You can only use this task to share a printer that is directly connected to your computer.
Part 8
Sharing a Printer
I
n a network, you may have one system designated as a print server. The print server has at least one printer (sometimes several printers) defined in the printing subsystem of that system. You can send a print job to a print server, and that system will handle the work of processing the print job. This task shows how to share an attached printer and how to access a shared printer that is attached to a print server. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System Preferences window. 2. Click the Sharing icon to show the Sharing pane of the System Preferences window. 3. Click the Services tab to display the window shown in Figure 81-1.
If you want to share with Mac OS 9 users a USB (Universal Serial Bus) printer that is connected to your computer, you must turn on USB Printer Sharing in OS 9 (or the Classic environment) on your computer.
Figure 81-1: The Services tab of the Sharing pane of the System Preferences window.
4. Click the checkbox to the left of Printer Sharing. The text on the right side of the pane changes to show that printer sharing is on, as shown in Figure 81-2. 5. Launch the Printer Setup Utility application in the Applications/ Utilities folder by double-clicking the Printer Setup Utility application icon. The Printer Setup Utility icon appears in the Dock and the Printer List window appears, as shown in Figure 81-3. 6. Click the top printer in the Printer List window.
Printing and Faxing
177
Task
81
tips
• •
Figure 81-2: Printer Sharing is on.
•
Figure 81-3: The Printer List window.
7. Click the Show Info button in the toolbar. The Printer Info window for the local printer appears, as shown in Figure 81-4.
•
The keyboard shortcut for showing the information for a printer is Ô-I. You can edit the informa tion in the Printer Info win dow for a local printer. You cannot edit or change the information for a shared printer on a remote OS X system. The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right in the menu bar. Printer sharing is particu larly beneficial to busi nesses, because it can save the expense of buying individual printers for every workstation, or even every department.
cross-reference
•
Figure 81-4: The Printer Info window for a local printer.
8. Click the shared printer name in the Printer List window. The Printer Info window will gray out and make noneditable the Printer Name and Location fields, as well as disable the Apply Changes button. 9. Close the Printer Info window by clicking the close window button in the upper-left corner of the window. 10. From the menu bar, choose Print Center ➪ Quit Print Center from the Application menu.
You can add a shared printer directly as a locally defined printer by following the steps in Task 78, “Adding a Printer.”
178
Task
82
Part 8
Exploring Print Options
I
n the previous tasks in this part, you’ve seen how to add a printer and configure the page setup within an OS X application. Mac OS X provides several other options for customizing how the printed page will look when printed on a selected printer. This task explores some of the options in the OS X Print window.
note
•
While this task only accessed those options found in the Layout panel, many other ways of cus tomizing a print job can be accessed by selecting other options from the Copies & Pages drop-down list. These options will vary according to your particular printer, but some are discussed in Task 83, “Exploring Further Print Options.”
1. Double-click the hard disk icon. The Finder window shows the top level of the system. 2. Click the Applications folder (from the menu on the left) to open it. 3. Double-click the TextEdit icon. The TextEdit application starts and opens a new blank window, as shown in Figure 82-1.
Figure 82-1: TextEdit.
4. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Print. The Print dialog appears, as shown in Figure 82-2.
Figure 82-2: The Print dialog.
5. Click the Printer drop-down list, and choose the printer you wish to use. 6. Click the Copies & Pages drop-down list, and choose Layout to see the Print dialog shown in Figure 82-3.
Printing and Faxing
179
Task
82
tips
•
Figure 82-3: The Layout view of the Print dialog.
7. From the “Pages per Sheet” drop-down list, choose how many pages of the document you want to print on a single sheet of paper. 8. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, choose the layout direction from the four Layout Direction icons.
•
9. Choose your preferred border from the Border drop-down list.
As you choose different options for the Pages per Sheet, Layout Direction, and Border, the preview display to the left of these three options changes to show the new output. If your printer is capable of double-sided printing, you can also adjust those options here.
10. To save your customized settings, click the Presets drop-down list, and choose the Save As command, then enter a name for this preset in the Save Preset dialog shown in Figure 82-4. Click the OK button to save your preset by that name.
cross-references
•
Figure 82-4: Save your customized printing instructions with the Save Presets
command.
•
• •
Opening TextEdit is dis cussed in Task 55, “Starting and Stopping TextEdit.” If you’ve used TextEdit recently, you can launch it from the Apple ➪ Recent Items menu command. Using the Recent Items command is discussed in Task 64, “Using Recent Documents and Applications.” The default printer will appear in the Printer dropdown list. Setting a default printer is discussed in Task 78, “Adding a Printer.” The Print window also pro vides access to the Fax feature in Mac OS. For more information on faxing, see Task 84, “Faxing.”
180
Task
83
Part 8
Exploring Further Print Options
T
he OS X Print dialog provides several options, some of which were discussed in Task 82, “Exploring Print Options.” In addition to the options presented in that task, Mac OS X also provides features for printing in different formats. This task shows more of the options in the OSX Print dialog.
notes
• •
PDF files can be read on almost any platform, which adds universality to the convenience of using them. PDF files print at the maxi mum quality of any printer. For this reason, a PDF file created using an inkjet printer selection might not look as good on a system using a laser printer selection.
1. Start TextEdit, and press Ô-P to display the Print dialog shown in Figure 83-1.
Figure 83-1: The Print dialog.
2. Click the Copies & Pages drop-down list, and choose Output Options. The Print dialog changes, as shown in Figure 83-2.
Figure 83-2: The Output Options view of the Print dialog.
3. Click the Save as File checkbox to unlock the Format drop-down list. 4. Click the Format drop-down list to choose between PDF and PostScript. 5. Click the Output Options drop-down list and choose Error Handling to display the Error Handling options shown in Figure 83-3.
Printing and Faxing
181
Task
83
tips Figure 83-3: The Error Handling view of the Print dialog.
•
6. Choose a simple or detailed PostScript error report format from the radio buttons. 7. If the printer has multiple trays for paper, the Tray Switching radio buttons are selectable. 8. Click the Error Handling drop-down list, and choose the Paper Feed to show the Paper Feed view of the Print dialog. 9. Click the Paper Feed drop-down list to choose the Printer Features view of the Print dialog. 10. Click the Printer Features drop-down list to choose the Summary view shown in Figure 83-4. The Summary view is a condensed view of the current presets and customizations of the Print dialog.
Figure 83-4: The Summary view of the Print dialog.
•
You can print a document in PDF just by clicking the “Save as PDF” button at the bottom of the Print dialog. The abbreviation PDF stands for Portable Document Format. Files in this format can be created and viewed from a variety of applications, the most common of which is Adobe Acrobat. However, Mac OS X allows you to produce a PDF without a specialized application. To get an idea of what the final document will look like when printed, click the Preview button next to the Help button in the bottom of the Print window. The file then opens in the Preview application. Next, click either “Cancel” or “Print” at the bottom of the Preview window to cancel the print ing or continue with it.
cross-references
• • •
The Print dialog is dis cussed in Task 82, “Exploring Print Options.” Opening TextEdit is dis cussed in Task 55, “Starting and Stopping TextEdit.” If you’ve used TextEdit recently, you can launch it from the Apple ➪ Recent Items menu command. Using the Recent Items command is discussed in Task 64, “Using Recent Documents and Applications.”
182
Task
84
notes
•
•
•
Most of the options avail able when printing (as dis cussed in the previous two tasks) are also available when faxing. Simply click the drop-down list originally labeled “Cover Page” to select other groups of options. When choosing contacts to fax from your Address Book, highlight the name(s) from the lists on the right, and click the “To:” button near the top of the window. Then, click the Red circle in the upper left to close the window. Notice that the Fax application requires names and fax numbers to be in the following format: Joe Smith <1-555-555-5555>. You can also receive faxes with your computer by opening System Preferences and clicking “Print & Fax.” Next click “Faxing,” and select the option for “Receive faxes on this com puter.” Adjust the other options as necessary before closing System Preferences and receiving faxes.
Part 8
Faxing
W
hile previous versions of the Mac OS required third-party applications for faxing, Panther (OS X 10.2) provides the capability to fax from any OS X application capable of printing. In fact, faxing in as easy as choosing File ➪ Print and pressing a few buttons. This task shows how to fax a document from any typical OS X application. (Note that you must have your computer modem hooked up to a telephone line, and not a DSL or cable modem connection, to perform this task.) 1. Double-click the hard disk icon to reveal the top level of your com puter system.
2. Click the Applications folder from the menu on the left to open it. 3. Double-click the TextEdit icon to start TextEdit. 4. Open an existing file or create a new one to fax, as shown in
Figure 84-1.
Figure 84-1: A document ready to be faxed from TextEdit.
5. Choose File ➪ Print. 6. Click the Fax button near the bottom of the Print window. 7. Enter the phone number of the person you wish to fax to, as shown in Figure 84-2, or click the small button to the right of the “To:” field to pick someone from your Address Book.
Printing and Faxing
183
Task
84
tips
•
Figure 84-2: Entering the fax number.
8. Enter the Subject and Dialing Prefix as necessary, and select the appropriate modem (if you have more than one available). 9. Place a checkmark in the box next to “Cover page” to send a cover page with your fax. Then, add the cover page text in the box below, as shown in Figure 84-3.
• • • Figure 84-3: Adding cover page text.
10. Click the Fax button in the bottom-right corner of the window to complete the process and send your fax.
Click the Preview button in the bottom-left corner of the Fax window to see your finished fax (complete with cover page if you added one) before sending it. The file opens in the Preview application, where you can click the Cancel or Fax buttons to cancel the fax process and return to TextEdit, or go ahead and send your fax, respectively. If you want to create a more customized cover page than is available here, you can do so by making it part of the document you’re faxing. If you’re faxing to someone out of state, be sure to add “1-” as the dialing prefix. Be sure to include the area code with the fax number as well. To check the status of a fax, click the modem’s icon in the Dock. If the modem’s icon no longer appears in the dock, the fax process has been completed.
cross-reference
•
Adding contacts to your Address Book is discussed in Task 116, “Using the Address Book.”
184
Task
85
Part 8
Printing from Classic
O
S X includes the Classic environment as a way to use most of the Mac OS 9 applications on an OS X system. Classic applications use the OS 9 control panels for the majority of their settings. This task shows how to select a printer for an application running in the Classic environment.
notes
•
•
•
•
While OS X and OS 9 (Classic) may indeed share an actual printer in your office, they cannot share printer setups on your com puter. In other words, you need to select and set up the appropriate printer (and options) in each operating system to be able to print.
1. Double-click the hard disk icon. The Finder window shows the top
level of the system.
2. Double-click the Applications (Mac OS 9) folder to open the
Applications (Mac OS 9) folder.
3. Double-click the SimpleText icon to launch the Classic SimpleText
application. A blank SimpleText window appears on the desktop, as
shown in Figure 85-1.
When a Classic application is the active application, the menu bar changes its appearance to OS 9. This includes the display of the current application in the upper right, and the Apple menu in the upper left. Quitting all the Classic applications does not quit the Classic environment, which stays running. The Classic environment uses a great deal of memory and resources. You may want to open System Preferences and stop the Classic envi ronment. The Classic environment, like all other applications you launch when logged into OS X, quits when you log out. You must have a printer set up in the Chooser to be able to print from the Classic environment. While the Classic environment is running, you can choose “Chooser” from the Apple menu to set up a printer if none is currently available.
Figure 85-1: A SimpleText window.
4. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Page Setup. The Classic Page Setup window appears, as shown in Figure 85-2.
Printing and Faxing
185
Task
Figure 85-2: The Classic Page Setup window.
tips
•
5. Click the OK button. The Page Setup window closes. 6. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Print. The Classic Print window appears, as shown in Figure 85-3.
85
• •
Figure 85-3: The Classic Print window.
Launching an application that runs in the Classic environment automatically launches the Classic environment. The keyboard shortcut to open the Classic Print win dow is Ô-P, just as it was in OS 9. If you have trouble printing from a Classic application, check to make sure that you’re running the most recent version: OS 9.2.1. To check this, you can locate the Classic application in the System 9 folder on your hard drive and choose File ➪ Get Info.
7. Click the Printer drop-down list to choose a printer. 8. Click the Print button to print the document. 9. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Quit to quit SimpleText.
cross-reference
•
Starting the Classic Environment is discussed in Task 28, “Starting, Stopping, or Restarting the Classic Environment.”
Part 9: Using .Mac and Sherlock Task 86:
Creating a .Mac Account
Task 87:
Accessing Your iDisk
Task 88:
Using iSync
Task 89:
Searching the Internet with Sherlock
Task 90:
Finding Pictures with Sherlock
Task 91:
Searching the Stock Market with Sherlock
Task 92:
Searching for Films with Sherlock
Task 93:
Searching the Phone Book with Sherlock
Task 94:
Searching eBay with Sherlock
Task 95:
Searching for Airplane Flights with Sherlock
Task 96:
Using the Dictionary Feature of Sherlock
Task 97:
Translating with Sherlock
Task 98:
Searching AppleCare with Sherlock
Task 99:
Setting Sherlock Preferences
188
Task
86
Part 9
Creating a .Mac Account
A
pple introduced an online service called .Mac that provides email, online storage, automatic backup of selected files, and several other features. This task shows how to create your own .Mac account.
notes
• • •
As of this writing, Apple offers a free 60-day trial .Mac membership. After that time, you will need to pay an annual fee ($99.95 as of this writing) for usage.
1. Open System Preferences by clicking the System Preferences icon in the Dock. 2. Click the .Mac icon to display the pane shown in Figure 86-1.
You must be 13 years of age or older to join .Mac. Joining .Mac will allow you to have an email address of
[email protected]. You can also access your .Mac email from any computer anywhere in the world by using the www.mac.com Web site.
Figure 86-1: The .Mac pane of System Preferences.
3. Click the Sign Up button. Your default Web browser starts and displays the .Mac home page, as shown in Figure 86-2.
caution
•
If you do not log out of .Mac, your member name is automatically entered into a Log In form, and any one using your computer may have access to your .Mac account.
Figure 86-2: The .Mac home page.
Using .Mac and Sherlock 4. Click the button on the left side of the Web page for a “Free Trial” to begin your 60-day free trial subscription to .Mac.
189
Task
5. Fill in the fields on the form. Press the Continue button in the lower right. 6. If someone has already registered the user name you chose, the window shown in Figure 86-3 appears. Choose a name from the options given or enter a new name, then click the Continue button. The next window shows a summary of your registered trial account.
86
tips
• •
You can also sign up for a .Mac account by visiting www.mac.com directly (without first going to System Preferences on your computer). Another benefit of a .Mac account is the ability to publish your calendar(s), photos, and other files on the Internet, making them easily accessible from any computer with Internet access.
Figure 86-3: Choosing an alternate name.
7. Print the account settings in the window, then click the Continue button. 8. When the Thank You screen appears, click “Start Using My .Mac Account” to continue to the .Mac member home page. When you’re ready to upgrade your membership, click the Join Now button in the upper-right corner of the .Mac home page.
cross-references
• • • •
Setting up your Mail pro gram to check your email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account.” Publishing a calendar on the Internet with .Mac is discussed in Task 153, “Sharing a Calendar.” Publishing your photos on the Internet with .Mac is discussed in Task 201, “Creating a Web Page of Photos.” Printing is discussed in Task 63, “Printing Documents.”
190
Task
87
notes
•
•
•
Your public folder is not a publicly accessible Web site, but more like your “file closet” on Apple’s Web site. Your Web sites are kept in the Sites folder of your iDisk.
Part 9
Accessing Your iDisk
W
hen you created your .Mac account, Apple created a user directory for you on its corporate servers. This means that you have a virtual hard drive (called iDisk) on your computer that is physically an account on an Apple server. You can access this user directory from anywhere on the Internet. You can use this space to store files, to build a Web site, and so on. This task shows how to configure your OS X system to access your iDisk. 1. Open System Preferences by clicking the System Preferences icon in
the Dock.
2. Click the .Mac icon to display the pane shown in Figure 87-1.
When you place files in your Public folder, anyone who knows your member name and has access to iDisk Public folders can download those files. To do so, the user needs to visit http://idisk.mac. com/username. Even Windows users can access your iDisk Public folder if they use a WebDAV filesharing protocol. More information can be found in the Help section of the .Mac Web site. The size of the “hard disk” that iDisk provides to full .Mac members is 100 MB.
Figure 87-1: The .Mac pane of System Preferences.
3. Enter your .Mac account user name and password in the two fields shown in Figure 87-1. 4. Click the iDisk tab to display the iDisk tab shown in Figure 87-2.
Figure 87-2: The iDisk tab of the .Mac pane of System Preferences.
Using .Mac and Sherlock 5. To permit others to upload files into your iDisk, click the Read & Write radio button under Your Public Folder.
191
Task
6. To add a password for your Public folder, check the checkbox next to Use a Password to Protect your Public Folder. A dialog appears prompting you to enter a password. Enter the password, reenter to confirm it, and click the OK button. Then click the Apply Now button. 7. To access your iDisk from the menu bar, choose Go ➪ iDisk, as shown in Figure 87-3. Your iDisk appears on your desktop as a mounted volume, and the window shows the folders in your iDisk, as shown in Figure 87-4.
tips
•
• • Figure 87-3: The menu command to access your iDisk.
• Figure 87-4: The iDisk mounted volume and open window.
8. To copy a file from your OSX system to your iDisk, just drag the file into your Documents folder. To put a file where everyone can see it on your .Mac member Web site, drag it to the Public folder. 9. To remove the link to your iDisk from the desktop, drag the iDisk icon to the Trash to eject it, like any other mounted volume.
87
You should probably leave the Access Privileges for your iDisk Public Folder as read-only unless you have a good reason to permit others to put files on your iDisk. You can always change this in the future. You can also access your iDisk simply by doubleclicking on your hard drive icon and clicking on the iDisk icon on the left. If you are using a free .Mac trial subscription and you let it expire, you will not be able to access those files. Apple does not delete your free .Mac membership for a while, however. As of this writing, they keep your files for “no less than 3 days.” If you need those files, you will have to sign up for a paid .Mac subscription with that trial account name and password. The Software folder contains popular shareware, free ware, and updates to Apple software. This folder, as well as the Backup and Library folders, are read-only.
cross-reference
•
Signing up for a .Mac account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.”
192
Task
88
notes
• •
If you can’t locate a copy of iSync on your computer, you can download one for free from Apple’s Web site at www.apple.com/ isync/download. If you’re not connected to the Internet at the time you click “Sync Now,” iSync saves your changes and syncs the next time you’re connected to the Internet.
Part 9
Using iSync
T
ask 87, “Accessing Your iDisk,” discussed the online storage space you are given after signing up for a .Mac account. With iSync, you can copy things (such as your Address Book contacts, Calendar events, to-do lists, and Web browser bookmarks) into your .Mac storage space, thereby making it accessible from any computer in the world that has Internet access. In addition, if you have multiple Macs (such as one at work and one at home), you can use this feature to keep your information consistent on all computers. This task details how to use iSync for this purpose. 1. Double-click the Macintosh Hard Drive icon on your desktop, and
click the Applications icon in the left-hand navigation pane. Double-
click the iSync icon.
2. Click the .mac button on the left of the iSync window, and click
“Register” at the bottom of the pane below, as shown in Figure 88-1.
Figure 88-1: Clicking to register with the .Mac synchronization server.
3. Enter a name to identify your computer, and click Continue. 4. Review the items iSync will synchronize (copy), and add or remove checkmarks as necessary, as shown in Figure 88-2. Adjust the other settings as needed. 5. If you have another Mac that you want to synchronize with this one, switch to that computer and repeat Steps 1 to 4 until all of your Macs are listed under the “All Registered Computers” section of the screen shown in Figure 88-2. 6. Click the “Sync Now” button near the top of the iSync window to begin the synchronization process between this computer and your .Mac storage space. (If you have a lot of information to sync, or if you are using a particularly slow Internet connection, this process may take a few minutes.)
Using .Mac and Sherlock
193
Task
88
tips
•
Figure 88-2: The iSync configuration window.
7. If you clicked the checkbox in Figure 88-2 to synchronize your Address Book information, and you now want to access that information online, visit http://addressbook.mac.com and log into your .Mac account. Click “Turn on Syncing,” as shown in Figure 88-3. Wait while your .Mac Address Book is synchronized with the contacts on your computer.
•
•
You can make the iSync status menu appear in the menu bar of any other appli cation by selecting “Show the sync status in the menu bar” in the iSync Preferences window (choose iSync ➪ Preferences). This adds a small set of turning arrows to the top menu bar (near the date and time), from which you can quickly choose to “Sync Now.” If you want to access your calendar and to-do informa tion online, you need to first publish that information from within iCal. After it’s been published, calendars are accessible at http:// ical.mac.com/user name/calendarname. You can also use iSync to copy information from your computer to another device such as an iPod, a Palm OS device, or a Bluetooth/USB phone. To do so, first ensure that the device is connected to your computer and then choose Devices ➪ Add Device from within iSync. Follow the instruc tions in iSync, and choose Help ➪ iSync Help for more information on using your particular device with iSync.
cross-references Figure 88-3: Synching your online Address Book.
8. If you clicked the checkbox in Figure 88-2 to sync your bookmarks, and you now want to access that information online, visit http:// bookmarks.mac.com and log into your .Mac account. The first time you visit this site, click “Turn on Syncing” and wait while your .Mac bookmarks are synchronized with those on your computer. Then, click “Open Bookmarks” to use your bookmarks.
• •
Signing up for a .Mac account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” Publishing a calendar online is discussed in Task 153, “Sharing a Calendar.”
194
Task
89
notes
• • • •
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock.
Part 9
Searching the Internet with Sherlock
A
pple’s Sherlock is a search application that allows you to search for many different kinds of items on the Internet, without opening your Web browser. Icons on the toolbar for this application are called channels and provide timesaving links to valuable Web services. This task introduces Sherlock and some of its abilities. 1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock, or choose Go ➪ Applications
and select Sherlock from the list, to start Sherlock. The Sherlock
Channels window appears, as shown in Figure 89-1.
A search engine is an index to a portion of the World Wide Web or other Internet network. After you quit Sherlock, the next time you open the program, it will automati cally open the last channel you used. As Apple updates channels on its corporate servers, these are automatically updated on your application.
Figure 89-1: The Sherlock Channels window.
2. Click the Internet icon to switch to the Internet channel shown in Figure 89-2.
Figure 89-2: The Sherlock Internet channel.
Using .Mac and Sherlock 3. Enter keywords to search for on the Internet into the Topic or Description field, using the search engines shown in the bottom edge of the Internet Channels window.
195
Task
89
4. Click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Topic or Description field to search. Figure 89-3 shows the result of a search for the topic “Labrador retriever.”
tips
• •
Figure 89-3: The Sherlock Internet channel search result.
•
5. Double-click any of the results you see to show the result in your Web browser. 6. Click any of the search engine names shown on the bottom edge of the Sherlock Internet channel to show that search engine’s Web site in your Web browser.
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking the magnifying glass icon. Sherlock may have more channels than are visible, if the Sherlock window is too narrow for the channel icons. To see the hidden channels, either widen the Sherlock window or click on the >> symbol in the upper-right corner of the window to view the remain ing channels. Unless you click the icon of a specific search engine, Sherlock’s search will incorporate the services of all the search engines listed at the bottom of the window.
7. If you want to save a result and look at it later, click the result and drag it to the desktop, where it will stay as a URL clipping. Doubleclicking the clipping will open that site in your Web browser. 8. Choose Sherlock ➪ Quit Sherlock to close the program when you’re finished.
cross-references
• • •
Setting up your computer for Internet access is covered in Part 7, “Networking.” You can also search the Web from within Safari, the default Web browser on your computer. This is dis cussed in Task 125, “Searching the Web.” Customizing Sherlock is discussed in Task 99, “Setting Sherlock Preferences.”
196
Task
90
Part 9
Finding Pictures with Sherlock
A
pple’s Sherlock is a search application that allows you to search for many different kinds of items. One of the channels (toolbar icons) provides access to Internet pictures. This task shows how to use Sherlock to search for pictures on the Internet.
notes
• • •
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking the magnifying glass icon.
1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. 2. Click the Pictures icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the
Pictures channel shown in Figure 90-1.
To switch between channels by Ctrl-clicking, Sherlock must be running, but does not have to have any windows open. Sherlock only searches for photos from commercial stock-photo companies. When you double-click a particular image, it appears in your Web browser and gives you the option to “license image profession ally.” Clicking that link takes you to the stock-photo company’s Web site, where you can purchase the right to use that photo. Previews of the photo are typically displayed with a watermark (text superimposed over the photo indicating owner ship). After you pay for the right to use a photo, that watermark is removed.
Figure 90-1: The Sherlock Pictures channel.
3. Enter keywords into the “Picture Topic or Description” field to search for pictures on the Internet, using the search engines shown on the bottom edge of the Picture Channels window. 4. Click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the “Picture Topic or Description” field to search. Figure 90-2 shows the result of a search for the pictures for the topic “Labrador retriever.” 5. Double-click any of the results you see to show the result in your Web browser. 6. To see more search results, click the magnifying glass icon a second time.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
197
Task
90
tips
• •
Figure 90-2: The Sherlock Pictures channel search result.
• •
Figure 90-3: Requesting additional search results.
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. Click any of the search engine names shown along the bottom edge of the Sherlock Internet channel to show that search engine’s Web site in your Web browser. Use the Image Search tab of Google (in Safari or another Web browser) to expand your search for photos on the Web. Another way to quickly switch to a different Sherlock channel is to Ctrl-click the Sherlock icon in the Dock and then choose the channel from the pop-up menu, as shown in Figue 90-3.
cross-reference
•
Customizing Sherlock is discussed in Task 99, “Setting Sherlock Preferences.”
198
Task
91
Part 9
Searching the Stock Market with Sherlock
A notes
• •
•
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking the magnifying glass icon. If multiple companies appear in the main field, you can change the sorting order by clicking the column head. To sort by Symbol, for example, click the Symbol header in the main field. The list ings are sorted alphabeti cally by symbol, instead of alphabetically by company name. Support for some channels in Sherlock varies accord ing to your country. For example, the Stocks, Movies, and Yellow Pages channels are supported only in the United States, as of this writing.
pple’s Sherlock application provides the capability to explore the stock market from your OS X system. By using the Stocks channel (toolbar icon), you can get instant access to current information in the world of stocks and bonds. This task explains how. 1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. The Sherlock
Channels window appears.
2. Click the Stocks icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the Stocks
channel.
3. Enter search terms into the “Company Name or Ticker Symbol”
field.
4. Click the magnifying glass icon to the right of the “Company Name
or Ticker Symbol” field to search.
5. Select a stock from the search results by clicking it. 6. The Recent Headlines box displays news stories relating to the
selected company. Click a story link to have that story displayed in
the pane at the bottom, as shown in Figure 91-1.
Figure 91-1: The Sherlock Stocks channel showing a news story.
7. Click the Chart drop-down list to change the chart view from year to week to intraday. The drop-down list and the chart in the Week setting is shown in Figure 91-2.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
199
Task
91
tips
• •
Figure 91-2: The Sherlock Stocks channel showing the weekly chart.
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. Each time you add a stock name, the list of stocks expands. To remove a stock name, click its row and press Delete.
8. To save the chart, click it and drag it to the desktop. The picture clipping icon appears on the desktop. 9. To save a news story, click the news story headline and drag it to the desktop. 10. Double-click the clipping and the news story appears in your preferred Web browser.
cross-references
• •
You can also use Safari to visit your favorite stock Web sites. Using Safari is dis cussed in Part 11, “Surfing the Web with Safari.” To learn how to load addi tional channels, refer to Task 99, “Setting Sherlock Preferences.”
200
Task
92
Part 9
Searching for Films with Sherlock
A
pple’s Sherlock application provides the capability to explore entertainment information with your OS X system. By using the Movies channel (toolbar icon), you can instantly get up-to-date information about current offerings and showtimes at your favorite theatres. This task explains how.
notes
• •
• •
You can adjust the volume of the film preview to turn it down or off by clicking the small speaker icon in the bottom-left corner of the preview window. As with graphics in a Web browser, you can click the film poster graphic and drag it to the desktop as a graphic clipping. Doubleclicking the clipping dis plays the graphic in a clipping window.
1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. 2. Click the Movies icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the
Movies channel.
3. Enter a U.S. city or ZIP code in the Find Near field, and press the
Return key. The Sherlock movie window will fill with films running
in the area.
4. Click a film title in the Movies field. The information about the film appears. 5. Click a theatre to display showtimes, as shown in Figure 92-1.
This channel only works for movies being shown in the United States. To view a movie preview, Sherlock needs to know your Internet connection speed. This is set in System Preferences. If you haven’t yet specified your connec tion speed, Sherlock will open System Preferences and prompt you to do so before continuing.
Figure 92-1: The Sherlock Movies channel in Movies search mode.
6. To see showtimes for any day up to 2 weeks ahead (if available) choose the date from the Showtime drop-down list. 7. To watch the preview for the film, wait for it to finish loading and press play in the lower-right pane. 8. Click the Theaters button in the upper-left corner. The list of movies is replaced by a list of theaters, as shown in Figure 92-2.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
201
Task
92
tips
• • •
Figure 92-2: The Sherlock Movies channel in Theater search mode.
9. Click a theater name to select that theater. Click a film name in the top-center field to see show times for that film at that theater.
•
10. Click the Driving Directions button next to the theatre name at the bottom of the screen to see driving directions to the theatre, using the Phone Book channel, as shown in Figure 92-3.
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. If you are traveling, remem ber to change the ZIP code. The Theatre Information pane shows not only the address of the theatre, but also links to nearby restau rants, shopping, bars, coffee shops, and other busi nesses. Clicking the appro priate link brings those business listings up with the Phone Book channel. Click the Address Book icon near the theatre name at the bottom of the screen to add the business to your Address Book.
cross-reference
•
Figure 92-3: Driving directions to the theatre using the Phone Book channel.
Setting the OS X system volume is discussed in Task 5, “Setting the Volume.”
202
Task
93
Part 9
Searching the Phone Book with Sherlock
A notes
• •
•
•
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking on the magnifying glass icon. The print function provides a digest of information you can take with you when driving to the business (including the address, telephone number, driving directions, and a map). The content for Apple’s Phone Book is provided by Switchboard.com. To add, update, or remove a listing, click the Switchboard.com logo at the bottom of the Phone Book channel to visit the Switchboard Web site. Sherlock saves the locations entered in the Driving Directions field for later use. If you need to remove them, click in the field and select Clear Recent Addresses.
pple provides Internet access to business and personal listings through the Phone Book channel of Sherlock. Just as you would use the telephone directory, you can use the Phone Book channel (toolbar icon) to find out important information on businesses and people in locations you choose. This task shows how to use the Phone Book channel. 1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. 2. Click the Phone Book icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the
Phone Book channel.
3. To search for a business, click the yellow “i” button (for Yellow
Pages) below the Channels button. Then, enter a business listing
name in the Business Name or Category field.
4. Enter a city or state, or a ZIP code, in the “Name, City & State or
Zip” field.
5. Click the magnifying glass icon (or press Return on your keyboard)
to search for that business in the specified city or ZIP code. Figure
93-1 shows the results of searching for Apple’s offices.
6. To get driving directions, enter a city, state, and/or ZIP code in the
box labeled “Driving Directions From:” and press Return on your
keyboard. The driving directions are printed below the location you
entered, as shown in Figure 93-2.
Figure 93-1: The Sherlock Phone Book channel showing Apple’s offices.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
203
Task
93
tips
• • •
Figure 93-2: Driving directions.
7. To search for a person, click the white “i” button (for White Pages) below the Channels button, and enter the last name and location in the appropriate fields, as shown in Figure 93-3.
•
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. Entering a city and state pair requires a comma after the city name. If your search results are not what you expect, try a different spelling for a topic (such as “coffee shop” ver sus “coffeeshop”). To save a map for later use, drag it from the Sherlock window onto your desktop.
cross-reference Figure 93-3: Searching for people in the White Pages.
8. Click the magnifying glass icon (or press Return on your keyboard) to start the search. 9. Select a name from the list that appears, and repeat Step 6 to get
driving directions.
10. To print the directions, click the Print button above the map.
•
Printing driving directions and maps sometimes requires changing the page setup or format to fit the content on a page. For assistance with this, refer to Task 79, “Configuring Page Setup.”
204
Task
94
Part 9
Searching eBay with Sherlock
A
pple’s Sherlock application provides a search interface to the popular eBay online auction site. By using the eBay channel (toolbar icon), you can check out the vast array of offerings on this popular site. This task shows how to use Sherlock to search for items on eBay.
notes
• •
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking the magnifying glass icon.
1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. 2. Click the eBay icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the eBay
channel, shown in Figure 94-1.
Clicking the Bid link for an item causes Safari (or your default Web browser) to open and access the eBay Web site, where you are prompted to enter your eBay use rname and pass word before bidding. Your .Mac account user name and password will not work here. You must use/create an eBay account to pro ceed with the bidding process.
Figure 94-1: The Sherlock eBay channel.
3. Enter terms to search for in the Item Title field. 4. Click the magnifying glass icon to search for that item. Figure 94-2 shows the result of a search for the terms “labrador retriever.” The first item found is automatically selected, and the two detail fields in the bottom of the Sherlock eBay window show additional information on the selected item.
caution
•
A fact stated many times on the eBay Web site, but that deserves repeating nonetheless: Remember that bidding on an item through eBay is a binding contract between you and the seller. If your bid is the winning (highest) bid, you are required to pay for the item.
5. To see another item, click its title in the main field. The detail fields in the bottom of the Sherlock eBay window change to show the new item’s information. 6. Refine your search with the All Category, All Regions, and Items Ending First drop-down lists. 7. Limit your search by entering your minimum or maximum prices in the “Priced between” fields.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
205
Task
94
tips
• •
Figure 94-2: The Sherlock eBay channel showing a search result.
•
8. To track a selected auction, click the Track Listing button in the bottom-right of the Sherlock eBay window. 9. To see the auctions you are tracking, click the Track button just below the Item Title field. The Sherlock eBay window changes to show your tracked items, as shown in Figure 94-3.
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. Dragging an auction title off to the desktop creates a URL clipping. You can double-click the clipping to open the URL in your preferred Web browser. One of the advantages of using Sherlock’s eBay channel is the ability to track an auction. As most eBay enthusiasts know, the last few minutes of an auc tion are critical. Having quick access to (as well as being able to make easy comparisons of) multiple auctions at the same time is key. When you are tracking an auction, be sure to leave Sherlock open with the eBay chan nel active. Then, Sherlock will let you know before an auction closes.
cross-reference
•
Figure 94-3: The Sherlock eBay channel showing tracked auctions.
10. Click the item you are interested in to see its details.
You can also access eBay through Safari, which is dis cussed in Part 11, “Surfing the Web with Safari.”
206
Task
95
Part 9
Searching for Airplane Flights with Sherlock
A notes
• • • • •
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. If you know the city or air port code, you can enter those directly into the Departure City and Arrival City fields.
pple’s Sherlock application provides an easy way to search for airplane flights over the Internet. By using the Flights channel (toolbar icon), you can instantly get up-to-date information about flights to and from cities of your choice. This task shows how to use Sherlock to search for airplane flights. 1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. 2. Click the Flights icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the Flights
channel, shown in Figure 95-1.
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking the magnifying glass icon. The Sherlock Flight channel is useful for checking flight information within about a 24-hour window, and primarily shows only direct flights. When viewing a flight with multiple stops, select the part of the trip you want to learn about from the Legs pop-up menu.
Figure 95-1: The Sherlock Flights channel.
3. Click the downward-pointing arrow on the right end of the “Departure City or Airport Code” field to choose the departure city from the drop-down list shown in Figure 95-2. After choosing a departure city, Sherlock displays all the flights out of that city today. 4. To narrow down the list of flights, enter or choose an arrival city or airport in the Arrival City or Airport Code field. 5. Limit your search further, if you want, by choosing a specific airline from the Airline drop-down list.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
207
Task
95
tips
• •
Figure 95-2: Select a city from the drop-down list.
6. Click the magnifying glass icon (or press the Return key on your keyboard) to refresh the display and search for flights from the first location to the second location. Click a flight to view its details, as shown in Figure 95-3.
•
If you already know a flight number, enter it in the Flight # field and click the magnifying glass icon. The panes at the bottom of the window provide useful information such as gates and terminals. On the righthand side is even a map showing the current loca tion of an en route flight. Sherlock defaults to dis playing only flights and air ports within North America. To expand your search, click the small light switch icon in the bottom-right corner of the Flights chan nel to display the Flights preferences window.
cross-reference
•
Figure 95-3: Flights found are shown in the main field.
7. Sort the search results by clicking the headers in the main field. For example, to sort by flight number, click the Flight # column header.
You can print the details of a flight by first clicking inside the details pane and then choosing File ➪ Print. Learn more about printing in Part 8, “Printing and Faxing.”
208
Task
96
Part 9
Using the Dictionary Feature of Sherlock
N notes
• • •
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking the magnifying glass icon. Choosing File ➪ Print causes all information about the word (including the contents of both the Description and Thesaurus windows) to be printed. The source for Sherlock’s Dictionary channel is the American Heritage Dictionary. Click the Dictionary.com logo in the bottom-left part of the screen to learn more.
ot everyone is good at spelling or choosing the correct word. Apple’s Sherlock application provides a convenient interface to search online dictionaries and thesauruses. This task explains how to use Sherlock to search for words and meanings. 1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. 2. Click the Dictionary icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the Dictionary channel. 3. Enter a word to search for in the Word to Define field. 4. Click the magnifying glass icon to search for the desired word. Figure 96-1 shows the result of a search. 5. The words “Reptilian age” shown in Figure 96-1 are underlined because they are a Web link. Click the link to show the link in your preferred Web browser. 6. If you misspell a word, the search shows spelling suggestions in the field just below the Word to Define field, as shown in Figure 96-2.
Figure 96-1: A completed word search.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
209
Task
96
tips
• •
Figure 96-2: Misspelling a search word results in spelling suggestions.
7. If you searched for a word whose meaning matches that of other words, those are displayed under the Thesaurus heading in the lower left of the Sherlock Dictionary window, as shown in Figure 96-3. Double-click a word in the Thesaurus listing to see its definition above it.
•
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. If you are not interested in using either the dictionary or the thesaurus, click the double horizontal line in the middle of the Sherlock Dictionary window and drag the divider up or down to hide the feature you don’t want to see. The words in the Dictionary and Thesaurus windows are listed alphabetically. Click the small arrow in the section header to adjust whether they’re listed A to Z or Z to A.
cross-reference
•
Figure 96-3: Thesaurus listing.
Printing is discussed in Part 8, “Printing and Faxing.”
210
Task
97
Part 9
Translating with Sherlock
A
pple’s Sherlock provides a convenient Internet interface to an online translation service. By using the Translation channel, you can convert words, sentences, paragraphs, or long discussions from a foreign language so that you can understand what is being said.
notes
•
•
•
The Sherlock Translation channel can be useful if you are exploring the Web and find a page that seems to be about something you are interested in, but can’t read the language on the Web page. Select the text you’re interested in, copy it from the Web browser, and paste it into Sherlock’s Translation channel.
2. Click the Translation icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the
Translation channel, shown in Figure 97-1.
Choosing File ➪ Print causes both the original and translated text to be printed together. If you want to print only one or the other, copy the text and paste it into a TextEdit file before printing. If you attempt to translate to a language other than the native language used on your computer, you may notice some characters aren’t displayed properly. This is common and can occur if you’re missing a font capable of displaying characters that are specific to the language in question.
caution
•
1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock.
The Translation channel provides an automated translation that is not veri fied by a human being. Because of this, errors do occur and may sometimes even cause the translation to be difficult to under stand. As stated in the bottom of the Translation channel, “it is not advisable to rely upon this translation where absolute accuracy is required.”
Figure 97-1: The Sherlock Translation channel.
3. Enter text into the Original Text field. 4. Choose a language from and to pair by clicking the drop-down list in the middle of the Sherlock – Translation window, as shown in Figure 97-2. 5. Click the Translate button. The text in the Original Text field is translated from one language to the other, and the translation appears in the field in the bottom half of the Sherlock – Translation window, as shown in Figure 97-3.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
211
Task
97
tip
•
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock.
Figure 97-2: Choosing a language from and to pair with the drop-down list.
Figure 97-3: The result of the translation.
cross-references
• •
Printing is discussed in Part 8, “Printing and Faxing.” Using TextEdit is discussed in Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit.”
212
Task
98
Part 9
Searching AppleCare with Sherlock
A
pple maintains a large amount of technical information and advice in its online knowledge base. This task shows how to use the Sherlock AppleCare channel to search for technical information on Apple hardware and software. 1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock.
notes
• •
You can press the Return key on your keyboard after entering the keywords, instead of clicking the magnifying glass icon.
2. Click the AppleCare icon in the Sherlock toolbar to switch to the
AppleCare channel, shown in Figure 98-1.
The knowledge base is the same information source accessed by Apple service technicians.
Figure 98-1: The Sherlock AppleCare channel.
3. Enter a term or terms to search for in the “Topic or Description” field. 4. Click the magnifying glass icon to search for the desired topic or description. Figure 98-2 shows the result of a search. The first result is automatically selected and displayed in the field at the bottom of the Sherlock – AppleCare window. 5. To read the selected document without having to scroll as much, click the double horizontal line in the middle of the Sherlock – AppleCare window and drag the divider up to enlarge the display area, as shown in Figure 98-3.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
213
Task
98
tips
• • •
Figure 98-2: Results found in the AppleCare knowledge base.
•
You need an active Internet connection to use Sherlock. You can find information in the knowledge base about every Mac model ever manufactured. Limiting your search or being as specific as possi ble in your search criteria usually provides better results. Want to search for multiple topics at the same time? Choose File ➪ New to launch a new instance of the Sherlock window, where you can select the AppleCare channel and enter new search terms.
Figure 98-3: The Sherlock – AppleCare window can be adjusted for easier reading.
6. To save a link to a knowledge base article you found, click the title in the search results field and drag it to the desktop. The URL stays on the desktop as a clipping. 7. Double-click the clipping to view the knowledge base article in your preferred Web browser.
cross-reference
•
Accessing Apple’s Help files from any other appli cation is discussed in Task 245, “Launching the Help Viewer.”
214
Task
99
Part 9
Setting Sherlock Preferences
S
herlock is a versatile program, but it can be even better with a little customization. This task covers using other channels (aside from the default channels) and customizing the toolbar in Sherlock.
notes
• •
• •
You need an active Internet connection to add and access Other Channels in Sherlock. If you clicked “Cancel” to the alert that first appeared after clicking the Other Channels link, no channels will be loaded. If you decide you want to access those channels at a later time, choose Help ➪ Sherlock Help, and search for “other channels.” Click the link labeled “Restoring the Other Channels collection,” and follow the directions listed.
1. Click the Sherlock icon in the Dock to start Sherlock. The Sherlock Channels window appears. 2. Click the Channels icon in the toolbar to view the default channels. 3. Click the Other Channels folder to display the non-Apple channels, as shown in Figure 99-1. (Note that Apple will alert you when the content from these channels is not monitored by Apple. Click Proceed when prompted.)
Aside from the channels displayed by default in the toolbar, the Apple Channels collection also contains the News (Japan) channel, as of this writing. The Channels Menu folder contains those channels displayed in the Channels menu at the top of the screen.
Figure 99-1: Other Channels in Sherlock.
4. Double-click the name of a channel to load it. For example, doubleclick the Shop Channel to shop Amazon.com through Sherlock, as shown in Figure 99-2. 5. To search for additional channels from third-party companies that are not already loaded into Sherlock, click the Internet Channel in the toolbar and search for “Sherlock Channels.” 6. When you find a channel you want to load, follow the directions provided by the channel’s creator to load the channel into Sherlock. Typically, this involves clicking the appropriate link in your Web browser and then specifying where in Sherlock the channel should be located, as shown in Figure 99-3.
Using .Mac and Sherlock
215
Task
99
tips
•
• Figure 99-2: The Shop Channel in Sherlock.
7. To rearrange channels loaded in Sherlock, drag and drop the channel names between folders in the Collections list. For example, to move the Shop Channel to the Toolbar, click the Shop channel once in the Other Channels listing to highlight it. Then drag its name over the Toolbar icon in the Collections list.
•
You can rearrange the order of the channels listed in the toolbar by choosing View ➪ Customizing Toolbar. You can also access the Customizing Toolbar link by Ctrl-clicking anywhere on the toolbar. There are many Web sites with links to other Sherlock channels, but here are two to get you started quickly: www. sherlockers.com and http:// sherlock.clan-mac. com. You can use the My Channels folder to provide quick access to your favorite channels, if you don’t have room or don’t want to list them all in the toolbar.
cross-reference
•
Figure 99-3: Specifying where to add a new channel in Sherlock.
Using the Apple Channels in Sherlock is discussed in several steps in this part, starting with Task 89, “Searching the Internet with Sherlock.”
Part 10: Correspondence with Mail and Address Book Task 100: Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account Task 101: Starting Mail and Importing Email Task 102: Reading Email Task 103: Sending Email Task 104: More about Sending Email Task 105: Adding a Signature File in Mail Task 106: Sorting Mail Task 107: Searching Mail Task 108: Replying to Mail Task 109: Forwarding Mail Task 110: Working with Draft Emails Task 111: Adding to the Address Book from Mail Task 112: Opening and Saving Mail Attachments Task 113: Mail Tricks Task 114: Editing New Messages Task 115: Filtering Your Email to Reduce Junk Mail Task 116: Using the Address Book Task 117: Removing an Address Book Entry Task 118: Adding a Group to the Address Book Task 119: Using Mail and the Address Book Together Task 120: Customizing Address Book Entries
218
Task
100
Part 10
Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account
E notes
•
•
•
You can repeat the steps in this task to add additional .Mac accounts, or even to add email accounts you have with other service providers. If you’re adding a non-.Mac account, simply choose the appropriate account type (such as POP) from the drop-down list in the Mail preferences window. Wondering about the other types of accounts listed in the Account Types menu? Post Office Protocol (POP) is a set of rules and stan dards that email clients use to communicate with an email server. Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) is a client/server protocol for receiving email from a local server. With IMAP, mail is received and held by an Internet server and subsequently retrieved, searched, read, or deleted by the client. Exchange enables you to connect to a Microsoft Exchange mail server without using Outlook or Outlook Express. To temporarily disable an email account without removing it from Mail, uncheck “Enable this account” from the Advanced settings.
mail is one of the most common uses of computing. This task (and several tasks in Part 10) will explain how to configure and use the included Mail application to send and receive email. Specifically, this task presents how to configure Mail to send and receive email using a free trial .Mac account as an example. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window.
2. Click the .Mac icon to display the .Mac pane of the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 100-1.
Figure 100-1: The .Mac tab of the System Preferences window.
3. Enter your .Mac member name and password if you have not done so already, and close that window. 4. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to open the Mail program. Note that if you followed Steps 1 to 3 and successfully logged into your .Mac account in the System Preferences window, Mail will automatically set up your .Mac email account the first time you open the program. This means that you do not have to continue with the following steps. However, if you do not have a .Mac account, or if you wish to use a different email account, continue with Step 5. 5. Choose Mail ➪ Preferences, and click Accounts. 6. Click the “Add Account” (+) button in the bottom of the window, and choose “.Mac” from the Account Type drop-down list that appears on the right, as shown in Figure 100-2.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
219
Task
100
tips
•
Figure 100-2: The Accounts pane of the Mail Preferences window.
7. Edit the options below “Account Type” as needed. 8. Click the Special Mailboxes tab to display the screen shown in Figure 100-3, and adjust the settings as needed.
Figure 100-3: Setting rules for special mailboxes.
9. Click the Advanced tab to display the screen, and adjust those set tings as needed.
10. Click the red button in the upper-left corner of the window to close the Mail Preferences window. Choose Save when prompted. You are now ready to use Mail to send and receive email.
•
If you prefer to use another email application, open Mail and choose Mail ➪ Preferences. Click the General button, then the Default Email Reader dropdown list, and finally choose Select. A File browser dialog appears, and you can use it to find and select your preferred email client. Not sure which icon in the dock is for System Preferences? Hold your mouse over the icons for a few seconds to see the corresponding names of each icon.
cross-reference
•
Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.”
220
Task
101
notes
•
•
• •
Many other email applica tions exist, either as dedi cated email applications (such as Microsoft Outlook) or as one part of a bigger package’s functionality, (such as Netscape Communicator). However, OS X Mail is designed to work well with other OS X applications. The first time you open Mail, it also prompts you to review the new features of Mail. To access this part of Mail Help at a later time, choose Help ➪ Mail Help from within the Mail program.
Part 10
Starting Mail and Importing Email
O
S X includes the Mail application to use for reading and writing email. In this task, you’ll see how to start Mail and how to import mail from another email application. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. If this is the first
time you’re opening the program, a dialog appears asking if you
would like to import mailboxes from another mail client, as shown
in Figure 101-1.
Figure 101-1: You can import email from another email client on your OS X system.
2. Click the Yes button in the dialog or, if you’ve previously clicked No in that dialog box, choose File ➪ Import Mailboxes to display the window shown in Figure 101-2.
Empty mailboxes are not imported into Mail during the Import process. If you’re trying to import mail from applications not listed in the Import window, try choosing “Other” to look for mail in the standard “mbox” format. Be aware that mailboxes from Microsoft Outlook and Microsoft Outlook Express for the PC can’t be imported into Mail.
Figure 101-2: The first step in importing mailboxes is to select where the data comes from.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 3. Choose the type of mailbox by clicking the radio button next to the email application’s name.
221
Task
4. Click the >> button in the lower right of the Import Mailboxes window, and follow the directions shown for the type of mailboxes you’d like to import. 5. Click the >> button in the lower right of the Import Mailboxes window again. The email application chosen in Figure 101-2 starts, as needed, and the mail is imported into OS X Mail.
101
tip
•
All imported mail is auto matically placed into a new mailbox titled “Import” in Mail. To view the contents of that mailbox, click the arrow to the left of its name in the mailbox list. (If you don’t see any mailboxes on the screen, choose View ➪ Show Mailboxes in Mail.) To move a mailbox out of the Import section, click and drag the mailbox’s name into a new section of the mailboxes list.
cross-reference
•
Reading email is discussed in Task 102, “Reading Email.”
222
Task
102
notes
•
•
The Mail icon in the Dock has a red number on it, showing the number of unread emails in the inbox. The red number disappears after you’ve read all new messages.
Part 10
Reading Email
O
S X includes Mail, an application for sending and reading email. Your mail is organized in folders that Apple calls mailboxes, which are then displayed in a pane that looks and acts like a drawer. This task introduces how to use Mail to read email and create mailboxes. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 102-1.
To create a subfolder, use a slash in the name. For example, you could create a folder named “Apple” inside the “read” folder by entering the Name as “read/Apple.”
Figure 102-1: The Mail application window.
2. Click the email shown in the Inbox to display the contents of the message, as shown in Figure 102-2.
Figure 102-2: Select a message to read it.
3. To make a new mailbox, from the menu bar choose Mailbox ➪ New Mailbox. A dialog appears, as shown in Figure 102-3.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
223
Task
102
tips
•
Figure 102-3: Making a new mailbox.
4. Choose the location of the new mailbox from the drop-down list. Click the drop-down arrow, and choose On My Mac.
•
5. Type the name Read in the Name field. 6. Click the OK button. The dialog closes, and the newly created mailbox appears in the Mail Drawer on the side of the Mail application window. 7. To move the read message to the new folder, from the menu bar choose Message ➪ Move To ➪ Read.
•
8. Click the Read folder to show its contents in the main pane, as shown in Figure 102-4. 9. Click the message to read the email in the lower pane of the Mail window.
Switch between the main mailboxes quickly with key board shortcuts: The In mail box is Ô-1, the Out mailbox is Ô-2, and so on. See the list by choosing from the menu bar Mailbox ➪ Show, and read the keyboard short cuts shown on the menu. If you have too many mail boxes to view at one time in the Mail Drawer, Ctrl click in the Drawer and choose the Use Small Mailbox Icons option. To switch back, ctrl-click again and uncheck the Use Small Mailbox Icons option. To move the Mail Drawer from the right side of the Mail window to the left side, move the mail window so that there is desktop vis ible on the left side of the Mail window, then click on a message in the main pane of the Mail window and drag (but don’t drop) the message off to the left side. The Mail Drawer will shift to the left side. Drag an email over the right edge of the screen to reverse it.
cross-references
• •
Figure 102-4: Transferred mail now resides in the Read folder.
Configuring your OS X sys tem to use your .Mac email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account.” Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.”
224
Task
103
Part 10
Sending Email
T
he OS X Mail application allows you to send and receive email. This task shows how to send an email using the built-in Mail application.
1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 103-1.
notes
• • •
You can also start a new message by choosing File ➪ New Message from the menu bar, or pressing Ô-N on the keyboard. Unread email has a blue dot in the leftmost column. You can also empty the Trash with the keyboard shortcut Ô-K.
Figure 103-1: The Mail application window.
2. Click the New button on the Mail window toolbar. The New Message window appears, as shown in Figure 103-2.
Figure 103-2: The New Message window.
3. Enter an email address in the To field. For this example, you can send yourself the email, so enter your .Mac (or other) email address. 4. Enter a subject in the Subject field. The name of the New Message window changes to the subject when you enter a subject.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 5. Enter some content in the main field of the email. The message window should now resemble the window shown in Figure 103-3.
225
Task
103
tip
•
If you have multiple email accounts, you can use the Account drop-down list on the New Window screen to specify from which account the email should be sent.
Figure 103-3: The New Message window, ready to send.
6. Click the Send button. The new message window closes as Mail sends the message. 7. To retrieve new email from the mail servers, click the Get Mail button on the Mail window. The new message header appears in the main pane, as shown in Figure 103-4.
cross-references
• • •
Figure 103-4: The new message in the Mail window.
8. To delete a message, click it to select it, then click the Delete button on the Mail window toolbar. 9. Empty the Trash by choosing Mailbox ➪ Erase Deleted Messages from the menu bar.
•
Configuring your OS X sys tem to use your .Mac email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account.” Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” If you have a signature file (that is, content you want to add to the bottom of all your emails), it appears in the New Message window, so you can turn it off as needed. Creating a signa ture file is discussed in Task 105, “Adding a Signature File in Mail.” You can set fonts and col ors, and cut, copy, paste, and edit your reply email just as you can text in gen eral in OS X. See Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit,” for information on how to enter and edit text in most OS X applications.
226
Task
104
notes
• •
You can also attach a file simply by dragging it from your desktop into the New Message window.
Part 10
More about Sending Email
S
ometimes you may want to include a file as an attachment to your email message, or you may want to apply special formatting to your messages. This task shows additional features the built-in OS X Mail application offers for composing email. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application starts and appears on the desktop. 2. Click the New button on the Mail window toolbar. The New
Message window appears, as shown in Figure 104-1.
Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a file open or save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop.
Figure 104-1: The New Message window.
3. Enter an email address in the To field. For this example, you can send yourself the email, so enter your .Mac (or other) email address. 4. Enter a subject in the Subject field. The name of the New Message window changes to the subject when you enter a subject. 5. Enter some content in the main field of the email. 6. Click the Attach button in the New Message window. A file browser dialog appears. 7. Use the file browser sheet to navigate the OS X system file structure, select a file to send with the email as an attachment, and click “Choose File,” as shown in Figure 104-2.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
227
Task
104
tips
•
Figure 104-2: The New Message window showing the file browser dialog.
8. Click the Fonts button in the New Message window. The Font window appears, as shown in Figure 104-3. To edit the text, first select it in the email and then make changes in the Font panel
• •
When sending files to Windows users, click the book labeled “Send Windows Friendly Attachments” in the file browser dialog. This way you avoid sending the preview icon to someone who wouldn’t be able to use it anyway (and might be con fused by receiving it). Select multiple files to attach at once, by holding down the Ô key while selecting the filenames. If you need to save the email to send at a later time, click the Save As Draft button instead of the Send button in the New Message window. Later, look for your saved file in the Drafts folder.
Figure 104-3: The Font window in a New Message window.
9. Click the Colors button in the New Message window. The Color panel appears, as shown in Figure 104-4. To add color to text, first select the text in the email and then click a color in the Color panel.
cross-references
• •
Figure 104-4: The Colors panel in a New Message window.
10. When you are finished composing the email, click the Send button. The new message window closes as Mail sends the message.
• •
Sending email is discussed in Task 103, “Sending Email.” Configuring your OS X sys tem to use your .Mac email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account.” Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” The Font and Color windows are discussed in Task 60, “Setting Font Appearance.”
228
Task
105
notes
• •
The Mail Preferences win dow can be shown with the keyboard shortcut Option-,. When selecting a signature, if you choose Randomly or Sequentially, Mail will choose a different signa ture for each email mes sage you send out. This avoids making your email signatures seem repetitive, especially if you are using a quotation.
Part 10
Adding a Signature File in Mail
M
ost email applications allow you to create a signature file (sometimes abbreviated as a sigfile) that includes information. Typical content that people put in a sigfile includes their name, email address, title or responsibilities (if the sigfile is for a professional purpose), a Web site URL, or even a quotation. This task shows you how to create a signature file in OS X’s Mail application. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop.
2. From the menu bar, choose Mail ➪ Preferences. 3. Click the Signatures button on the Preferences window toolbar.
The Signatures pane appears, as shown in Figure 105-1.
Figure 105-1: The Mail Preferences window with the Signatures pane.
4. Click the Add Signature button. The signature sheet appears, as shown in Figure 105-2.
caution
•
Signature files can be help ful, and they can be annoy ing. In general, you should think carefully before putting too much information in a sigfile. For example, it is almost never a good idea to include your home address or telephone numbers, and including a cute half-page ASCII drawing of a cat is probably not a good idea either. In general, a good rule of thumb is to keep your sigfile to four lines of text or less. Finally, remem ber that including graphics and photos in a signature will greatly increase the download time and file size of your email, which may make your email less appealing to friends and family.
Figure 105-2: The signature sheet.
5. Enter a description in the Description field. 6. Enter the content of the signature file.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 7. Click the OK button. The signature sheet closes, and the description of the new signature is shown in the Description field of the Signatures pane, as shown in Figure 105-1.
229
Task
105
8. Use the Automatically Insert Signature drop-down list to specify if a certain sigfile should be used by default or if the system should switch between multiple sigfiles automatically or sequentially. 9. Adjust the remaining options as needed, and click the red button in the upper-left corner to exit the Preferences window.
tips
•
•
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right in the menu bar. Starting your sigfile with two dashes (hyphens) on a line by themselves is a common practice that allows a mail server to filter out the sigfile if you are sending mail to a mailing list that has a digest format.
cross-reference
•
Creating an email message is discussed in Task 103, “Sending Email.”
230
Task
106
notes
• •
The column that the mail is sorted on is highlighted. In Figure 106-1, the Date Received column header is highlighted. When you choose to view email messages by “thread,” you can view those emails that are part of a chain conversation together in the list of mes sages. Click the small blue arrow in the first column of the message list to expand or collapse a thread. Or, choose View ➪ Expand All Threads or Collapse All Threads to do so all at once. Customize the color that threads are shown in, by choosing Mail ➪ Preferences.
Part 10
Sorting Mail
E
mail can be useful, but, like a physical letter, it’s sometimes difficult to find the one you want at any given time. This task shows how to sort your email in OS X’s Mail application. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 106-1. By
default, the email is sorted by date from oldest to newest.
Figure 106-1: The Mail application window.
2. Click the Date Received column header. The small triangle reverses it direction, and the email is now sorted in the In pane from newest to oldest. 3. Click the Date Received column header to return the sort to the order shown in Figure 106-1. 4. Click the From column header to sort the mail alphabetically according to its sender. 5. Click the From column header to reverse the sorting, then click it again to restore the previous order. 6. Click the Subject column header to sort the email by subject, as shown in Figure 106-2.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
231
Task
106
tip
•
Click a column header, such as the Date Received header, and drag it to the left or right and drop it to rearrange the column order.
Figure 106-2: Sort by Subject by clicking the Subject column header.
7. Reverse the Subject sort by clicking the Sort column header a second time, then click a third time to return it to the order shown in Figure 106-3. 8. Click the column with a round dot in the header to sort mail by read and unread status. 9. Click the column with a large comma (or word balloon shape) in the header to sort mail by replied to and not replied to status. 10. Choose View ➪ Organize by Thread to sort the email by “conversation.” Then, click the small triangle to the left of the thread name to expand or collapse the thread, as shown in Figure 106-3.
cross-references
•
Figure 106-3: View by threads.
• •
Configuring your OS X sys tem to use your .Mac email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail with to Check Your Email Account.” Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” Reading email is discussed in Task 102, “Reading Email.”
232
Task
107
notes
•
•
Part 10
Searching Mail
E
mail can accumulate like physical mail, and finding a particular email can be difficult. This task shows how to search email in the Mail application included with OS X. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 107-1.
If, when following the steps in this task, you find unex pected results after Step 2, click the small arrow next to the magnifying glass in the search window and confirm that “Entire Message” is selected under “In.” Mail begins searching as soon as you type the very first letter in the search box. For example, if you set the search parameters to look only at the “From” field of all the messages in your Inbox, and then type “T” in the search box, it will dis play messages from anyone who’s name begins with “T.” Adding an “i” will narrow down the search results, and adding an “m” will fur ther narrow the results to show messages from “Tim.”
Figure 107-1: The Mail application window.
2. Click in the Search field in the upper right of the Mail window, and enter a word that is in one of your emails. 3. Press the Return key on the keyboard, and the result is similar to that shown in Figure 107-2.
Figure 107-2: The Mail search results.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 4. Click the found email to read it.
233
Task
5. Click the small X in the Search field to close the Search results and to return to the view shown in Figure 107-1.
107
6. Click the small downward-pointing triangle in the Search field to display the drop-down list shown in Figure 107-3.
tips
•
•
Figure 107-3: Narrow the search to certain parts of the emails.
The Find Panel shown in Figure 107-4 has a replace field (similar to the “Find & Replace” feature of some word processors) that can be used to edit email that you’re currently composing. If you want Mail to display only messages you manu ally select and hide all others in the list, first high light the messages. Then, from the View menu, choose Focus On Selected Messages. To see all mes sages once again, from the View menu, choose Show All Messages.
7. To search in the currently open email, press Ô-F to display the Find panel shown in Figure 107-4.
cross-references
•
Figure 107-4: Use the Find panel to search within the selected email.
8. To close the Find panel, click the close button on the far-left edge of the Find panel title bar.
• •
Configuring your OS X sys tem to use your .Mac email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account.” Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” Sorting email is discussed in Task 106, “Sorting Mail.”
234
Task
108
notes
•
• • •
Part 10
Replying to Mail
W
hen you receive email, you can reply to the message either by creating a new message or by using the reply features built into Mail. This task shows how to reply to an email you have received with the built-in Mail application in OS X. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 108-1.
By default, the file browser sheet opens to your user directory on the OS X sys tem. Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a file open or save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop. If you set up a signature file, you also have a dropdown list available to add or remove a signature from the reply email. When sending attachments to users of Windows-based computers, check the “Send Windows Friendly Attachments” box in the file browser sheet. If you have multiple email accounts, you also have a drop-down list to select the account from which to send your email. By default, when you click “Reply” or “Reply All,” a reply message window will open using the account that the original message was sent to.
Figure 108-1: The Mail application window.
2. Find an email you want to reply to. 3. Click the Reply button in the Mail window toolbar. The Reply window appears, as shown in Figure 108-2.
Figure 108-2: The Mail Reply window.
4. Type something, and text you enter with the keyboard appears where the cursor is in the reply email.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 5. To add an attachment, click the Attach button in the Reply toolbar to display the file browser sheet shown in Figure 108-3.
235
Task
108
tips
• •
To reply to everyone on an email that’s addressed to more than just you, click the Reply All button. To send a copy of a mes sage to someone without other recipients knowing, choose View ➪ Bcc Header and add the email address in the Bcc: field of the message.
Figure 108-3: The file browser sheet.
6. Use the file browser sheet to navigate the OS X system and find a file you want to include in the email. 7. Click the file to select it. 8. Click the Open button. The file browser sheet closes and the file is inserted in the reply email where the cursor was, as shown in Figure 108-4.
cross-references
• •
Figure 108-4: An attached file added to your email reply.
9. To send the email when you are finished composing the reply, click the Send button. The Reply window closes, and a copy of the email is saved in the Sent mail folder.
•
Configuring your OS X sys tem to use your .Mac email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account.” Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” You can set fonts and col ors, and cut, copy, paste, and edit your reply email just as you can text in gen eral in OS X. See Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit,” for information on how to enter and edit text in OS X applications.
236
Task
109
notes
• •
Part 10
Forwarding Mail
S
ometimes, there is mail you want to send to other people, or perhaps to another email account of your own. This task shows how to forward email using the Mac OS X built-in Mail application. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 109-1.
Cc is an abbreviation for “carbon copy.” By default, when you for ward an email, the entire message, as well as the headers (From, To, Date, Subject), is sent to the recipient. If you want to for ward just a portion of an email (such as only the message, but not the head ers), select the portion of the original email that you want to forward before clicking the Forward button.
Figure 109-1: The Mail application window.
2. Find an email you want to forward to someone. 3. Click the Forward button in the Mail window toolbar. The Fwd window appears, as shown in Figure 109-2.
Figure 109-2: The Mail Fwd (Forward) window.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 4. Enter an email address in the To field. For this example, you can send yourself the email, so enter your email address.
237
Task
5. Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the next field. Enter another address in the Cc: field if you wish to.
109
6. Press the Tab key again. The entire Subject line is selected. Edit or replace the Subject if you wish. 7. Press the Tab key again, and the cursor moves to the top of the content pane. Enter some content in the main field of the email as an introductory message to the people you are forwarding the original message to. The message window should now resemble the window shown in Figure 109-3.
tips
•
• •
• Figure 109-3: The Fwd window, ready to send.
8. Click the Send button. The Fwd message window closes as Mail sends the message.
If you want to forward an email to someone, but keep the original sender’s address in the “From:” field, you can “redirect” the mes sage. Choose Message ➪ Redirect instead of Forward. To forward an email to more than one email address, simply separate the address with commas. To send a copy of a mes sage to someone without other recipients knowing, choose View ➪ Bcc Header and add the email address in the Bcc: field of the mes sage. Bcc is an abbreviation for “blind carbon copy.” You can forward multiple messages at once by selecting them from within the message list (you don’t have to open them) and clicking “Forward.” If you’ve set up your Mail to view threads (View ➪ Organize by Threads), you can also forward an entire thread of messages by selecting the thread before clicking “Forward.”
cross-reference
•
You can set fonts and col ors, and cut, copy, paste, and edit your reply email just as you can text in gen eral in OS X. See Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit,” for information on how to enter and edit text in OS X applications.
238
Task
110
notes
• •
•
You can specify a different mailbox for saved messages (drafts) by selecting the mailbox and choosing Mailbox ➪ Use This Mailbox For ➪ Drafts.
Part 10
Working with Draft Emails
O
ccasionally you may not have time to finish writing an email in one sitting, or you may need to gather more information, or perhaps you just need to leave the message alone while you think. This task shows how to save an email message in progress as a draft, and how to reopen a draft and continue editing it. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application starts and appears on the desktop. 2. Click the New button on the Mail window toolbar. The New Message window appears, as shown in Figure 110-1.
If you stop working on a message for a few minutes, it automatically saves itself into the Drafts folder. So, for example, if you go to lunch and leave a new message you’re composing up on your screen, when you return to your desk it will be saved in the Drafts mailbox. Once a message has been sent, it is automatically removed from the Drafts mailbox.
Figure 110-1: The New Message window.
3. Enter an email address in the To field, a subject in the Subject field, and some content in the main field of the email, or whatever portion of these you want to (after all, the point is you’re not going to send the email yet). 4. Click the Save As Draft button in the New Message toolbar. 5. Click the red dot in the upper-left corner to close the New Message window and return to the main Mail window. If the Mail Drawer to the right (or left) is not open, click the Mailboxes button on the Mail window toolbar to open the Mail Drawer. The Drafts mailbox now has (1) next to it, as shown in Figure 110-2. 6. Click the Drafts mailbox in the Mail Drawer. The main pane shows the information for draft emails you have not yet sent. 7. Click the draft email to show it in the lower pane of the Mail window.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
239
Task
110
tips
• •
Figure 110-2: The Mail window showing a Draft message’s presence.
8. Double-click the email in the top pane of the main Mail window, and the message appears in the compose window, as shown in Figure 110-4.
•
9. Edit any part of the email, and then click the close button without sending or saving as a draft. A dialog appears, as shown in Figure 110-3.
•
You can also save a Reply, a Reply (to) All, or a Forward as a Draft message. Quitting the Mail applica tion automatically saves any unfinished email to the Drafts mailbox. To move the Mail Drawer from the right side of the Mail window to the left side, move the mail window so that there is desktop vis ible on the left side of the Mail window, then click on a message in the main pane of the Mail window and drag (but don’t drop) the message off to the left side. The Mail Drawer will shift to the left side. Drag an email over the right edge of the screen to reverse it. Pressing Ô-3 automatically opens the Drafts mailbox.
cross-reference
•
Figure 110-3: An unfinished email being closed without sending or saving it.
10. Click the Don’t Save button to delete the message without saving it, the Cancel button to close the sheet and leave the message untouched, or the Save button to save the message in the Drafts folder.
You can set fonts and col ors, and cut, copy, paste, and edit your reply email just as you can text in gen eral in OS X. See Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit,” for information on how to enter and edit text in OS X applications.
240
Task
111
notes
• • •
The menu command Message ➪ Add Sender to Address Book has the keyboard shortcut of Ô-Y.
Part 10
Adding to the Address Book from Mail
T
he OS X Mail application is designed to work with other portions of OS X. This task shows how to add email addresses from received emails to the Address Book application built into OS X. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop.
2. Find an email with an address you want to add to the Address Book in the main pane of the Mail window. Click the email shown in the Inbox to display the contents of the message, as shown in Figure 111-1.
If you include more than one email address in the To: or Cc: field, be sure to separate them with a comma. Once an address has been added to your Address Book, you only need to type a portion of the address in the To: or Cc: field and Mail will attempt to finish the address for you. For exam ple, if you type “W” in the To: field, Mail will display all contacts in your address book beginning with “w.” Select one from the list or continue typing to finish the address.
Figure 111-1: Select a message to read it.
3. From the menu bar, choose Message ➪ Add Sender to Address Book, as shown in Figure 111-2. 4. Click the New button on the Mail window toolbar. A New Message window appears. 5. Click the Address button on the New Message window toolbar. 6. Select a name from the Address Book by clicking it, as shown in Figure 111-3. 7. Click the To: button to enter the selected address in the To: field of the New Message window.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
241
Task
111
tips
• •
Figure 111-2: Add the sender to the Address Book application.
Figure 111-3: Selecting a name from the Address Book.
8. Click the Cc: button to enter the selected address in the Cc: field of the New Message window. 9. Click the red Close button in the Addresses title bar to close the
Addresses window.
10. Finish the email, and send it as you would normally.
You can use the search field in the Addresses win dow to search for a name, if you have trouble finding the name in your Address Book. You can also add to your Address Book simply by clicking once on any email address in any message to select it. Then, click the small arrow that appears to the right of the address and choose “Add to Address Book” from the drop-down list that appears. If “Add to Address Book” is not avail able in that menu, but “Open in Address Book” is available, the address has already been added to your address book. Choosing “Open in Address Book” allows you to edit the saved address as needed.
cross-reference
•
You can set fonts and col ors, and cut, copy, paste, and edit your reply email just as you can text in gen eral in OS X. See Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit,” for information on how to enter and edit text in OS X applications.
242
Task
112
notes
• •
Part 10
Opening and Saving Mail Attachments
I
n addition to the content of the email, people may send attached files that you want to save for future reference. This task shows how to save email attachments using the Mail application built into OS X. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 112-1.
Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a File Open or Save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop. If you receive an attach ment that won’t open on your computer, check to determine the file’s format. It’s likely that you don’t have an application capa ble of opening that file for mat. If it’s a .doc file (Microsoft Word) and you don’t have Microsoft Word, request that the sender resave the file as .rtf (Rich Text Format) and send it again. Another option is to have the sender provide you with a PDF file, which can easily be opened on most any type of computer in a vari ety of applications.
Figure 112-1: The Mail application window.
2. Find an email with an attached file in the main pane of the Mail window. Click the email shown in the Inbox to display the contents of the message, as shown in Figure 112-2.
caution
•
File attachments are a com mon way to send viruses. In general, you should think carefully before opening any file attachment. Many viruses “spoof” email addresses to make the message appear to come from someone you know, so use caution regardless of who the message appears to come from.
Figure 112-2: Select a message to read it.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 3. Double-click an attached file to open it with the default application for that file type, or Ctrl-click the attached file icon in the email to display the menu shown in Figure 112-3, and specify which application with which to open the file.
243
Task
112
tips
•
Figure 112-3: Select an attached file and Ctrl-click it.
• 4. To save the attached file to the default downloads directory, choose Save to Downloads Directory from the menu shown in Figure 112-3 or click the Save All button in the message header. 5. To save the attached file to a different location, choose the Save Attachment command or click the Save All button in the message header. A file browser sheet appears, as shown in Figure 112-4.
To quickly find an email with an attachment, choose View ➪ Columns ➪ Attachments. The Attachments column will appear to the right of the Date Received column, and it will display paperclip icons next to any message containing an attachment. Click the paperclip icon at the top of the Attachment column to sort emails according to whether or not they have attachments. You can also save an attachment to your desktop folder simply by dragging it from the message window to your desktop. Another option is to choose File ➪ Save Attachments.
cross-reference
•
Figure 112-4: Use the file browser sheet to choose a location to save to.
6. Use the file browser sheet to choose the location to save the file.
Attaching a file to your email is discussed in Task 104, “More about Sending Email.”
244
Task
113
notes
• •
Part 10
Mail Tricks
T
he Mail application has a large number of useful features built in. This task will show how to use the contextual menu for the Mail application and introduces you to using Mail as an OS X service. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 113-1.
Ctrl-clicking the Mail icon in the Dock when Mail is not running only gives you the Show in Finder command. You can also Ctrl-click on messages and mailboxes in the Mail program to display contextual messages with additional options. For example, Ctrl-clicking a message gives you easy access to Reply, Forward, Move, Delete, and so on.
Figure 113-1: The Mail application window.
2. Option-click the Mail icon in the Dock to hide the Mail window. 3. Ctrl-click the Mail icon in the Dock to display the pop-up menu shown in Figure 113-2.
caution
•
Be sure to keep in mind connection speeds when attaching files. Large attachment files may take a long time to download when received, especially if the recipient is using a dial-up connection.
Figure 113-2: Ctrl-click the Mail Dock icon for a contextual menu.
4. Choose Quit from the pop-up menu to quit the Mail application. 5. Find a file you want to email to someone on the hard disk. Click it to select it. 6. From the Application menu, choose Finder ➪ Services ➪ Mail ➪ Send File, as shown in Figure 113-3.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
245
Task
113
tips
•
Figure 113-3: Mail is available as a service from any OS X application.
7. The Mail application starts up and creates a New Message window with the selected file as a file attachment. This message is stored in the Drafts folder, as shown in Figure 113-4.
•
•
Figure 113-4: Sending a file by Mail as a service.
•
You can also click the Finder icon in the Dock to set the Finder as the active applica tion, instead of Ctrl-clicking the Mail icon to hide it. The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right in the menu bar. Look at the Dock and notice the red dot with a number in it. If the Mail application is active and you have unread mail, the red dot appears on the Mail icon in the Dock and shows the number of unread mes sages in your Inbox. To select multiple files, Ctrl click or Shift-click the indi vidual files you want. This is similar to selecting multiple files in the Finder.
cross-reference
•
For more information about reading email, see Task 102, “Reading Email.”
246
Task
114
notes
•
•
•
Bcc (blind carbon copy) is a way to hide the recipients from each other. If you send your friend John an email, and bcc me and my friend Mike, John sees that the email is from you to him, with unknown bcc recipi ents. I see that the email is from you to John, and that I received it as a bcc, but I don’t see Mike as a recipi ent. Mike sees that the email is from you to John, and that he is a bcc recipi ent, but doesn’t see that I was sent the message. Your name, or a friend’s name, is probably not in the dictionary in OS X. The built-in dictionary’s sugges tions for the word it thinks you meant to type are at the top. In Figure 114-4, the word “conference” is the suggested correction. Adding names of locations, technical terms, or people’s names can help you when using the built-in spell-checker.
Part 10
Editing New Messages
T
he Mail application included with OS X is a fully featured email application. This task shows some of the features included for editing new messages and drafts. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop.
2. Click the New button on the Mail window toolbar. The New Message window appears, as shown in Figure 114-1. Add the To: and Cc: addresses as needed.
Figure 114-1: The New Message window.
3. To add a Bcc: field to your email, from the menu bar choose Edit ➪ Add Bcc Header. Enter the address of the recipient you wish to receive a bcc version of the email. 4. To add a Reply-To: header to your email, from the menu bar choose Edit ➪ Add Reply-To Header. Enter the address you wish the recipient to reply to. 5. Click in the body of the message. Type anything you want, until a word is underlined in red, as shown in Figure 114-2, indicating that Mail doesn’t recognize its spelling or grammar. 6. Ctrl-click the underlined word to show the contextual menu for the unrecognized word, as shown in Figure 114-3. 7. To choose the dictionary’s suggested spelling, choose the suggested spelling from the top of the contextual menu. The suggested word replaces the underlined word.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
247
Task
114
tips
•
Figure 114-2: The New Message window showing a word not recognized by the
dictionary.
•
To move the Mail Drawer from the right side of the Mail window to the left side, move the mail window so that there is desktop visible on the left side of the Mail window, then click on a message in the main pane of the Mail window and drag (but don’t drop) the message off to the left side. The Mail Drawer will shift to the left side. Drag an email over the right edge of the screen to reverse it. You can specify when Mail performs the spell-check by choosing Edit ➪ Spelling and choosing from the menu.
Figure 114-3: The contextual menu for an unrecognized word.
cross-reference 8. To ignore the spelling problem of this word for this message, choose the command Ignore Spelling. The underlining disappears from the word, but using the word again in another message will cause OS X to mark it as misspelled. 9. To add the word to the built-in dictionary, choose the Learn Spelling command. The word as spelled is added to the OS X dictionary for your user account, and the word will not be marked as misspelled again. 10. Choose from the additional options in the contextual message to further customize your message. For example, choose Style ➪ Bold to make the word bold.
•
Aside from working with the contextual message in the New Message window, you can set fonts and colors, and cut, copy, paste, and edit your reply email just as you can text in general in OS X. See Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit,” for information on how to enter and edit text in OS X applications.
248
Task
115
Part 10
Filtering Your Email to Reduce Junk Mail
U notes
• •
•
The Message ➪ Mark as Junk Mail command key board shortcut is Shift-Ô-J. After you switch from Training mode to Automatic, the junk mail is no longer left in your normal mail boxes and highlighted in a different color. Instead, it is automatically moved to the Junk mailbox without you ever seeing it. It’s good to check that mailbox from time to time, to confirm that Mail is only removing actual Junk messages (and not valid emails). To specify how long mail is left in the Junk Mail mailbox before being deleted, choose Mail ➪ Preferences and click the Accounts button. Select your account from the list on the left, and click Special Mailboxes to make the changes. You can also mark an email as junk by selecting it and clicking the Junk button on the Mail window toolbar. You can select multiple emails and mark them all as junk at the same time. If the Junk button isn’t visible in your toolbar, Ctrl-click on the toolbar, choose “Customize Toolbar,” and drag the Junk button to your toolbar before clicking Close.
nsolicited mail, or “junk mail,” is typically called “spam” when referring to its email form. The Mail application in OS X has the ability to learn what is and is not junk mail, based on your instructions. This task shows how to train the OS X Mail application to recognize a piece of spam. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application
starts and appears on the desktop.
2. Find a piece of spam in your Inbox and click it to read it. If the
Junk Mail header appears at the top of the message (as shown in
Figure 115-1), Mail has already identified this mail as a possible
junk email.
Figure 115-1: The Mail application tagging an email as junk mail.
3. Click the ? button in the banner in the email to read an explanation of the Junk Mail setting, as shown in Figure 115-2. 4. Clicking the ? in the Junk Mail window in Figure 115-2 opens the Apple Help Viewer to display more information on Mail’s Junk Mail setting. 5. If Mail has mistakenly identified this email as junk mail, click the Not Junk button. 6. If the Mail application misses a junk email, click the email to select it, and choose Message ➪ Mark ➪ As Junk Mail.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
249
Task
115
tip
•
Figure 115-2: An explanation of Mail’s junk mail setting.
7. To turn the Junk Mail rules off, from the Application menu of the menu bar, choose Preferences and click the Junk Mail button. Next, uncheck “Enable Junk Mail filtering.” 8. By default, the Mail application begins in Training mode, where it is learning what emails are junk mail. After a time, when the Mail application is recognizing junk emails accurately enough for you, from the Application menu of the menu bar, choose Mail ➪ Preferences and click the Junk Mail button. Click the second option under “When Junk Mail arrives:” to switch to Automatic mode.
Mail also features the option to “Bounce” email back to its sender. When you select a message and choose Message ➪ Bounce, Mail sends a mes sage back to the sender, pretending that the recipi ent (you) couldn’t be found. This may cause some spammers to assume that your email address is not valid and therefore remove you from their mailing list. This tactic for reducing spam is not always suc cessful, and may require you to “Bounce” messages several times to the same user before being removed from the mailing list.
9. To customize the junk mail rules, from the Application menu, choose Mail ➪ Preferences and click the Junk Mail button. Adjust the settings as needed or click “Advanced” to open the window shown in Figure 115-3 and further specify how to handle junk mail.
cross-reference
•
Figure 115-3: The Junk Mail rules window.
You can also specify that all messages sent from con tacts not in your Address Book are junk. To add an address to your Address Book, refer to Task 111, “Adding to the Address Book from Mail.”
250
Task
116
notes
•
•
•
Once you have added all your contacts to your Address Book, it’s easy to print labels (for example, for mailing holiday cards). Select the address or group of addresses to output and choose File ➪ Print. Under the Style menu, choose whether to print labels or mailing lists. Choose the type of labels you want to output (according to the type of label paper you have) and adjust the other settings as needed before clicking the Print button at the bottom. You can add additional fields (such as a birthday) to an address card by choosing Card ➪ Add Field and selecting the field you want to add from the menu. The Note field in the lower half of the person’s card can always be edited, even if you’re not in editing mode. To add to the note section of a person’s card, select the card, click in the Note section, and enter your notes.
Part 10
Using the Address Book
O
S X includes the Address Book application for keeping track of names, addresses, and so on. This task shows how to create a new entry for a person in the Address Book. 1. Click the Address Book icon in the Dock to start the Address Book.
The Address Book application starts and appears on the desktop, as
shown in Figure 116-1.
Figure 116-1: The Address Book application window.
2. Click the + button at the bottom of the Name column of the Address Book window. The detail pane on the right now displays a blank personal pane, as shown in Figure 116-2.
Figure 116-2: Entering a new person’s information in the Address Book application.
3. The First (name) is magnified and highlighted because it is the selected field. Type the person’s first name, or if entering a contact for a company, click the Company checkbox and enter the company’s name. 4. Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the next field, the Last (name) field, as shown in Figure 116-3 (unless you changed First name to Company), and enter the last name of the contact.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
251
Task
Figure 116-3: Press the Tab key to move between fields.
5. Press the Tab key to continue moving between fields, or simply click in a field to jump to it. Click the double arrows between a label and its field to open a drop-down list to choose a different label for that field, as shown in Figure 116-4.
116
tips
• •
• Figure 116-4: Choose another label for a field with the drop-down list.
Double-click a contact in the Name column to view it in a separate window. By default, the Address Book displays cards on the right and the group and name columns on the left. You can click the “View Card Only” button in the upper-left corner of the Address Book window to remove the group and name panes from the view. While viewing cards only, use the arrows in the bot tom right to step through the contacts in your Address Book. Pressing Shift-Tab moves the cursor through the fields in reverse.
6. Continue entering information for the person. The Address Book saves your entry as you go, so there’s no Save step to perform. 7. If you want to change a field, or add new information after you’re finished, find and select the name in the Name column, and click the Edit button below the detail pane showing the person’s card.
cross-references
•
•
Adding a person’s email address to the Address Book from an email in the Mail application is dis cussed in Task 111, “Adding to the Address Book from Mail.” Additional ways to cus tomize a address card are discussed in Task 120, “Customizing Address Book Entries.”
252
Task
117
notes
• •
The Undo command in the Address Book, and in many OS X applications, is given the keyboard shortcut Ô-Z.
Part 10
Removing an Address Book Entry
T
he Address Book application included with OS X is used to record names, addresses, and so on. This task shows how to remove an entry, also called a “card”, for a person in the Address Book. 1. Click the Address Book icon in the Dock to start the Address Book. The Address Book application starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 117-1.
When a name is selected in the Name column, you can use the Up and Down arrow keys on your key board to scroll through the cards in the Address Book one at a time.
Figure 117-1: The Address Book application window.
2. Find the card in the Name column of the Address Book. 3. Click the name of the person you want to remove from your Address Book. 4. From the menu bar, choose the command Edit ➪ Delete Person, as shown in Figure 117-2.
Figure 117-2: Delete the card with the menu command.
5. To undo the delete, press Ô-Z, or from the menu bar choose Edit ➪ Undelete Person. The card reappears in the Name column.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 6. You can also delete a selected card by pressing the Delete key on the keyboard. As a safety precaution, a sheet prompts you to confirm the deletion, as shown in Figure 117-3.
253
Task
117
tips
•
Figure 117-3: Deleting the card from the keyboard requires confirmation.
7. Click the Yes button to delete the selected card or No to cancel the deletion.
•
If you have friends with mul tiple email addresses, it can be common to end up with multiple records for the same person in your Address Book. To clean it up, click the second instance of the person and then highlight the email address. Press Ô-c to copy it and then switch to the other instance of the person in the Name pane and click the Edit button. Click the green plus (+) sign next to the existing email address to add a sec ond one. Paste the email address you copied into that spot by pressing Ô-v. Now you can delete the other instance of the person. Hold down the Shift key to select multiple contacts to delete. If the contacts aren’t next to each other in your contact list, press the Ô key instead. If you choose Edit from the file menu while multiple con tacts are selected, notice that the Delete option changes from Delete Person to Delete People.
cross-reference
•
Adding a group to the Address Book is discussed in Task 118, “Adding a Group to the Address Book.”
254
Task
118
notes
•
• •
•
Removing a person’s card from a group does not delete the person’s card from the Address Book. To delete a person from the Address Book altogether, highlight the contact and choose Edit ➪ Delete Person. Deleting a person’s card from the Address Book removes that card from all groups it is a mem ber of.
Part 10
Adding a Group to the Address Book
Y
ou can create groups in the OS X Address Book application to organize your personal and business contact lists. This task shows how to create a new entry for a group in the Address Book and how to add and delete cards from the new group. 1. Click the Address Book icon in the Dock to start the Address Book.
The Address Book application starts and appears on the desktop.
2. Click the + button at the bottom of the Group column of the Address
Book window. A new group with a default name of Group Name
appears in the Group column, as shown in Figure 118-1.
You can rename a group simply by double-clicking it in the Group column and giving it a new name. The Directories button in the group column is only available if you’re working on a network that is set up to use network directories on LDAP servers. To set up the Address Book to look for your LDAP server, choose Address Book ➪ Preferences and click LDAP. Dragging one group name over another group name enables you to include groups within other groups.
Figure 118-1: Creating a new group in the Address Book application.
3. The Group (Group Name) is highlighted because it is the selected field. Enter a name for the group, and press the Return key. The name appears with the group icon, as shown in Figure 118-2.
Figure 118-2: The newly created and empty group in the Address Book application.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 4. Click the All icon in the Group column to show the cards in the Name column.
255
Task
5. Click a person’s name in the Name column to select it.
118
6. Drag the person’s name to the new group you created in Step 3. 7. Click the new group in the Group column to see the person’s card shown as part of the group, as shown in Figure 118-3.
tips
•
• Figure 118-3: The newly created but no longer empty group in the Address Book
application.
Once you have a group set up, it’s easy to send an email to all members of that group (provided that you’ve added an email address to each member’s card). To send a group email, Ctrl click the group name, and select Send Email to “Group Name.” If you already have Mail open, you can use the group in the To: field, rather than entering all individual recipients, by typing the group name. Another way to create a group is to highlight several contacts and choose File ➪ New Group From Selection.
8. To remove a card from a group, click the group in the Group column to select the group. 9. Click the person’s name in the group. 10. From the menu bar, choose Edit ➪ Remove From Group.
cross-reference
•
If you need to add a new person’s card for this task, see Task 116, “Using the Address Book.”
256
Task
119
Part 10
Using Mail and the Address Book Together
T notes
• •
You can also start a new message by choosing File ➪ New Message from the menu bar, or by press ing Ô-N on the keyboard.
he OS X Mail application allows you to send and receive email, and the Address Book is used to store personal and business contact information. This task shows how to send an email using the built-in Mail application and the Address Book to choose the destination. 1. Click the Mail icon in the Dock to start Mail. The Mail application starts and appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 119-1.
The Address Book also has a place to add instant mes saging (IM) addresses. If you add an IM address to a particular contact who then sends you an email, Mail will let you know if that per son is online and ready to chat by placing a green cir cle in the Buddy Availability column. (To turn on the Buddy Availability column, choose View ➪ Columns ➪ Buddy Availability.) Doubleclick that green circle to start a text-chat with the person.
Figure 119-1: The Mail application window.
2. Click the New button on the Mail window toolbar. The New Message window appears, as shown in Figure 119-2.
Figure 119-2: The New Message window.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book 3. Click the Address button in the New message window toolbar. The Addresses window appears and looks similar to the screen in Figure 119-3.
257
Task
119
tips
•
• Figure 119-3: The Addresses window.
4. Click a name in the Name column to select it. 5. Click the To: button. The New Message window now shows the email address of the name you selected in the To: field, as shown in Figure 119-4.
You can select multiple names at the same time, including nonadjacent names. Shift-click two names to select the names and everything between them, or Ô-click to select the two names but not any of the names in between the two. You can also send mes sages to contacts from your Address Book simply by typing the contact name in one of the address fields of your email message. For example, typing “Will” into the To: field displays all the contacts in your address book containing “will.” You can then select the address from the options displayed. (Note that when searching for “will,” both “William Smith” and “Bob Willard” will be displayed as options.)
cross-references
•
Figure 119-4: The New Message window showing the chosen address.
6. When you are finished choosing addresses to send your email to, click the red Close button in the title bar of the Addresses window to close the window.
•
Configuring your OS X system to use your .Mac email account is discussed in Task 100, “Configuring Mail to Check Your Email Account.” Setting up a .Mac free trial account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.”
258
Task
120
notes
•
• •
Swapping the first/last name order only affects the card or cards selected in the Name column, it does not change the name order of all the cards in the Address Book. A phonetic guide can help remind you how a person or company’s name is pronounced.
Part 10
Customizing Address Book Entries
T
he Address Book provides several options for adding and modifying cards in the Address Book. This task shows how to add additional fields and change display modes for cards in the Address Book. 1. Click the Address Book icon in the Dock to start the Address Book. The Address Book application starts and appears on the desktop. 2. Click a name in the Name column to select that entry and to display the card in the detail pane on the right side of the Address Book window. 3. To set the selected card as your card, from the menu bar choose Card ➪ This Is My Card. 4. To reverse the order of a person’s name, from the menu bar choose Card ➪ Swap First/Last Name to change the entry on the card, as shown in Figure 120-1.
The birthday field is not affected by the date and time format settings in the International panel of OS X System Preferences. If you don’t enter a year, the cur rent year is used.
Figure 120-1: Reverse the first and last names with the menu command.
5. To define the card as a business, from the menu bar choose Card ➪ This is a Company. 6. To add a phonetic guide of the person or company’s name, from the menu bar choose Card ➪ Add Field ➪ Phonetic First/Last Name. The card changes to edit and the phonetic fields are added, where you can enter a phonetic guide indicating how to pronounce the name, as shown in Figure 120-2.
Correspondence with Mail and Address Book
259
Task
120
tips
•
Figure 120-2: Adding phonetic guides to the name fields.
7. To add a birthday, choose Card ➪ Add Field ➪ Birthday. The selected card is opened in Edit mode, and the Birthday field is selected, as shown in Figure 120-3.
•
•
Figure 120-3: Adding a birthday entry.
•
8. Enter a birthday for the card. 9. When you’re finished editing, click any card in the Name column to save your entry.
To add a photo to a person’s card, double-click the photo icon next to the person’s name while viewing the card in the Address Book. When the pop-up window appears, click Choose to pick a photo from your file browser, or drag a photo from your desktop into the photo icon area. If you have a digital camera connected to your computer and set up, you can also take a snapshot. Click Set when finished. To see which card is yours and what information is on it, look for the card with the small head-and-shoulders icon next to it in the Name column, or from the menu bar choose Card ➪ Show My Card. To add an anniversary, choose Card ➪ Add Field ➪ Dates. To change the Anniversary label to another type of date, click the arrows next to Anniversary and choose Custom. Specify the name and click OK. To display a map of a person’s address, Ctrl-click the address in the person’s card and choose “Map Of.” (Note, you must be connected to the Internet for this to work.)
cross-reference
•
For more information on the Address Book, see Task 116, “Using the Address Book.”
Part 11: Surfing the Web with Safari Task 121: Starting Safari Task 122: Using Bookmarks Task 123: Managing Bookmarks Task 124: Customizing the Web Browser’s Appearance Task 125: Searching the Web Task 126: Saving a Web Page Task 127: Setting Safari Preferences Task 128: Emailing a Web Page Task 129: Exploring Safari’s Pop-Up Menus Task 130: Using SnapBack and the History menu Task 131: Printing a Web Page Task 132: Resetting Safari Task 133: Browsing with Tabs
262
Task
121
notes
•
•
•
Many people like to set their default Web page or home page to a favorite news site. Or, you might choose to create and cus tomize a My Yahoo! page (http://my.yahoo. com), which provides cur rent weather and news for your hometown, as well as plenty of other tips and tid bits of information.
Part 11
Starting Safari
T
he World Wide Web is one of the most common ways to use the Internet (another is email). This task introduces Apple’s Web browser Safari and shows how to use it and how to set the default Web page for a new Safari window in the Safari Preferences. 1. Double-click the hard disk icon on the desktop to open the hard disk
window.
2. Double-click the Applications icon to open the Applications folder. 3. Double-click the Safari icon. The Safari Web browser starts and
opens a window to the default Web site, as shown in Figure 121-1.
4. To change the default Web site, choose Safari ➪ Preferences from
the Application menu. The Safari Preferences window appears.
5. Click the General button in the Safari Preferences toolbar to display
the Safari Preferences window, as shown in Figure 121-2.
Setting Safari as your default Web browser means that when you click on a Web link in an email or another document, Safari will launch, open a browser window, and display that Web page for you. The keyboard shortcut for showing the Safari Preferences window is Ô-,.
Figure 121-1: The Safari Web browser window.
Surfing the Web with Safari
263
Task
121
tip
•
Figure 121-2: The Safari Preferences window.
6. Click the Home page field, and edit the URL to change the default page. 7. You can set the currently open Web page as your default page by clicking the Set to Current Page button below the Home page field.
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right.
8. To set Safari as the default Web browser, click the Default Web Browser drop-down list and choose Safari, as shown in Figure 121-3.
Figure 121-3: Set Safari as the default Web browser.
9. Click the red Close button in the Safari Preferences title bar to close the Preferences window and save your changes.
cross-references
• •
Setting up network connec tions is discussed in Part 7, “Networking.” Setting up email is discussed in Part 10, “Correspondence with Mail and Address Book.”
264
Task
122
notes
• •
•
• •
The keyboard shortcut for “Open Location” in Safari is Ô-L.
Part 11
Using Bookmarks
A
bookmark is just like any physical bookmark you use with a book to find a page quickly. Setting a bookmark in a Web browser allows you to return to a Web page quickly. This task shows how to add a site to your Bookmarks file and how to use the Bookmarks menu to return to a Web site. 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site, as shown in Figure 122-1.
The default location of the new bookmark is the Bookmarks Bar. Choose one of the folders in the drop-down list to put the new bookmark in a folder instead of on the Bookmarks Bar. The newest bookmarks are always added to the first spot on the left side of the Bookmarks Bar. As you con tinue adding bookmarks to the Bookmarks Bar, they move to the right. When you have too many bookmarks to be displayed across the bar, a drop-down list is dis played at the far right of the bar, providing access to any that don’t fit. The keyboard shortcut for showing the Safari Preferences window is Ô-,. The keyboard shortcut for adding a bookmark to the Bookmarks Bar is Ô-D. The keyboard shortcut for adding a bookmark to the Bookmarks menu is Shift-Ô-D.
Figure 122-1: The Safari Web browser window.
2. Go to a new Web site, such as CBS.com. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Open Location. The location field is highlighted in the Safari Address Bar. 3. Enter www.cbs.com to open CBS’s Web site. 4. From the menu bar, choose Bookmarks ➪ Add Bookmark to Menu, as shown in Figure 122-2.
Figure 122-2: Adding a bookmark.
Surfing the Web with Safari 5. Enter a name for the bookmark, or edit it as you wish.
265
Task
6. Choose a destination (Bookmarks Bar) for the new bookmark from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 122-3.
122
tips
• •
Figure 122-3: Choosing a destination for the new bookmark.
7. Click the Add button. The CBS bookmark appears in the Bookmarks Bar, as shown in Figure 122-4.
•
To hide the Bookmarks Bar, press Ô-B. To show the Bookmarks Bar, press Ô-B again. You can also drag an address from the location field onto the Bookmarks Bar. In addition, you can rearrange the bookmarks in the Bookmarks Bar by clicking and dragging them within the bar. If you try to add a bookmark twice, Safari replaces the old bookmark with the new one. In other words, it will not create two bookmarks in the same location for the same Web site address.
Figure 122-4: Click a button in the Bookmarks Bar to go to that Web site.
8. Click the .Mac button in the Bookmarks Bar to go to the .Mac Web site. 9. From the menu bar, choose Bookmarks ➪ Bookmarks Bar ➪ CBS to return to the CBS Web page.
cross-references
• •
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” Working with lots of book marks to make them more usable is discussed in Task 123, “Managing Bookmarks.”
266
Task
123
notes
• • •
•
The keyboard shortcut for adding a new bookmark folder is Shift-Ô-N.
Part 11
Managing Bookmarks
I
f you’ve ever added several bookmarks to a single book, you know how hard it can be to rifle through all of those to find just the right page. Working with bookmarks online is no different, in that you often have to “clean house” to make things more efficient. This task discusses managing bookmarks in Safari. 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site, as shown in Figure 123-1.
The keyboard shortcut for showing the Safari Preferences window is Ô-,. The keyboard shortcut for adding a bookmark to the Bookmarks Bar is Ô-D. The keyboard shortcut for adding a bookmark to the Bookmarks menu is Shift-Ô-D. You can close the Bookmarks view (and return to normal Web page view) by pressing the Bookmarks button again.
Figure 123-1: The Safari Web browser window.
2. Click the Bookmarks icon in the left end of the Bookmarks Bar to show all bookmarks. 3. Click the Bookmarks Bar icon in the Collections column. The Bookmarks view appears, as shown in Figure 123-2. 4. Click a bookmark in the main pane, and drag it to the Other folder in the Collections column. 5. Click the Other folder to show the relocated bookmark. 6. From the menu bar, choose Bookmarks ➪ Add Bookmark Folder. An untitled folder appears in the Collections column.
Surfing the Web with Safari
267
Task
123
tips
•
Figure 123-2: The Safari Bookmarks window.
•
7. The name “untitled folder” is highlighted because it is selected. Type a new name for the folder. 8. To delete a bookmark folder and its contents, click the folder in the Collections column and press the Delete key.
•
9. From the menu bar, choose Safari ➪ Preferences, then click the Bookmarks button in the Preferences toolbar to display the window shown in Figure 123-3.
•
By default, Safari comes with several folders already set up in the Bookmarks Collections menu. For example, the News folder contains links to CNN, the New York Times, and the Los Angeles Times, just to name a few. However, you can add your own book marks to this folder and delete the existing ones as you wish. You can delete individual bookmarks or entire folders simply by highlighting the intended item (be it a file or a folder) and pressing the Delete key. You can also add new folders or new bookmarks by clicking the Add (+) buttons at the bottom of the Collections and Bookmarks panes. Click the small dot on the bar between the Collections and Bookmarks panes, and drag it to the left or right to increase or decrease the size of either pane.
cross-reference
•
Figure 123-3: The Bookmarks pane of the Safari Preferences window.
10. Check the checkboxes to add the Address Book or the Rendezvous menu to the Bookmarks Bar and the Bookmarks menu.
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.”
268
Task
124
Part 11
Customizing the Web Browser’s Appearance
M
ac OS X’s Web browser, Safari, is very customizable. This task shows how to change Safari’s window appearance to suit your needs.
notes
• • •
•
The keyboard shortcut for hiding and showing the Address Bar is Ô-Shift-|.
1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site, as shown in Figure 124-1.
The keyboard shortcut for hiding and showing the Bookmarks Bar is Ô-B. You can add and remove individual buttons to and from the Address Bar by choosing them from the View menu, then checking or unchecking them. Checked items are included on the Address Bar ; unchecked items are not included. A fixed-width font is a font in which every letter and number is the same width. Fixed-width fonts are often used to display code, or cre ate columns of text or num bers that line up evenly.
Figure 124-1: The Safari Web browser window.
2. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Address Bar. The Address Bar disappears from the Safari window. 3. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Bookmarks Bar. The Bookmarks Bar disappears from the Safari window, as shown in Figure 124-2. 4. Press Ô-Shift-| to return the Address Bar to the Safari window. 5. Press Ô-B to return the Bookmarks Bar to the Safari window. The window should now look as it did in Figure 124-1. 6. To enlarge the text in the Safari window, press Ô-+. Do this three times.
Surfing the Web with Safari
269
Task
124
tips
•
Choose View ➪ Status Bar to display the status bar at the bottom of the screen. This bar lists the address of a link in a Web page when the mouse is moved over that link. In addition, it also specifies whether aspects of a page are still loading. If the status bar is empty, the browser has finished loading the page.
•
Choose View ➪ View Source to view the code used to create the Web page.
Figure 124-2: The Safari Web browser window.
7. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Home. The Home button (which allows you to return to your default Web page with a single button click) appears on the Address Bar.
•
8. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Text Size. The Text Size button pair appears on the Address Bar, as shown in Figure 124-3.
While the Font Size buttons are useful for changing the font size of individual Web pages, you can also change the default font size used by Safari. To do so, choose Safari ➪ Preferences and click the Appearance but ton. Next click the “Select” buttons to specify different standard and fixed-width fonts.
cross-references
• •
Figure 124-3: Edit the Address Bar buttons with the View menu.
9. Click the small Text Size window three times to reduce the text to its original size.
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” Setting the default Web page for your browser is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.”
270
Task
125
notes
• •
The keyboard shortcut for hiding and showing the Address Bar (which includes the Search field) is Ô-Shift-|. It is not possible to change the search engine (Google) used in the Search field in Safari. However, to visit another search engine, simply enter its address in the Location field or select one from your bookmarks.
Part 11
Searching the Web
A
Web browser enables you to take advantage of the exciting (but ever so extensive) world of the Internet. This task shows how the OS X Web browser Safari makes it easy to search the Web. 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site. 2. In the Address Bar, click in the Google search field and enter words to search for. 3. Press the Return key. Safari sends the words you entered to the Google search Web site and displays the search results, as shown in Figure 125-1. 4. Click the Google Search field in the Address Bar, and enter another term to search for. 5. Press the Return key. Safari sends the words you entered to the Google search Web site and shows the search results in the window. 6. Click the Home button to go to the default home page. In the Google Search field in the Address Bar, click the Snapback button, shown in Figure 125-2.
Figure 125-1: The Google search results.
Surfing the Web with Safari
271
Task
125
tips
• •
Figure 125-2: The Safari Web browser window showing the SnapBack button.
7. To see the most recent Google searches you’ve performed, click the magnifying glass icon to display the pop-up menu shown in Figure 125-3.
• • •
If the Google search field is not present in the Address Bar, choose View ➪ Google Search from the menu bar. To delete the history of Google searches in the pop up menu, click the magnify ing glass icon in the Google Search field to show the pop-up menu and choose the Clear Entries command. Click and drag the small dot in between the Location and Search fields to increase or decrease the size of either field. Click once inside the Search field to add text. Click twice to highlight a word in the Search field, or click three times to highlight the entire contents of the field. Click the small X on the right end of the Search field to remove all search terms from the field.
cross-references
• • •
Figure 125-3: A history of your recent Google searches is in a pop-up menu.
8. Choose a word or words from the recent list of searches to repeat that search.
•
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” You can also search the Internet with Sherlock. Using Sherlock is dis cussed in Part 9, “Using .Mac and Sherlock.” Showing and hiding the Address Bar is discussed in Task 124, “Customizing the Web Browser’s Appearance.” You can also use the Snapback feature when you’re surfing normally (without the Google Search field). Refer to Task 130, “Using Snapback and the History Menu”, for details.
272
Task
126
notes
• • • • •
Part 11
Saving a Web Page
O
S X’s Web browser Safari includes the ability to save the text-based content of a Web page to your OS X system, so that you can read it when not connected to the Internet. This task shows how to save a Web page. 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web
browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site.
The keyboard shortcut for saving a Web page is Ô-S.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Save As. The Save As sheet
appears, as shown in Figure 126-1.
Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a File Open or Save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop.
3. The default name for the saved file is the title of the Web page. Click the Save As field, and edit the name if you want something different than the default name.
If you have a .Mac account, you can set the default location to save files to your iDisk.
4. Click the drop-down list to choose another location in which to save the Web page, as shown in Figure 126-2.
The keyboard shortcut for showing the Safari Preferences window is Ô-,. Saving a Web page with the steps discussed in this task only saves the text content to the file on your computer. This means any pictures or other interactive elements may not be visible when the page is viewed from your computer.
Figure 126-1: Saving the current Web page.
5. Click the OK button to save the Web page. 6. To change the default save location in Safari, from the Application menu of the menu bar, choose Safari ➪ Preferences. 7. Click the General button in the Preferences toolbar. The Safari Preferences window appears, as shown in Figure 126-3.
Surfing the Web with Safari
273
Task
126
tips
•
Figure 126-2: Saving the current Web page to a different location.
•
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right. To save a copy of the Web page exactly as it is dis played on the screen (images and all), choose File ➪ Print and click the PDF button near the bot tom of the Print window. Saving the file as a PDF file gives you a version that is easily printed, emailed, or saved for later use.
cross-reference Figure 126-3: The General pane of the Safari Preferences window.
8. Click the drop-down list next to “Save downloaded files to.” 9. From the drop-down list, choose the default location in which to save Web pages and downloaded files. 10. Click the red Close button in the title bar of the Preferences window to close the window and save your changes.
•
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.”
274
Task
127
notes
•
•
Part 11
Setting Safari Preferences
T
he OS X Web browser Safari is highly customizable. This task shows how to work with the AutoFill and Security panes of Safari Preferences.
1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web
browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site, as shown
in Figure 127-1.
Web browser plug-ins are items such as the Macromedia Flash plug-in that allow Safari to show Flash animations in the Safari Web-browser window. Java and JavaScript are pro gramming languages that are used for services on some Web sites. When you choose to “Block pop-up windows” Safari will only block those windows that appear immediately after opening or closing a Web page. It will not block pop-up windows that are launched by clicking a link on a Web page.
Figure 127-1: The Safari Web browser window.
2. From the Application menu of the menu bar, choose Safari ➪ Preferences. The Safari Preferences window appears. Click the AutoFill button in the Safari Preferences toolbar to display the Safari Preferences window shown in Figure 127-2.
caution
•
Any time you submit a Web form or log in to a Web site, Safari will ask you if you want Safari to save the information on the form for AutoFill use later. You may want to be careful if the OS X system is accessible to other people, or if your AutoFill information might be used to do things by someone other than you. Log out if you’re going to be away from the OS X sys tem, especially if it’s pub licly accessible.
Figure 127-2: The AutoFill pane of the Safari Preferences window.
3. Check the checkboxes to the left of the three options to choose from where Safari takes information to complete Web forms.
Surfing the Web with Safari
275
4. Click the Edit button to the right of “Using info from my Address Book card” to open your card in the Address Book.
Task
5. Click the Edit buttons to the right of “User names and passwords” and “Other forms” to open Safari’s list of saved Web sites and password information. 6. Click the Security button in the Preferences window toolbar to see the Security pane, as shown in Figure 127-3.
tip
• • •
Figure 127-3: The Security pane of the Safari Preferences window.
7. Check the checkboxes to the left of the options you want to allow, such as Web browser plug-ins, Java, or JavaScript. 8. Choose not to allow pop-up windows by checking the “Block pop-up windows” checkbox. 9. Choose whether or not to accept cookies, or Web-based ID tokens, from Web sites. Click the Show Cookies button to display the Cookies window shown in Figure 127-4.
Figure 127-4: The Cookies sheet of the Security pane of the Safari Preferences window.
10. Click the red Close button in the upper-left corner of the window to save changes and close the window.
127
You can also toggle the pop-up windows permis sion by choosing Safari ➪ Block Pop-Up Windows from the Application menu of the menu bar. The keyboard shortcut to toggle allowing pop-up win dows on and off is Ô-K. Cookies are bits of infor mation stored on your computer to help facilitate transactions between your computer and Web sites. While cookies have received a bad reputation in the past, they are in most cases not worth wor rying about. For example, a particular Web site can only retrieve the cookie it stored on your computer previ ously. It cannot access any other site’s cookies or any other information on your computer. A common use of a cookie is to track when you last visited a Web site, for the purposes of offering you information about what you’ve missed on the site since that time. Most Web sites use cookies in some way. Therefore, if you turn cookies off, you may not be able to access some Web sites.
cross-reference
•
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.”
276
Task
128
notes
• •
The keyboard shortcut to select the entire document is Ô-A. Web pages sent in emails don’t look exactly the same as they do in the Web browser. This is because email applications like Apple’s Mail program don’t understand the code behind Web pages as well as browsers do. Because of this, you’ll likely notice images lined up in columns instead of interspersed throughout the rest of the content. In addition, back ground colors and images that were present in the original Web page will typi cally not be displayed in the email program.
Part 11
Emailing a Web Page
T
he Safari Web browser with OS X is integrated with other applications from Apple. This task shows how Safari works with Mail and TextEdit, using Mail and TextEdit as services. 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web
browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site.
2. From the menu bar, choose Edit ➪ Select All. The text of the Web
page highlights to show it is selected.
3. From the Application menu, choose Safari ➪ Services ➪ Mail ➪
Send Selection, as shown in Figure 128-1.
4. Mail launches and creates a new message window in the Drafts
folder. Double-click the new message to display it, as shown in
Figure 128-2.
Figure 128-1: Using Mail as a service within Safari.
5. Address the message (either directly or using the Address Book), add a subject, and click the Send button on the new Message toolbar. The message is sent. 6. Find an email address on a Web page, and select it. 7. From the Application menu, choose Safari ➪ Services ➪ Mail ➪ Send To from the menu that was shown in Figure 128-1. Mail launches (if it’s not already running), and a new message is created in the Drafts folder, addressed to that email address, as shown in Figure 128-3.
Surfing the Web with Safari
277
Task
128
tips
•
Figure 128-2: The text of the Web page in a new message window.
•
• Figure 128-3: A new message window addressed to the chosen address.
•
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right. If an email address is underlined in a Web page, you can click on it to send an email to the recipient (without choosing Send To from the Safari menu). However, if an email address is not underlined, it is likely not linked directly, which means that you can follow the steps in this task to send an email. If you need to email some one an exact copy of a Web page, choose File ➪ Print and click the PDF button to save the Web page as a PDF file on your computer. Then, click on the file in your hard drive and choose Finder ➪ Services ➪ Mail ➪ Send File. Many Web sites also include links to “Email this page.” In cases like this, you fill out a form on the Web site and the site’s server sends the content of the page directly to your recipient.
cross-references
• •
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” Sending email is discussed in Task 103, “Sending Email.”
278
Task
129
Part 11
Exploring Safari’s Pop-Up Menus
O
S X and OS X-native applications have a great deal of power available through pop-up menus. This task shows the various pop-up menus in Safari.
1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web
browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site.
notes
•
•
Ctrl-clicking on a Mac is similar to right-clicking on a Windows-based PC. In fact, right-clicking in a Web browser on a PC would pro duce very similar results to Ctrl-clicking in Safari.
2. Using the cursor, drag and select a word or a phrase. 3. Ctrl-click the selected text to see the pop-up menu shown in
Figure 129-1.
4. Find a text-based link (one that is not in an image) in a Web page.
Ctrl-click the link to see the pop-up menu shown in Figure 129-2.
The options available on the pop-up menus can vary according to how you have Safari customized. For example, if you have enabled Tabbed Browsing in the Safari Preferences (see Task 133, “Browsing with Tabs”), you will also see an option to “Open Link in New Tab.”
Figure 129-1: The pop-up menu for selected text.
5. Find an image being used as a link, and Ctrl-click on it to see the pop-up menu shown in Figure 129-3.
Surfing the Web with Safari
279
Task
129
tips
•
• Figure 129-2: The pop-up menu for a text-based link.
When you select text in a Web page and Ctrl-click to choose Google Search, Safari copies the high lighted words and pastes them into the Google Search field at the top of the browser. The Web page then changes to display the result of that search. Ctrl-clicking a link provides a chance to copy the link address to your clipboard, where it can then be pasted into another file or applica tion. However, if you just want to copy the link to the desktop for a quick book mark, simply drag the link from the browser window to your desktop.
cross-references
•
Figure 129-3: The pop-up menu for a graphics-based link.
6. Find an image on a Web page that is not a link, and Ctrl-click on it to bring up its pop-up menu. An image pop-up menu contains just the bottom three commands shown in Figure 129-3.
• •
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” Selecting text is discussed in Task 59, “Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text.” Adding bookmarks is discussed in Task 122, “Using Bookmarks.”
280
Task
130
notes
•
• •
The orange circle button in the Location field snaps you back to the marked page, while the orange cir cle button in the Search field snaps you back to the marked search results.
Part 11
Using SnapBack and the History Menu
S
afari has a useful feature called SnapBack that resembles a temporary bookmark saved in your History menu. This task shows how to use SnapBack and the History menu. 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web
browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site, as shown
in Figure 130-1.
Each window has only one SnapBack page. By default, the first page you open in a Safari win dow is remembered as the SnapBack page until you mark a different page as such.
Figure 130-1: The Safari Web browser window.
2. Click the Google Search field on the Safari browser window, and enter search terms. For example, search for the word “password” and press Return.
caution
•
If you try to mark a page for SnapBack, but the SnapBack command is not active after switching to another page, repeat the steps, making sure you put the cursor in the Location field before choosing “Mark Page for SnapBack.”
3. From the menu bar, choose History ➪ Mark Page for SnapBack, as shown in Figure 130-2. 4. Repeat the search, for something different. Anything will do (for example, the word “kumquat”). 5. In the Location field of the Safari browser window, enter a Web site address, such as www.apple.com/safari/ and press Return to go to that address. 6. Place the cursor in the Location field, and choose History ➪ Mark Page for SnapBack from the menu bar, as shown in Figure 130-2. 7. Click the Home button on the Address Bar or choose History ➪ Home to go to the default home page. 8. Go somewhere else on the Web (anywhere will do). Follow some links, and go somewhere else.
Surfing the Web with Safari
281
Task
130
tips
• •
Figure 130-2: Marking a page for SnapBack.
9. From the menu bar, choose History ➪ Page SnapBack, as shown in Figure 130-3. The page you marked for SnapBack in Step 6 reappears in the browser window.
As seen in the figures, all three of the SnapBack commands have keyboard shortcuts. By default, Safari remem bers all of the Web pages you visit and lists them in the History menu. You can choose a page from that menu to quickly return to it. Typically, Safari can store about a week’s worth of pages in its history. Previous days’ sites are accessed through fly-out menus named with the date. You can choose Clear History at any time to erase all the sites from the History menu.
cross-references
• •
Figure 130-3: Snapping Back to the marked page.
10. From the menu bar, choose History ➪ Search Results SnapBack, as shown in Figure 130-3. The search results page you marked for SnapBack in Step 3 reappears in the browser window.
•
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” Using the Google Search function is discussed in Task 125, “Searching the Web.” Setting the default home page for Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.”
282
Task
131
note
•
Part 11
Printing a Web Page
S
ometimes you may want a paper version (or hard copy) of a Web page you’ve found. This task shows how to print a page from Safari.
1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web
browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site, as shown
in Figure 131-1.
You can also Ctrl-click on a blank spot in a Web page and choose Print Page from the pop-up menu to print the page.
Figure 131-1: The Safari Web browser window.
2. Click the Google Search field on the Safari browser window, and search the Web for anything you want. For example, search for the word “kumquat.” 3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Print. The Print sheet appears in the Safari browser window, as shown in Figure 131-2. 4. Click the Printer drop-down list, and choose from the available printers. 5. Click the Preview button to start the Preview application and view the page as it will be printed, as shown in Figure 131-3.
Surfing the Web with Safari
283
Task
131
tips
•
Figure 131-2: The Safari print sheet.
• •
•
Figure 131-3: The Web page print formatting shown in Apple’s Preview application.
6. To print the Web page to the selected printer, click the Print button. The Print sheet closes, and the Web page is printed on the printer. Click Cancel to return without printing the page.
If you want to email or store the page electronically, click the Save as PDF button to save the Web page as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file. A dialog prompts you to enter a filename and choose a location to save to. Enter a name, choose a location, and click the Save button to save the Web page as a PDF file. PDF files are viewable on almost any computer platform, and pages saved in this format retain their original formatting including fonts and graphics. To fax a Web page, click the Fax button in the Print dia log and follow the direc tions on the screen. Printed Web pages may not appear exactly as they do on the screen. To customize how the pages print, make selections from the Copies & Pages menu in the Print dialog. Sometimes large Web pages need to be scaled down to fit on a printed page. Choose File ➪ Page Setup to specify the scale at which to increase or decrease the page when printed.
cross-references
• • •
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” Using the Google Search function is discussed in Task 125, “Searching the Web.” Printing in OS X is dis cussed in Part 8, “Printing and Faxing.”
284
Task
132
notes
•
•
•
Resetting Safari empties the history and the cache, clears the Downloads win dow and Google Search entries, removes all cook ies, and deletes all saved AutoFill user names, pass words, and form data, all at once. Most of these tasks can also be completed separately, as outlined in Steps 4 to 10 of this task. Resetting Safari also closes all open windows and launches a new window with the default Web page. This new window cannot access your old history or SnapBack pages.
Part 11
Resetting Safari
S
afari, like all Web browsers, keeps track of where you’ve been and what you’ve been doing on the Web. This task shows you how to delete these records of your Web surfing in Safari (either all at once or individually). 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site. 2. To completely reset Safari, choose Safari ➪ Reset Safari from the Application menu, as shown in Figure 132-1.
Figure 132-1: Resetting Safari.
3. A dialog appears, as shown in Figure 132-2. Click the Reset button to completely reset Safari.
When you reset Safari, cookies used in other applications (such as Sherlock) may also be deleted.
Figure 132-2: Confirm that you want to reset Safari.
4. If you only want to empty the browser cache, choose Safari ➪ Empty Cache, as shown in Figure 132-3. Click Empty when prompted.
Figure 132-3: Clearing the browser cache.
Surfing the Web with Safari 5. If you only want to clear the history, choose History ➪ Clear History, as shown in Figure 132-4.
285
Task
132
tips Figure 132-4: Clearing the browser history.
•
6. If you only want to clear the Search field, Click the magnifying glass icon in the Google Search field of the Safari window and choose Clear Entries from the pop-up menu. 7. If you only want to remove all cookies, first choose Safari ➪
Preferences from the Application menu to open the Safari
Preferences window.
8. Click the Security button to display the Security pane. 9. Click the Show Cookies button to display the Cookies window.
•
10. Click the Remove All button to clear the cookies.
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right. If you are using Safari on a public computer (or one used by someone other than yourself), consider always resetting the browser after each use. This prevents the next user from seeing what you were doing and also from accessing your passwords or saved form data.
cross-references
• •
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” Cookies and security are discussed in Task 127, “Setting Safari Preferences.”
286
Task
133
notes
•
• • •
The keyboard shortcuts for Safari, Ô-click, Ô-Shiftclick, Ô-Option-click, and Ô-Option-Shift-click, do slightly different things, depending on the boxes checked in the Tabs pane. Check both Enable Tabbed Browsing and Select New Tabs as they are created, then uncheck both, then check only the Enable Tabbed Browsing checkbox to see the variations in the keyboard shortcut actions. If you delete all but one tab, the tab bar in the browser window vanishes unless you have the “Always show tab bar” checkbox checked in the Safari Preferences. A small rotating circle appears in the right side of a tab when parts of that page are loading. Using Tabs can be a much more efficient way of searching multiple pages at the same time because you’re not wading through several different windows on your screen. All the pages are organized neatly in the Tab bar.
Part 11
Browsing with Tabs
A
pple’s OS X Web browser Safari includes the ability to view multiple Web pages in the same window, by using tabs to separate the pages. This task shows how to turn on and use tabbed browsing. 1. Start Safari as shown in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” The Safari Web browser starts and opens a window to the default Web site. 2. From the Application menu of the menu bar, choose Safari ➪
Preferences. The Safari Preferences window appears. Click the
Tabs button in the Safari Preferences toolbar to display the Safari
Preferences window shown in Figure 133-1.
Figure 133-1: The Tabs pane of the Safari Preferences window.
3. Check the checkbox to the left of Enable Tabbed Browsing. 4. Close the Preferences window. 5. Open the Google Web page at www.google.com. 6. Ô-click on the Advanced Search link on the Web page, and choose “Open Link in New Tab.” The Safari browser loads the Google Advanced Search page in a tab behind the current page you are viewing, as shown in Figure 133-2. 7. Click the Google Advanced Search tab to show that tab in the foreground, as shown in Figure 133-3. 8. Click the small X button in the left of a tab to close that tab.
Surfing the Web with Safari
287
Task
133
tips
•
Figure 133-2: The Safari browser window showing a tabbed page behind the main page.
•
•
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right in the menu bar. Ctrl-click on a tab in the Tab bar to do any of the follow ing: create a new tab, close the selected tab, close all other tabs, reload the selected tab, and reload all other tabs. Ctrl-click in the empty space of the Tab bar to create a new tab or reload all tabs.
cross-reference
•
Figure 133-3: The tab in the foreground.
Starting Safari is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.”
Part 12: Instant Messaging with iChat Task 134: Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name Task 135: Setting Your iChat Status Task 136: Adding a Buddy Task 137: Viewing Information about Buddies Task 138: Using Buddy Groups Task 139: Starting a Text Chat Task 140: Starting an Audio Chat Task 141: Starting a Video Chat Task 142: Saving a Chat Session Task 143: Sending a File Task 144: Blocking Annoying People Task 145: Setting iChat Message Appearance Task 146: Setting iChat Message Actions
290
Task
134
Part 12
Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name
I notes
• • • •
The keyboard shortcut for the iChat AOL Buddy List window is Ô-1. The short cut for the Rendezvous win dow is Ô-2.
nstant messaging (IM) is widespread among Internet users. IM allows you to carry on a conversation in a chat window, thus providing a personal and realtime flavor to an electronic messaging system. iChat actually allows access to AOL’s huge IM network. This task shows how to start iChat for the first time and connect using your .Mac account or AOL Instant Messenger (AIM) screen name. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start the iChat application. If this
is the first time you’ve run iChat, a Welcome window appears, as
shown in Figure 134-1. Click Continue.
Rendezvous messaging only works if you’re con nected to a network that includes other Mac OS X users. AOL boasts more than 100 million members in its Instant Messenger (IM) network. When using your .Mac account with iChat, the “@mac.com” suffix is automatically appended to your .Mac user name. This means that you must tell friends to look for you as “
[email protected]” in IM.
Figure 134-1: Welcome to iChat.
2. Click the First Name field, and enter your name. 3. Click the Last Name field, and enter your name. 4. Click the Account Type drop-down list and specify whether you want to use your .Mac account or an AIM screen name. 5. Click the Account Name field, and enter your .Mac user name or AIM screen name.
caution
•
If you use your .Mac account on iChat, those who are using older ver sions of AOL IM programs may experience difficulty seeing you on the network.
6. Click the Password field and enter your password. The iChat setup window should now resemble Figure 134-2.
Instant Messaging with iChat
291
Task
134
tips
•
Figure 134-2: Welcome to iChat, with account information entered.
7. Click the Continue button. On the next screen, specify whether to use Rendezvous messaging, and click Continue.
•
8. If you have a camera connected to your computer, its video feed
should appear on the next screen. Click Continue.
9. Click Done. The Welcome window closes and iChat starts. If you’ve chosen to use Rendezvous messaging, the Rendezvous window appears.
•
10. From the menu bar, click Window ➪ Buddy List, to display the Buddy List window, as shown in Figure 134-3.
•
As of this writing, iChat works with .Mac and AOL instant messaging (IM). iChat does not support the use of MSN, Yahoo, or other IM services as of this writing. You can change the screen name you’re using in iChat by choosing Preferences from the iChat Application menu, then clicking the Accounts button to edit your account information. If you do not have a .Mac account or an AIM screen name, click the “Get an iChat Account” button, as shown in Figure 134-2. Your default Web browser starts (or opens a new win dow) and displays Apple’s .Mac sign-up page. If you don’t have a camera currently connected to your computer, but want to add one later, choose iChat ➪ Preferences and click the Video button after the cam era is connected and turned on.
Figure 134-3: iChat’s empty Buddy List and Rendezvous windows.
cross-references
• • •
Logging back onto iChat after you’ve logged off is discussed in Task 135, “Setting Your iChat Status.” Creating a .Mac account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” You don’t have any other names in the Buddy List because you haven’t added any. Adding information to the Buddy List is discussed in Task 136, “Adding a Buddy.”
292
Task
135
notes
• • •
You can add many different status messages to your iChat window as you feel are relevant and appropriate.
Part 12
Setting Your iChat Status
T
he outside world needs to know when you are available for a “chat.” Similarly to other IM applications, OS X’s built-in iChat allows you to set your availability status to indicate if you want to be contacted or not. This task shows you how. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List (and Rendezvous window, if available), as shown in Figure 135-1.
People who have added you to their Buddy Lists will automatically see the changes you make to your status. When changing your status in iChat, your changes take effect for all iChat windows. In other words, if you specify you are “Out to Lunch,” users on both the Rendezvous (local) and AIM (worldwide) networks see that change in your status.
Figure 135-1: The iChat windows.
2. On the Buddy List window, click the word “Available” to display the drop-down list shown in Figure 135-2. Figure 135-2: The Buddy List window showing the
status menu.
3. Choose Away from the status menu. The dot changes from green to red and the text changes from Available to Away. 4. Open the status menu and choose the Custom command next to a red dot. The status menu closes and a text field appears, as shown in Figure 135-3.
Instant Messaging with iChat Figure 135-3: Creating a custom status menu entry.
293
Task
135
tips
•
5. Click the text field, and type Out to Lunch. Press the Return key. The field grays out, and the words “Out to Lunch” appear next to the red dot.
•
6. To make the process of changing your iChat status easier, choose iChat ➪ Preferences from the Application menu. 7. Place a check in the box next to “Show status in menu bar.” 8. A new icon is displayed in the upper-right corner of your screen (on the top menu bar), as shown in Figure 135-4. Use this menu to quickly log on to iChat and to change your status. Figure 135-4: Accessing iChat from the menu bar.
•
You can also use the Delete key on the keyboard to delete selected status entries. To further customize your status messages, open the status menu and choose Edit Status Menu (at the bottom of the status menu). Click an entry to select it, then the minus button (-) underneath the column to delete that entry. To add a new status mes sage to either column, click the plus button (+) under the appropriate column and enter your new status message. You can further customize how the computer reacts when you’re away by choos ing iChat ➪ Preferences and editing the General options. For example, if you don’t want iChat to automatically log in when the program is opened, uncheck the first box in the General settings.
cross-references
• •
Logging into iChat for the first time is discussed in Task 134, “Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name.” To make yourself always available, designate iChat as a startup item. Each time you log into your com puter, iChat will open and log you in automatically. Refer to Task 20, “Setting Applications to Start Automatically on Login,” for details.
294
Task
136
notes
• • • •
•
The keyboard shortcut to add a contact in iChat is Shift-Ô-A.
Part 12
Adding a Buddy
T
he first tasks in this part discussed how to set up iChat to connect to the AOL instant messaging network and how to set status messages. However, advertising your status helps only if other people are seeing it. This task shows you how to add contacts (called “buddies”) to iChat. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects
to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 136-1.
Figure 136-1: An empty buddy list.
You must know the account name of a buddy to add that person to your Buddy List. If the new buddy’s name is gray in the Buddy List, that person is not currently logged into his or her IM program. By default, the Buddy List is arranged in alphabetical order. However, online bud dies are displayed first, at the top of the list, while those that are offline are pushed to the bottom.
2. On the iChat window, click the plus button (+) at the bottom of the Buddy List window to display the sheet shown in Figure 136-2.
When a buddy is online, you can invite that person to participate in chat sessions. Refer to Task 139, “Starting a Text Chat,” Task 140, “Starting an Audio Chat,” and Task 141, “Starting a Video Chat,” for details on starting text, audio, and video chats, respectively.
Figure 136-2: Adding a new person from the Address Book.
3. Choose a card from the Address Book. 4. Click the Select Buddy button. The person’s name appears in your iChat window.
Instant Messaging with iChat
295
5. If the person you select from the Address Book does not have instant messaging defined in his or her card in your Address Book, click the Select Buddy button to display a second sheet that helps you update your Address Book card for them with instant messaging information, as shown in Figure 136-3.
Task
136
tips
•
Figure 136-3: Adding instant messaging information to a card in your Address Book
from Chat. 6. Choose the IM Account type (AIM or Mac.com) from the drop-
down list.
• •
7. Enter the person’s Account Name (screen name) for the selected
IM type.
8. Click the Add button to add the person to your iChat window. 9. If you want to add a person who is not in your Address Book, click
the New Person button on the sheet shown in Figure 136-2.
10. Fill in the fields, and click the Add button. The person is added to your iChat window, as shown in Figure 136-4.
•
Figure 136-4: Your newly added IM friend is listed in the Buddy
List window.
iChat works with .Mac and AOL instant messaging (IM), as well as ICQ version 3.4. iChat does not support the use of MSN, Yahoo!, or other IM services as of this writing, but Apple plans to support these in the future. If your buddy has associated a photo or icon with the IM account, you should see it next to that person’s name in the Buddy List window. If you have a digital picture of your buddy and would prefer to use that, drag it above the Buddy Icon text on the address window. You can then see a picture of the person with whom you are chatting. To delete a buddy, select the person’s name in the Buddy List and press the Delete key on your key board. Note that deleting a buddy from your Buddy List does not delete that person from your Address Book.
cross-references
• •
Starting iChat for the first time and using a .Mac account are discussed in Task 134, “Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name.” You can also add a person’s IM information by editing that person’s card in the Address Book, as discussed in Task 120, “Customizing Address Book Entries.”
296
Task
137
notes
• • • •
•
The comments you add in the Your Notes field shown in Figure 137-4 are not sent to anyone, and they remain in your iChat appli cation on your OS X system.
Part 12
Viewing Information about Buddies
S
ince you’ll be adding plenty of buddies with whom to “chat,” you’ll need to keep all the information about your buddies organized. iChat allows you to view information associated with an instant messaging account you’ve added as a buddy. This task shows how to view that information. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 137-1. Figure 137-1: The iChat Buddy List window, with an online buddy.
The keyboard shortcut for viewing a selected iChat person’s information is Shift-Ô-I. An AOL IM icon (as shown in Figure 137-1 next to Wyeth Willard) indicates that the person is using an AOL account to chat. A video camera icon dis played next to a buddy’s name in the Buddy List indi cates that the person has a video camera connected and turned on, and can par ticipate in video chats. The type of chatting you’re able to do with a buddy (text, audio, or video) depends on your buddy’s capabilities as well as yours. Check the bottom of the Get Info screen, as shown in Figure 137-4, for the person’s chat capabili ties. If only “chat” is dis played, that person is only capable of participating in text chats with you (but not audio or video).
2. Click a person in the iChat window to select that name. 3. From the Buddies menu at the top of the screen, choose Get Info to display the Info window shown in Figure 137-2.
Figure 137-2: Information about an IM buddy.
4. The Info window shows the information you have for this person stored in your OS X Address Book. Click the fields, and edit them to change the information in your Address Book. 5. Click the Show drop-down list and choose Actions to display the information shown in Figure 137-3.
Instant Messaging with iChat
297
Task
137
tips
•
Figure 137-3: Actions iChat makes in response to events from an IM buddy.
6. Click the Event drop-down list to choose an event (such as notification when the person logs in), and check the checkboxes to enable or disable iChat actions in response to the person’s events.
•
7. Click the Show drop-down list and choose the person’s screen name from the bottom of the drop-down list to display the information shown in Figure 137-4.
•
iChat works with .Mac and AOL instant messaging (IM), as well as ICQ version 3.4. iChat does not support the use of MSN, Yahoo!, or other IM services as of this writing, but Apple plans to support these in the future. Cards in the Address Book can store much more infor mation than that shown in Figure 137-2. The iChat Info window only shows information relevant to instant messaging. You can also access the Get Info window by Ctrl-clicking a buddy in the Buddy List and choosing Get Info from the pop-up menu.
Figure 137-4: More information about the person.
8. Click in the Your Notes field, and add comments. 9. Click the OK button to close the Info window.
cross-reference
•
Starting iChat for the first time and using a .Mac account are discussed in Task 134, “Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name.”
298
Task
138
notes
•
• • • • •
You delete a group by click ing once on its name in the Groups drawer and then pressing Delete on your keyboard. The buddies in that group will also be deleted, unless they also exist in other groups.
Part 12
Using Buddy Groups
I
f you end up with a lot of buddies, consider using buddy groups to help organize them. For example, you can group your coworkers together in one group and your personal friends in another. This task discusses how to do just that. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 138-1. Figure 138-1: The iChat Buddy List window.
The Undo command in the Edit menu does not replace the person or group you just deleted from the iChat window. There must always be at least one group in iChat. The default group’s name is “Buddies.” The keyboard shortcut to show or hide the Groups drawer is Shift-Ô-G.
2. Choose iChat ➪ Preferences, and click the General icon. Select “Use groups in Buddy List.” 3. A new button appears in the Buddy List window. Click it, and choose Groups from the menu, as shown in Figure 138-2. Figure 138-2: Choosing Groups from the All Groups menu.
Buddy groups aren’t avail able when chatting on the Rendezvous (local) network. When you start iChat, it dis plays whichever group(s) you had visible the last time iChat was open.
4. Click the Add Group (+) button in the bottom-left corner of the Groups drawer.
Instant Messaging with iChat
299
5. Enter the name of the new group in the field that appears, and press Return on your keyboard.
Task
6. To add a buddy to a group, drag the buddy’s name from the main Buddy list window into the Groups drawer and over the appropriate group name. 7. To display only one group at a time, choose that group’s name from the Groups drop-down list in the Buddy List window, as shown in Figure 138-3.
tips
•
Figure 138-3: Viewing buddies in only one group.
• 8. Click the small arrow in the upper-right corner of the Groups drawer to close it.
138
•
By default, dragging a buddy to a group removes that person from any other group that person is in. However, you can add buddies to more than one group. To do so, hold down the Option key while drag ging the buddy to another group. You can rename any group by clicking its name in the Groups drawer, pressing Return, typing a new name, and pressing Return again. To display or hide specific groups, you can either use the Groups menu in the Buddy List window, or the checkboxes in the Groups drawer.
cross-reference
•
If you want to add a buddy to your iChat window, follow the steps discussed in Task 136, “Adding a Buddy.”
300
Task
139
notes
• • •
•
The keyboard shortcut to open an instant mes sage window to a person whose name is selected in the iChat window is Opt-Ô-M.
Part 12
Starting a Text Chat
P
revious tasks in this part have covered how to start iChat, connect to the network, and add and delete users. Now you are ready to “chat” with the outside world. This task shows how to use iChat to communicate with other people. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects
to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 139-1.
Figure 139-1: The iChat window.
The little cloud and three dots icon next to the icon in Figure 139-2 appear to the other person as a sign that you’re about to send them a message. Smileys are a very old common tradition that attempts to add some shorthand text indicator of emotion to email and other text-based communications forms such as Internet Relay Chat (IRC). Smileys are “drawn” with characters from the keyboard, and interpreted by turning your head sideways. For exam ple, “ : )” is a happy face, “: (” is a frown, and so on. Newer IM applications like iChat switch the orientation of the smileys so you don’t have to turn your head sideways anymore. If you minimize your iChat message window, the icon in the Dock displays the icon of the person with whom you are carrying on a chat. When that person responds again, the icon bounces in the Dock and a sound is made.
2. Double-click a person in the iChat window to select that name and open an instant message window. 3. The cursor is automatically placed in the text entry field at the bottom of the instant message window. Type something to say to that person, as shown in Figure 139-2.
Figure 139-2: Opening a conversation with another person.
Instant Messaging with iChat 4. Press the Return key to send the typed text to the person. Your words appear in the instant message window, on the right side of the window.
301
Task
5. Review the person’s reply messages, which appear on the left side of the window.
139
6. Type some more, and select all or some of what you’ve typed before you send it. 7. Press Ô-b to make the text bold. 8. Similarly, select text before sending it and press Ô-i to make the selected text italic.
tips
•
9. Click the happy face button in the bottom-right of the text entry field and choose a smiley from the drop-down list to insert that smiley in the text-entry field. The formatted text should resemble Figure 139-3.
•
Figure 139-3: iChat includes limited ability to format chat text.
• •
If you change your mind and don’t want the text to be formatted as bold or italic, you can select it and press the keyboard short cut again to change it. If bolding the text was the last action you took, you can also press Ô-Z to undo your last action and unbold the text. Another way to access the text formatting is through the Format menu at the top of the screen. Choose Format ➪ Show Fonts to display the Font window, where you can change font faces, sizes, col ors, and more. Be aware that some users of older instant messaging software may not see your formatting changes. To join a named chat, select File ➪ Go to Chat, and enter the name of the chat you want to join. When you click OK, you join in the chat. To join an existing chat room on the AOL Instant Messenger service, choose File ➪ Go to Chat and enter the room’s name. For a list of some com monly used rooms, visit ichatmasters.net.
cross-reference
•
iChat AV is also capable of using audio and video chat. Refer to Task 140, “Starting an Audio Chat,” and Task 141, “Starting a Video Chat.”
302
Task
140
notes
•
•
If you don’t have a micro phone attached to your computer, but you do have a camera that has a micro phone, you can use that. Just plug in your camera and make sure that it’s turned on to capture sound. In order to have an audio chat with someone, that person needs to also have iChat AV or the latest version of AOL Instant Messenger, as of this writing.
Part 12
Starting an Audio Chat
A
n audio chat is very much like talking on the phone, except you don’t have to pay for the long-distance charges! You do have to have a microphone connected to your computer, however. This task shows you how to start an audio chat with a buddy in iChat. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects
to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 140-1.
Figure 140-1: The iChat window.
2. Make sure that your microphone (or camera with microphone) is connected to your computer. (A green phone or camera icon is visible next to your name at the top of the Buddy List window, as shown in Figure 140-2.) Figure 140-2: The iChat window with a camera microphone
attached.
Instant Messaging with iChat
303
3. Look for a buddy who is online and capable of receiving an audio chat, such as “Jenna” in Figure 140-2.
Task
4. Click that person’s name in the Buddy List to select her, and click the phone icon to send her an invitation to an audio chat.
140
5. After the person accepts your audio chat, you see a feedback window with a volume control, as shown in Figure 140-3.
tips
•
Figure 140-3: Using the audio chat feature.
6. Adjust the volume as needed, until you can hear the person speaking. 7. Click the “Mute” button (shown as a microphone with a line across) in the lower-left corner of the Audio Chat window to temporarily stop transmitting sound to your buddy. Click it again to resume the chat. 8. Click the red Close button in the upper-left corner of the Audio Chat window to leave the chat.
•
•
•
If you have more than one microphone, choose iChat ➪ Preferences and click the Video tab. Then, select a microphone from the Microphone drop-down list to choose which one to use. (If you don’t have a microphone, or you’re using a microphone attached to a camera, the Microphone drop-down list will not be available.) Want to record the audio chats you have in iChat? Download the free WireTap tool from Ambrosia Software (www.ambrosiasw. com/utilities/ freebies/), and you can! If your buddy has iChat AV, but doesn’t have a micro phone, you can still send your audio chat to your buddy (although that person won’t be able to talk back). To do so, Ctrl-click on the buddy’s name in the Buddy List and choose “Invite to One-way Audio Chat.” To check your volume level, click the phone or camera icon next to your name at the top of the Buddy List window. In the Preview win dow that appears, use the volume meter at the bottom of the window to make sure that your buddy can hear you with your current setup. Click the Preferences button to adjust your settings. You may need to move your microphone around to find the best location for optimal sound transmission.
cross-reference
•
To take advantage of a cam era with iChat, refer to Task 141, “Starting a Video Chat.”
304
Task
141
notes
•
•
•
•
•
iChat works with .Mac and AOL instant messaging (IM), as well as ICQ version 3.4. iChat does not support the use of MSN, Yahoo!, or other IM services as of this writing, but Apple plans to support these in the future.
Part 12
Starting a Video Chat
A
video chat is even better than talking on the phone. You don’t pay longdistance charges, and you get to see your friend! A video chat does require a digital video camera or Web cam, but there are many options available for even small budgets (refer to the “tips” section for suggestions). This task shows you how to start a video chat with a buddy in iChat. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 141-1. Figure 141-1: The iChat window.
You can only use the video chat option of iChat with other iChat AV users or those with the latest version of AOL Instant Messenger, as of this writing. By default, iChat makes the sound of a ringing phone when someone sends you an invitation to an audio or video chat. You can change this setting in the Alerts pane of the Preferences window.
2. Make sure that your camera is connected to your computer and turned on. (A green camera icon is visible next to your name at the top of the Buddy List window, as shown in Figure 141-2.) Figure 141-2: The iChat window with a camera attached to the system.
You can only video chat with one person at a time, as of this writing. In addi tion, you can not use iChat to video chat with PC users. However, future ver sions of the software may change that. Many video cameras are set to automatically shut off after a period of nonuse. Because you’re not actually recording when you’re video chatting, it thinks you’re not using it and shuts down. To prevent this, make sure that there are no tapes in the camera when you turn it on.
3. Look for a buddy who is online and capable of receiving a video chat, such as “Jenna” in Figure 141-2. 4. Click that person’s name in the Buddy List to select him or her, and click the camera icon (either next to that person’s name or in the toolbar at the bottom of the window) to send an invitation to a video chat. 5. After the person accepts your video chat, you see both yourself and your buddy in the Video Chat window, as shown in Figure 141-3.
Instant Messaging with iChat
305
Task
141
tips
•
Figure 141-3: Using the video chat feature.
6. Click the “Mute” button (shown as a microphone with a line across it) in the lower portion of the Video Chat window to temporarily stop transmitting sound or video to your buddy. Click it again to resume the chat.
•
7. Click the button with two small arrows to switch to full-screen mode, as shown in Figure 141-4.
• • •
Figure 141-4: Using the video chat feature in full-screen mode.
8. Click the full-screen button again to revert to normal-screen mode. 9. Click the red close button in the upper-left corner of the Video Chat window to leave the chat.
If you want to save a still photo from a video chat, you can do so by Ô-clicking in the video chat window and dragging the image to your desktop. It is then saved as a JPEG file. If your buddy doesn’t have a camera, but does have iChat AV, you can still trans mit your video. To do so, Ctrl-click the buddy’s name in the Buddy List and choose “Invite to One-way Video Chat.” While in full-screen mode, you can close the view of yourself by clicking the small X button. (You can’t close the view of yourself in normal–screen mode.) While in either normal- or full-screen mode, you can move the inset video of yourself all around the Video Chat window. Apple sells a Web cam especially for iChat called iSight. Visit Apple’s Web site (www.apple.com) for details. However, it is not required that you use an iSight to use the video capabilities of iChat. If you have a regular digital video camera, such as a Sony Digital HandyCam, that will work just fine. Simply plug the camera into your computer via its FireWire cable and switch it on.
cross-reference
•
You can also use the nor mal text messaging options while you’re video chatting. Refer to Task 139, “Starting a Text Chat,” for details.
306
Task
142
notes
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut to save the current instant message session is Ô-S.
Part 12
Saving a Chat Session
A
pple’s OS X instant messaging client, iChat, provides you with the capability to save conversations. This task shows how to save a chat session to a file and how to configure iChat to do so automatically. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 142-1. Figure 142-1: The iChat Buddy List window.
The default location iChat saves selected chat session files to is the Documents folder in your user direc tory. Click the Open Folder button in the Messages Preferences to open that folder in the Finder. Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a file Open or Save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop.
2. Double-click a person in the iChat window to select that name and open an instant message window. 3. The cursor is automatically placed in the text entry field at the bottom of the instant message window, as shown in Figure 142-2. Type something to say to that person.
Figure 142-2: Opening a conversation with another person.
4. Using the cursor, drag to select the section of the chat session that you want to save. 5. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Save a Copy As to display the Save file browser sheet shown in Figure 142-3.
Instant Messaging with iChat
307
Task
142
tips
•
Figure 142-3: Saving an iChat session.
6. Enter a name to save the chat session as in the “Save As” field. 7. Choose a directory to save the chat session file to. 8. Click the Save button to save the selected portion of the chat session as a file. 9. To automatically save all chat sessions as files, from the Application menu, choose iChat ➪ Preferences, then click the Messages button in the Preferences toolbar to display the Preferences window, which is shown in Figure 142-4.
•
•
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right. To open a previously saved iChat session, choose File ➪ Open and locate the saved file. Alternately, you can just double-click on the file and iChat will open to display it. Saving chat sessions only records the text content transferred during the ses sion. However, if you want to save a still photo from a video chat, you can do so by Ô-clicking in the video chat window and dragging the image to your desktop. It is then saved as a JPEG file.
cross-reference Figure 142-4: The iChat Preferences window.
10. Check the checkbox to the left of “Automatically save chat transcripts” and close the iChat Preferences window.
•
For more information on working with Mac OS X files, see Part 4, “Finding and Working with Files,” or Part 6, “Word Processing with TextEdit.”
308
Task
143
notes
•
• • • • •
•
To clarify, sending a file with an open chat session allows you and the recipi ent to both see the file in the chat window. Sending a file without an open chat session does not.
•
Sending a File
S
ometimes you may want to share more than sparkling conversation with your IM buddy. Sometimes you may want to share electronic files. Apple’s iChat instant messaging application lets you send files to people on your chat list. This task shows how to send a file to someone. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects
to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 143-1.
Figure 143-1: The iChat window.
The keyboard shortcut to send the selected person a file is Opt-Ô-F. The default location where iChat looks for a file you want to send to someone is the Documents folder in your user directory. Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a file Open or Save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop.
2. Click the name of the person you want to send a file to in the iChat window. 3. From the menu bar, choose Buddies ➪ Send File (as shown in Figure 143-2) to display the Save file browser sheet.
You can only send one file at a time. Sending file attachments is an option only available to iChat users and users of newer versions of AOL IM. Older versions of AOL IM may not support file attachments. There is no size limit for the files you send through iChat, but larger files will take longer to transmit.
cautions
•
Part 12
It’s considered polite to let the person know you’re sending a file first, especially if the file is large. Chat and email are two of the most common ways computer viruses spread themselves, and some peo ple block all file reception through email or other meth ods for security reasons. When in doubt, ask first. Recipients of files sent through iChat have the option to accept or reject the files.
Figure 143-2: Choosing to Send a File to a buddy.
Instant Messaging with iChat 4. Use the file browser dialog to locate a file to send to the person.
309
Task
5. Click the Send button. The file browser dialog closes, and iChat sends the file to that person.
143
6. To send a file to a person from an iChat session window that is already open, again choose Buddies ➪ Send File. 7. Locate the file in your directory structure, and click Open. 8. A small file icon appears in the box at the bottom of your instant message window. Add a caption if you want, and click the Send button to display the photo in the message window, as shown in Figure 143-3.
tip
•
You can also send a file by dragging it over a buddy’s name in the Buddy List.
Figure 143-3: Sending a file in an already open message window.
9. Use the file browser dialog to choose a file to send to the person.
cross-reference
•
For more information about mail attachments, see Task 112, “Saving and Opening Mail Attachments.”
310
Task
144
notes
•
•
•
The Privacy Level menu, as shown in Figure 144-3, gives you the options to allow everyone, to allow (only) people on your Buddy List to contact you, to allow people listed on the Privacy pane to contact you, to block the people listed in the Privacy pane, or to block everyone. You’ll need to decide what’s right for you. When someone is blocked, you cannot see whether that person is currently online, and that person cannot see if you’re online. Instead, you both appear “offline” until you unblock that person.
Part 12
Blocking Annoying People
A
s in real life, not everyone you meet on the Internet is a nice person. At some point, you may not want to be bothered by a person in iChat. This task shows how to block people from contacting you in iChat. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects
to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 144-1.
Figure 144-1: The iChat window.
2. From the application menu, choose iChat ➪ Preferences to open the iChat Preferences window. 3. Click the Privacy button on the Preferences toolbar to display the window shown in Figure 144-2.
A blocked buddy does not know you have blocked him or her. Instead, it simply appears as though you’re never online.
Figure 144-2: The Privacy pane of the iChat Preferences window.
Instant Messaging with iChat 4. From the Privacy Level radio buttons, select “Block Specific People.”
311
Task
5. Click the Edit List button to display the sheet shown in Figure 144-3. Click the plus sign (+) in the bottom-left corner of the sheet. The first line of the list in the center of the window is highlighted, and the cursor appears in the left margin of the selected line.
144
tips
•
Figure 144-3: Adding a screen name to the list of blocked people.
•
6. Type the screen name of a person. Press the Return key. 7. To remove a person from the list, click the name to select it and then click the minus (–) button.
iChat works with .Mac and AOL instant messaging (IM), as well as ICQ version 3.4. iChat does not support the use of MSN, Yahoo!, or other IM services as of this writing, but Apple plans to support these in the future. If you’re currently receiving messages from someone you want to block, click the Block button at the bottom of the message window, or choose Buddies ➪ Block Person. You’ll then have to choose iChat ➪ Preferences and follow the steps in this task to unblock that person.
cross-reference
•
Starting iChat for the first time and using a .Mac account is discussed in Task 134, “Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name.”
312
Task
145
notes
•
•
Changing the font and color of your messages in iChat affects how you see your text, as well as how it’s displayed on the recipient’s computer, provided that person has iChat or the lat est version of AOL Instant Messenger. Choosing to “Reformat incoming messages” over rides all formatting your buddies have used to transmit their messages to you. This may come in handy, however, if a buddy chooses to send you pale pink writing that is difficult to read on your screen.
Part 12
Setting iChat Message Appearance
A
pple’s instant messaging application, iChat, allows you to customize its behavior and appearance in several ways. This task shows how to set and change the appearance of messages in iChat session windows. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 145-1. Figure 145-1: The iChat window.
2. From the application menu, choose iChat ➪ Preferences to open the iChat Preferences window. 3. Click the Messages button on the Preferences toolbar to display the window shown in Figure 145-2.
Figure 145-2: The Messages pane of the iChat Preferences window.
Instant Messaging with iChat 4. Click the “My balloon color:” drop-down list to set the color of the balloon your words appear in.
313
Task
5. Click the “My font color:” drop-down list to set the color of the font your words appear in.
145
6. Click the Set Font button to open the Font browser panel, which is shown in Figure 145-3.
tips
•
•
Figure 145-3: The Font browser panel.
7. Use the Font browser panel to change your preferred font.
•
8. Click the red close button in the top left of the Font browser title bar to close the Font browser panel. 9. Check the Reformat incoming messages checkbox to reformat
incoming messages according to your specifications.
10. Use the “Sender’s balloon color” drop-down list, the “Sender’s font color” drop-down list, and the Set Font button to change messages from other people in the same way as you used Steps 4 through 8 to reformat the appearance of your own messages.
•
Chat works with .Mac and AOL instant messaging (IM), as well as ICQ version 3.4. iChat does not support the use of MSN, Yahoo!, or other IM services as of this writing, but Apple plans to support these in the future. To display the chat session as text boxes instead of balloons, choose View ➪ Show As Text. If you choose not to display the balloons, the message window appears as a collection of colored rectangles with user icons on the left and chat text on the right. By default, iChat displays an icon or photo next to the person’s message. You can specify whether to use pictures, text, or both under the View menu. Another way to customize the chat session is to add an image to the background of the message window. To do so, choose View ➪ Set Chat Background and select the file you want to use. To remove that file later, choose View ➪ Clear Background.
cross-reference
•
Starting iChat for the first time and using a .Mac account is discussed in Task 134, “Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name.”
314
Task
146
notes
•
•
•
The Speech volume slider adjusts related to System volume. The System volume set in System Preferences is always at maximum. If the OS X System sound level is zero or muted, the iChat speech won’t be heard. iChat is set up to automati cally bounce the iChat icon in the Dock when you receive a message while working in another applica tion. However, the bouncing stops and doesn’t repeat. To have it repeat until you return to working in iChat, choose “Message Received” from the Event drop-down list and place a checkmark in the active box labeled “Repeat.”
Setting iChat Message Actions
A
pple’s instant messaging application, iChat, allows you to customize its behavior and appearance in several ways. This task shows how to set and change the behavior of iChat in response to actions taken by you and other people you chat with. 1. Click the iChat icon in the Dock to start iChat. iChat starts, connects to the Internet, and opens your Buddy List, as shown in Figure 146-1. Figure 146-1: The iChat window.
2. From the application menu, choose iChat ➪ Preferences to open the iChat Preferences window. 3. Click the Alerts button on the Preferences toolbar to display the window shown in Figure 146-2.
When you are working in another program, but iChat is open and you’re online, the iChat icon in the Dock will be automatically updated to display the number of new messages you have, regardless of how you customize the Alerts preferences.
caution
•
Part 12
Checking both “Play sound” and “Speak text” for a single event may produce unpredictable results, in that one or both of the sounds may be lost.
Figure 146-2: The Alerts pane of the iChat Preferences window.
4. Click the Event drop-down list to see the list of actions for which you can customize iChat’s behavior, as shown in Figure 146-3.
Instant Messaging with iChat
315
Task
146
tips Figure 146-3: The Event drop-down list.
•
5. Choose an action from the drop-down list. The checkboxes below change status, depending on which action you are editing. 6. If the Play Sound checkbox is checked, you can choose a sound from the drop-down list shown in Figure 146-4.
•
•
As of this writing, iChat works with .Mac and AOL instant messaging (IM). iChat does not support the use of MSN, Yahoo!, or other IM services as of this writing. The ampersand (@) charac ter can be used in the Speak Text field to represent a buddy’s name. For exam ple, type “You have a new message from “@” in iChat” for the event “Message Received” to have iChat announce who’s sent you a message. Unlike AIM, the current ver sion of iChat (as of this writing) is not capable of automatically speaking the contents of a new message. However, you can download an application enhancer called iChatter to do it for you, from www.ecamm. com/mac/ichatter.
Figure 146-4: The Play Sound drop-down list.
7. Check the Speak text checkbox, and enter a phrase for Apple Speech to read aloud when the action takes place. 8. Adjust the volume to read the phrase aloud with the Speech volume slider at the bottom of the Actions pane. 9. Check or uncheck the Bounce icon in the Dock to choose whether or not to have the iChat icon in the Dock bounce when the action takes place.
cross-reference
•
Starting iChat for the first time and using a .Mac account is discussed in Task 134, “Setting Up iChat with Your .Mac or AIM Screen Name.”
Part 13: Scheduling with iCal Task 147: Starting iCal Task 148: Adding an Event to a Calendar Task 149: Adding a Repeating Event to a Calendar Task 150: Adding Reminders and Notes to an Event Task 151: Inviting People to an Event Task 152: Adding a Calendar Task 153: Sharing a Calendar Task 154: Working with a Shared Calendar Task 155: Subscribing to a Calendar Task 156: Adding a To-Do Item Task 157: Searching Calendars and To-Do Lists Task 158: Printing Calendars and To-Do Lists
318
Task
147
notes
• •
The keyboard shortcut to open the iCal Preferences window is Ô-Y. If you cannot find iCal on your system, you can download the iCal installer from Apple using your Web browser: www.apple. com/ical/ download/index. html.
Part 13
Starting iCal
A
pple’s iCal application is a useful way to track your calendars and create to-do lists. This task will show how to start iCal, how to set preferences, and how to change the view in the main iCal window. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application (or locate
it in the Applications folder of your Macintosh hard drive). The iCal
window appears.
2. From the application menu, choose iCal ➪ Preferences to open the
iCal Preferences window shown in Figure 147-1.
Figure 147-1: The iCal Preferences window.
3. Set the days per week for the week and month view, and the day of the week to begin the week on, from the drop-down lists in the Week section. 4. Set the start time for the day and the end time for the day, and how many hours to show in the main window, with the drop-down lists in the Day section. 5. Click the “Sort To Do items by” drop-down lists to choose how to organize to-do items in the calendar, and specify when to delete or hide events and to-do items in the Events and To Do items section. 6. Click the red Close button in the Preferences title bar to close the window. 7. The Calendars column in the left of the iCal window shows the calendars you have in iCal, and a mini-view of the months. Click the up arrow to scroll the mini-months back in time, the down arrow to scroll the mini-months forward in time, and the center diamond to bring the current month back to visibility.
Scheduling with iCal
319
8. Click the calendar button below the mini-month view to close the pane, as shown in Figure 147-2. Click the calendar button again to return to the mini-month view.
Task
147
tips
•
Figure 147-2: iCal with the mini-months view closed.
•
9. Click the pushpin icon at the right end of the bottom of the iCal window to show the current to-do list, as shown in Figure 147-3.
• •
Figure 147-3: The To Do items list expands and closes from the right side of the iCal
window.
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying length, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right. Click the Day, Week, and Month buttons at the bot tom of the iCal window to change the view of the main calendar accordingly. Use the “Next” and “Back” arrows next to those but tons to move to the next or last day, week, or month (depending on which but ton is highlighted). To get today’s date, either go to View ➪ Go to Today, or simply press Ô-T. Click the “i” button next to the pushpin on the bottom right of the iCal window to display details for the cur rently selected calendar, event, or to-do item.
cross-references
•
10. Close the To Do items list to return the iCal window to the normal view.
•
You can move the iCal icon to another location in the Dock, or remove it entirely, as discussed in Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock.” Installing new software is discussed in Task 12, “Installing New Software.”
320
Task
148
notes
• •
• •
• •
The keyboard shortcut to enter a new event into the selected calendar is Ô-N.
Part 13
Adding an Event to a Calendar
A
pple’s iCal application is a calendaring and to-do list manager that you can use to keep track of what, where, and when to perform tasks or be somewhere. Appointments, meetings, and so on are collectively known as events. This task shows how to add a single-day event (one that does not repeat) to a calendar. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The
iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 148-1.
By default, a new event starts one hour later than when you open the Event Info window, and ends at the next hour. So, creating an event at 2:20 P.M. means the new event starts at 3:20 P.M., and ends at 4 P.M. All-day events do not have start or end times, just start and end dates. When viewing a calendar in Day or Week view, you can tell the status of an event by looking for a status icon to the right of the event name. A question mark indicates an event is listed as “Tentative.” A checkmark specifies a “Confirmed” event and an X marks a “Cancelled” event. Click the icon to change an event’s status.
Figure 148-1: iCal.
2. In the Calendars column, click the Work calendar to show the Work calendar in the main pane. 3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Event. The Info drawer appears, as shown in Figure 148-2, and a “New Event” is automatically added to the selected day in the calendar.
You can also change the timing of an event by click ing and dragging the event to a different time and/or date. All-day events are listed at the top of each day in the main calendar view.
Figure 148-2: Adding a new event to a calendar with the Info drawer.
Scheduling with iCal 4. Click “New Event” and enter the name of the event. Click “location” to specify a location, as needed.
321
Task
5. If this is an all-day event, check the “all-day” checkbox.
148
6. If this event is not an all-day event, set the date, the start time, and the end time of the event by clicking the fields and using the up-down arrow pairs. 7. Click the status drop-down list to set the status of this event. 8. Click the calendar drop-down list to choose the calendar for this event, as shown in Figure 148-3.
tips
•
• •
You can also schedule an event by double-clicking the appointed time when the calendar view is set to “Day.” Furthermore, you can drag vertically across a period of time while in Day view or Week view to create an event that spans that time period. Delete an event by selecting it in the calendar view (click on the event name) and pressing the Delete key. You can copy an event quickly by selecting it and pressing Ô-C. Then, click in the location in which you want to paste the event, and press Ô-V.
Figure 148-3: Set the calendar for the new event.
9. Specify a URL in the URL field, if the event has a corresponding Web site.
cross-references
• • •
This task only covers singleday events. To add a repeat ing event, refer to Task 149, “Adding a Repeating Event to a Calendar.” The attendees field is dis cussed in Task 151, “Inviting People to an Event.” The alarm and notes fields are discussed in Task 150, “Adding Reminders and Notes to an Event.”
322
Task
149
notes
• •
•
• •
The keyboard shortcut to enter a new event into the selected calendar is Ô-N.
Part 13
Adding a Repeating Event to a Calendar
M
ost schedules include events that occur on a regular basis, at regular times, with regular attendees. Rather than entering each event individually, iCal enables you to set up regular events in your calendar as “repeating events.” This task shows how to add a regularly repeating event to a calendar. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The
iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 149-1.
You can choose to have an event never repeat (the default); repeat daily, weekly, monthly, yearly; or repeat on a given day and week, such as “the second Monday of the month.” If the Info drawer is not visible, click the small “i” button in the bottom-right corner of the iCal window to display it. Alternately, you can press Ô-I to display the Event Info. When in Day or Week view, you can also double-click the bar at the top of an event to display the Info drawer. Click and drag the small dot in the center of the outside edge of the Info drawer to increase or decrease its size.
Figure 149-1: iCal.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Event. 3. Click the subject field, enter the name of the event, and then set the date and times as discussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.” The Info drawer appears, as shown in Figure 149-2.
The Info drawer may appear on either the left or right side of your main iCal win dow, depending on the amount of space currently available on your screen.
Figure 149-2: Adding a new event to a calendar with the Event Info window.
Scheduling with iCal 4. Click the repeat drop-down list, and select from the choices shown in Figure 149-3. For the purposes of this example, select “every week.”
323
Task
149
tips
• •
Figure 149-3: The Repeat menu of the Event Info pane.
5. After selecting the repeat schedule, specify when the event ends in the end drop-down list. 6. Further customize the event as needed, and click the Month view at the bottom of the iCal window to see the event appear on multiple days, as shown in Figure 149-4.
•
•
To set a custom repeat schedule, choose “Custom” from the drop-down list and adjust the options in the pop-up window as needed. Be sure to indicate how many times the event will occur in the bottom part of the setup box. If you select “Never,” from the “End” drop-down, the event will always show up in your calendar. You can recognize a recur ring event when in Day or Week view by looking for the repeating icon to the right of the event name. To show that an event repeats, iCal displays three small squares that appear to be stacked in front of each other. Quickly change when a repeating event stops by Ctrl-clicking the event on the date you want it to stop and choosing “Stop Recurrence” from the pop-up menu.
cross-references
•
Figure 149-4: The new event appears weekly on the Month calendar.
• •
Adding a new event to a calendar in iCal is discussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.” The attendees field is discussed in Task 151, “Inviting People to an Event.” The alarm and notes fields are discussed in Task 150, “Adding Reminders and Notes to an Event.”
324
Task
150
Part 13
Adding Reminders and Notes to an Event
A notes
• • • •
•
The keyboard shortcut to enter a new event into the selected calendar is Ô-N.
pple’s OS X iCal application allows you to customize events you’ve entered into calendars. Sometimes you may need to be reminded that an event is coming up, or even what the event is all about. This task shows how to add reminders and notes about an event in the calendar. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The
iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 150-1.
You must have your own address card set up with a valid email address in the Address Book to set an alarm to email you. Setting a sound reminder does not work if the system’s sound is muted or turned off. When iCal sends a reminder email, it opens Mail (if it wasn’t already open) and sends an email that includes the event’s date, name, and any notes specified in the notes field of the Info drawer. The default time for advance warning of an event is 15 minutes. Click the number and time frame (minutes, hours days), and enter a new time to change it.
Figure 150-1: iCal.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Event to add a new event to the currently selected day. 3. Create an event as discussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.” 4. Click the alarm drop-down list in the Info drawer to display the choices shown in Figure 150-2.
Figure 150-2: The alarm options of the iCal Info drawer.
Scheduling with iCal
325
5. Select Message or Message with sound to have iCal show a reminder pop-up message on the desktop, as shown in Figure 150-3.
Task
150
Figure 150-3: iCal can show a reminder of an upcoming event on the desktop.
tips 6. Select Email to have iCal send an email reminder to you. Select Open File to have a particular file or application (such as iCal) opened before the event. 7. Specify the amount of time before the event that the reminder alarm should be made.
• •
8. Add details in the Notes field below the URL, as shown in Figure 150-4.
• • Figure 150-4: The notes section of the iCal Info drawer.
To remind yourself to follow up on an event, add an alarm set to go off after the event. You can add additional alarms by clicking the word “alarm” in the Info drawer and choosing “Add Alarm.” For example, you might add one alarm that emails you 1 day in advance of an event, and then a second alarm that causes a pop up message to appear on the screen 15 minutes before the event. Click the word “alarm” again, and choose “Remove Alarm” to remove an alarm after creating it. iCal remembers the last few alarms you set up and stores them at the bottom of the Alarms drop-down list. This makes it easy to repeat an alarm without selecting all of the options again.
cross-references
• •
Adding a new event to a calendar in iCal is dis cussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.” Adding attendees is dis cussed in Task 151, “Inviting People to an Event.”
326
Task
151
notes
• • • • •
•
The iCal People window is a view into your Address Book.
Part 13
Inviting People to an Event
A
pple’s iCal calendaring application is integrated to work closely with other OS X applications, including the Mail application. If you are scheduling an event, you must have a way to invite people to attend. This task shows how to add attendees and invite those people to an event by using your Mail program with iCal. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The
iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 151-1.
Invitations sent by iCal are stored in Mail’s Sent folder. No action is required by you to send those invitations. You can simultaneously select multiple people in the People window to add to the attendees field. You can also press Ôoption-A to hide or display the People window. The standard invitation email includes a link to click to accept or decline the invitation. If the recipi ent is using a calendar pro gram that can view .ics files (such as iCal), then that person can click the link to add the event to his or her calendar. After you send invitations to people, a question mark appears next to the names in the attendees field. When a person confirms his attendance, that ques tion mark changes to a checkmark to signify that the person has accepted your invitation. If the person declines the invitation, the question mark becomes an X.
Figure 151-1: iCal.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Event. The Info drawer appears, if it wasn’t already visible. 3. Create an event as discussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.” 4. Choose Window ➪ Show People to display the People window shown in Figure 151-2. 5. Find a person to invite in the People window, and click that person’s name to select it. 6. Drag the person’s name to the attendees field for the event you want to invite him or her to.
Scheduling with iCal
327
Task
151
tips
•
Figure 151-2: The iCal People window.
7. Click the red Close button in the People window’s title bar to close the window.
•
8. Click the word “attendees” in the Info drawer, and choose “Send Invitations” to send the attendees an invitation to the event. iCal opens the Mail program and sends a message similar to that shown in Figure 151-3.
•
Figure 151-3: An invitation sent by iCal to an event attendee.
You can also add attendees simply by typing their names into the attendees field. If iCal recognizes the name from your Address Book, it will complete the typing for you, just as it does when typing an address in an email message. It’s possible to send a par ticular attendee an email directly by clicking that person’s name in the atten dees list and selecting Send Email from the pop-up menu. Email an event by Ctrl clicking the event in the main calendar view and selecting “Mail Event” from the pop-up menu.
cross-references
• •
Adding a new event to a calendar in iCal is dis cussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.” Sending email is discussed in Part 10, “Correspondence with Mail and the Address Book.”
328
Task
152
notes
• • • • •
The keyboard shortcut to create a new calendar is Opt-Ô-N.
Part 13
Adding a Calendar
I
f you have a busy schedule, you may need more than one calendar to keep track of all your activities. Apple’s iCal includes the ability to add new calendars for sorting your different activities (such as home, work, the kids, and so on). This task shows how to add a new calendar to iCal. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The
iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 152-1.
When a calendar is selected, events belonging to other calendars are faded out. The Info drawer may also be displayed by Ctrl-clicking the calendar name in the Calendars column, and choosing Show Info. You can add any text into the Description field of the calendar: names, street addresses, URLs, com ments, whatever makes sense to you. An event can only belong to one calendar.
Figure 152-1: iCal.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Calendar. A new calendar named Untitled appears in the Calendars column, as shown in Figure 152-2.
Figure 152-2: The new calendar being added.
Scheduling with iCal 3. The name of the new calendar is “Untitled” and is automatically selected. Type a name for the new calendar. For this task, you can use the example “Exercise.”
329
Task
152
4. Press Return to save the name of the new calendar. 5. The new calendar is selected. Press Ô-I to display the Info drawer (if it’s not already visible), as shown in Figure 152-3.
tips
• • •
Figure 152-3: The Info drawer.
6. Click the Name field to place the cursor in the field, and edit the
name if you aren’t satisfied with it.
7. Click the Color drop-down list, and change the color of events
assigned to that calendar.
8. Click the Description field to place the cursor in the field.
• •
9. Enter a description of the calendar. 10. Click the red Close button in the Calendar Info title bar to close the window and save your changes.
When scheduling an event, be sure to click a calendar before creating the appoint ment to ensure that the appointment is entered into the correct calendar. To hide events from your iCal window, uncheck the calendar name in the Calendars column. You can also add a new calendar by clicking the New Calendar (+) button in the bottom-left corner of the iCal window. When selecting a color for a calendar’s events, you can choose from the predefined list of colors or select Custom to define your own color for the calendar. You can hide the minimonth calendar by clicking the calendar button in the lower-left corner of the iCal window. To change the amount of space given to the mini-month calendar and the list of calendars, drag the small dot on the border between the two sections.
cross-reference
•
Adding a new event to a calendar in iCal is dis cussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.”
330
Task
153
notes
• • •
•
Part 13
Sharing a Calendar
I
n addition to creating a calendar for your own benefit, you can share a calendar by publishing it over the Internet to your .Mac account or to another Web server. This task shows how to publish your calendar. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The
iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 153-1.
A small broadcast icon appears next to the pub lished calendar name in the Calendars column of the iCal window. Publishing a calendar requires an Internet connection. You publish an individual calendar, not all your calen dars at once. So, if you want to publish calendars, it’s a good idea to separate events into ones you want to make public and ones you want to keep private. The “Publish subjects and notes” checkbox is auto matically checked. Uncheck it if you do not want to include the subjects and notes in the published calendar.
Figure 153-1: iCal.
2. In the Calendars column, click the name of the calendar you want to publish to select it. 3. From the menu bar, choose Calendar ➪ Publish. The Publish Calendar window appears, as shown in Figure 153-2. 4. Check the “Publish changes automatically” checkbox to have any changes you make to your selected calendar in iCal be updated in the published version. 5. Check the “Publish subjects and notes” checkbox to include the subjects and notes in the published calendar.
Figure 153-2: The Publish Calendar window.
Scheduling with iCal 6. Check the “Publish alarms” and “Publish To Do items” checkboxes to include those items with the published calendar.
331
Task
7. By default, the calendar is published to your .Mac Web space. To publish to another (WebDAV-enabled) server, select “Publish on a WebDAV server” from the Publish calendar drop-down list and enter the necessary information. 8. Click the Publish button. The calendar uploads to the site, and you should see a success message that resembles the one in Figure 153-3.
tips
• • •
Figure 153-3: Successfully publishing a calendar to a .Mac account.
9. Click the OK button to close the dialog. Click the Visit Page button to open the calendar in your default Web browser, as shown in Figure 153-4, or click Send Mail to start your default mail program and compose an email inviting people to view or subscribe to your published calendar.
153
• •
If you are publishing a calendar to an non-.Mac account, you’ll need to get the appropriate information from the system adminis trator of that server. You can also export a cal endar if you want to use it on another computer. To do so, choose File ➪ Export. After a calendar has been published, the publishing details are displayed in the Info drawer when that cal endar is selected. Click the Auto-publish drop-down list to edit the date when the calendar is to be published next. Check and uncheck the publish items, as needed. You can change the name that visitors see when they access your calendar by entering a new name in the “Publish name” field when you publish the calendar. This does not change the calendar’s name in your Calendars list.
cross-references
• • •
Figure 153-4: A published calendar.
Creating a .Mac account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” Creating a new calendar is discussed in Task 152, “Adding a Calendar.” Users can subscribe to published calendars, as discussed in Task 155, “Subscribing to a Calendar.”
332
Task
154
notes
• •
The keyboard shortcut to update a selected pub lished calendar is Opt-Ô-P.
Part 13
Working with a Shared Calendar
O
nce you’ve published a calendar, you may need to update the calendar. You may also want to send an email to invite people to read or subscribe to your calendar. At some point, you may want to remove the calendar from publication. This task shows how to update a calendar, invite people to your calendar, and unpublish the calendar. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The
iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 154-1.
Calendars published on .Mac can be viewed by anyone using a normal Web browser. However, calen dars published on a private WebDAV server can only be viewed through iCal.
Figure 154-1: iCal.
2. In the Calendars column, click the name of the calendar you want to publish to select it. 3. Follow the steps in Task 153, “Sharing a Calendar,” to publish the calendar. 4. Once you’ve edited a published calendar, you may need to manually update the published version on the Web. To do so, from the menu bar, choose Calendar ➪ Refresh. iCal republishes the calendar updates to the Web. 5. To invite people to view or subscribe to your calendar, from the menu bar choose the Calendar ➪ Send publish email command. iCal launches your default mail application and composes an invitational email, as shown in Figure 154-2.
Scheduling with iCal
333
Task
154
tips
•
Figure 154-2: Sending email to invite people to read or subscribe to your published
calendar.
•
6. Use your mail program to address and send the invitational email. 7. To remove a published calendar from the Internet, choose the Calendar ➪ Unpublish command, as shown in Figure 154-3.
• •
Figure 154-3: Unpublishing a calendar.
8. A dialog, shown in Figure 154-4, appears, asking you to confirm your choice to unpublish the calendar. Click the Unpublish button. The dialog closes, and the published icon disappears from the calendar name in the Calendars column of the iCal window.
You can also set a calendar to automatically refresh any time you make changes to that calendar. Double-click the calendar’s name to reveal the Info drawer, and select “after each change” from the Auto-publish dropdown list. To have your calendar show only when you are busy, but not what event is keeping you busy, publish your cal endar without any subjects or notes. If you unpublish a calen dar, new users cannot sub scribe to it, but previous subscribers can view the last published version. To delete a calendar from .Mac entirely (so even pre vious subscribers can no longer view it), choose Go ➪ iDisk from the Finder Application menu. Next, choose Go ➪ Go to Folder. Type /Volumes/membername/Sites/.calendars, and drag the particular calendar to the Trash. (Remember to replace “membername” with your .Mac account name in the link.)
cross-references
•
Figure 154-4: Confirming unpublishing a calendar.
• •
To learn how to initially pub lish a calendar, refer to Task 153, “Sharing a Calendar.” Adding a calendar in iCal is discussed in Task 152, “Adding a Calendar.” Visitors who also have iCal can subscribe to your shared calendar to see a copy in their own version of iCal. Refer to Task 155, “Subscribing to a Calendar,” for details.
334
Task
155
notes
• • • •
The keyboard shortcut to subscribe to a calendar is Opt-Ô-S. Your options for automatic refreshing of the subscribed calendar are every 15 min utes, hourly, daily, and weekly.
Part 13
Subscribing to a Calendar
I
n addition to tracking events of your own or sharing them by publishing a calendar to a public Web server, you can subscribe to someone else’s calendar and have that calendar appear on your iCal window. This task shows how to subscribe to a public calendar. 1. The first thing to do is find a calendar to subscribe to. Apple has a Calendar Library site at www.apple.com/ical/library. Open your Web browser and go to the Web site. 2. Choose a calendar to subscribe to by clicking its link. For the example, you can use the US Holidays calendar by clicking the “US Holidays” link below the Holidays headline. 3. Clicking the link causes iCal to launch and display the Subscribe window, as shown in Figure 155-1.
Subscribing to a calendar requires an Internet connection. Subscribed-to calendars are indicated by a small arrow icon to the right of the calendar name in the Calendars list.
Figure 155-1: Subscribing to a calendar.
4. The URL is automatically entered, because you clicked the link in the Web browser.
Scheduling with iCal 5. To automatically refresh the calendar, check the Refresh checkbox, then choose an interval at which to refresh the calendar, using the drop-down list.
335
Task
155
6. Uncheck the “Remove alarms” and “Remove To Do items” checkboxes if you want to receive any alarms or to-do items from the subscribed-to calendar. 7. Click the Subscribe button. The subscribed-to calendar’s name appears in the calendars column, and the events appear in the main pane of the iCal window, as shown in Figure 155-2.
tips
•
•
• Figure 155-2: The subscribed-to calendar appears in the Calendars column.
•
Set your Web browser to www.icalshare. com to enter a worldwide clearinghouse for such iCal calendars as schedules for Mac user groups, events at Apple retailers across the country, trade show sched ules, and much more. You can also subscribe to a calendar manually by choosing Calendar ➪ Subscribe and entering the calendar’s address in the space provided or by choosing Calendars ➪ Find Shared Calendars. You can change the color of the subscribed calendar’s items by editing the Color drop-down list in the Info drawer. (Click the “i” button in the lower-right corner of the iCal window to display the Info drawer.) You can move an event from one calendar to another by choosing a different calen dar in the Info drawer. To do so, first double-click the event name in the main calendar view and then select from the Calendar drop-down list in the Info drawer.
cross-reference
•
Opening a Web browser is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.”
336
Task
156
notes
• • • •
The keyboard shortcut for a new to-do item is Ô-K.
Part 13
Adding a To-Do Item
T
o-do lists are a common means for organizing a day’s activities. Such lists provide a clear, itemized view of what must be accomplished. In addition to keeping track of events, you can add to-do items to your iCal calendars. This task shows how to create a to-do item and add it to a calendar in iCal. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application. The iCal window appears, as shown in Figure 156-1.
When entering a to-do item, you are limited to seeing the single line. When you press Return, all the text you’ve entered is visible. If you haven’t marked a todo item as completed, and the due date has passed, an alert icon appears next to the item’s name. You can change the calen dar that a particular to-do item is associated with, by selecting the to-do item and then choosing a new calendar from the calendar drop-down list in the Info drawer.
Figure 156-1: iCal.
2. In the Calendars column, click the name of the calendar you want to work with to select it. 3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New To Do. The To Do items column of the iCal window opens, and a New To Do item appears, as shown in Figure 156-2. 4. The name of the new to-do item is automatically selected when it is created. Type the new to-do item name, and press Return to save the to-do item, as shown in Figure 156-3.
Figure 156-2: The To Do items column of the iCal window.
Scheduling with iCal
337
Task
156
tips
•
Figure 156-3: The new to-do item.
•
5. Click the pushpin button in the bottom-right corner of the iCal window to close the To Do items column. 6. Click the pushpin button in the bottom-right corner of the iCal window to reopen the To Do items column. 7. Click the “i” button to display the Info drawer, and select a to-do item to view its details in the Info drawer, as shown in Figure 156-4.
• • •
Figure 156-4: Details about the to-do item.
10. When you are finished with the to-do item, check the checkbox to mark it as done.
You can also adjust the pri ority of an item by clicking the priority icon to the right of the to-do item’s name in the To Do items list. The higher the priority, the higher an item is displayed in the list. One bar means “not very important,” while three bars is “very important.” To hide the to-do item with out closing the To Do items column, uncheck the item’s calendar in the Calendars column. To delete the to-do item whether or not you’ve checked it as done, click the to-do item to select it and press the Delete key. You can have iCal notify you (via email, with a pop-up message or by opening a file) when a to-do item is due by selecting it from the Alarm menu after first assigning it a due date in the Info drawer.
cross-references
•
8. Edit the priority of the to-do item by selecting from the priority
drop-down list in the Info drawer.
9. Place a checkmark in the due date checkbox, and add a date to specify when the task is due. Add a URL and Notes as needed.
Ctrl-click anywhere in the To Do items list and choose from the Sort by menu to change how the items are sorted in the list view.
• •
You can set iCal to automat ically delete events and todo items after a period of time in the iCal Preferences window, as discussed in Task 147, “Starting iCal.” You can specify whether to publish to-do items when you share a calendar. For details, refer to Task 153, “Sharing a Calendar.” Printing a to-do list is dis cussed in Task 158, “Printing Calendars and To-Do Lists.”
338
Task
157
notes
•
•
When you enter characters in the Search field, iCal searches all events and to-do items on all visible calendars (that is, calen dars that have checkmarks next to their names in the Calendar list). This includes subjects, descriptions, names, and email addresses of those invited to events, and URLs and notes associated with events and to-do items.
Part 13
Searching Calendars and To-Do Lists
W
hen you add numerous events and to-do items to your calendars, it can be difficult to locate particular events and items. Luckily, iCal contains a convenient search tool to help you do just that. This task shows how to search for calendar events and to-do items in iCal. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application to display the main iCal window. 2. Enter text to search for in the Search field at the bottom of the main
iCal window, as shown in Figure 157-1.
You cannot search by time or date (such as 4:15 or 4/5) because the time and date fields are not searched.
Figure 157-1: Entering search terms at the bottom of the main window.
3. To limit your search to a particular calendar, uncheck the other calendars’ checkboxes in the Calendars list. iCal automatically updates your search results, as shown in Figure 157-2.
Figure 157-2: Turning off the “Work” calendar removes its items from the Search Result
window.
Scheduling with iCal
339
4. Click an item in the Search Result window to go to that item in the calendar view above, as shown in Figure 157-3.
Task
157
tips
•
• Figure 157-3: Select an item from the Search Result window to view that item in the
main calendar view. 5. Double-click an item in the Search Result window to view the details for that item in the Info drawer. 6. Click the button immediately to the right of the Search field to hide or display the Search Result window.
• •
When you type even a sin gle letter in the Search field at the bottom of the iCal window, iCal starts showing search results. Type addi tional letters to narrow the search until you find the item you’re looking for. To view all the items on a calendar again, highlight and delete the text from the Search field, or click the “x” that appears in the right of that field. You can search for the name of a person invited to an event. Searching for “may” will display all events and to-do items with “may” included somewhere in their text. This means that “Cinco de Mayo” will be displayed in the search results because “may” is contained in the word “Mayo.”
cross-references
• • •
Starting iCal is discussed in Task 147, “Starting iCal.” Adding to-do items is discussed in Task 156, “Adding a To-Do Item.” Adding Events is discussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.”
340
Task
158
notes
• • •
•
Printing with the Day or Week view selected causes multiple pages to be printed. If you want a single-page monthly calendar, be sure to select the Month view in iCal before choosing the Print command. The standard print layout from iCal displays the heading and mini-month(s) at the top of the page. Below that is a color key for the different calendars, fol lowed by the calendar itself and then the to-do items at the bottom of the page.
Part 13
Printing Calendars and To-Do Lists
E
ven though it can be highly efficient to keep your calendars and to-do lists electronically in iCal, there may come a time when you require a printed copy as well. This task shows you how to print calendar events and to-do items from iCal. 1. Click the iCal icon in the Dock to start the iCal application and to
display the main iCal window.
2. Select the type of view you want to print (Day, Week, or Month) at the bottom of the iCal window, and choose File ➪ Print, as shown in Figure 158-1. Figure 158-1: Choosing File ➪ Print.
3. Select iCal from the Copies & Pages drop-down list, as shown in Figure 158-2.
When printing from the Month view, the time range is disabled in the iCal print options.
Figure 158-2: Selecting iCal from the Copies & Pages menu.
Scheduling with iCal 4. Specify the dates range to print.
341
Task
5. Uncheck the boxes below the dates to prevent any of the items (calendars, to-do lists, or mini-months) from being displayed on the printed page.
158
6. Specify the time range to print. 7. Click the Print button, as shown in Figure 158-3.
tips
• • •
Figure 158-3: Printing from iCal.
•
To prevent a particular calendar’s events and todo items from being dis played on the printed page, uncheck its name in the Calendars list. Select other options from the Copies & Pages dropdown list in the Print win dow to further customize your print job. You can also save a copy of a calendar as a PDF file, which can be viewed on almost any computer sys tem. To do so, click the PDF button at the bottom of the Print window after choosing File ➪ Print. You can also fax a coy of a calendar by clicking the Fax button at the bottom of the Print window after choosing File ➪ Print.
cross-references
• • •
Printing is discussed in detail in Part 8, “Printing and Faxing.” Adding to-do items is discussed in Task 156, “Adding a To-Do Item.” Adding Events is discussed in Task 148, “Adding an Event to a Calendar.”
Part 14: Audio with iTunes Task 159: Starting iTunes Task 160: Playing a CD with iTunes Task 161: Using the iTunes Equalizer Task 162: Importing Music from a CD Task 163: Using the iTunes Visualizer Task 164: Viewing and Editing Song Information Task 165: Exporting Your Music List Task 166: Importing Downloaded or Shared Music Task 167: Creating a Playlist Task 168: Creating a Smart Playlist Task 169: Listening to and Editing a Playlist Task 170: Setting iTunes Preferences Task 171: Setting More iTunes Preferences Task 172: Burning a Music CD Task 173: Setting Burn Preferences Task 174: Sharing Music with iTunes Task 175: Listening to Internet Radio Task 176: Searching and Sorting Your iTunes Library Task 177: Using the iTunes Music Store Task 178: More about Your iTunes Music Store
344
Task
159
notes
•
• •
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because appli cations have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right.
Part 14
Starting iTunes
A
pple’s iTunes application is used to play music, download music, “rip” music from a CD to your laptop or an iPod portable MP3 player, and perform other functions. This task shows how to start iTunes for the first time and how to quit iTunes. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The first time you start iTunes, a software license agreement for iTunes appears. 2. Click the Agree button to accept the iTunes Software License Agreement. The iTunes Setup Assistant window appears, as shown in Figure 159-1.
The keyboard shortcut to quit iTunes is Ô-Q. If there are multiple users logged into your Mac, only one person can open and use iTunes at a time.
Figure 159-1: The iTunes Setup Assistant window.
3. Click the Next button to continue. 4. Adjust the selected options on page two of the Setup Assistant to use iTunes for Internet audio content and to allow iTunes to automatically connect to the Internet, as needed. Click Next to continue. 5. Click Next on page three of the Setup Assistant to allow iTunes to look for music files on your computer, as shown in Figure 159-2.
Figure 159-2: Accepting iTunes offer to locate music files on the computer.
Audio with iTunes 6. Click “No, take me to my iTunes Library” on page four of the Setup Assistant and click Done, as shown in Figure 159-3.
345
Task
159
tips
•
Figure 159-3: Finishing the iTunes Setup Assistant.
•
7. The main iTunes window displays the Library window of local music files, as shown in Figure 159-4.
Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a file Open or Save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop. If you decide not to use iTunes for Internet music playback, you can change that setting later by choos ing iTunes ➪ Preferences from the Application menu and editing the General preferences.
Figure 159-4: The main iTunes window.
8. To quit iTunes, from the Application menu choose iTunes ➪ Quit iTunes.
cross-references
• • •
“Using the iTunes Music Store” is discussed in Task 177. Using iTunes to listen to online radio is discussed in Task 175, “Listening to Internet Radio.” You can add iTunes to the Dock (if it’s not already there) for easy access to your favorite music. For more information on adding applications to the Dock, see Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock.”
346
Task
160
notes
•
• •
•
Part 14
Playing a CD with iTunes
A
pple’s iTunes application can be used for several tasks relating to music. For example, with iTunes, you can play music right through your computer’s speakers. This task shows how to use iTunes to play an audio CD. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears, as shown in Figure 160-1.
The Compact Disc Database (CDDB) is an Internet-based system that keeps a record of CDs and song titles. iTunes sends a “serial number” of the CD to the CDDB server so it can identify the CD and give you the CD’s informa tion. For more information on the CDDB, see the Web site at www.grace note.com. Your OS X system must have an active Internet connection to connect to the CDDB servers. Occasionally, the CD is not recognized as a unique CD by the CDDB. In this case, a CD Lookup Results win dow appears, with the options found in the CDDB. Choose the correct match from the list if it’s there, and click the OK button, or click the Cancel button to play the CD without identi fying it.
Figure 160-1: The iTunes window.
2. Insert an audio CD you want to listen to into the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive of your Macintosh. A pop-up window titled Accessing CDDB appears, as shown in Figure 160-2.
iiTunes only needs to con nect to the CDDB database the first time you insert an audio CD. After that, it automatically recognizes the CD when it’s inserted.
Figure 160-2: iTunes accesses the CDDB to get song title and length information for you.
3. After iTunes completes gathering the song title and length information for you, that information is displayed in the main iTunes window, as shown in Figure 160-3.
Audio with iTunes
347
Task
160
tips
•
Figure 160-3: The iTunes window showing the CD with song information.
4. To play the CD, starting with the first song, press the spacebar.
•
5. To pause the currently playing song, press the spacebar. Press the spacebar again to restart it. 6. To play a specific song, click the song’s name in the main iTunes pane and press the spacebar, or simply double-click the song’s name. 7. To skip to the next song, press Ô-right arrow. 8. To raise and lower the volume for the iTunes application, press Ô-up arrow or Ô-down arrow.
•
9. To eject the CD, press Ô-E. The CD stops playing and the CD is ejected from the drive.
• •
To listen to music played in a random order from an audio CD, click the Shuffle button (the second button from the left in the bottom left of the iTunes window). Some keyboard controls for playback include the spacebar for Play and Pause, the right and left arrows for next song and previous song, the down arrow and up arrow for next source and previous source, the Ô-up arrow combination for louder, and the Ô-down arrow combi nation for quieter playback. You can also use the but tons in the upper-left corner of the main iTunes window to control the playback, as well as the volume. To control playback from the Dock, Ctrl-click the iTunes icon to present a pop-up menu offering play back commands. If your keyboard is equipped with an eject button in the upper-right corner, you can also use that to eject a CD.
cross-references
• • • •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” If iTunes isn’t already visi ble in your Dock, refer to Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock.” Copying an audio CD to your hard disk is discussed in Task 162, “Importing Music from a CD.” Copying files from your iTunes library to a CD is discussed in Task 172, “Burning a Music CD.”
348
Task
161
notes
• •
• •
The keyboard shortcut to show or hide the iTunes Equalizer window is Ô-2. When you remove a preset from the Equalizer list, you are prompted to make sure that you want to remove it. Then iTunes asks you if you want to remove those set tings from any songs using them when the preset is deleted.
Part 14
Using the iTunes Equalizer
S
ome CDs sound best with more bass, and some sound better adjusted for a vocal range. iTunes provides the capability to adjust sound levels on your music to match your personal preferences. This task shows how to use the Equalizer to adjust audio levels. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears. 2. Insert an audio CD you want to listen to into the CD-ROM or DVDROM drive of your Macintosh. iTunes displays the CD in the main iTunes window, as shown in Figure 161-1.
Switching to another preset in the Equalizer window changes the settings for all the songs in the currently active CD. The iTunes Equalizer win dow can also be shown by clicking the third-from-theright button in the lowerright corner of the main iTunes window.
Figure 161-1: The iTunes window showing the CD with song information.
3. From the menu bar, choose Window ➪ Equalizer to display the Equalizer window shown in Figure 161-2.
Figure 161-2: The iTunes Equalizer window.
4. Click the drop-down list, and choose a different setting to use a setting other than the current one (“Flat” is shown in Figure 161-2).
Audio with iTunes 5. To create your own custom preset setting, first move the sliders on the current setting to your ideal values.
349
Task
6. Choose Make Preset from the drop-down list. Enter a new preset name, and click the OK button, as shown in Figure 161-3, to make your preset available in the drop-down list of options.
161
tips
•
• Figure 161-3: Creating your own Equalizer setting.
7. To edit the list of Presets, choose Edit List from the drop-down list. The Edit Presets window appears, as shown in Figure 161-4.
•
• Figure 161-4: The Edit Presets window in iTunes.
8. Click a preset name to select it, then click the Rename button to
rename that setting, or the Delete button to remove it from the
Presets list.
9. Click the Done button to close the Edit Presets list. 10. Click the red Close button in the upper-left corner of the Equalizer window to close it.
The iTunes Help feature says, “With an equalizer (EQ), you can fine-tune specific frequencies of the sound spectrum, much like the treble and bass con trols of a stereo.” The iTunes Help feature says, “The horizontal values on the equalizer represent the spectrum of human hearing in hertz (Hz). 32 Hz represents the deepest fre quency (bass), 250 Hz and 500 Hz represent the mid range frequencies, and 1 kHz-16 kHz represent the higher frequencies (treble).” The iTunes Help feature says, “The vertical values on each bar are represented in decibels (dB), units that measure the volume or intensity of each Hz fre quency. By moving the slid ers (also called “faders”) up or down, you increase or decrease the sounds that you hear in that particular frequency range.” The iTunes Help feature says, “Preamp is a secondary volume adjustment that is applied to all frequencies equally. You might want to increase or decrease the preamp volume when listen ing to music that was recorded particularly quietly or loudly.”
cross-reference
•
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.”
350
Task
162
notes
• • • • • •
The keyboard shortcut to Import a CD selected in the Source column is Shift-ÔO (that’s the letter “O,” not the number zero). By default, iTunes begins playing the first song after it has finished copying it to your computer. You can change this option in the iTunes Preferences window.
Part 14
Importing Music from a CD
I
f you want to listen to music from a variety of songs from different CDs, but don’t want the hassle of switching each CD manually, you can save copies of the songs on your computer. iTunes makes it very easy to import (or “rip”) music from a CD into your OS X system. This task shows how to do so, and how to edit your preferences for importing music in iTunes. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears. 2. Insert an audio CD into the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive of your
Macintosh. iTunes displays the CD in the main iTunes window, as
shown in Figure 162-1.
iTunes indicates which song it is currently importing by placing a small yellow dot (with a wave inside) between the song’s number and name. A speaker icon appears next to the name of the song currently playing. In addi tion, details about that song are displayed above it. iiTunes automatically stores your ripped audio files in the directory Music/ iTunes/iTunes Music in your user directory. You can change the loca tion where your audio files are stored by selecting a new location in the Advanced pane of the iTunes Preferences window (iTunes ➪ Preferences). This is particularly useful for storing files on a sepa rate hard drive.
Figure 162-1: The iTunes window showing the CD with song information.
3. Click the CD in the Source column to select it (if it isn’t already selected). 4. Click the Import button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window to import all the songs on the CD. iTunes rips the music from the CD to your OS X system. As iTunes rips the songs, it places a green check next to the song, as shown in Figure 162-2.
caution
•
Be cognizant of all federal Copyright laws when trans ferring music from a prere corded audio CD.
Figure 162-2: The iTunes window importing the CD.
Audio with iTunes 5. Click the Library icon in the Source column to display the audio files in your local OS X system, as shown in Figure 162-3.
351
Task
162
tips
•
Figure 162-3: The iTunes window showing the audio files in your local library.
•
6. From the Application menu, choose iTunes ➪ Preferences to show the iTunes Preferences window. 7. Click the Importing button in the Preferences window toolbar to display the Importing Preferences pane, as shown in Figure 162-4.
• •
Figure 162-4: The iTunes Importing Preferences window.
8. To change the file format iTunes uses to import audio, click the Import Using drop-down list, choose the appropriate encoder, click the Setting drop-down list, and choose at what quality you want to import music. 9. Check or uncheck the checkboxes for playing songs while importing, and for creating files with track numbers. 10. Click the OK button to close the iTunes Preferences window.
You can automatically import music from a CD and eject it after it is fin ished by choosing “Import Songs and Eject” from the “On CD Insert” option in the General pane of the iTunes Preferences window (iTunes ➪ Preferences). Watch the status window at the top of the iTunes pane to monitor the progress of songs being converted from a CD to your hard drive. Clicking the X in this win dow cancels the transfer. To import only a few songs from a particular CD, first uncheck the boxes next to the songs you don’t want to copy. Then, click the Import button. For details about each of the different encoding options available in the Import Preferences, choose Help ➪ iTunes and Music Store Help from the Application menu. Then, enter “encoder” in the search field and press the Return key. Double-click on the topic name in the results window to read the help files.
cross-references
• •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” Listening to particular songs imported from differ ent CDs is easiest when you create a playlist, as discussed in Task 167, “Creating a Playlist.”
352
Task
163
notes
• • •
The keyboard shortcut to turn on the Visualizer is Ô-T. The keyboard shortcut to put the Visualizer in FullScreen mode is Ô-F.
Part 14
Using the iTunes Visualizer
i
Tunes includes a “video effects light show” feature called the Visualizer. The Visualizer looks sort of like a screensaver, but it is triggered by sound played by iTunes. This task shows how use the Visualizer. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears. 2. Insert an audio CD you want to play into the CD-ROM or DVDROM drive of your Macintosh. iTunes shows the CD in the main iTunes window, as shown in Figure 163-1.
Using the Visualizer in FullScreen mode can be quite a memory-intensive task. Because of this, the move ment of the graphics may not be as clean and fluid as when the Visualizer is displayed within the iTunes window.
Figure 163-1: The iTunes window showing the CD with song information.
3. Press the spacebar to play the CD. 4. From the menu bar, choose Visualizer ➪ Turn Visualizer On. The Visualizer appears in the main window, as shown in Figure 163-2.
Figure 163-2: The iTunes Visualizer.
Audio with iTunes 5. To reduce the size, from the menu bar choose Visualizer ➪ Small or Visualizer ➪ Medium.
353
Task
6. To make the Visualizer occupy the whole screen, choose Visualizer ➪ Full Screen from the Application menu.
163
7. To get your OS X desktop back, press the Escape key, then press Ô-. or click the mouse. 8. When the Visualizer is on and not in Full-Screen mode, click the Options button to display the Visualizer Options window, as shown in Figure 163-3.
tips
•
• Figure 163-3: The iTunes Visualizer Options window.
9. Check the checkboxes for the options you want on or off for the Visualizer, such as Cap frame rate at 30 fps and Use OpenGL (for better graphic’s performance).
•
10. Click the OK button to close the Visualizer Options window.
Several keys on the key board affect Visualizer set tings. The F key, for example, toggles the frame rate dis play on and off. The I key shows the song info. The N key switches between nor mal and high-contrast col ors. The B key displays the Apple logo in the center of the Visualizer. The D key resets any changes you’ve made to the original defaults. The H key shows Help on the Visualizer screen. The middle button in the lower-right corner of the main iTunes window toggles the Visualizer on and off quickly. You can also install addi tional visual effects by placing them into the iTunes Plug-ins folder, located in the iTunes folder inside the Library folder in your Home folder. Visit www.apple.com/ downloads/macosx/ audio for iTunes plug-ins.
cross-references
• •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” The keyboard commands used to pause and play songs in iTunes still work while the Visualizer is dis played. Refer to Task 160, “Playing a CD with iTunes,” for details on using those key commands.
354
Task
164
notes
• •
•
•
•
The keyboard shortcut to Get Info on a file in iTunes is the same as in the Finder: Ô-I.
Part 14
Viewing and Editing Song Information
K
eeping track of a growing library of music is essential. Organizing your music allows you quicker access to your favorite tunes. iTunes provides the capability to view and edit information about a given audio file in your Library. This task shows how to do so. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears.
2. Click the Library icon in the Source column to display the audio files
in your local OS X system, as shown in Figure 164-1.
The Summary tab of the Information window shows not only song title and length, album title and artists, but also other information such as the encoder used, how often you’ve played this track, and the full path to that audio file at the bottom. The CDDB has a great deal of information, and not all of it is completely correct. If you need to change how a song or album shows up in your iTunes, you can do so on the Info tab as shown in Figure 164-3. On the Info tab, you can edit the name and artist, add your own comments to the file, choose or change the genre classification, add a beats per minute (BPM) value, and so on.
Figure 164-1: The iTunes window showing the audio files in your local library.
3. Click a song to select it. 4. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Get Info. 5. Click the Summary tab to display the Information window, as shown in Figure 164-2.
On the Options tab, you can adjust the volume level for this song relative to other songs, choose an Equalizer preset to use with just this song, or edit the start or end time (for exam ple, if a song has the artist chatting before he or she begins playing and you want to skip that). You can also provide a rating for iTunes to use when creating smart playlists.
Figure 164-2: The Summary tab of the Information window for a song in the iTunes Library.
Audio with iTunes
355
6. Click the Info tab to display the Information window, as shown in Figure 164-3. Edit the information, as needed, or fill in anything that is missing.
Task
164
tip
•
You can change or add infor mation for several songs at once by holding down the Shift key to select them, choosing Get Info from the File menu, and then making your modifications.
Figure 164-3: The Info tab of the Information window for a song in the iTunes Library.
7. Click the Options tab to display the Options Information window shown in Figure 164-4. Adjust the volume, equalizer, rating, start time, and stop time as needed.
cross-references
• •
Figure 164-4: The Options tab of the Information window for a song in the iTunes Library.
8. Click the Artwork tab to display any artwork currently associated with the song. Click the Add button to associate a graphics file from your computer with this particular song. 9. Click the Cancel button on the Info window to close the window without saving any of your changes, or the OK button to save any changes you’ve made to the information for the song.
•
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” The Equalizer is discussed in Task 161, “Using the iTunes Equalizer.” Adding a rating to a song is particularly beneficial when playing “smart” playlists. Refer to Task 168, “Creating a Smart Playlist,” for details.
356
Task
165
notes
• • •
•
The default location to save the file to is the Documents folder in your user directory. Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a file Open or Save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop.
Part 14
Exporting Your Music List
A
mong several other features, iTunes provides the capability to export a list of songs so you can play the same list in another copy of iTunes (on another computer). Exporting like this does not actually export the music, but just a list of the songs (title, author, and so on). This task shows how to export a song list. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears.
2. Click the Library icon in the Source column to show the audio files
in your local OS X system, as shown in Figure 165-1.
Once imported into another copy of iTunes (using the File ➪ Import command), only the songs from your song list that are actually saved on that computer’s hard drive will be available to play. The actual information saved in the file includes all available details for each song, which may include any of the following: Album, Artist, Beats Per Minute, Bit Rate, Comment, Composer, Date Added, Date Modified, Disc Number, Equalizer, Genre, Kind, Last Played, My Rating, Play Count, Sample Rate, Size, Time, Track Number, and Year.
Figure 165-1: The iTunes window showing the audio files in your local library.
3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Export Song List. The “Save: iTunes” dialog appears, as shown in Figure 165-2.
Figure 165-2: Saving a song list to a text file.
Audio with iTunes 4. Click the Format drop-down list to choose between Plain Text, Unicode Text, and XML.
357
Task
5. Click the Where drop-down list to choose the location to which you want to save the file.
165
6. Click the Cancel button to cancel or the Save button to save the file.
tips
•
• •
The iTunes Library info file is the master list of all the songs in your library, any playlists you’ve created, rat ings you’ve assigned, com ments added, and so on. To save the entire Library info file, from the menu bar, choose File ➪ Export Library. The “Save: iTunes” dialog appears; it is similar to that shown in Figure 165-2. However, you can not specify a Format because the Library info file can be saved only as an XML file. You can save any of your individual playlists listed in the Source column of iTunes by following the same basic steps as dis cussed in this task. To copy the info about a single song, select that song in the Info window and choose Edit ➪ Copy. Then switch to the program in which you want to add the information and choose Edit ➪ Paste from the Application window.
cross-references
• • • •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” Ripping a music CD to iTunes is discussed in Task 162, “Importing Music from a CD.” Grouping certain songs into a particular song list is dis cussed in Task 167, “Creating a Playlist.” If you want to export the actual songs with the song list, consider burning them to a CD, as discussed in Task 172, “Burning a Music CD.”
358
Task
166
notes
• • • •
The keyboard shortcut to add a file to the iTunes Library is Ô-O (the letter “O,” not the number zero).
Part 14
Importing Downloaded or Shared Music
I
t is easy to rip (or import) music from a CD into iTunes. But how do you add a music file that you may have downloaded from another computer to your iTunes Library? This task shows how. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears. 2. Click the Library icon in the Source column to show the audio files
in your local OS X system, as shown in Figure 166-1.
The default location to look for files to add to the iTunes Library is the Documents folder in your user directory. Pressing the keyboard shortcut Ô-D in a file Open or Save browser sheet sets the location to the desktop. By default, when you add a song to your library, iTunes makes a copy of it, but doesn’t move the original file. However, if you’d prefer that iTunes only point to the file (instead of using hard disk space to copy it), choose iTunes ➪ Preferences and click the Advanced tab. Uncheck the option to “Copy files to iTunes Music Folder when adding to library.”
Figure 166-1: The iTunes window showing the audio files in your local library.
3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Add to Library. The Add To Library dialog appears, as shown in Figure 166-2.
Figure 166-2: Adding a music file to the iTunes Library.
Audio with iTunes 4. Click the file you want to import, as shown in Figure 166-3.
359
Task
166
tips
•
Figure 166-3: The selected music file in the Add To Library file browser sheet.
5. Click the Open button. The Add To Library file browser sheet closes.
•
6. Click the Library icon in the Source column of the main iTunes window to see the newly added file in the window, as shown in Figure 166-4.
You can also add songs to iTunes by dragging them from the desktop into the iTunes window. If you have a playlist selected when you drag a file into iTunes, that song will automatically be added to the current playlist. MP3 is a file format that stores sound in a much smaller file than those found on an audio CD. You can use iTunes to load MP3 files to an MP3 player.
Figure 166-4: The new music file in the iTunes Library.
cross-references 7. Play the new file by clicking it to select it and pressing the spacebar or the Play button.
• • •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” Ripping a music CD to iTunes is discussed in Task 162, “Importing Music from a CD.” Select the file and edit its information as discussed in Task 164, “Viewing and Editing Song Information.”
360
Task
167
notes
• • •
•
•
The keyboard shortcut to create a new playlist is Ô-N.
Part 14
Creating a Playlist
M
any users enjoy selecting the order in which their music will play. In iTunes, you create playlists, which are lists of music to play in sequence. This task shows how to create and edit a playlist. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears.
2. Click the Library icon in the Source column to show the audio files
in your local OS X system, as shown in Figure 167-1.
The keyboard shortcut to show or hide the browser is Ô-B. You can rearrange the order of songs in a playlist by using the column headers to rearrange the sort value, or you can click a song’s name and drag it to rearrange the order individually. When you put a song on a playlist, you are actually creating a pointer, or an alias. Thus, you can add a song to several playlists without actually increasing the size of your library. Also, deleting a song from the playlist does not delete it from the library. A playlist is shown with a musical note symbol in the icon. A smart playlist is shown in the Source col umn as having a gear in the icon.
Figure 167-1: The iTunes window showing the audio files in your local library.
3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Playlist. A new playlist, named “untitled playlist,” appears in the Source column, as shown in Figure 167-2.
Figure 167-2: The new untitled playlist shown in the Source column.
4. The name of the untitled playlist is automatically selected and highlighted. Type the name of your new, empty playlist.
Audio with iTunes 5. Click Library in the Source column to show all the available songs for use in your new playlist.
361
Task
6. Click a song in the Library, and drag the song to the playlist in the Source column. The song will appear on the playlist when you click the playlist in the Source column to select it. 7. Continue adding songs to the playlist until you are satisfied with the contents. 8. To view the different genres, artists, and albums included on a single playlist or within your library, select the playlist or library from the Source column and choose Edit ➪ Show Browser from the Application menu. The iTunes window changes to display the browser, as shown in Figure 167-3.
tips
•
• • Figure 167-3: The browser view of the iTunes Library.
9. To make a playlist from an album you’ve imported, click the album’s name in the browser window shown in Figure 167-3 and drag the album’s name to the Source column. iTunes automatically creates a playlist of that album, as shown in Figure 167-4.
167
•
Because playlists are just text files containing direc tions on which songs from the library play in a particu lar order, they don’t take up much space at all on your computer. Therefore, feel free to create as many as you like. For example, every one in your family can have his or her own playlist. Or, create a list of songs to play at a dinner party, or at a child’s birthday party. Another way to create a new playlist is to click the Add (+) button in the bottom-left corner of the main iTunes window. To select multiple songs to add to a playlist at the same time, hold down the Command key (to select noncontiguous files) or the Shift key (to select contigu ous files) and click. To remove a song from your playlist, click it to select it and press the Delete key.
cross-references
• • •
Figure 167-4: Creating a playlist from an album.
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” You can export your individ ual playlists to text files as is discussed in Task 165, “Exporting Your Music List.” To let iTunes help create a playlist based on your lis tening habits, refer to Task 168, “Creating a Smart Playlist.”
362
Task
168
notes
• • • •
The keyboard shortcut to create a new smart playlist is Alt-Ô-N.
Part 14
Creating a Smart Playlist
O
ne of the more interesting features of iTunes is the ability to create smart playlists. An example of a smart playlist is the Recently Played playlist in the Source column, which tracks songs as iTunes plays them—whether or not you chose the songs individually; iTunes can randomly shuffle them and select the songs or you can choose to play them from a playlist. This task shows how to create your own smart playlist. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears, as shown in Figure 168-1.
If you have multiple selec tion criteria (as shown in Figure 168-4), you can choose to match all or any of the two or more condi tions you’ve set. A smart playlist is shown in the Source column with a gear in the icon. A playlist is shown with a musical note symbol in the icon. You can actually rate songs in a smart playlist. Widen the iTunes main window to reveal the My Rating column. Click in the column for a selected song to specify a number of stars. You can then use the rating as a search criterion in your smart playlist.
Figure 168-1: The iTunes window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Smart Playlist. The Smart Playlist window appears, as shown in Figure 168-2.
Figure 168-2: The Smart Playlist window.
3. Smart playlists are generally built around logical conditions. Under “Match the following condition,” click the first drop-down list to see your options, as shown in Figure 168-3. 4. Choose a search criterion (such as “Artist”) and a selection criterion (such as “contains”) from the first and second drop-down lists.
Audio with iTunes
363
Task
168
tips
•
Figure 168-3: Your search criteria options for a smart playlist.
•
5. Enter a value or word appropriate to the two drop-down list options you’ve chosen. 6. Click the plus (+) button to the right of the condition to add a second criteria set, as shown in Figure 168-4.
Figure 168-4: You can have multiple selection criteria options in a smart playlist.
7. Check the “Limit to” checkbox if you want to limit the number of songs in the smart playlist according to certain criteria, such as a specific number of songs.
•
10. Click the OK button to add your new smart playlist to your iTunes Source column.
To rename a smart playlist, double-click the playlist’s name in the Source column and enter a new name. Press the Return key when finished. To delete a playlist, click the playlist’s name in the Source column and press the Delete key. You will be prompted to make sure you really want to delete the playlist. This is because once a playlist has been deleted, you cannot retrieve by choosing Edit ➪ Undo.
cross-references
• •
8. Check the “Match only checked songs” checkbox if you want to limit the smart playlist to only songs that are checked in the Library. 9. Check the “Live updating” checkbox if you want the smart playlist to automatically update itself as iTunes is used.
To edit a smart playlist that’s already been cre ated, first click the playlist in the Source column. Then, choose File ➪ Edit Smart Playlist and make changes as necessary.
• •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” Creating a standard playlist with specific songs is dis cussed in Task 167, “Creating a Playlist.” You can export your individ ual playlists to text files as is discussed in Task 165, “Exporting Your Music List.” You can copy a particular playlist to a CD, to listen to away from your computer, by following the steps in Task 172, “Burning a Music CD.”
364
Task
169
notes
•
•
•
You can’t undo a deletion from a playlist with the Undo command. If you change your mind after ward, find the song in the Library and add it to the playlist again.
Part 14
Listening to and Editing a Playlist
A
fter you create a few playlists, you may find it necessary to further refine and fine-tune those lists, to better suit your needs. For example, suppose that you no longer want to listen to a particular artist’s music. This task discusses how to edit a playlist to remove all of one artist’s music, as well as simply how to listen to a playlist. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears.
2. Click the Library icon in the Source column to display the audio files
in your local OS X system, as shown in Figure 169-1.
If you only want to play a few songs on your playlist this time, uncheck the boxes next to the names of the songs you don’t want to hear. Then, press the spacebar to have iTunes play the songs with checks next to their names. You can’t reorder or delete the songs in a smart play list (as indicated by the gear next to the playlist name in the Source col umn) because those songs are automatically gener ated based on certain cri teria. Refer to Task 168 for details on “Creating a Smart Playlist.”
Figure 169-1: The iTunes window showing the audio files in your local library.
3. Find a playlist you’ve created, and click it to select it. The contents of the playlist appear in the iTunes window, as shown in Figure 169-2.
Figure 169-2: The iTunes window showing the selected playlist.
Audio with iTunes 4. Press the spacebar to begin playing the playlist, starting with the first song.
365
Task
5. Click a song on the playlist to select it, and press the spacebar to play that song. You can also simply double-click the song to play it directly. 6. To reorder a playlist, click a song to select it and drag it to where you want it to be. Figure 169-3 shows song 1 in the playlist being dragged to become the new last song.
169
tips
•
• Figure 169-3: Dragging a song to rearrange the playlist.
7. To delete a song from a playlist, click the song to select it. Press the Delete key on the keyboard. As shown in Figure 169-4, a dialog appears, asking you to confirm the deletion.
•
Click the second button from the left in the lowerleft corner of the iTunes window to toggle Shuffling on and off. When Shuffling is on, the button is high lighted in blue, and iTunes randomly plays the checked songs on the playlist. When it’s off, the songs are played in the order shown. Click the third button from the left in the lower-left cor ner of iTunes to play the playlist once (indicated by the lines in the button being gray), repeat the playlist continuously (indicated by the lines highlighting to blue), or repeat a song con tinuously (indicated by the lines highlighting to blue and adding a small circle). Changes made to the Shuffle and Repeat buttons take effect only for the playlist that was selected when the changes were made. In other words, one playlist can be set to auto matically repeat, while another can be set to play only once, but always in random order.
cross-references
•
Figure 169-4: Deleting a song from the playlist.
8. Click the Cancel button to cancel the deletion of the song, or click the Yes button to remove the song from the playlist.
•
Creating standard playlists using selected songs is discussed in Task 167, “Creating a Playlist.” Playing the CD is discussed in Task 160, “Playing a CD with iTunes.”
366
Task
170
notes
• • • •
The keyboard shortcut to show the iTunes Preferences window is Ô-,.
Part 14
Setting iTunes Preferences
A
pple’s iTunes application can be customized to the user’s liking in many ways. This task introduces how to change iTunes’s Preferences settings, focusing on the General pane, which includes options for how text is displayed in iTunes and what to do with a CD when it is first inserted into the computer’s CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears, as shown in Figure 170-1.
The keyboard shortcut to show or hide the browser is Ô-B. If you want to see the genre when using the iTunes browser, leave the “Show genre when brows ing” checkbox checked. The “Connect to Internet when needed” checkbox primarily affects iTunes’s connecting to the Internet when a new music CD is inserted and it searches for that CD in the online Compact Disc Data Base (CDDB), or when you want to search for or purchase music from Apple’s Music Store. Leave this checked if you want iTunes to connect to the Internet (when possi ble) when you use iTunes for a task for which it would normally need to do so.
Figure 170-1: The iTunes window.
2. From the Application menu in the menu bar, choose iTunes ➪ Preferences. 3. Click the General button in the toolbar of the iTunes Preferences window. The General pane appears, as shown in Figure 170-2.
Figure 170-2: The General pane of the iTunes Preferences window.
4. Use the drop-down lists for Source Text (text in the Source column) and Song Text (text in the Songs pane) to change either or both from small to large.
Audio with iTunes
367
5. Use the On CD Insert drop-down list (shown in Figure 170-3) to set iTunes’s response to a new music CD being inserted into the OS X system’s CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive.
Task
170
tip
•
Figure 170-3: Setting iTunes’s response to a new CD.
6. Click the Set button to use iTunes for Internet music playback. If you choose this option, a confirmation dialog appears, as shown in Figure 170-4.
When importing music from several different CDs, choose “Import Songs and Eject” from the “On CD Insert” drop down list in General Preferences. This will cause the CD to be automatically ejected when iTunes has finished import ing all the songs. To have iTunes automatically import music from new CDs, but not eject them when fin ished, choose “Import Songs” instead.
Figure 170-4: Setting iTunes to be used automatically for Internet music playback.
7. Click the OK button to close the dialog. 8. Click the Cancel button to close the iTunes Preferences window without saving your changes, or click the OK button to close the window and save your changes.
cross-references
• • •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” The iTunes Importing Preferences pane is discussed in Task 162, “Importing Music from a CD.” Additional iTunes prefer ences, such as those in the Effects and Advanced pan els, are discussed in Task 171, “Setting More iTunes Preferences.”
368
Task
171
notes
• •
The keyboard shortcut to show the iTunes Preferences window is Ô-,.
Part 14
Setting More iTunes Preferences
A
pple’s iTunes application can be customized to the user’s liking in many ways, such as varying the amount of overlap time between songs and the factor used to shuffle songs. This task introduces how to change iTunes’s Preferences settings for the Effects and Advanced settings. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears, as shown in Figure 171-1.
If you connect to the Internet with a slow connection (such as via a 56-Kbps telephone modem), select Large from the Streaming Buffer Size drop-down menu to try to improve playback of Internet radio or other online audio.
Figure 171-1: The iTunes window.
2. From the Application menu in the menu bar, choose iTunes ➪ Preferences. 3. Click the Effects button in the Preferences window toolbar. The Effects pane appears, as shown in Figure 171-2.
Figure 171-2: The Effects pane of the iTunes Preferences window.
4. To change the amount of time iTunes takes to overlap and fade out the ending of a song while the next song fades in, use the Crossfade playback slider. To turn off crossfade playback completely, uncheck the checkbox.
Audio with iTunes
369
5. Similarly, turn off the Sound Enhancer by unchecking the checkbox, and adjust its effect by using the slider.
Task
6. Check the Sound Check checkbox if you want iTunes to automatically adjust the volumes of songs being played to the same level.
171
7. Click the Advanced button in the Preferences window toolbar. The Advanced pane appears, as shown in Figure 171-3.
tips
•
Figure 171-3: The Advanced pane of the iTunes Preferences window.
8. Adjust the buffer size with the drop-down list and choose to shuffle music by either Song or Album, when in Random Play mode. 9. To change the folder iTunes uses the store its music and playlists, click the change button to display the file browser sheet shown in Figure 171-4.
•
Figure 171-4: Change the iTunes default Music Folder location on the Advanced pane.
10. Use the checkboxes at the bottom of the Advanced pane to choose to automatically keep the iTunes Music Folder organized, and to copy music files to the iTunes Music Folder when adding new files to your iTunes Library. Click OK, when finished, to save your changes.
The checkbox next to “Keep iTunes Music folder orga nized” determines whether making changes to song and CD information in iTunes also affects those files on your hard drive. For example, suppose that you change the name of a song in your iTunes library. If “Keep iTunes Music folder organized” is checked (as it is by default), then the name of the song will also be changed on your hard drive. However, if that checkbox is left unchecked, the file on the hard drive will not be changed. The checkbox next to “Copy files to iTunes Music folder when adding to library” determines how new files are handled when added to the iTunes music library. If this box is checked (as it is by default), all new files added to the iTunes library are automatically copied and placed into the Music folder. However, if left unchecked, a pointer is made to reference the orig inal file, wherever it resides. This can be beneficial if you’re concerned about using too much of your hard disk for sound files.
cross-references
• •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” The iTunes General Preferences pane is dis cussed in Task 170, “Setting iTunes Preferences.”
370
Task
172
notes
•
•
Part 14
Burning a Music CD
A
pple’s iTunes includes the capability to burn (or record) an audio CD. You need a blank recordable CD (CD-R) for this task, and your OS X system must have a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive capable of recording CDs. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears, as shown in Figure 172-1.
Be sure that all the songs in your playlist are in the correct order before click ing the Burn button. Once the disc has begun to burn, you can no longer make any changes to that playlist. There are two basic types of CD-ROM discs you can use to burn playlists: CD-R (which stands for “writable”) and CD-RW (which stands for “rewritable”).
Figure 172-1: The iTunes window.
cautions
•
• • •
Most brands of CD-Rs can hold either 74 or 80 min utes of audio in CD format. Before you try to burn a playlist, make sure that the playlist will fit onto the CD you are trying to record to. You can see how many min utes of audio a playlist is by selecting it. The number of songs, length in minutes, and size in MB are shown across the bottom of the main iTunes window, as shown in Figure 172-3. Be cognizant of all Federal Copyright laws when trans ferring music from a prere corded audio CD. If you’re using a CD-R disc and you cancel the burn before it’s complete, the disc is likely no longer usable. If the playlist you’re burning contains songs purchased from the iTunes Music Store, you can only burn the same playlist 10 times.
2. Insert a blank CD-R into the CD/DVD drive. A dialog appears (as shown in Figure 172-2) and prompts you to set how OS X should respond to a blank CD-R.
Figure 172-2: OS X’s response to a blank CD-R.
3. Choose Open iTunes from the Action drop-down list, and click OK. When iTunes prompts you about how to handle the blank CD, click OK again. 4. Make a new playlist and select it, or select a playlist you’ve already created in the Source column. The Browse button in the upper right of the main iTunes window changes to a Burn Disc button, as shown in Figure 172-3.
Audio with iTunes
371
Task
172
tips
•
Figure 172-3: iTunes ready to start recording a music CD.
5. Click the Burn Disc button in the upper right of the iTunes main window, or from the menu bar choose File ➪ Burn Playlist to Disc. The Burn Disc button changes to prompt you to click the button a second time to confirm you’re ready to burn the CD. 6. Click the Burn Disc button a second time. iTunes begins to burn the songs in the selected playlist to the CD-R, as shown in Figure 172-4.
• •
Watch the status window at the top of the iTunes pane to monitor the progress of converting songs from a CD to your hard drive. Clicking the X in this window can cels the transfer. When the burn process is complete, the disc appears in the Source column and on your desktop, with the same name as the playlist you burned to it. While CD-RW discs are nice because you can burn them again, you will find they are not as compatible with CD players as CD-R discs.
cross-references
• •
Figure 172-4: iTunes burning a music CD.
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” Creating playlists is dis cussed in Task 167, “Creating a Playlist.”
372
Task
173
notes
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut to show the iTunes Preferences window is Ô-,.
Part 14
Setting Burn Preferences
A
pple’s iTunes allows several options for customizing how iTunes burns audio CDs, including the target format and automatic adjustment of recording volumes. This task shows how to view and set iTunes’s Burning Preferences. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears, as shown in Figure 173-1.
OS X checks the actual hardware every time you open the Burning Preferences pane, so there is a slight delay before the pane appears compared to the other panes in the iTunes Preferences window. MP3 CDs can hold more than 12 hours of music (or about 150 songs). So if you plan to play the CD on an MP3 player or in an MP3-capable CD player, and you have many songs to burn, try using the MP3 format. If the playlist is longer than will fit on one (MP3) CD, iTunes will prompt you to insert a sec ond CD to finish the burn.
Figure 173-1: The iTunes window.
2. From the Application menu in the menu bar, choose iTunes ➪ Preferences. 3. Click the Burning button in the Preferences window toolbar. The iTunes Preferences window appears, as shown in Figure 173-2.
Figure 173-2: The Burning pane of the iTunes Preferences window.
caution
•
Not all CD players can read MP3 or data CDs. Before burning these discs, make certain that you have a drive that supports them.
Audio with iTunes
373
4. Use the drop-down list for Preferred Speed to set the speed of burning a CD.
Task
5. Use the three radio buttons to choose what type of CD to burn: Audio CD, MP3 CD, or Data CD. 6. With the Audio CD option (the default) selected, set the gap of silence between songs to be any number of seconds from zero to five with the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 173-3.
tips
•
• Figure 173-3: Set the time between songs on an audio CD in the Burning pane of the iTunes Preferences window.
7. Check the Use Sound Check checkbox to use the Sound Check option to automatically adjust the songs’ volumes to the same level. 8. Click the Cancel button to close the iTunes Preferences window without saving your changes, or click the OK button to close the iTunes Preferences window and save your changes.
173
•
•
If you burn CDs with the speed set to “Maximum Possible,” and then find that your disc is not readable on other computers, try lower ing the speed to 6x or 8x. Some CD readers are not capable of reading discs burned at higher speeds. If you’re having trouble burn ing a CD, make sure that your drive is actually capa ble of burning discs (it should be labeled as a CD-RW drive or an Apple Superdrive). Also, make sure that you’re burning from a playlist, because iTunes won’t let you burn from the entire library or a few selected songs from the library. If you still have trouble burn ing a CD, did your monitor or computer “go to sleep” dur ing the burn process? Sometimes this can cause the process to fail. Adjust the “sleep” properties in your System Preferences Energy Saver control panel. Check the format off the music files you want to burn to a disc. If you try to burn MP3 files, for exam ple, on a normal audio CD, the process will fail. You need to select the MP3 file and choose Advanced ➪ Convert Selection to AAC before you can burn it suc cessfully to an audio CD.
cross-references
• •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” The Sound Check option is also on the Effects pane of the iTunes Preferences win dow and is discussed in Task 171, “Setting More iTunes Preferences.”
374
Task
174
notes
• • •
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut to show the iTunes Preferences window is Ô-,.
Sharing Music with iTunes
I
f your computer is connected to other computers in your house or workplace, it’s very easy to share your library and playlists in iTunes with up to five of those other computers. This task shows how to share music, and how to set and edit Sharing Preferences. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears, as shown in Figure 174-1.
The name of your shared library is “[your user name]’s Music.” Shared songs are “streamed” from the origi nal owner’s computer, but are not actually copied into another person’s iTunes library. Furthermore, shared music cannot be transferred to another person’s iPod or burned onto a disc from another person’s computer. Sharing music is only pos sible if you have at least version 10.2.4 of Mac OS X and iTunes 4.01 or later (for Mac) or iTunes 4.1 or later (for Windows). The first time you share music in iTunes, a prompt reminds you that “sharing is for personal use only.” Click the checkbox to dis able that prompt in the future, before clicking OK.
Figure 174-1: The iTunes window.
2. From the Application menu in the menu bar, choose iTunes ➪ Preferences. 3. Click the Sharing button to show the Sharing pane of the iTunes Preferences window, as shown in Figure 174-2.
If no one on your network has any music shared right now, you will not see any changes in iTunes after turning music sharing on. Likewise, you won’t see any changes in your main iTunes window after sharing your own music.
caution
•
Part 14
Be cognizant of all federal Copyright laws when shar ing music from a prere corded audio CD.
Figure 174-2: The Sharing pane of the iTunes Preferences window.
Audio with iTunes
375
4. Uncheck the “Look for shared music” checkbox if you do not want to see other iTunes shared Libraries or playlists in your iTunes window. By default, this checkbox is checked.
Task
174
5. To share your music, check the “Share my music” checkbox, then use the two radio buttons to choose whether to share your entire iTunes library or just selected playlists. 6. If you choose to share selected playlists, check the checkboxes next to your playlists you want to share (by default, none are selected). 7. Click the Cancel button to close the iTunes Preferences window without saving your changes, or click the OK button to close the iTunes Preferences window and save your changes.
tips
•
8. Shared libraries of other iTunes users appear in the Source column. Click the shared library to load its information. 9. Click the small arrow to the left of the shared library to see the playlists of the shared library in your Source column. Figure 174-3 shows how your shared playlist might appear on another user’s computer, in this case a Windows machine.
•
• •
You can require network users accessing your iTunes library to enter a password by checking the Require password checkbox in the Sharing Preferences panel and entering a password in the field. When looking for shared music, you can only see shared MP3, AIFF, WAV, and AAC files, plus shared radio station links. Any other types of files or file formats can’t be shared with iTunes. The person sharing music must have iTunes open when you or another per son tries to access that shared music. To check to see if a song in your iTunes window is shared, click the song’s name and choose File ➪ Get Info. If the kind of file is listed as “remote,” then the file is shared from another computer and can only be played when that person has iTunes turned on.
Figure 174-3: Shared libraries appear in the iTunes window in the Source column.
cross-reference
•
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.”
376
Task
175
notes
• • • •
Your OS X system must have an active Internet connection to connect to the Internet radio streams, or to refresh the list of streams in a category.
Part 14
Listening to Internet Radio
I
n addition to importing music from CDs and other sources, iTunes has a builtin radio tuner than can access streamed MP3 files from over 250 free Internet radio stations. This can greatly improve your options for listening to different types of radio stations, particularly if you live in an area with few options. This task shows how to set up and listen to Internet radio through iTunes. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window appears, as shown in Figure 175-1.
You can also play a selected Internet radio stream by double-clicking it or by choosing the command Controls ➪ Play from the menu bar. There is no easy way to capture Internet broadcasts or save them to your hard drive. Internet radio stations are different from traditional radio stations in that they typically cannot be heard offline (that is, to listen to those radio stations, you must use a computer). Your local radio station may also broadcast its programming online. Check its Web site for details. If you know the exact address of a particu lar radio station’s stream, choose Advanced ➪ Open Stream in iTunes and enter the URL in the space provided.
Figure 175-1: The iTunes window.
2. Click the Radio source in the Source column to show the categories of Internet radio streams, as shown in Figure 175-2.
Figure 175-2: iTunes groups Internet radio streams by category.
3. Click a triangle next to a stream category to open that category and see the streams available in that category, as shown in Figure 175-3.
Audio with iTunes
377
Task
175
tips
•
Figure 175-3: iTunes groups Internet radio streams by category.
4. Click a stream name to select that stream.
•
5. Press the spacebar to play the selected Internet radio stream. The stream names appear in the field at the top of the iTunes window, and the “playing” icon appears to the left of the stream name in the main pane, as shown in Figure 175-4.
The Refresh button only refreshes the stream cate gories that you’ve ever opened. If you never open the Talk/Spoken Word Category, Refresh does nothing. The first time you open a category, iTunes connects to the Internet and looks for the list of Internet music streams for that category. The “Bit Rate” listed next to Internet Radio streams in iTunes may be important, depending on your Internet connection speed. For example, if you use a tele phone modem to connect to the Internet, you’ll want to select a radio stream using 56 Kbps (kilobytes per sec ond) or less. In addition, you can increase the streaming buffer size to allow more music to download at a time. Choose iTunes ➪ Preferences, and click the Advanced tab. Choose Large from the Streaming Buffer Size menu.
cross-reference
•
Figure 175-4: Playing an Internet radio stream.
6. To stop playing the stream, press the spacebar again. 7. To refresh the list of streams in the categories you have opened, click the Refresh button in the upper right of the main iTunes window.
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.”
378
Task
176
Part 14
Searching and Sorting Your iTunes Library
W notes
• • • •
•
hen your iTunes Library grows to include a significant amount of music, it can be difficult to easily find the particular song you’re looking for. Apple’s iTunes has several options for viewing, sorting, and searching your iTunes library. This task shows some of these options.
The keyboard shortcut to show or hide the browser is Ô-B.
1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears.
The keyboard shortcut to show the iTunes Preferences window is Ô-,.
2. Click the Library icon in the Source column to show the audio files
in your local OS X system, as shown in Figure 176-1.
The search field lets you choose to search for Artist, Album, Composer, Song (title), or All (the default). The number of times you play each song, the artist’s name, and several other criteria are tracked by iTunes automatically. If you want to search by your own rating, be sure you have entered that criteria on a song-by-song basis. This is not tracked automatically by iTunes. iTunes doesn’t search the text in the Comment column unless that column is visi ble when the search takes place. To make that column visible, check “Comment” in the View Options window (shown in Figure 176-3).
Figure 176-1: The iTunes window showing the audio files in your local library.
3. Click the Browse button in the upper right to display the browser, as shown in Figure 176-2. To show the browser as only two columns (artist and album, but without the genre column), open the iTunes Preferences window with the keyboard shortcut Ô-,. 4. Click the General button in the iTunes Preferences window toolbar to show the General pane. 5. Uncheck the Show genre when browsing checkbox. 6. Click the OK button. The iTunes Preferences window closes and the browser no longer displays the genre column. 7. Click the Browse button again to close the browser. 8. From the menu bar, choose Edit ➪ View Options to display the View Options window, as shown in Figure 176-3.
Audio with iTunes
379
Task
176
tips
•
Figure 176-2: The iTunes window showing the Library browser.
•
Click the column name to reorganize the list of songs. For example, clicking “Song Name” reorganizes the list of songs alphabetically by name. Clicking the “Artist” or “Album” column reorga nizes the list of songs alphabetically by artist or album, respectively. iTunes starts looking for songs that match your search criteria with the very first letter you type. So if you type “l” with it set to search only “song titles,” iTunes will display all songs with an “l” in them. Adding “ife” narrows the list to only songs with “life” in the title.
Figure 176-3: The View Options window.
9. Check the checkboxes next to the columns you want to be visible in Library View, and click the OK button. The View Options window closes and the Library shows the columns you checked. 10. To search for a song or songs, click the Search field and enter a word to search for. You can choose the type of search by clicking the magnifying glass icon in the left of the search field and choosing the type of search from the drop-down list.
cross-references
• •
Starting iTunes is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.” Searching for music in the iTunes Music Store is differ ent from searching for music in your local iTunes library. To access the Music Store, refer to Task 177, “Using the iTunes Music Store.”
380
Task
177
notes
• •
• •
• •
After you click the Buy button, your purchase is charged to the credit card on your Apple account and cannot be returned.
Part 14
Using the iTunes Music Store
A
pple provides a convenient way for you to purchase music online. By using the iTunes Music Store, you can purchase all of your favorite new music. This task shows you how to use the iTunes Music Store to increase your listening pleasure. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears.
2. Click the Music Store icon in the Source column to show the home
page of the iTunes Music Store, as shown in Figure 177-1.
Depending on the type of account you have and whether you’ve already used it to purchase from Apple, you may have to enter additional informa tion before being permitted to buy the selected music. The iTunes Music Store is not available in all coun tries. Refer to /www. apple.com/music/ store for details. You must have active Internet access to use the iTunes Music Store. While you can access the store through a telephone modem, best results are achieved when using highspeed Internet access, such as DSL, a cable modem, or another highspeed network medium. As of the writing of this book, single song down loads are only $.99. If you sell or give away your computer, you’ll need to “deauthorize” it so the new owner can’t purchase music under your name. Choose Advanced ➪ Deauthorize Computer.
Figure 177-1: Apple’s iTunes Music Store.
3. Choose a Genre of music to view from the Choose Genre drop-down list, near the upper-left corner of the Music Store window. If you choose “Classical,” you see the window change to display something similar to Figure 177-2. 4. Click a CD’s name or icon to view all the songs on that CD. 5. Double-click a song’s name to listen to a preview of the song. 6. Click the Buy Song button to buy the selected song, or click the Buy CD button to purchase the entire CD. 7. Enter your .Mac or Apple Account information, or click Create New Account if you haven’t yet created an account, and click the Buy button, as shown in Figure 177-3.
Audio with iTunes
381
Task
177
tips
•
Figure 177-2: The Classical genre of the iTunes Music Store.
•
• Figure 177-3: Logging into your Apple account to buy music on the iTunes Music Store.
Any music you buy in the iTunes Music Store is downloaded to your computer in the MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) format. This format is of very high quality and in most cases sounds the same or better than traditional CDs. When the Music Store icon is selected in the Source list, you can use iTunes’s Search fields to search the entire iTunes Music Store. Select Power Search from the drop-down list in the Search field to further refine your search. If you lose your Internet con nection during a download of purchased music, you can choose Advanced ➪ Check for Purchased Music to have iTunes redownload the music for you.
8. Follow the on-screen directions to finalize your purchase, at which point the selected music will be downloaded to your iTunes Library.
cross-references
•
•
Anyone with a copy of iTunes can view and search the iTunes Music Store, but you must have an Apple Account (or .Mac account) to purchase music. Setting up a .Mac account is dis cussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.” By default, iTunes is set up to use 1-Click purchasing in the Music Store. This means that after you have set up your Apple Account in iTunes, you only have to click the Buy button to purchase music immediately (as was outlined in the steps of this task). Refer to Task 178, “More about Your iTunes Music Store,” for details.
382
Task
178
notes
•
•
•
If you switch to buying with a shopping cart, as dis cussed in Step 4, you will no longer see “Buy” buttons next to CDs and songs in the Music Store. Instead, those will be “Add” buttons, to add selections to your shopping cart. If you share your computer with another user, always sign out from iTunes to pre vent the other user from buying music with your account. To do so, click the Account button in the upper-right corner and choose Sign Out.
Part 14
More about Your iTunes Music Store
W
hile finding and buying music in the iTunes Music Store is relatively easy, there are many other aspects of the store you can customize. For example, you can specify whether to buy music automatically after clicking the buy button, or to use a shopping cart system where you place items in a cart and buy them when you’re ready. This task discusses this and other items in the iTunes Store Preferences, as well as providing more information about navigating through the Music Store. 1. Click the iTunes icon in the Dock to start iTunes. The iTunes window
appears.
2. Click the Music Store icon in the Source column to show the home
page of the iTunes Music Store.
3. Choose iTunes ➪ Preferences, and click the Store button to display
the window shown in Figure 178-1.
If you sell or give away your computer, you’ll need to “deauthorize” it so the new owner can’t purchase music under your name. Choose Advanced ➪ Deauthorize Computer.
Figure 178-1: The iTunes Music Store Preferences window.
4. To shop with 1-Click buy access, leave the “Buy and download using 1-Click” option selected. To use a Shopping Cart instead, choose the “Buy using a Shopping Cart” option. 5. To play songs immediately after they’ve been purchased and downloaded, place a check in the first checkbox next to “Play songs after downloading.” 6. If you are using a slower Internet connection, consider placing a check in the second box next to “Load complete preview before playing.” This will enable you to hear the entire preview clip at once, as opposed to hearing it in bits and pieces as it downloads. Click OK to close the Store Preferences window and continue. 7. Click the first name under the Featured Artists section on the iTunes Music Store home page to reveal a page about that artist.
Audio with iTunes
383
8. Notice that your path from the home page is displayed near the top of the iTunes window. Click the Home icon at the beginning of the path to return to the home page.
Task
178
9. Click the left or right arrows next to the path to move forward or
backward along your path in the iTunes Music Store.
10. Click the Browse button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window to browse the Music Store by text only, as shown in Figure 178-2.
tips
• •
•
Figure 178-2: Browsing the Music Store by genre, category and author, with text only.
•
•
You can also access audiobooks in the iTunes Music Store. Select “audiobooks” from the Genre drop-down list to learn more. Parents can set up allowance accounts for kids, in which a certain amount of money is automatically placed in their iTunes Music Store Account each month. Click the iTunes Allowances button on the Music Store home page to learn more. iiTunes gift certificates make great gifts for any music fan. Click the iTunes Gift Certificates button on the Music Store home page to learn more. Can’t find a particular song or artist in the iTunes Music Store? If you search for something and the search doesn’t match any results, click the “Request” link to send an email to Apple requesting the song or artist. You can view your purchase history buy signing into the Music Store in the upperright corner of the window and then clicking the Account button again to select “View Account” in the Account Information window, then select “Purchase History.”
cross-references
• •
Finding and buying music in the iTunes Music Store is discussed in Task 177, “Using the iTunes Music Store.” You must have an Apple account (or .Mac account) to purchase music. Setting up a .Mac account is discussed in Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.”
Part 15: Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto Task 179: Importing Photos from a Digital Camera Task 180: Importing Photos from Your Computer or a Disk Task 181: Rotating a Photo Task 182: Cropping a Photo Task 183: Editing Photos in Separate Windows Task 184: Editing Photos in Other Programs Task 185: Customizing the Way Photos Are Displayed in iPhoto Task 186: Adding Text Details to Photos Task 187: Finding Photos in iPhoto Task 188: Adjusting the Exposure of a Photo Task 189: Retouching a Photo Task 190: Removing Red-Eye from a Photo Task 191: Converting a Photo to Black and White Task 192: Creating a New Photo Library Task 193: Creating a Photo Album Task 194: Using Photos as Desktop Pictures and Screen Savers Task 195: Emailing Photos Task 196: Exporting Photos Task 197: Printing a Photo on Your Printer Task 198: Ordering Professional Color Prints Task 199: Creating a Photo Book Task 200: Creating a Slide Show with Your Photos Task 201: Creating a Web Page of Photos Task 202: Archiving Photos to CD
386
Task
179
notes
•
•
If you connect your camera or card reader to the com puter and iPhoto fails to recognize it, first recheck the connection to make sure that the cables are secure. Then, visit the iPhoto Web site at www.apple.com/ iphoto to see if your camera is compatible with iPhoto. If it is not compati ble, you should install the software that came with the camera or visit the camera manufacturer’s Web site for more information.
Importing Photos from a Digital Camera
i
Photo makes importing photos from your digital camera a snap. In most cases, you don’t even need to install any additional software (even the software that came with your camera) because iPhoto has the necessary software built right in. This task shows you how to import photos from a digital camera. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Connect your digital camera or card reader to the computer using its
USB cable.
3. Click the Import button below the photos window, and confirm that
your camera or card reader is listed in the Import toolbox at the
bottom of the screen.
4. Check the checkbox “Erase camera contents after transfer” if you
want iPhoto to erase all the photos from the camera after importing
them.
5. Click the Import button in the bottom-right corner of the screen, as
shown in Figure 179-1.
Some cameras have a sleep mode that automati cally shuts them down after a period of time to con serve battery power. Be sure that your camera’s sleep timer is turned off, or set it to a long enough time period to allow iPhoto to download the photos.
caution
•
Part 15
Don’t disconnect your cam era or card reader until iPhoto has finished trans ferring the photos. If you need to disconnect before the photos are finished transferring, click the Stop button in iPhoto, then drag the camera’s icon from the desktop to the Trash.
Figure 179-1: Clicking the Import button.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 6. Track the progress of the importation in the bottom portion of the screen, as shown in Figure 179-2.
387
Task
179
tips
•
Figure 179-2: Importing the 52 photos from the camera.
•
7. Locate the imported photos in iPhoto, typically near the bottom of the library (your collection of photos in iPhoto). 8. Drag the camera’s icon on your desktop to the Trash before disconnecting the camera, as shown in Figure 179-3.
Choose View ➪ Film Rolls or press Cmd-Shift-F to sort the photos in the iPhoto window according to roll or import group. You can rearrange the rolls in the window by clicking the roll name and dragging it to its new location. You can also rearrange photos within and between rolls by click ing and dragging them. If you don’t have a digital camera, but have one that uses regular film, consider having your photos put on disk when they’re devel oped, so you can easily import them into iPhoto.
cross-reference
•
Figure 179-3: Dragging the camera icon to the Trash.
To learn how to import photos into iPhoto from other places on your computer, see Task 180, “Importing Photos from Your Computer or a Disk.”
388
Task
180
Part 15
Importing Photos from Your Computer or a Disk
W note
•
When you import photos into iPhoto, the program actually makes a copy of the photo and stores it in a different location than the one you copied from. If you find yourself short on disk space, consider archiving some of the photos in iPhoto.
hen you want to copy photos from other places on your computer into iPhoto, you follow the same set of steps as when copying photos from a CD or DVD. In either case, you just need to tell the program where to find your files, and it takes care of the rest. This task discusses how to import photos from your computer or from a disk. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Choose File ➪ Import or press Ô-Shift-I on your keyboard to invoke
the import options window.
3. Navigate to the file(s) on your computer that you want to copy into
iPhoto, as shown in Figure 180-1.
Figure 180-1: Selecting the photos to copy into iPhoto.
cautions
•
•
iPhoto prefers files in the Red-Green-Blue (RGB) color mode, as opposed to Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-Black (CMYK). While it may let you import CMYK images, you’ll likely encounter errors when trying to edit those images. iPhoto is somewhat picky with regard to the files it lets you import. For exam ple, you cannot import a TIFF file saved with ZIP or JPEG compression, but you can import a TIFF file with LZW or no compression.
4. Click the Import button to start the import process. iPhoto shows its progress in the bottom section of the window. 5. Locate your newly imported images in iPhoto (typically toward the bottom of the Organize pane, if you have lots of photos in your library), as shown in Figure 180-2.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
389
Task
180
tips
•
Figure 180-2: Imported photos appear in the Organize pane.
6. Click once on a photo to edit its title or add comments in the area to the left of the Organize pane.
•
7. Drag the slider below the Organize pane (in the bottom-right corner) to grow or shrink the preview size of the images you imported, as shown in Figure 180-3.
•
When choosing which files to import into iPhoto, hold down the Shift key to select multiple, consecutive files at once. To select multiple files that don’t appear next to each other in the file list, hold down the Ô key while clicking each file’s name. You can import most of the common graphics file for mats into iPhoto, including JPEG, GIF, TIFF, and PNG, as well as Photoshop files (PSD). Imported files stay in the original file format (that is, iPhoto does not change a JPEG file into a TIFF file, or vice versa). You can also import photos into iPhoto by dragging them into the Organize pane, or even by dragging an image or folder of images over the iPhoto icon in the Dock at the bottom of your screen.
cross-reference
•
Figure 180-3: Increase the size of previewed images with the slider.
The Import command is also used to copy photos from a digital camera to iPhoto, as discussed in Task 179, “Importing Photos from a Digital Camera.”
390
Task
181
Part 15
Rotating a Photo
N
ever be limited to taking only horizontal photos. iPhoto makes rotating your photos so easy that you can turn your camera any way necessary to take the best photo. This task shows you how to rotate a photo. 1. Open iPhoto.
notes
• •
•
•
Drag the photo size slider to the right or left to view the image larger or smaller in the Organize pane.
2. Click the Organize button, if its not already active/highlighted. 3. Click once on the photo you want to rotate to activate it, as indicated
by a thick line displayed around the photo (see Figure 181-1).
Hold down the Option key while clicking the Rotate button to change the direc tion of the rotation. To spec ify the default direction of the Rotate button, choose iPhoto ➪ Preferences and then select one of the two available options next to Rotate. To rotate multiple photos, hold down the Shift key to select multiple, consecutive files at once, before clicking the Rotate button. To rotate multiple files that don’t appear next to each other in the file list, hold down the Ô key while clicking each file’s name, and click the Rotate button. If you make a mistake while rotating an image, press Ô-Z to undo the last oper ation. Or, choose File ➪ Revert to Original to return the photo to the way it appeared when you first imported it into iPhoto.
Figure 181-1: Activated photos are outlined in the Organize pane.
4. Click the Rotate button on the left side of the screen, shown in Figure 181-2, to rotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise, or hold down the Option key while clicking the Rotate button to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
391
Task
181
tips
•
Figure 181-2: Rotating images with the Rotate button.
•
5. View the newly oriented image in the Organize pane, as shown in Figure 181-3.
Figure 181-3: The newly oriented image is displayed in place of the original in the Organize pane.
If you click the wrong photo or photos, you can choose Edit ➪ Deselect All or press Ô-Shift-A to dese lect the photos. Or, simply click outside the photos. There are three more quick ways to rotate a photo. First, you can Ctrl-click the photo (in either the Organize or Edit pane) and choose Rotate ➪ Clockwise or Rotate ➪ Counter Clockwise. Second, you click press Ô-R (counter clockwise) or Ô-Shift-R (clockwise). Third, select the photo and choose Edit➪Rotate, then Counter Clockwise or Clockwise.
cross-reference
•
A rotated photo can be easily emailed to a friend or relative, as discussed in Task 195, “Emailing Photos.”
392
Task
182
note
•
After selecting the area of the photo you want to crop, you can also tell iPhoto to crop by Control-clicking within the image and selecting “Crop” from the pop-up menu.
Part 15
Cropping a Photo
W
hen you want to zoom in on a particular part of a photo so that, for example, your daughter’s face fills the frame, you can crop it. Cropping in iPhoto means that the parts you don’t want in an image are deleted permanently from the iPhoto version of that image. This task shows you how to crop a photo. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Select the photo you want to crop by locating it in the Organize pane
and clicking it one time.
3. Click the Edit button, and your image will be displayed by itself in
the Edit pane, as shown in Figure 182-1.
Figure 182-1: Editing an image in iPhoto.
4. Click and hold in the upper-left corner of the area you want to keep, then drag toward the lower-right corner until you are satisfied. The area to be deleted is “grayed-out,” while the area to be kept is visible within the box you drew, as shown in Figure 182-2.
cautions
•
•
If you plan to use the image as your desktop pic ture, select “Display” from the Constrain menu next to the Crop button, to make sure that the newly cropped image is the right size for your monitor. Cropping permanently deletes portions of an image. If you’re unsure about doing so, consider working on a copy of the image by first selecting the image and then choosing File ➪ Duplicate.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
393
Task
182
tips
•
Figure 182-2: Specifying where to crop the image.
5. Click the Crop button or press Ô-Shift-C to tell iPhoto that you’re ready to actually crop the photo and remove the “grayed-out” parts from the image, as shown in Figure 182-3.
•
•
Figure 182-3: The cropped image fills the window.
6. Press the Control key to compare the newly cropped photo to the uncropped original.
You can restrict the size of the cropped image if, for example, you want to make sure that the newly cropped image is exactly square. To do so, specify how to restrict the size from the Constrain menu next to the Crop button. If you need to constrain the size of the image you’re cropping to a certain num ber of pixels, you must first edit the image in a sepa rate window. To do so, hold down the Option key and double-click on the image. Then, specify the pixel sizes in the Custom boxes pro vided before selecting the portion of the image to crop. If you click the wrong photo or photos, you can choose Edit ➪ Deselect All or press Ô-Shift-A to deselect the photos. Or, you can simply click outside the photos.
cross-reference
•
For more custom crop options, you’ll need to edit the photo in a separate window, as discussed in Task 183, “Editing Photos in Separate Windows.”
394
Task
183
note
•
While it may not seem ben eficial to edit a photo in a separate window, doing so does give you the option of making the image be dis played larger than it could be displayed in the normal iPhoto window.
Part 15
Editing Photos in Separate Windows
W
hen you edit (crop, remove red-eye, and so on) photos in iPhoto, you have the choice of doing so right within the Edit pane or in a separate iPhoto window. While this is mostly a matter of personal preference, the separate Edit window does offer a few more features than the Edit pane in the normal iPhoto window. This task discusses how to edit photos in separate windows. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Choose iPhoto ➪ Preferences or press Ô-, (see Figure 183-1).
Figure 183-1: Choosing the Preferences command from the iPhoto menu.
3. Choose “Opens in separate window” next to the options for Doubleclick, as shown in Figure 183-2.
Figure 183-2: Choose “Opens in separate window.”
4. Click the red “X” in the upper-left corner to dismiss the Preferences window and accept your changes.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 5. Locate the photo you want to edit, and double-click it to edit it in a separate window, as shown in Figure 183-3.
395
Task
183
tips
•
• Figure 183-3: Editing a photo in a separate window.
6. Edit the photo by using the Edit toolbar at the top of the window.
•
7. Click the arrows on the right of the toolbar to reveal additional options or to customize the visible options (as shown in Figure 183-4), and click Done when you’re finished.
•
Photos typically open at 100 percent, but you can use the Zoom arrows in the upper left to adjust the size of the image. Or, you can click “Fit” to cause the photo to be resized to fit within the available window size. Depending on the size of your photo, some of the default buttons may not be visible in the Edit toolbar. Click the double arrow to the right of the toolbar to access any tools you’re missing. If you want to edit a photo in the Edit pane of iPhoto (as opposed to a separate window), simply click once on the photo in the Organize pane, and then click the Edit button. If, at any time during the editing process you make a mistake, choose Edit ➪ Undo or press Ô-Z to undo the most recent operation. If you feel like you need to start over completely, choose File ➪ Revert to Original.
cross-references
• •
Figure 183-4: Customizing the buttons visible in the Edit toolbar.
8. Click the red “X” in the upper-right corner of the window to close it when you’ve completed editing the photo.
You can also specify another program to edit your photos, as discussed in Task 184, “Editing Photos in Other Programs.” The Edit toolbar of this separate window provides a more custom way of cropping an image, as discussed in Task 182, “Cropping a Photo.”
396
Task
184
notes
•
•
At any time, you can change the application used to edit photos from iPhoto. To do so, simply repeat the steps in this task and select a different program in the Preferences window. If you don’t want to edit all your photos in another application, but still want the option to edit some in another application from time to time, you can. Just be sure to specify which application you want to use, in the Preferences win dow, as discussed in Step 4 of this task. Then, select the radio button next to whichever way you normally want to edit photos (in the Edit window or in a sepa rate iPhoto window). When you find a photo you want to edit in an external appli cation, Ctrl-click on that photo and choose “Edit in external editor.” iPhoto will launch the editor specified in the Preferences window to edit the photo.
cautions
•
•
Don’t rename your photo or change its location when you save it from your graph ics editor. If you do, iPhoto will no longer recognize it and you’ll need to reimport it into iPhoto. Remember that iPhoto doesn’t like CMYK (CyanMagenta-Yellow-Black) files, so don’t change the color mode of your photos while editing them in other pro grams. (They should remain in the RGB color mode.)
Part 15
Editing Photos in Other Programs
I
f you have a more powerful graphics editor on your computer (such as Adobe Photoshop or Photoshop Elements), you’ll likely want to edit photos in that program instead of in iPhoto. It’s easy to change iPhoto’s preferences so that when you double-click a photo in iPhoto, your graphics editor is automatically launched with that photo ready for editing. This task shows you how to edit photos using a program other than iPhoto. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Choose iPhoto ➪ Preferences or press Ô-, (see Figure 184-1).
Figure 184-1: Choosing the Preferences command from the iPhoto menu.
3. Choose “Opens in other:” next to the options for Double-click, as shown in Figure 184-2.
Figure 184-2: Choosing “Opens in other.”
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 4. If the space below is empty, iPhoto will automatically prompt you to select the application with which you want to edit photos, as shown in Figure 184-3. If you’re not prompted to select an application, click the button labeled “Select” (shown in Figure 184-2) and choose an application.
397
Task
184
tips
•
• Figure 184-3: Selecting the program to use for editing photos.
5. Click the red “X” in the upper-left corner of the Preferences window to close it.
•
6. Locate the photo you want to edit in the Organize pane, and doubleclick it to open it in the program you specified.
If you don’t have another graphics program but would like to try one, Adobe Photoshop Elements is a great product for photo enthusiasts. Try it for free for 30 days by visiting www.adobe.com/ products/tryadobe. Save your edited files in the same file format that they were opened with. If you don’t, you’ll need to reim port them into iPhoto. Want to work on a copy of your file instead of the original iPhoto image? Select the image, and then choose File ➪ Duplicate to make a copy.
7. Edit the photo as necessary. 8. Save the file. 9. Close the file and return to iPhoto, where the updated file appears in the Organize pane.
cross-reference
•
If you want to change your preferences so that you no longer edit photos in another application, see Task 183, “Editing Photos in Separate Windows.”
398
Task
185
Part 15
Customizing the Way That Photos Are Displayed in iPhoto
A notes
• •
Any changes you make to the display of photos only affects how they are dis played in the Organize pane, not how they appear in the Edit pane. You can also customize the look of the photos by drag ging the Image Size slider just to the right of the Book button in iPhoto’s main window. Drag to the right to make the photos larger, or click the button to the right of the slider to display the images as large as possi ble. Drag to the left to make the photos display smaller, or click the button to the left of the slider to display the images as small as possible.
fter you are comfortable working with iPhoto, you may decide you want your photos to be displayed differently in the program. For example, you can specify whether iPhoto shows your photos with a drop shadow or in a frame. Likewise, you can tell the program which photos are placed first in a list of photos. This task shows you how to customize the way that photos are displayed in iPhoto. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Choose iPhoto ➪ Preferences or press Ô-,. 3. Specify “Drop Shadow,” “Border,” or “No Border” next to
Appearance, to tell iPhoto what to place around each photo it
displays.
4. Drag the Background Color slider to a position between “Black” and
“White” to identify the background color you’d like to use, as shown
in Figure 185-1.
Figure 185-1: Changing the background color behind the photos to a dark gray.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 5. Uncheck “Align to grid” if you want to allow the photos to flow freely in the Organize pane, as shown in Figure 185-2.
399
Task
185
tips
•
• Figure 185-2: Allowing the photos to flow freely in the Organize pane.
6. Check “Place most recent photos at the top” if you prefer that the photos you last added be at the top of the screen. 7. Click the red “X” in the upper-left corner of the Preferences window to close it when you’re satisfied with the changes you made.
If you notice iPhoto seems a bit slow in displaying all your photos, turn off the drop shadows behind the photos and opt for a border or noth ing at all. Although they look nice, drop shadows do seem to slow down iPhoto’s dis playing of images. You can also tell iPhoto to display a photo’s title, film roll, or keywords next to the photo in the Organize pane, by choosing Titles, Keywords, or Film Rolls from the View menu. The title is displayed below the photo, while the keywords are displayed to the right of the photo. When film rolls are shown, photos imported from the same source are grouped together.
cross-references
•
•
The Preferences window includes Double-click, Rotate, and Mail settings as well. See Task 183, “Editing Photos in Separate Windows,” and Task 184, “Editing Photos in Other Programs,” for information about the Double-click set tings. See Task 181, “Rotating a Photo,” for tips on the Rotate settings. Finally, refer to Task 195, “Emailing Photos” for Mail settings. If you tell iPhoto to display the titles and keywords of each photo, you’ll likely want to edit those features. See Task 186, “Adding Text Details to Photos.”
400
Task
186
notes
•
•
•
•
You can edit the text infor mation of a photo when you are viewing the photo in the Organize pane, as well as when editing the photo within the main iPhoto window.
Adding Text Details to Photos
i
Photo is perhaps the most useful when it enables you to quickly locate a particular photo among hundreds or even thousands of photos on your computer. To speed that process along, you can add text details to your photos (such as titles, dates, comments, and keywords). This task shows how to add text details to photos. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Select the first photo you want to add text details to by clicking it
once.
3. Click the Information button (labeled with an “i”) near the lower-left
corner of the main window in iPhoto, as shown in Figure 186-1.
By default, the Date field is filled with the date the file first existed on your com puter or, if imported from a digital camera, the date and time the photo was taken. Clicking the Information button multiple times causes iPhoto to display different pieces of the text information for an image. For example, if the text details are currently hid den, clicking once opens the basic text information. Clicking again opens the Comments field, and click ing a third time hides the information entirely. If you need more space in the Comments field, simply click the small circle above the Title field and drag it up until enough space is visible.
caution
•
Part 15
New keywords are added to the list directly below the currently selected keyword. Once you add a keyword, you can’t move it.
Figure 186-1: Clicking the Information button displays the text details of the photo.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 4. Edit (or enter) the title of the photo in the Title field, as shown in Figure 186-2.
401
Task
186
tips
•
• Figure 186-2: Editing the text information for a photo.
5. Change the date as necessary in the Date field. 6. Click the Information button again to reveal the Comments field
(if it wasn’t already visible).
7. Enter text in the Comments field as necessary. 8. Choose Edit ➪ Keywords to open the Keywords window. 9. Select a keyword or hold down the Shift key while selecting multiple keywords that you want to associate with the selected photo and click the Assign button.
•
10. Choose View ➪ Keywords to tell iPhoto to display the keywords assigned to each photo next to them in the Organize pane.
Use the first keyword, a checkmark, to mark photos that you’ve already edited or added text content to. The checkmark actually appears on top of the photo in the Organize pane and makes it really easy to identify. You can specify how iPhoto automatically assigns titles by choosing Edit ➪ Set Title To and selecting an option from the submenu. “Empty” causes iPhoto to leave the title field blank, while “Roll Info,” “File Name,” and “Date/Time” each cause iPhoto to use the respective information in the Title field. Note that if any of those are empty, the title will be empty as well. To create new keywords, choose “New” from the Keyword drop-down list at the top of the Keywords window. Likewise, you can choose “Rename” or “Delete” from that list to rename or delete the cur rently selected keyword in the Keywords list.
cross-references
• •
To learn how to use the text content to easily locate photos in iPhoto, see Task 187, “Finding Photos in iPhoto.” You can also edit the title of a photo when it’s used in an iPhoto book, as discussed in Task 199, “Creating a Photo Book.”
402
Task
187
notes
•
• •
iPhoto does search all text fields when a specific text string is entered into the Search box on the Keywords page. This is different from the keyword search, which only searches the Keyword field.
Part 15
Finding Photos in iPhoto
A
s mentioned in Task 186, “Adding Text Details to Photos,” iPhoto is especially useful for quickly finding a photo or series of related photos within a larger group of photos. In fact, after keywords have been assigned to photos and other text information has been added, the process of finding photos is a snap. This task describes how to find photos in iPhoto. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Choose Edit ➪ Keywords or press Ô-K to display the Keywords
window if it isn’t already visible (see Figure 187-1).
The keyboard shortcut for displaying the Keywords window to assign, edit, or search by keyword is Ô-K. The keyboard shortcut for showing/hiding a photo’s keywords in the main iPhoto window is Shift-Ô-K.
Figure 187-1: Opening the Keywords window.
3. Double-click the name of the keyword you want to search for, as shown in Figure 187-2.
Figure 187-2: Searching for “Vacation” reveals the only photo assigned to that keyword.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 4. Hold down the Shift key, and double-click an additional keyword to narrow your search even further.
403
Task
5. Click the Show All button to display all the photos again. 6. Enter text in the Search box at the bottom of the Keywords window to find photos whose title, comments, keywords, or filename matches. Continue typing to narrow down your search results, as shown in Figure 187-3.
tips
• •
Figure 187-3: Searching for “joe” reveals three photos with “joe” in the title.
187
•
7. Click the Show All button to display all the photos again. 8. Click the red “X” in the upper-left corner of the Keywords window to close it.
You can also search for photos with multiple key words by Shift-selecting the keywords and pressing the Search button in the Keywords window. While you can search for keywords by double-clicking on the keyword name, you can also simply type all or a portion of the keyword into the Search box at the bottom of the Keywords window and press the Return key. Both actions produce the same results. In fact, typing the word in the Search box may even be a bit faster. If you have multiple photo libraries and albums in iPhoto, be sure to select the one you want to search (that is, highlight it in the menu on the left of iPhoto’s main window) before searching. Otherwise, you may not find what you’re looking for.
cross-references
•
•
To make your searching really effective, you must first add content that can be searched. This means you need to assign titles, comments, and keywords to your photos. To do so, see Task 186, “Adding Text Details to Photos.” You can easily group the photos in your search results into a special photo album in iPhoto. Refer to Task 193, “Creating a Photo Album.”
404
Task
188
Part 15
Adjusting the Exposure of a Photo
A
fter importing photos from a digital camera, it’s common to find some that are either overexposed or underexposed. iPhoto has a few tricks for fixing this problem. This task describes how to adjust the exposure of a photo. 1. Open iPhoto.
notes
•
• •
Be aware that Windowsbased PCs typically have screens that display images darker than Macs. So, for example, if you plan to email a particular photo to a friend using a PC, con sider increasing the bright ness a bit to make sure that it’ll be readable on a darker monitor.
2. Locate the photo whose exposure you want to adjust, and click once to select it. 3. Click the Edit button, as shown in Figure 188-1.
Press the Control key after you Enhance a photo to compare the original to the newly enhanced version. If you make a mistake, choose Edit ➪ Undo. If you go too far and need to start over again, choose File ➪ Revert to Original.
Figure 188-1: Clicking the Edit button.
caution
•
While it is possible to “Enhance” a photo more than once, it is not advis able. Each time you do so, you lose a bit of informa tion from the image. In fact, after several attempts to “Enhance” your photo, it will become almost useless.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 4. Click the Enhance button to have iPhoto automatically adjust the brightness and contrast of your image to improve the exposure, as shown in Figure 188-2.
405
Task
188
tips
•
• Figure 188-2: Enhancing the photo adjusts its exposure.
5. Drag the Brightness/Contrast sliders to further customize the exposure, as needed (see Figure 188-3).
•
•
Drag the Image Size slider to the right to make the view of the photo larger, or to the left to make the view smaller. Click the silhouette to the right of the slider to view the image as large as possible, or click the sil houette to the left to view it as small as possible. To edit the next or previous photo in your album without returning to the Organize screen, click the corre sponding (Next or Previous) button in the bottom-right corner of iPhoto. The Brightness slider is the one on top, with the sun shine icons at either end. The Contrast slider is on the bottom. In general, both settings should be about in the middle; going too far in either direction causes an image to be too dark or too light. You can also quickly enhance a photo by hold ing down the Control key while clicking anywhere inside the photo’s borders and choosing Enhance.
cross-reference Figure 188-3: Dragging the Brightness/Contrast sliders.
6. Click the Organize button to return to viewing all the photos in your album, or continue editing the photo as necessary.
•
Beyond the basic enhance ments to your photos that are possible within iPhoto, other programs such as Adobe Photoshop are capable of powerful image editing. See Task 184, “Editing Photos in Other Programs,” for details on how to edit your iPhoto files in a more powerful image editor.
406
Task
189
notes
•
•
If your image has large areas that need to be retouched, you’re better off editing the image in a more powerful image editor, such as Adobe Photoshop Elements. While Step 5 (zooming in) is not required when retouching a photo in iPhoto, it is recommended. This is because zooming in enables you to see the details of the image better, and, therefore, makes it easier to only affect the details you want to, when applying the retouch or red-eye tools, for example.
Part 15
Retouching a Photo
i
Photo includes the Retouch brush, which is a very basic way to fix minor scratches or blemishes on a photo. While this tool is not intended to help you retouch major sections of an image, it can be helpful to remove a spec of dust that somehow got on the scanner and made its way onto the photo, or a tiny water droplet captured with the camera lens. This task shows how to retouch a photo. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Locate the photo you want to retouch, and click once to select it. 3. Click the Edit button. 4. Click once on the Retouch brush button in the Edit toolbar to activate it. Once activated, the brush button icon is outlined with white, as shown in Figure 189-1.
Figure 189-1: Clicking the Retouch brush button.
5. Zoom in to the area you want to retouch, by clicking the larger silhouette icon to the right of the image size slider and then locating the blemish with the scroll bars in the image window.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 6. Move the cursor over the area you want to retouch, as shown in Figure 189-2.
407
Task
189
tips
• •
Figure 189-2: Getting ready to retouch.
7. Click and drag over the area, using small brush strokes, until the blemish has been blended into the surrounding area, as shown in Figure 189-3.
•
•
Press the Control key to compare the newly retouched area to the original. The Retouch brush seems to work the best when you start your brush strokes in the middle of the blemish area and move outward. Use small strokes whenever possible. Wait a few sec onds before continuing, because the program some times takes that long to redraw the area in question. If you make a mistake while editing your photo, choose Edit ➪ Undo to undo the most recent step. You can repeat this step as neces sary. However, if you feel you’ve made too many changes to “undo” and need to start over again, choose File ➪ Revert to Original. You can also quickly turn the Retouch brush on and off by holding down the Control key while clicking anywhere inside the photo’s borders and select ing “Retouch.”
cross-references
•
Figure 189-3: Viewing the retouched area.
8. Click the Retouch brush in the Edit toolbar again to turn it off when you’re finished (the white outline should go away). 9. Click the Organize button to return to viewing all the photos or continue editing this photo as needed.
•
To learn how to change iPhoto’s setting and edit your image in a more pow erful image editor, see Task 184, “Editing Photos in Other Programs.” Another common way to enhance a photo is to remove any red spots that appear in the subject’s eyes. Refer to Task 190, “Removing Red-Eye from a Photo.”
408
Task
190
notes
• •
The Red-Eye button in the Edit toolbar only becomes available after an area of the photo is selected. Wondering how to avoid red-eye in your photographs altogether? Red-eye hap pens if the flash on the camera is too close to the lens, as it often is on com pact cameras. So, the more compact your camera, the more likely you are to have red eyes in your photo graphs. In addition, red-eye is made worse at night and in dark rooms, when eyes dilate and pupils take in more light. Some cameras compensate for this by causing additional flashes to go off before the picture is actually taken, to get your eyes ready for the photo and hopefully shrink the pupils back down. While this does help reduce redeye, it doesn’t remove it completely.
Part 15
Removing Red-Eye from a Photo
E
veryone has seen red-eye in photos. It’s the terrible change in eye color that occurs when the flash of the camera reflects off the back of the eye. iPhoto has an easy tool that’s perfect for removing the red color from eyes in photographs. This task describes how to remove “red-eye” from a photo. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Locate the photo you want to edit, and click it once to select it. 3. Click the Edit button. 4. Choose “None” from the Constrain pop-up menu, if it isn’t already
selected, as shown in Figure 190-1.
Figure 190-1: Choosing “None” from the Constrain pop-up menu.
caution
•
The Red-Eye tool removes all red from the selected area, so be sure to only select the area immediately surrounding the person’s eyes. If you accidentally remove the red from the person’s skin as well, it may turn a bit green. Choose Edit ➪ Undo and try again.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 5. Move the cursor to the top left of the area in which the red-eye occurs, as shown in Figure 190-2.
409
Task
190
tips
•
• Figure 190-2: Moving to the top left of the red-eye area.
•
6. Click and drag toward the bottom right of the red-eye area, until it is entirely selected, as shown in Figure 190-3.
It may be helpful to zoom in on the area in need of retouching. To do so, drag the image size slider to the right, or click on the larger silhouette icon to the right of the slider. After using the Red-Eye tool in iPhoto, click the Control key to compare the newly edited photo to its original. You can also access the Red-Eye function by hold ing down the Control key while clicking anywhere inside the photo and choosing “Red-Eye.”
cross-reference Figure 190-3: Selecting the red-eye.
7. Click the Red-Eye button in the Edit toolbar to remove the red from the selected area. 8. Click the Organize button to return to viewing all photos, or continue editing this photo as needed.
•
If you want to email a photo after removing the red-eye from it, see Task 195, “Emailing Photos.”
410
Task
191
Part 15
Converting a Color Photo to Black and White
B note
•
If you click the B&W button but nothing happens, try clicking the Organize button and then the Edit button again. At this point, your photo should be displayed in black and white. (If it is not, click the B&W button again.) Sometimes iPhoto needs to refresh the view of the photo to show it to you correctly.
lack-and-white photography can be very beautiful, even with its lack of millions of colors. Sometimes the subtle variations of gray can serve a photo better because the colors aren’t competing for your attention. This task shows how to use iPhoto to help you easily convert color photos into shades of black and white. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Locate the photo you want to convert and click it once to select it, as shown in Figure 191-1.
Figure 191-1: Clicking once on a photo selects it.
3. Click the Edit button. 4. Click the B&W button in the Edit toolbar at the bottom of the window, as shown in Figure 191-2.
caution
•
There is no button to “revert to color.” Instead, if you make a mistake, try Edit ➪ Undo to go back. If that doesn’t work, you can choose File ➪ Revert to Original, but you’ll also lose all other formatting you’ve done to the photo.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
411
Task
191
tips
•
Figure 191-2: Clicking the B&W button.
•
5. Wait while iPhoto converts the photo from color to black and white, as shown in Figure 191-3.
•
Want to change only a por tion of a photo to shades of gray? First, click and drag to select the area you want to convert. Then, click the B&W button in the Edit toolbar. You can also quickly con vert an image or a portion of an image to black and white by holding down the Control key while clicking the image, and then choos ing “B&W.” Compare the black-andwhite photo to the original by pressing the Control key.
Figure 191-3: Converting the photo to black and white.
6. Click the Organize button to return to viewing all the photos or continue editing this photo as needed.
cross-references
• •
If you want to create a spe cial photo album in iPhoto for all your black-and-white photos, refer to Task 193, “Creating a Photo Album.” To learn how to change iPhoto’s setting and edit your image in a more pow erful image editor, see Task 184, “Editing Photos in Other Programs.”
412
Task
192
notes
•
•
You can only have one main iPhoto Library from your hard disk displayed in iPhoto at a time, but you can also display an iPhoto Library from a CD or DVD. When you insert a CD or DVD into your computer’s disk drive, an icon for the disk should automatically be visible in the photo library list in iPhoto. Simply click the icon to show the photos from that disk. If you don’t want to rename the iPhoto Library folder, you could simply move it outside the Photos folder in your home directory. Moving it achieves the same goal as renaming it. iPhoto can’t find it without your help.
Part 15
Creating a New Photo Library
i
Photo stores all the photos you import in its main “Photo Library.” You can also create your own separate photo libraries to help organize your photos, or simply to assign libraries to different family members. While you can only have one photo library active at a time in iPhoto, you can switch between them using the following steps: 1. Quit iPhoto if it’s already open. 2. Click anywhere on your desktop to access the Finder. 3. From the menus at the top of your screen, choose Go ➪ Home, as
shown in Figure 192-1.
Figure 192-1: Choosing Go ➪ Home.
4. Double-click “Pictures,” as shown in Figure 192-2.
Figure 192-2: Double-clicking Pictures.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 5. Click “iPhoto Library” once and rename it, as shown in Figure 192-3.
413
Task
192
tips
•
Figure 192-3: Renaming the iPhoto Library folder.
6. Open iPhoto.
•
7. Click Create Library, as shown in Figure 192-4.
Figure 192-4: Clicking Create Library.
•
8. Enter a new name and specify a location for the photo library. 9. Click Save.
To switch back to your pre vious photo library, repeat the steps in this task. However, instead of clicking “Create Library” in Step 7, choose “Find Library” and locate the library you want to display. While there is no specific limit to the number of pho tos iPhoto permits you to import, you are limited by the amount of available space on your computer and its memory. If you find that iPhoto is becoming slower, try quitting other open programs to free up some memory. Another way to speed up iPhoto is to turn off the drop shadows from the Organize pane (choose iPhoto ➪ Preferences and select “No Border”). In addition, choose View ➪ Film Rolls and then click the triangle next to the names of the film rolls you’re not using, to tem porarily hide them.
cross-references
• •
If you find you’re running out of disk space for your photo libraries, consider archiving some of your photos to CD. Refer to Task 202, “Archiving Photos to a CD.” If you want to create sepa rate groups of photos in iPhoto without renaming or creating new Libraries, con sider using iPhoto’s Photo Albums feature, as described in Task 193, “Creating a Photo Album.”
414
Task
193
notes
•
•
To delete photos from an album, select the photo by clicking it once, and then press the Delete key. Or, drag the photo to the Trash under the list of albums in iPhoto. Deleting a photo from an album does not delete it from iPhoto alto gether. To do that, you must delete it from the iPhoto Library.
Part 15
Creating a Photo Album
I
n iPhoto, you can use photo albums to organize specific groups of photos from your library. For example, you might create an album just for the photos from your summer vacation, or perhaps all of your daughter’s soccer photos. This task shows how to create a photo album. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Click the Add button (shaped like a plus sign) in the lower-left corner of iPhoto’s main window, as shown in Figure 193-1.
iPhoto automatically saves changes you make while working with photos and albums. If you make a mis take, choose Edit ➪ Undo to go back.
Figure 193-1: Adding a new photo album.
3. Type a name for your new album and click the OK button, as shown in Figure 193-2.
Figure 193-2: Naming the new photo album.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 4. Select the photos you want to copy into the new photo album, and drag them over the new album’s name in the album list, as shown in Figure 193-3.
415
Task
193
tips
•
• Figure 193-3: Dragging photos into the new album.
5. Click the name of the album in the album list to view its contents. 6. Drag the photos around as needed, to rearrange their order in the album.
• •
Another way to create a new album is to drag a folder of photos from your desktop onto the list of albums and libraries in iPhoto. A new album (con taining all the photos in that folder) will automati cally be created with the folder’s name. You can make copies of an album to play around with different layouts. To do this, click once on the album’s name in the list of libraries. Choose File ➪ Duplicate. Double-click the name of the new album to rename it. You can rename your photo album by double-clicking its name in the list of photo libraries. Press the Return key when you’re finished. If you want to delete an entire album, select the album from the list of libraries and press the Delete key. Or, drag it to the Trash in iPhoto.
cross-references
• •
After creating a photo album, you can add cap tions and title pages, as well as customize the layout. Refer to Task 199, “Creating a Photo Book.” Why not use a favorite photo album for your computer’s screensaver? See Task 194, “Using Photos as Desktop Pictures and Screensavers.”
416
Task
194
Part 15
Using Photos as Desktop Pictures and Screensavers
i notes
•
•
You can also use a group of photos as your desktop image. Your computer will rotate them to show you a new one every 30 minutes. You can change that time interval by opening System Preferences (from the Apple menu) and choosing View ➪ Desktop & Screen Saver. (Click the Desktop tab, if necessary, to display the Desktop picture options.) You can also specify a specific folder of images (as opposed to the entire iPhoto Library, which is selected by default) to use as your screensaver. Click “Choose Folder...” in the Screen Savers list instead of “Pictures Folder.” Then, select the folder you want to use. If you look inside the Pictures folder, and then inside the iPhoto Library folder, you’ll find a folder called Albums. Inside that folder are additional folders for each album you have in iPhoto.
Photo makes it easy to use your favorite group of photos as a screensaver for your monitor. Here’s how it works. After your computer is inactive for a few minutes, iPhoto starts a slide show with the designated images, displaying them one after the other on the screen until you move the mouse or press a key on the keyboard to “wake up” the computer. iPhoto also displays the photos on your desktop in the background, changing them after a specified amount of time (usually 30 minutes). This task shows you how to use photos as desktop pictures or screensavers. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Click the name of the album you want to use as your screensaver and
desktop image.
3. Click the Organize button. 4. Click the Desktop button at the bottom of the main iPhotos window,
as shown in Figure 194-1.
Figure 194-1: Clicking the Desktop button.
5. Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu, and click the Desktop & Screen Saver button (under the Personal section). Next click the Screen Saver tab to customize your screensaver, as shown in Figure 194-2.
Figure 194-2: Screen Saver Preferences.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 6. Click “Pictures Folder” in the Screen Savers menu, if it isn’t already chosen.
417
Task
7. Specify when to start the screensaver with the “Start screen saver” time slider.
194
8. Click the Options button to set the Display Options before clicking OK, as shown in Figure 194-3.
tips
• •
• Figure 194-3: Setting the Display Options.
9. Click the Test button to test the screensaver. 10. Click the red “X” in the upper-left corner to close the Screen Effects Preferences window.
You can also specify that a single photo be used as your desktop image. Simply select the photo in iPhoto and click the Desktop button. To access the screensaver and desktop image prefer ences for your computer, open System Preferences (from the Apple menu) and choose View ➪ Desktop and Screen Saver. The Screen Saver prefer ences also contains a spot to assign “Hot Corners.” This means that if you put a checkbox in the lower-left corner, for instance, you can force the screensaver to start simply by moving your cursor into that corner of the screen. Also, if you click a corner twice, to add a minus symbol, the screensaver does not start when the mouse is resting in that corner.
cross-reference
•
If you want to create a slide show to play independently on your computer (not as a screensaver), refer to Task 200, “Creating a Slide Show with Your Photos.”
418
Task
195
Part 15
Emailing Photos
I
nstead of fumbling around with attaching photos in your email program, let iPhoto do the work for you! You can email your photos to friends and family with a few quick steps in iPhoto. This task shows you how to email photos. 1. Open iPhoto.
notes
•
•
iPhoto uses the Mac OS X Mail program by default. If you prefer to use a different email program that you have loaded on your computer, first choose iPhoto ➪ Preferences and select your mail program from the Mail pop-up-menu. iPhoto sup ports Entourage, Eudora, and AOL, in addition to Mac OS X Mail. After changing those prefer ences, clicking the Email button in iPhoto will start your preferred email program. If you’re wondering what size to send your photos at, try the smallest choice first, because it is a great size to send the bulk of your photos. Many people only increase the size when sending one or two favorite photos, or when sending a photo that the recipient may want to use as his or her own desktop photo.
2. Click once on the photo or photos you want to mail to select them. 3. Click the Organize button. 4. Click the Email button near the bottom of the main iPhoto window, as shown in Figure 195-1.
Figure 195-1: Clicking the Email button.
5. Select the size (in pixels) at which you want your photos to be emailed from the Size pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 195-2.
Figure 195-2: Selecting the size of the photos to be emailed.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 6. Choose whether to include any titles and/or comments associated with the photo(s).
419
Task
7. Click the Compose button, as shown in Figure 195-3.
195
tips
•
Figure 195-3: Clicking the Compose button.
8. Type the email address of the person to whom the photos should be sent. 9. Add a subject, and enter your text in the message field. 10. Click the Send button, as shown in Figure 195-4.
•
Remember to consider the downloading time for the recipients of your email. The total size of your photos is printed on the Mail Photo window below the Size pop up menu. A good rule of thumb is to limit the total size of the photos you send within a single email to under 1 MB. If you know that the recipient has cable, DSL, or some other highspeed Internet access, you can send a bit more, but still be aware that many email programs don’t accept incoming messages larger than 1 MB. In addition to the download time, consider the file for mat of the photos you’re sending. If you’re only work ing with JPEGs, there’s noth ing to worry about. However, if you imported other types of files into iPhoto (such as TIFF files), be aware that fewer people can view TIFF files than JPEG files.
cross-references
•
Figure 195-4: Clicking the Send button to send the email.
•
If you imported TIFF files into iPhoto and now want to save them as JPEG files for emailing, see Task 196, “Exporting Photos.” Learn more about the Mac OS X Mail program in Part 10, “Correspondence with Mail and Address Book.”
420
Task
196
notes
•
•
If you’re exporting photos to be used on a Windowsbased PC in particular, be sure to leave the “Use extension” checkbox selected. Files without extensions are less likely to be properly understood and opened, especially in a non-Mac environment.
Part 15
Exporting Photos
I
f you want to save your photos in a format other than the one they’re currently in, you’ll need to use iPhoto’s Export command. Likewise, if you want to send them to a word processor or similar program, you’ll want to export them in the appropriate format. This task shows you how to export photos. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Click once on the photo or photos you want to export to select them. 3. Choose File ➪ Export or press Ô-Shift-E, as shown in Figure 196-1.
If you select two or more photos before choosing File ➪ Export, all the photos will be exported. However, you will not be given a chance to name the files individually. Instead, iPhoto will use their titles or existing filenames during the export process.
Figure 196-1: Choosing the Export command.
4. Click the File Export tab to bring that to the front (if it wasn’t already). 5. Specify the file type: Original (to leave it as is), JPG, TIFF, or PNG (see Figure 196-2).
caution
•
When choosing the option to use for naming your file or files (filename, title, or album), remember that filenames uploaded to a Web page shouldn’t have spaces or most types of punctuation. If you plan to use the exported photos on a Web site, stick with nam ing conventions using let ters, numbers, and either dashes or underscores.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
421
Task
196
tip
•
Figure 196-2: Specifying the exported file type.
6. Specify the size: “Full-size images” or scaled to a maximum of a
certain size.
7. Identify how to name the photo(s): “Use filename,” “Use title,” or “Use album name.”
You can also use the Export command to export photos directly to QuickTime. To do so, choose the QuickTime tab instead of the File Export tab in Step 4. Then, specify the size of the images, the amount of time each should be displayed, the background color or image, and whether to use the currently selected music as background music in the movie. Click the Export but ton, then give the movie a name and location before clicking the Save button.
8. Check the “Use extension” checkbox to add the file extension to the end of the filename. 9. Click the Export button. 10. Edit the filename as needed, choose a location, and click the Save button to finish the process, as shown in Figure 196-3.
cross-references
• •
Figure 196-3: Choosing the location and clicking the Save button.
If you want to email photos, you don’t even need to export them. You can email them directly from iPhoto, as discussed in Task 195, “Emailing Photos.” The Export command is also used for exporting photos to a Web page, as discussed in Task 201, “Creating a Web Page of Photos.”
422
Task
197
notes
•
•
Aside from the iPhoto options discussed here, there may be additional printing options available for your particular printer. Choose “Advanced Options” from the Print menu to access those.
Part 15
Printing a Photo on Your Printer
i
Photo makes it easy to print photos in a variety of different formats. Choose from a contact sheet layout with a large number of photos on a single page to a single full-page photo. You can also print photos as greeting cards or in other sizes typical of photographs. This task discusses how to print a photo on your printer. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Click once on the photo or photos you want to print to select them. 3. Click the Print button near the bottom of the screen, as shown in
Figure 197-1, or choose File ➪ Print from the top menu.
The exclamation mark dis played on the Preview area of Figure 197-2 indicates that the photo’s resolution is too low to print clearly in the selected layout. Instead, choose a different layout or smaller print size. If you cropped the photo in iPhoto, consider reverting it to its original size and trying to print that instead.
Figure 197-1: Clicking the Print button.
4. Choose the printer you want to use from the Printer pop-up menu.
caution
•
iPhoto also has a Page Setup command (choose File ➪ Page Setup), which includes paper orientation and size instructions. Unless you know that it’s necessary to change those options, avoid doing so because iPhoto also adjusts them according to the layout choice you make in the Print window.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 5. Choose a layout from the Style pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 197-2.
423
Task
197
tips
•
Figure 197-2: Choosing a print style.
6. Specify the options for the style you choose (such as the margin size for a full-page print or the number of folds for a greeting card), as shown in Figure 197-3.
•
•
To select multiple photos to print at the same time, click once on the first photo. Then, hold down the Shift key and click on the additional photos to add to the selection. To select photos that aren’t next to the first one, hold down the Ô key instead of the Shift key while selecting them. The preview area of the Print window gives a pretty good indication of how your printed page should look. If something doesn’t look right in that window, make changes before clicking the Print button. Depending on the type of printer you have and the size of the photo(s) you’re printing, it may take a bit longer than you’re used to for the photos to print, par ticularly if you’re used to printing documents such as emails and Web pages.
cross-references Figure 197-3: Specifying the layout options.
•
7. Edit the number of copies to print. 8. Click the Print button at the bottom of the Print window to finish.
•
Want color prints of your digital photos but you only have a black-and-white printer? See Task 198, “Ordering Professional Color Prints,” for details on buying color prints of your photos in iPhoto. You can also fax a photo from iPhoto by clicking the PDF button at the bottom of the Print window and select ing “Fax this document” from the pop-up menu. Refer to Task 84, “Faxing,” for additional details.
424
Task
198
notes
•
•
If you’re logging in with an existing Apple ID and pass word, but this is your first time ordering prints through Apple, you’ll be prompted that additional information is required to set up 1-Click ordering. Click the MyInfo button in that dailog to edit your information before pro ceeding. You’ll not be able to continue without first accessing the MyInfo page on Apple’s site. After you’ve updated your information on the MyInfo page, return to iPhoto and proceed with setting up your account. You’ll then be prompted to enter credit card informa tion for your order. If you order numerous prints, be prepared to wait while iPhoto uploads the highest-quality photos available to the print service.
Part 15
Ordering Professional Color Prints
A
pple has partnered with Kodak’s Print Service to offer iPhoto users an easy way to order professional color prints from their photos in iPhoto. The photos are then delivered to your door in a few days. This task discusses how to order professional color prints. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Select the photo(s) for which you want to order prints. 3. Click the Order Prints button near the bottom of iPhoto and wait
while the connection is made, as shown in Figure 198-1.
Figure 198-1: Connecting to Kodak to order prints.
4. If this is your first time ordering prints, click “Set Up Account” near the bottom of the window, as shown in Figure 198-2.
caution
•
Avoid ordering particular size prints when the warn ing symbol appears next to that line in the order form. Most commonly, that sign appears when the resolu tion of the photo is too low for a good-quality print. The resolution may have been lost during editing. Did you crop the photo? Often, cropped photos do not have enough resolution to be printed well in larger sizes. This was the case with the photo with warn ings shown in Figure 198-4.
Figure 198-2: Clicking Set Up Account for first-time users.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 5. Enter your login information for Apple if you have already set up a user ID and password (see Figure 198-3), and click Sign In. If you haven’t already set up an account, click Create Account and follow the steps to proceed.
425
Task
198
tips
•
• Figure 198-3: Logging in.
6. Provide any additional information (as needed) to complete the setup of your Apple account. This may include entering credit card information and a shipping address to enable 1-Click ordering of prints from iPhoto. When you’re finished, you’ll be able to enter quantities in the order form.
To select multiple photos to print at the same time, click once on the first photo. Then hold down the Shift key and click on the additional photos to add to the selection. To select photos that aren’t next to the first one, hold down the Ô key instead of the Shift key while selecting them. If you can’t enter quantities in the boxes next to the print prices in the Kodak Print Service window, Apple needs more information from you. Click the “Set Up Account” button at the bot tom of the screen and log in to determine what that information is.
7. Enter quantities in the order form next to each print and size you
want to order.
8. Adjust the shipping settings as needed. 9. Click the Buy Now button when you’re ready. 10. Wait while iPhoto transfers the photos to the print service and completes your order. Check your email for a confirmation of your order.
cross-reference
•
If you’d prefer to print pho tos from your own com puter and printer, see Task 197, “Printing a Photo on Your Printer.”
426
Task
199
notes
• •
•
Changing a photo’s title and comments in a book also changes them every where else they exist in iPhoto. If you click the “Order Book” button, but then are not able to enter a quantity, click the “Set Up Account” button to set up an account with Apple for 1-Click order ing. You cannot purchase a book or photos through iPhoto without first having an account with Apple. While you can click and drag the pages in a book or the photos on a single page while viewing the Photo Book, you can’t move spe cific photos from one page to another. To do so, first click the Organize button. Then, rearrange the photos before clicking the Book button again.
Part 15
Creating a Photo Book
I
f you’ve ever spent time designing a photo album for your printed photos, you already have experience to prepare you for creating iPhoto’s version called the Photo Book. When you create a photo album with a group of photos in iPhoto, you’re beginning to design your digital Photo Book. After adding the photos, the next step is to design the layout and theme. When you’re finished, you can order a printed and bound copy from Apple. This task discusses how to create a Photo Book. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. From the list of albums on the left side of iPhoto’s main window,
select the photo album you want to use to create your book.
3. Click the Book button, as shown in Figure 199-1.
Figure 199-1: Clicking the Book button.
4. From the Theme pop-up menu, choose a theme to be applied to the book, as shown in Figure 199-2. Customize the settings for the theme by unchecking or checking the boxes to show Titles, Comments, and/or Page Numbers on each page. 5. Customize each page of the book by choosing a page style from the Page Design pop-up menu: Cover (for the cover page), Introduction (a page with only text), or One, Two, Three, or Four photos per page.
caution
•
If you change the theme of the book after adding custom text to any of the pages, you’ll lose that text.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
427
Task
199
tips
•
Figure 199-2: Selecting a theme.
•
6. Rearrange the pages by clicking and dragging them to the appropriate spots. 7. Add titles, comments, and introductory text as needed. 8. Choose Edit ➪ Spelling ➪ Spelling to perform a spell-check on the text you entered, or choose Edit ➪ Spelling ➪ Check Spelling As You Type to have iPhoto underline questionable words in red. 9. Click the Preview button to preview your book in a separate window. Use the forward and backward buttons in the upper-left corner to navigate through the book. 10. Click the Order Book button to order a professionally printed color copy of your book, complete with a cover and binding. When prompted, enter the quantity, select the cover color, and click “Buy Now,” as shown in Figure 199-3.
•
To prevent the photos on a particular page from mov ing when you rearrange the pages and/or photos in the book, click that page and then click the box next to “Lock Page.” Use the options in the Edit ➪ Font menu to view and/or change the font of the text. Note that it is not possible to use different fonts on different pages. You can, however, use dif ferent colors for text on dif ferent pages. When viewing the Fonts window, choose “Colors” from the Extras pop-up menu. Then, select the text you want to col orize and choose a color from the Color window. (Some themes have font characteristics that cannot be changed.) If you’re having trouble aligning the photos in your book, check their size ratio. Because iPhoto designs Photo Books with a 4 x 3 size ratio, photos that don’t have this ratio may not align properly. If you find this to be a problem in your Photo Book, consider crop ping your photos to a 4 x 3 ratio with iPhoto’s cropping tool.
cross-reference
•
Figure 199-3: Ordering a printed copy of a Photo Book.
For tips related to cropping in iPhoto, see Task 182, “Cropping a Photo.”
428
Task
200
notes
• •
•
When you pause a slide show with the spacebar, it only pauses the photos (not the music).
Part 15
Creating a Slide Show with Your Photos
I
f you have a series of photos that you’d like to view in slide show format (that is, one after the other automatically), you can do so quite easily from within iPhoto. In addition, you can add music and customize the length of time each photo is displayed. This task shows you how to create a slide show with your photos. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Select the album or group of photos you want to display. 3. Click the Slideshow button in the bottom portion of the iPhoto
window, as shown in Figure 200-1.
If you have iDVD 2.1 or higher installed on your computer, you can export a slide show directly to iDVD, which lets you create your own DVDs with music and photos. You’ll know if your computer is set up to do this if an iDVD button is available in between the Desktop and Burn buttons in iPhoto. If it is, select the album containing the slide show you want to export and click the iDVD button. Slide shows are created from photo albums in iPhoto, as discussed in Task 193, “Creating a Photo Album.”
Figure 200-1: Clicking the Slideshow button.
4. Adjust the length of time (in seconds) iPhoto displays each photo. 5. Check “Display photos in random order” to let iPhoto select the order in which to play the photos. 6. Check “Repeat slide show” to have the photos automatically repeat.
caution
•
You must have at least two photos selected (or an album with at least two photos) in order to play a slide show.
7. Check “Music” to play music during the slide show, and select which song to play, as shown in Figure 200-2.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
429
Task
200
tips
•
Figure 200-2: Selecting the music.
8. Click “Save Settings” to save the settings without actually viewing the slide show first. 9. Click “Play Slideshow” to save the settings and also view the slide show, as shown in Figure 200-3.
•
•
Figure 200-3: Playing the slide show.
10. Press any key (other than the spacebar or arrow keys) on your keyboard to end the slide show.
•
You can navigate the slide show while it’s playing by pressing the right and left arrow keys on your key board. To pause the slide show, press the spacebar. Press it again to resume the slide show. While you’re nav igating the slide show with the keyboard, icons appear in the lower-right corner of the screen to assist you. You can also play a slide show right from the main iPhotos window by pressing the small Play button— shaped like a triangle pointing to the right—on the left side of the window. If you have a .Mac account, you can save your slide show to your iDisk and share it with other Mac OS X (10.2 or higher) users on the Internet. To do so, first select the photos (or album) you want to include in your .Mac slide show. Click the .Mac Slides button at the bottom of the window, and then click Publish. After the upload is complete, click the Announce Slideshow button to share access with your friends. You can only use a single track of music with each slide show. However, you can export your slide show to iMovie, where you can add multiple sound tracks. Select the album you want to use and choose File ➪ Export. Click the QuickTime tab, adjust the settings as needed, and click the Export button. Next, open iMovie, start a new project, choose File ➪ Import and locate the .mov file you just saved.
430
Task
201
notes
•
•
This task accomplishes half of what needs to happen in order to display your photos on the Web. The other half involves uploading the files to a Web server so other people can access them. The next few notes and tips explain this further. If you have a .Mac account, the process to upload your photos to the Web is a bit different from that listed in this task. Instead of export ing your photos, select up to 48 photos to publish online and click the HomePage button at the bottom of the Organize pane. Choose a theme, reorder the photos as needed, and specify a layout. Specify the location to save the album to (if you have more than one HomePage site on your .Mac account), and click the Publish button. When the process is completed, click the View Page Now button or record the address specified to visit at a later time.
caution
•
Remember that files uploaded to the Web should not contain any spaces or punctuation in their filenames. In addition, they must have a three- or four-letter extension (such as .JPG for photos or .HTML for Web pages).
Part 15
Creating a Web Page of Photos
I
f you have family and friends who live far away, why not publish your favorite photos online for them to see? iPhoto makes it easy to get started, and if you have a .Mac account, Apple will even give you your own Web site on their servers. This task shows how to create a Web page of photos. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Select the photos or album you want to include on your Web page. 3. Choose File ➪ Export, as shown in Figure 201-1, and click the Web Page tab.
Figure 201-1: Choosing File ➪ Export.
4. Name your Web page, and specify how many columns and rows of photos you want per page. 5. Click the Color button to assign a background color. Click the Text Color button to assign a text color. 6. Click the Image button to add a photo to the background of your
Web page. Locate the file and click “Set” to select the image.
7. Edit the maximum pixel width and height for the thumbnail versions of your photos, as well as the dimensions for the full-size versions. 8. Click Export (see Figure 201-2), and specify where to save your Web page before clicking OK. 9. Open Safari or your preferred Web browser. 10. Choose File ➪ Open File (as shown in Figure 201-3), and locate the HTML file you just exported from iPhoto to preview it in the browser, as shown in Figure 201-4.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto
431
Task
201
tips
•
Figure 201-2: Exporting a Web page of photos.
•
If you publish your photos to your HomePage using your .Mac account, you can protect the page so visitors need a password to view it. Visit www.mac.com and click the HomePage button to begin the task. Click “Protect this site” and assign a password before sharing that password with your friends and family. If you don’t have a .Mac account, but you do have Web space available through another Internet service provider (ISP), you can upload the page(s) you exported from iPhoto to that server with the help of some File Transfer Protocol (FTP) software. Contact your ISP to determine the exact steps you need to take to make your pages visible to others.
Figure 201-3: Opening the file in a Web browser.
cross-reference
•
Figure 201-4: Viewing the file in a Web browser.
To learn how to create a .Mac account, see Task 86, “Creating a .Mac Account.”
432
Task
202
notes
• •
•
You must have version 10.2 of higher of Mac OS X to burn DVDs. Depending on how many photos you’re archiving, it may take a while to burn the disc. If you need to cancel the process, press the Stop button in the progress window. There are two basic types of CD-ROM and DVD-ROM discs you can use to burn playlists: those ending with an R (which stands for “writable”) and those end ing with an RW (which stands for “rewritable”).
cautions
•
•
After burning a CD-R or DVD-R disc, you will not be able to add anything to it. If you cancel the process while writing to either of these two types of discs, you will likely render the disc unusable. While CD-RW and DVD-RW discs are nice because you can use them to burn again, you will find that they are not as compatible with CD and DVD players as the other types of discs.
Part 15
Archiving Photos to CD
S
toring all your photos in iPhoto can be great for a while, until you have so many that you run out of space on your computer. When that happens, consider archiving some of the photos to CD to free up some of that space on your computer. You can also use the steps outlined in this task to create CDs of photos to share with family and friends. 1. Open iPhoto. 2. Select the items you want to archive to a disc (an entire photo library,
one or more photo albums, or specific photos).
3. Click the Organize button. 4. Click the Burn button near the bottom of the window. 5. Place a writable CD into your disc drive (a CD-RW, a blank CD-R,
or a blank DVD-R). Click OK.
6. Specify a disc name in the information panel on the left side of
iPhoto’s main window. Add comments as necessary.
7. Click the Burn button again, as shown in Figure 202-1.
Figure 202-1: Clicking the Burn button.
Managing Still Pictures with iPhoto 8. Click the Burn button in the Burn Disc window to actually start writing to the disc, as shown in Figure 202-2.
433
Task
202
tips
•
Figure 202-2: Beginning the burn process.
9. Eject the disc when finished.
•
10. Insert the disc whenever you want to view the photos again. They will be visible in iPhoto if you click on the CD’s icon in the library listing on the left side of the screen, as shown in Figure 202-3.
If you archive photos to CD using the Burn features of iPhoto and have trouble viewing those photos on a Windows-based PC, try first exporting them to a folder on your hard drive and then burning them from within the Mac OS (as opposed to iPhoto). This seems to work better in some cases when the disc is shared with nonMacintosh computers. After you insert a blank disk into your disk drive, its icon should appear in the library listing on the left side of iPhoto’s window. The green area of the icon indi cates how much space the selected photos will use on the disk.
cross-reference
•
Figure 202-3: Viewing archived photos.
To export photos before burning them, refer to Task 196, “Exporting Photos,” for details.
Part 16: Video Editing with iMovie Task 203: Capturing a Digital Photograph from a Digital Video in iMovie Task 204: Importing Existing Content into iMovie Task 205: Splitting Video Clips Task 206: Adding a Transition or Fade Task 207: Trimming and Cropping a Video Clip Task 208: Adding Still Photos to a Movie Task 209: Adding Motion to a Photo Task 210: Adding Audio to a Movie Task 211: Adding Narration Task 212: Saving a Video to View on Your Computer Task 213: Saving a Video to a DVD
436
Task
203
Part 16
Capturing a Digital Photograph from a Digital Video in iMovie
Y notes
• •
The default duration for still frames in iMovie is 5 sec onds. Their duration can be changed in the Show Info window (File ➪ Show Info). Still frames are numbered sequentially according to the first image created, even after you have renamed previous images. For example, the first still frame you create is auto matically labeled Still 01. After you have renamed this still, the next frame that is created is named Still 02, and so on.
ou can capture a single frame in iMovie to use as a photo in your project, or to export for use in another application. For example, you may have shot video that has images you would like to use as backgrounds for a DVD menu or to send in an email to friends and family. This task demonstrates how to capture a single frame from your motion video to use as a digital photograph. 1. Open iMovie by clicking its application icon, which is located in the dock or in the Applications folder on your hard drive. 2. Import a video clip by connecting a camera to your computer or by importing files that already exist on your hard drive, as described in Task 204, “Importing Existing Content into iMovie.” 3. Select a video clip in the Clips pane by clicking it once, as shown in Figure 203-1. You may also choose a clip in the clip viewer or timeline viewer.
Figure 203-1: Select a clip in the Clips pane.
Video Editing with iMovie 4. Move the playhead by dragging it to a frame in your movie that you want to capture and convert into a still frame.
437
Task
5. Choose Edit ➪ Create Still Frame to place the current frame into the Clips pane (see Figure 203-2). Once a still image is added to the Clips pane, it is available to be used as media in your iMovie projects.
203
tips
•
Figure 203-2: The Create Still Frame option in the Edit menu.
•
6. Click the bottom portion of the new still image’s thumbnail in the Clips pane, and highlight the text labeled Still 01. 7. Type a new name for the still image that suits your project.
You can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to navi gate through a clip one frame at a time. This makes it easier to locate the best frame when creating a new still frame image. Still images can be saved on a hard drive as either JPEG or PICT files by choos ing File ➪ Save Frame As and selecting a name, location, and format for the file before clicking Save.
8. Choose File ➪ Show Info to display information about your image, as shown in Figure 203-3.
Figure 203-3: The Show Info window for a clip.
9. Type a new duration for your still image in the Duration box of the Show Info window and click set.
cross-reference
•
Importing video clips is discussed in Task 204, “Importing Existing Content into iMovie.”
438
Task
204
notes
• • • •
•
Most users simply import content into the Clips pane, where clips can be easily previewed and added to a movie. The clip viewer and timeline viewer are considered the Movie timeline.
Part 16
Importing Existing Content into iMovie
A
lthough the majority of iMovie projects are captured directly from a camera, it is possible to import video content that is already on your hard drive. For example, video may have been captured and edited for a previous project, or a piece of video may exist as a self-contained QuickTime file. This task shows how to import existing content from your hard drive into the iMovie application, without the need for a camera or deck. 1. Choose iMovie ➪ Preferences. 2. Select Clips Pane or Movie Timeline in the “New clips go to” sec tion of the Preferences window (see Figure 204-1), which determines
where the new content should be imported to.
You can import a video or audio clip from another iMovie project by locating it in the Media folder of that particular iMovie project. Once a clip is imported into iMovie, it appears automatically in the Clips pane or Movie timeline (timeline viewer and clip viewer) for the project, depending on your settings in the Preferences window. The spacebar can be used to play and stop a movie.
Figure 204-1: The iMovie Preferences window.
3. Close the Preferences window. 4. Choose File ➪ Import to begin importing a clip into iMovie.
Video Editing with iMovie 5. Select a video clip, audio file, or still image on your hard drive using the file browser windows, as shown in Figure 204-2.
439
Task
204
tip
•
Figure 204-2: Choose a file to import from your hard drive.
6. Click Open to bring the clip into iMovie. The new clip is added to the Clips pane (as shown in Figure 204-3) or Movie timeline, depending on your Preferences setting.
If you do not know the name of a clip that you want to import from another iMovie project, you can open the project, select the clip, and choose File ➪ Show Info to view its name.
Figure 204-3: Imported clips are added to the Clips pane or Movie timeline.
7. Select the clip in the Clips pane or Movie timeline. 8. Press the Play button to preview your clip.
cross-reference
•
Audio files can also be imported as described in Task 210 “Adding Audio to a Movie.”
440
Task
205
notes
• • •
The Split command is not available in the Edit menu until you have selected a video or audio clip in the timeline viewer or clip viewer. In addition to splitting video clips, you can also choose to split only the audio clip. Splitting clips in iMovie is similar to using the razor blade tool in Final Cut Pro or other advanced editing software.
Part 16
Splitting Video Clips
W
hile editing a project in iMovie, there are times when it is necessary to split a video clip. Splitting a video clip creates two separate parts that can be easily rearranged and added to the timeline. A single video or audio clip can be split into two clips to move part of a clip to a new location in a movie. This is also a useful technique if part of a clip must be deleted, or if another clip or graphic must be inserted between portions of an existing clip. This task illustrates how to take an existing clip and split it into two halves that can be used individually in a project. 1. Import a video clip by connecting a camera to your computer or by importing files that already exist on your hard drive. 2. Select a video clip in the Clips pane by clicking it once, or choose a clip in the clip viewer or timeline viewer. 3. Move the playhead by dragging it to the frame in your movie where you want a split to occur, as shown in Figure 205-1.
Figure 205-1: Position the playhead in a video clip to select a location for a split.
Video Editing with iMovie 4. Choose Edit ➪ Split Video Clip at Playhead, as shown in Figure 205-2. You video clip is now split into two parts based on the location of the playhead.
441
Task
205
tips
•
Figure 205-2: The Split Video Clip at Playhead option in the Edit menu.
5. Click the timeline viewer button to open the timeline viewer. The following steps are only used to split an audio clip. 6. Position the playhead on an area of an audio clip that you want to split. 7. Choose Edit ➪ Split Selected Audio Clip at Playhead, as shown in Figure 205-3.
• • • •
Figure 205-3: The Split Selected Audio Clip at Playhead option in the Edit menu.
Once a clip is split in the clip viewer, the new clip can be dragged back to the Clips pane for future use. If you change your mind after splitting a clip, choose Edit ➪ Redo to go back and undo the action. A clip can be split multiple times to create several smaller clips. Clip are automatically split when a portion is removed from the middle by setting in and out points and choosing Edit ➪ Cut. If you want to split the audio for a Digital Video (DV) clip with the audio embedded, place the video clip in the timeline viewer and choose Advanced ➪ Extract Audio to put the audio for that clip on a separate track.
cross-reference
•
Importing video clips is discussed in Task 204, “Importing Existing Content into iMovie.”
442
Task
206
notes
• •
•
•
When using the Speed slider for a transition, a larger number of frames will create a slower transition, while fewer frames makes the transition quicker. A warning window appears if there are not enough video frames around the playhead to preview the transition. In this case, you would need to use a longer clip or decrease the speed of the transition.
Part 16
Adding a Transition or Fade
T
ransitions provide a way to move smoothly from one clip to the next. By blending the end of one clip with the beginning of the next clip, you can achieve pleasing results and eliminate the roughness of cutting from one clip to the next. In addition, transitions can be used to add new meaning for a series of clips. Using a dissolve or wipe can give the impression of time passing or scenes changing. They can also add excitement and fun to an otherwise boring presentation. This task shows how to add a transition or fade to your iMovie. 1. After you have added clips to the clip viewer or timeline viewer, click
the Transitions button (abbreviated as “Trans”) in the lower-right
portion of the iMovie interface to open the Transitions pane.
2. Choose a transition style in the Transitions pane, as shown in
Figure 206-1.
As the Speed slider is moved, the exact number of frames used for the tran sition is displayed in the lower-right corner of the small preview window, which is found in the upper-right corner of the Transitions pane. If you are using the Push transition, you can use the arrow buttons at the top of the Transitions pane to select the direction you want the clips to move. These buttons are grayed out at all other times, since they do not pertain to most transitions.
Figure 206-1: The Transitions pane.
Video Editing with iMovie 3. Watch the transition you have chosen in the Preview monitor in the top-right corner of the Transitions pane (see Figure 206-2), or press the Preview button to see how it looks in the iMovie monitor.
443
Task
206
tips Figure 206-2: The Preview monitor shows how a transition will look when added
•
to a movie. 4. Set the duration for the transition with the Speed slider (see Figure 206-3), which changes the number of frames used to accomplish the transition.
• Figure 206-3: The Speed slider in the Transitions pane adjusts the duration of a
transition. 5. Drag the transition you have modified from the list in the Transitions pane to a location in the clip viewer. 6. Select the transition icon in the clip viewer. 7. Click the Play button in the main playback controls to view the
transition.
To edit an existing transition (until you have saved your iMovie project or emptied the Trash), select the transi tion icon in the clip viewer, click the Transitions button, make the modifications that are required, and click Update. A video clip can be moved forward in the timeline viewer to create black frames at the beginning of a movie. You can do this by clicking the clip and hold ing down the Control and Shift keys while pressing the right-arrow key, which moves the clip forward 10 frames.
8. Choose Edit ➪ Select None. 9. Move the playhead to the beginning of the movie. 10. Press the Play button once again to preview the entire movie with transitions, as shown in Figure 206-4.
Figure 206-4: iMovie project with transitions added to clips in the clip viewer.
cross-reference
•
Importing video clips is discussed in Task 204, “Importing Existing Content into iMovie.”
444
Task
207
notes
•
• • •
Crop markers for video are located in the area below the scrubber bar, while audio crop markers are located at the ends of audio clips in the timeline viewer. When you select a portion of a clip or timeline with the crop markers, the selected portion appears yellow in the scrubber bar beneath the iMovie monitor.
Part 16
Trimming and Cropping a Video Clip
A
part from adding clips together on a timeline, the next-best feature of nonlinear editing software such as iMovie is the ability to trim clips. Trimming clips is the process of removing, or deleting, unwanted frames. Usually, these frames occur at the beginning or end of a clip, although they can occur anywhere within a clip. The process of selecting a portion of video to keep (by removing the ends) is known as cropping. This task shows how iMovie simplifies the trimming and cropping of individual clips. 1. Select a clip to edit in the Clips pane. 2. Drag the second crop marker to the last frame you want to remove.
Everything between the first marker and this marker will be
removed, (or trimmed) from the beginning of the clip, as shown
in Figure 207-1.
The left and right arrow keys can also be used to move audio crop markers one frame at a time when they are selected in the timeline viewer. Crop markers can be used to select several clips at a time.
Figure 207-1: Markers are in place to trim the beginning of a clip.
3. Click the crop marker, and use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move it frame by frame until it is in the exact position. 4. Choose Edit ➪ Cut to trim those frames between the markers, as shown in Figure 207-2.
Figure 207-2: The Cut option in the Edit menu.
Video Editing with iMovie 5. To crop the clip, drag the second crop marker (the triangular markers underneath the scrubber bar) to the last frame of the clip that you want to keep. Everything to the left of this marker will be deleted.
445
Task
207
6. Click the crop marker, and use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move it frame by frame until it is in the exact position. 7. Drag the first crop marker to the first frame of the clip that you want to keep. Everything to the right of this marker will be deleted. 8. Click the crop marker, and use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move it frame by frame until it is in the exact position, as shown in Figure 207-3.
tips
•
• •
Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to accurately select the right frames where you want to place the crop markers. Holding down the Shift key on the keyboard while pressing an arrow key moves the marker 10 frames at a time, to quickly navigate through a clip. To trim an audio clip, drag the beginning and end crop markers, at the ends of a clip in the timeline viewer, to select the portion of audio you want to keep. Use the Zoom slider at the bottom of the timeline viewer to get a closer view of the crop markers in your audio clips.
Figure 207-3: Both crop markers are in position to crop a clip.
9. Choose Edit ➪ Crop to remove the portions of the clip outside of the crop markers, as shown in Figure 207-4.
cross-reference
•
Figure 207-4: The Crop option in the Edit menu.
10. Press the Play button to preview the clip and to make certain that you trimmed the clip correctly.
Splitting video clips is discussed in Task 205, “Splitting Video Clips.”
446
Task
208
notes
• •
An iPhoto library with at least one picture must already be created in order to view and select photos in iMovie’s Photos pane.
Part 16
Adding Still Photos to a Movie
P
hotographs from an iPhoto library can be used in a movie as title cards (to introduce a portion of your video) or to create a slide show presentation, by placing a series of photos together in the clip viewer or movie timeline. Photos can also be cropped before adding them to a project. This task describes how to add still photos to iMovie. 1. Click the Photos button to activate the Photos pane, as shown in
Figure 208-1.
Your Start and Finish points for the Ken Burns effect are set as the same frame when you hold down the Option key while clicking the Finish button. This is useful for cropping and cre ating still images that do not move. However, you can also use the zoom and duration controls without selecting this effect.
Figure 208-1: The Photos pane.
Video Editing with iMovie 2. Choose an album you have already created in iPhoto from the popup menu (see Figure 208-2).
447
Task
208
tips
•
Figure 208-2: Your photo albums are available from iPhoto.
3. Select a photo. 4. Use the Zoom controls, and move the photo in the Preview monitor by clicking and dragging it, to select a portion of the image that you want to use, as shown in Figure 208-3.
•
To avoid seeing a black border around still images, they must be in the 4:3 aspect ratio or landscape mode (640 x 480) before they are imported into iMovie, unless you zoom and crop them in the application. After a photo has been added to the clip viewer or timeline viewer, you can drag it back to the Clips pane for use at another point in your project.
Figure 208-3: Zoom and Duration controls below the Preview monitor.
5. Set the Duration value for your clip by dragging the Duration slider (see Figure 208-3). 6. Click the Apply button to add the photo to your movie, or drag the photo from the library into the clip viewer or timeline viewer.
cross-reference
•
Photographs will automati cally have a pan and zoom effect applied to them if the Ken Burns Effect checkbox is selected, which adds motion to pho tographs (see Task 209 “Adding Motion to a Photo”). If you don’t want this effect applied to your image, deselect the checkbox before you add a pho tograph to your movie.
448
Task
209
notes
• •
Pan and zoom effects only work on images that are in the JPEG or TIFF formats.
Part 16
Adding Motion to a Photo
T
he Ken Burns Effect in iMovie (named after the highly regarded documentary film maker who developed the technique) provides the ability to animate a still photo by panning and zooming around the image. An example of the Ken Burns Effect would be zooming into a family portrait while panning across the faces in the image. This task describes how to achieve this effect. 1. Click the Photos button to activate the Photos pane, as shown in Figure 209-1.
If the controls for the Ken Burns Effect are not avail able, you should first make certain that the checkbox is selected for the effect.
Figure 209-1: The Photos pane.
2. Select an iPhoto library from the drop-down list, and choose a photo. 3. Make sure the Ken Burns Effect checkbox is selected (see Figure 209-2), and click the Start button.
Figure 209-2: The Ken Burns Effect checkbox with the Start and Finish buttons.
Video Editing with iMovie 4. Use the zoom controls, and pan the image in the Preview monitor by grabbing it (a hand should appear in place of the regular mouse arrow) and dragging to select a starting point for the effect, as shown in Figure 209-3.
449
Task
209
tips
•
Figure 209-3: Pan (represented by the hand) and Zoom controls.
5. Click the Finish button.
•
6. Use the zoom controls to select an end point for the effect and use the pan controls, by dragging the photo, to select a location for the end of the pan. 7. Adjust the Duration slider to modify the timing of the effect, as shown in Figure 209-4.
• •
Figure 209-4: The Duration slider.
8. Click the Preview button to view the effect you have created and
make any adjustments as necessary.
•
9. Click Apply to add the photo to a movie, where it appears at the end of the clip viewer or timeline viewer. 10. Drag the photo to a new location in the timeline or add it to the Clips pane for future use.
Hold down the Shift key while dragging a photo in the Preview monitor to move your photos in a straight line while setting up a pan. You can change an effect you have created by select ing the photo, using the pan and zoom controls to adjust the picture, and clicking the Update button. Use larger photos to improve the results of the pan and zoom effect. Choose a duration value for your pan and zoom effects that is long enough to smoothly animate your image. Try to create interesting motion between clips that both use pan and zoom motions. For example, be aware of the direction you are zooming when placing clips next to each other in a movie. If the first clip is zooming out, the next clip may look strange if it is also zooming out, unless that is the effect you are trying to achieve.
cross-reference
•
Importing video clips is dis cussed in Task 204, “Importing Existing Content into iMovie.”
450
Task
210
notes
• • •
If you want to get a more precise view of audio mark ers in the timeline viewer, use the Zoom slider to make the timeline bigger.
Part 16
Adding Audio to a Movie
A
udio is an important element of any movie and can significantly improve a dull or lifeless project. If your project requires music, you can import songs from a CD or directly from iTunes using the Audio pane in iMovie. There are also several sound effects that you can use, including new effects created by Skywalker Sound, the company responsible for movies like Star Wars and Jurassic Park (to name a couple). This task describes how to add audio to a movie. 1. Activate the timeline viewer by clicking its mode button in the lowerleft corner of the iMovie interface, as shown in Figure 210-1.
To delete a volume level marker in a clip in the timeline viewer, select the marker and click Delete. Individual audio tracks can be turned on and off to preview portions of a movie’s audio by uncheck ing one of the boxes in the lower-right corner of the timeline viewer.
Figure 210-1: Timeline viewer button and tracks.
2. Move the playhead to the location where you want your music track or sound effect to begin playing. 3. Click the Audio button to open the Audio pane, as shown in Figure 210-2.
Figure 210-2: The Audio pane.
Video Editing with iMovie 4. Choose iTunes library from the pop-up menu. You can also choose CD from the pop-up menu (if you have already inserted a CD into your CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive) or iMovie Sound Effects (see Figure 210-3) for interesting background effects.
451
Task
210
tips
•
• Figure 210-3: The iMovie Sound Effects list.
5. Select a song or sound effect from the list in the Audio pane. 6. Click the Play button to test preview the track.
•
7. Drag the song or sound effect from the list in the Audio pane, and place it in one of the audio tracks at the bottom of the timeline viewer, as shown in Figure 210-4.
•
Figure 210-4: Audio tracks in the timeline viewer.
To search for a particular song or artist in your iTunes library, type a keyword into the Find field at the bottom of the Audio pane. Click the button to the right of the field when you are finished, or simply wait as iMovie automatically searches the available titles. To precisely position a song or sound effect at the playhead location, click the Place at Playhead button in the Audio pane. You can lock an audio track to a particular portion of your video track by choos ing Advanced ➪ Lock Audio Clip at Playhead. This causes the audio track to move with the video, wher ever you move it in a movie. Audio levels can be adjusted by selecting the “Edit Volume” checkbox at the bottom of the timeline viewer and dragging a point on the volume level bars that appear on each clip up or down to make the audio louder or softer. You can also use the Volume Level slider at the bottom of the timeline viewer to adjust levels once a marker is in place.
cross-reference
•
Using the iTunes application is discussed in Task 159, “Starting iTunes.”
452
Task
211
notes
•
•
•
If the input meter is yellow, you are speaking loud enough into the microphone and the audio you record should be audible. If you are not speaking loudly enough, the input meters do not reg ister any volume levels or only display a few bars.
Part 16
Adding Narration
B
y attaching a microphone to your computer (or using the built-in microphone, if your computer is equipped with one), you can record your voice and add it to a movie for narration. This feature is useful for professional presentations and training videos, as well as home movies and travelogues. This task shows you how to add narration to your iMovies. 1. Assemble a movie in the clip viewer or timeline viewer by adding
clips from the Clips pane.
2. Position the playhead at the beginning of your movie by dragging it
or pressing the Home key.
3. Click the Audio button to open the Audio pane, as shown in
Figure 211-1.
The maximum amount of time you can record for when using a microphone is 10 minutes. However, you can stop the recording and start again to add more narration. The audio clip you recorded can be moved around in the timeline viewer, although it is not visible in the clip viewer. You can also move the clip to a different audio track, depending on your arrangement of clips.
Figure 211-1: The Audio pane.
4. Click the Record button, which is located next to the Microphone input meter (see Figure 211-2) in the Audio pane. The timeline viewer opens automatically and displays the new audio track you are recording.
Figure 211-2: The Microphone input meter and Record button.
caution
•
If the input meter turns red, you are speaking too loudly into the microphone and should reduce your volume level to avoid capturing audio that cracks and is distorted.
Video Editing with iMovie 5. Speak loudly and clearly into the microphone while watching your video and monitoring the input meters.
453
Task
6. Click the Record button once more to stop recording.
211
7. Select the Voice 01 audio clip in the timeline viewer, as shown in Figure 211-3.
tips
•
Figure 211-3: The new audio narration clip in the timeline viewer.
8. Choose File ➪ Show Info, and type a name for the audio file you just created in the Clip Info window, as shown in Figure 211-4.
•
You can paste narration or other audio clips over each other in the timeline viewer, while retaining the original audio. Simply slide the audio clips over each other to reposition a clip without losing the original audio. In order for this to work prop erly, make sure that the “Extract audio in paste over” option is selected in the iMovie Preferences window (iMovie ➪ Preferences). Pressing the Home key moves the playhead to the beginning of the movie, while pressing the End key moves it to the end.
Figure 211-4: The Clip Info window.
9. If your narration is not in the exact location where you want it to occur, grab the audio clip in the timeline viewer and move it around until it is in the correct location.
cross-reference
•
Using a microphone for speech recognition is discussed in Task 231, “Setting How Your System Listens.”
454
Task
212
Part 16
Saving a Video to View on Your Computer
W notes
•
•
MPEG-4 video is another excellent choice for produc ing good results for video playback on a computer, with relatively small file sizes. To select this setting, choose Movie to MPEG-4 from the Export pop-up menu in the “Save exported file as” dialog. Full Quality DV is the only format setting that does not reduce the quality of your finished video. This is the recommended setting if you plan on recompressing your video for use on a DVD or other format at a later time.
hen you have finished creating a project in iMovie, it is often nice to have a copy of the completed video that can be viewed on your computer at high quality, while taking up less space than uncompressed DV (or Digital Video, the format in use by most current, consumer camcorders). Apart from using MPEG2, which is the format utilized by DVDs, one of the best formats for viewing on a computer or CD-ROM is the Sorenson Video codec. You can select this codec, or any other compression format available in QuickTime (such as MPEG-4) by following the steps in this task. 1. Create a movie by adding clips from the Clips pane to the clip viewer
or the timeline viewer.
2. Choose File ➪ Export. 3. Choose To QuickTime from the list of options that appears in the
Export pop-up menu of the “iMovie: Export” window, as shown in
Figure 212-1.
Figure 212-1: The iMovie: Export window.
4. Choose Expert Settings from the Formats pop-up menu, and click the Export button.
caution
•
Exporting a movie or clip using expert settings can result in it taking a long time for iMovie to render the file. Sorenson Video can take an especially long time to render, although it produces nice results. In fact, whenever you export a file with iMovie, you can expect it to take a long time to finish rendering.
5. Type a name for your movie in the “Save exported file as” dialog (see Figure 212-2), and select a location to place the file on your hard drive.
Figure 212-2: The “Save exported file as” dialog.
Video Editing with iMovie 6. Choose “Movie to QuickTime Movie” from the Export pop-up menu.
455
Task
7. Click the Options button to activate the Movie Settings window, as shown in Figure 212-3.
212
tips
•
Figure 212-3: The Movie Settings window.
•
8. Click the Settings button in the Movie Settings window. 9. Select Sorenson Video from the drop-down list at the top of the Compression Settings window (see Figure 212-4), and set the Quality to High or Best, depending on the amount of space you want the video to occupy on your hard drive.
•
To quickly and simply export a video for viewing on your computer without using expert settings, choose CD-ROM or Full Quality DV from the list of Formats in the iMovie: Export window. Reducing the frames per second in the Motion sec tion of the Compression Settings window signifi cantly lowers the file size for your video, although it can seriously affect its quality. Typically, you would not want to use a frame rate lower than 15. Setting a low key frame number in the Compression Settings window increases the quality of the video, while also creating larger file sizes.
Figure 212-4: The Compression Settings window.
10. Click OK in the Compression Settings window and the Movie Settings window before finally clicking Save to export the video.
cross-reference
•
Saving video to a DVD is discussed in Task 213, “Saving a Video to DVD.”
456
Task
213
notes
•
• • • •
At one time, it was neces sary to choose File ➪ Export and select To iDVD from the Export pop-up menu in the “iMovie: Export” window. With the latest version of iMovie and iDVD, you can simply use the functions in the iDVD pane as described in this task. Chapter markers appear as diamond shapes above the timeline viewer. DVDs created with iDVD use DVD-R media, which can be played on most settop DVD players, and soft ware such as Apple’s DVD Player.
Part 16
Saving a Video to a DVD
I
f you are using a Mac that is equipped with Apple’s SuperDrive and a copy of iDVD, you can export your video to DVD using the “Create iDVD Project” command. iMovie includes several features in the iDVD pane that make creating DVDs from an iMovie project a simple process. This includes the creation of chapter markers that make navigating a disc much easier. This task shows how to save a video to a DVD. 1. Create a movie by adding clips from the Clips pane to the clip viewer
or the timeline viewer.
2. Activate the timeline viewer by pressing the Timeline Viewer Mode
button (which is shaped like a clock) in the lower-left corner of the
iMovie interface.
3. Select a clip in the timeline viewer. 4. Move the playhead to a point in the clip where you want to place a
chapter marker, which makes navigating a disc much easier and
quicker.
5. Click the iDVD button to open the iDVD pane, as shown in
Figure 213-1.
Visit the iDVD Web site at www.apple.com/ idvd for more informa tion about the application. iDVD converts your video to the high-quality MPEG-2 format, which is used by DVDs.
caution
•
Not all DVD players can play DVD-R media or other recordable discs. Check the Apple Web site at www. apple.com/dvd/ compatibility for information about player models that are currently supported.
Figure 213-1: The iDVD pane.
6. Click the Add Chapter button at the bottom of the iDVD pane, as shown in Figure 213-2.
Figure 213-2: The Add Chapter button.
Video Editing with iMovie
457
7. Continue moving the playhead and adding markers as needed by clicking the Add Chapter button, as shown in Figure 213-3.
Task
213
tips
•
• Figure 213-3: The timeline viewer with chapter markers in place.
If you are using an older version of iDVD, you may need to export your iMovie project to QuickTime and manually import the file into iDVD. To accomplish this, choose File ➪ Export, select To QuickTime from the Export pop-up menu and Full Quality DV from the Formats pop-up menu, save the movie, and import the file into iDVD. You can remove a chapter marker by selecting it in the timeline viewer and press ing the Remove Chapter button at the bottom of the iDVD pane.
8. Click the “Create iDVD Project” button. iDVD opens, and the movie you created appears as a project in the application, as shown in Figure 213-4.
cross-reference
•
Figure 213-4: The iDVD pane with chapter markers and Create iDVD Project button.
Setting CD-ROM and DVD preferences is discussed in Task 24, “Setting CD and DVD Preferences.”
Part 17: Terminal Tricks Task 214: Starting Terminal Task 215: Setting Terminal Preferences Task 216: Customizing Terminal Appearances Task 217: Customizing Terminal Settings Task 218: Customizing More Terminal Settings Task 219: Customizing Color and Window Settings for Terminal Task 220: Customizing Terminal Keyboard Shortcuts Task 221: Saving Custom Terminal Settings Task 222: Changing the Terminal Shell Task 223: Connecting to an FTP Server through Terminal Task 224: Connecting to an SSH Server through Terminal Task 225: Adding Services and Servers Task 226: Turning on Sharing Services Task 227: Using Terminal to Start an Application
460
Task
214
notes
• •
• • •
The first line of the Terminal window in Figure 214-2 tells you the last time you logged into OS X. The characters between the “~” and the “$” are the first eight characters of your user account’s short name on the OS X system, and you cannot change this without logging out of your account and logging in as another user account on the system.
Part 17
Starting Terminal
O
S X is built on Darwin, a version of the Berkeley Software Distribution (BSD) family of Unix operating systems. Unlike previous versions of Macintosh operating systems, OS X has access to the command line of the operating system, allowing you to do many things without using the desktop window system. This task shows how to start the Terminal application, and some of the configurations you can do for Terminal. 1. Double-click the hard disk icon. The Finder window shows the top
level of the system.
2. Double-click the Applications folder to open the Applications folder. 3. Double-click the Utilities folder to open the Utilities window, as
shown in Figure 214-1.
The Terminal application derives its name from com puters consisting of only a monitor and keyboard that are hooked into mainframe computers. The tilde (~) character is the current directory. This is Unix shorthand for your home directory. Commands you type in Terminal are case-sensitive.
Figure 214-1: The Terminal icon in the Utilities folder.
4. Double-click the Terminal application icon. The Terminal icon appears in the Dock and a new blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 214-2.
Figure 214-2: A new Terminal window.
5. To change the name of the OS X system you are using, click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System Preferences window.
Terminal Tricks 6. In the Internet & Network row of the System Preferences window, click the Sharing icon to display the screen shown in Figure 214-3.
461
Task
214
tips
• •
When typing commands in the Terminal, you can use your Tab key to automati cally find the unique thing you are in the process of typing. To learn more about the help system within Terminal called the man pages, simply type man at the command line.
Figure 214-3: The Sharing pane of the System Preferences window.
7. Click the Computer Name field to select it, and enter a new name if you want. 8. Press Ô-Q to quit System Preferences and save your changes. 9. Type exit at the command line in the Terminal window, and press the Return key. The Terminal window responds with a message stating that the logout and process are completed, as shown in Figure 214-4.
cross-references
•
Figure 214-4: The Terminal window after exiting the Terminal application.
10. Press Ô-Q to quit the Terminal application. 11. Restart the Terminal application from the menu bar by choosing Apple ➪ Recent Items ➪ Terminal. The restarted Terminal window shows the new computer name in the prompt.
• •
The short name for a user account is discussed in Task 46, “Adding a User Account.” Customize the Terminal’s appearance by following the steps in Task 216, “Customizing Terminal Appearances.” If you use the Terminal application often, you can add its icon to the Dock, as shown in Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock.”
462
Task
215
notes
• •
The keyboard shortcut to show the Terminal Preferences window is Ô-,.
Part 17
Setting Terminal Preferences
I
n most OS X applications, customizing settings for that application are chosen through the Preferences. In the Terminal, the Preferences do control some of the Terminal’s behavior, but most of the appearance of the Terminal is controlled in the Terminal Inspector (which is discussed in Task 216). This task shows how to set terminal types in the Terminal Preferences window. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 215-1.
The default shell in OS X 10.3 is bash. A shell is what accepts the com mands to be processed in Terminal. Different shells can change how you inter face with Terminal.
Figure 215-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the Application menu, choose Terminal ➪ Preferences to display the Terminal Preferences window, as shown in Figure 215-2.
Figure 215-2: The Terminal Preferences window.
Terminal Tricks
463
3. Use the radio button pair to choose whether to create a new Terminal window with the default system settings for your user account or use a custom setting.
Task
215
4. If you choose to start a Terminal window with a custom command, enter the complete path in the field below the second radio button. 5. The default terminal type is an X terminal version that supports color in the text. If you need a terminal type such as ANSI or VT100, choose the terminal type from the pop-up menu shown in Figure 215-3.
tips
• •
Figure 215-3: Choosing a different terminal type in the Terminal Preferences window.
6. Close the Terminal Preferences window by clicking the small red Close button in the upper-left corner of the Terminal Preferences title bar.
• •
A complete path starts with a / at the beginning. The example shown in Figure 215-2, /bin/bash, is a complete path. If you encounter difficulties connecting to a system, ask the system or network administrator of that sys tem if you should use a dif ferent Terminal type. The default preferences file is called com.app. Terminal.plist and is located in your Home folder. To return to the default set tings, move the preferences file out of your Home folder. The next time you start Terminal, the default settings will be restored.
cross-references
• •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” For more information on customizing the Terminal see Task 216, “Customizing Terminal Appearances,” and Task 217, “Customizing Terminal Settings.”
464
Task
216
notes
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut to change the title of the cur rent Terminal window is Shift-Ô- T.
Part 17
Customizing Terminal Appearances
I
n most OS X applications, customization settings for that application are chosen through the Preferences. In the Terminal, the Preferences do control some of the Terminal’s behavior, but most of the appearance of the Terminal is controlled in the Terminal Inspector. This task shows how to set the Terminal window title and to use the split-pane view of the Terminal. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 216-1.
When you select the “Use Settings as Defaults” option, a .term file is created. This file stores the size, location, and visible or invisible status of all win dows that were open when the file was created. The command “ls –al” lists all the files in the current directory with the details for each.
Figure 216-1: A new Terminal window.
2. You can change the name of the Terminal window. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Set Title to display the Terminal Inspector window shown in Figure 216-2.
Figure 216-2: The Terminal Inspector window with the Window pane.
Terminal Tricks 3. The default name of the Terminal window, “Terminal,” is selected in the Title field. Type a new name for the active Terminal window.
465
Task
4. Click the small red Close button in the upper-left corner of the Terminal Inspector title bar to close the window and change the name of the active Terminal window. 5. The Terminal can split the window and show the top and bottom, with a gap hiding the middle of the lines in the terminal session. First fill the terminal window by typing the following command and pressing the Return key:
tips
•
ls –al 6. Click the small cracked square in the upper-right margin of the Terminal window. The Terminal window now displays a horizontal divider line, as shown in Figure 216-3.
•
• Figure 216-3: The Terminal window listing files in the current directory.
7. To enlarge the upper pane, place the cursor over the three small dots in the center of the divider, and drag the divider down to roughly the center of the window, as shown in Figure 216-4.
216
•
If you want more lines to be visible, drag the lowerright corner of the Terminal window down to make the window taller. You can save any changes you make to the Terminal Inspector window for all future Terminals by clicking the Use Settings as Defaults button at the bottom of the Terminal Inspector window. To switch between Terminal windows, press Ô-1, Ô-2, and so on up to Ô-9. If you include the Command key in the title bar, you’ll be able to recognize which window is which much more easily. Alternately, you can press Ô-~ to rotate between the open windows. This not only works with the Terminal application, but also works in all applications.
cross-reference
•
Figure 216-4: The Terminal window showing a split-pane view.
8. To close the split-pane view, click the square in the upper-right margin of the lower pane to restore the Terminal window to a single pane.
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.”
466
Task
217
notes
• • •
•
The keyboard shortcut to show the Terminal Inspector window is Ô-I.
Part 17
Customizing Terminal Settings
I
n most OS X applications, customizing settings for that application are chosen through the Preferences. However, in the Terminal, most of the appearance is controlled in the Terminal Inspector. This task shows how to view and edit the Shell, Processes, and Emulation settings in the Terminal Inspector. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting
Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock and a new blank
Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 217-1.
The Shell pane shows the TTY (TeleTYpe) connection the OS X system assigned to the Terminal window, and the shell type you are using. In the world of Unix, a shell is a program responsible for interpreting your input, passing it along to the ker nel (the main component of the operating system), and showing you the kernel’s response. When you select the “Use Settings as Defaults” option, a .term file is created. This file stores the size, location, and visible or invisible status of all win dows that were open when the file was created.
Figure 217-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Show Info to show the Terminal Inspector window. 3. From the drop-down list, choose Shell to display the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 217-2.
Figure 217-2: The Shell pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
4. Use the radio buttons on the Shell pane to set the exit behavior of a Terminal window.
Terminal Tricks 5. From the pop-up menu, choose Processes to display the Process pane of the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 217-3.
467
Task
217
tips
•
Figure 217-3: The Processes pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
6. Use the radio buttons on the Processes pane to choose if the Terminal should display a prompt before closing.
•
7. Add a command to the “Prompt before closing window if there are processes other than” list by clicking the Add button and typing a command.
If you minimize the Terminal window, the Terminal Inspector window will show, “No Terminal Selected.” You must have a Terminal win dow open on the desktop to view and edit that Terminal’s settings with the Terminal Inspector. You can save any change you make to the Terminal Inspector window for all future Terminals by clicking the Use Settings as Defaults button at the bottom of the Terminal Inspector window.
8. From the pop-up menu, choose Emulation to display the Emulation pane of the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 217-4.
cross-reference Figure 217-4: The Emulation pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
9. Check the checkboxes on the Emulation pane to modify the behavior of the terminal emulation. 10. Close the Terminal Inspector window by clicking the small red Close button in the upper-left corner of the Terminal Inspector title bar.
•
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.”
468
Task
218
notes
• •
• •
The keyboard shortcut to show the Terminal Inspector window is Ô-I.
Part 17
Customizing More Terminal Settings
I
n most OS X applications, customizing settings for that application are chosen through the Preferences. However, the Terminal is different from most Mac applications. In the Terminal, most of the appearance is controlled in the Terminal Inspector. This task shows how to view and edit the Buffer and Display settings in the Terminal Inspector. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 218-1.
The Scrollback Buffer comes in handy when you type more commands than will fit on the screen. As those commands at the top of the screen disappear from view, they are stored in a buffer so that they can be redisplayed if you scroll up the page. Anti Aliasing allows Terminal to smooth the font so that the edges do not look jagged. By default, the Buffer is set to 10,000 lines, which should be enough for most users.
Figure 218-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Show Info to show the Terminal Inspector window. 3. From the pop-up menu, choose Buffer to display the Buffer pane of the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 218-2.
Figure 218-2: The Buffer pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
4. Use the radio buttons on the Buffer pane to set the number of lines a Terminal window file stores by default. 5. Use the checkboxes to set how the Terminal window handles wraparound and scrollback.
Terminal Tricks 6. From the pop-up menu, choose Display to open the Display pane of the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 218-3.
469
Task
218
tips
•
Figure 218-3: The Display pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
•
7. Choose the cursor’s shape by clicking the appropriate radio button, and set the cursor to blink (or not blink) by checking (or unchecking) the Blink checkbox. 8. Set the font by clicking the Set Font button to display the Font window, as shown in Figure 218-4.
You can save any change you make to the Terminal Inspector window for all future Terminals by clicking the Use Settings as Defaults button at the bottom of the Terminal Inspector window. No matter what font you choose, Terminal displays the characters aligned with those above and below it, much as what you would see with a monospaced font such as Courier or Monaco.
Figure 218-4: The Font window of the Terminal Inspector window.
9. Click the Save This Setting As My Default Font button on the Font sheet to make your choice the default font for the Terminal application. Close the Font sheet by clicking the small red Close button in the upper-left corner of the Terminal Inspector title bar. 10. Use the checkboxes on the Display pane of the Terminal Inspector window to set the behavior of text in the terminal application. 11. Close the Terminal Inspector window by clicking the small red Close button in the upper-left corner of the Terminal Inspector title bar.
cross-references
• • •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” Customize the Terminal application settings by fol lowing the steps in Task 217, “Customizing Terminal Settings.” You can start customizing the Terminal’s appearance by following the steps in Task 216, “Customizing Terminal Appearances.”
470
Task
219
Part 17
Customizing Color and Window Settings for Terminal
W notes
• • • •
The keyboard shortcut to show the Terminal Inspector window is Ô-I. The keyboard shortcut to open the Window pane of the Terminal Inspector win dow is Shift-Ô- T.
hen working in multiple Terminal windows, it is important for you to be able to tell each one apart. This is not something that happens by default, considering that they all look like a white box with black text. If you want to spruce up your Terminal windows, visit the Terminal Inspector. This task shows how to view and edit the Color and Window settings in the Terminal Inspector. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 219-1.
When the Transparency slider is at the left end, the Terrminal window is opaque (0% transparent). When the Trasparency slider is at the right end, the Terminal window is a solid color, which is black.
Figure 219-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Show Info to show the Terminal Inspector window. 3. From the pop-up menu, choose Color to display the Color pane of the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 219-2.
Figure 219-2: The Color pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
Terminal Tricks 4. Click the “Standard color selections” pop-up to set standard color sets for the Terminal, or click the Cursor, Selection, Normal Text, and Bold Text hollow square buttons to show the Colors sheet.
471
Task
219
5. Click the “Use this background color” hollow square button to choose a different background color. 6. Click the “Use an image for the background color” radio button to choose an image, and click the Set button to show a file browser window that you can use to select an image, as shown in Figure 219-3.
tips
•
• Figure 219-3: The file browser window.
You can save any change you make to the Terminal Inspector window for all future Terminals by clicking the Use Settings as Defaults button at the bottom of the Terminal Inspector window. When choosing the colors for your Terminal window, make sure that there is enough contrast between the text and the back ground to make the text readable.
7. Drag the Transparency slider to adjust the amount of transparency for the Terminal window. 8. From the pop-up menu, choose Window to display the Window pane of the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 219-4.
cross-references
•
Figure 219-4: The Window pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
9. Set the dimensions of the Terminal window by editing the numbers in the Columns and Rows Dimensions fields. 10. Check the checkboxes under the Title field to set what items are shown in the title bar for the Terminal.
• •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” Editing the terminal title name is discussed in Task 216, “Customizing Terminal Appearances.” Customize the Terminal application settings by fol lowing the steps in Task 217, “Customizing Terminal Settings.”
472
Task
220
Part 17
Customizing Terminal Keyboard Shortcuts
A notes
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut to show the Terminal Inspector window is Ô-I. When typing commands in the Terminal, you can use your Tab key to automati cally find the unique thing you are in the process of typing. This is called tab completion. The tab-completion feature of Mac OS X is especially helpful when working with pathnames in Terminal. For example, if you type the first few characters of a pathname and then press Tab, Terminal fills in the rest of the pathname. If Terminal cannot find a match, it beeps. If Terminal finds more than one match, it beeps and shows you a list of matches.
pple’s built-in Terminal application provides many keyboard shortcuts for typing within a Terminal window, and the ability to add new ones of your own. This task shows how to work with the Keyboard pane of the Terminal Inspector window to view and edit the existing keyboard shortcuts. This task also shows how to add new shortcuts for use in the Terminal. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting
Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank
Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 220-1.
Figure 220-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Show Info to show the Terminal Inspector window. 3. From the pop-up menu, choose Keyboard to display the Keyboard pane of the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 220-2.
Figure 220-2: The Keyboard pane of the Terminal Inspector window.
Terminal Tricks 4. Click one of the entries in the Key Mappings list box to select it.
473
Task
5. Click the Edit button to display the Edit Key Mapping pane, as shown in Figure 220-3.
220
tip
•
You can save any change you make to the Terminal Inspector window for all future Terminals by clicking the Use Settings as Defaults button at the bottom of the Terminal Inspector window.
Figure 220-3: The Edit Key Mapping pane.
6. Edit the Key Mapping by choosing a key from the Key drop-down list, a modifier key from the Modifier drop-down list, and an action from the Action drop-down list. 7. If you choose the Action “send string to shell,” enter a text string to send to the Terminal cursor. 8. Click Cancel to not save your edits, or click OK if you want to change the key mapping you chose. 9. To add a key mapping, click the Add button to display the Add Key Mapping dialog (as shown in Figure 220-4) and follow the steps explained earlier in this task.
cross-references
•
Figure 220-4: The Add Key Mapping dialog.
•
Customize the Terminal’s appearance by following the steps in Task 216, “Customizing Terminal Appearances.” Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.”
474
Task
221
notes
• • • • •
The keyboard shortcut to show the Terminal Inspector window is Ô-I.
Part 17
Saving Custom Terminal Settings
S
everal of the tasks in this part show how to customize the Terminal application to your liking. However, it would be a waste of time to have to redo these changes every time you started the Terminal. This task shows how to save your changes. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 221-1.
The keyboard shortcut for saving is Ô-S. The default location to save a file to is the Documents folder of your user directory. To learn more about color and window settings, see Task 219, “Customizing Color and Window Settings for Terminal.” To learn more about key board shortcuts, see Task 220, “Customizing Terminal Keyboard Shortcuts.”
Figure 221-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Show Info to display the Terminal Inspector window, as shown in Figure 221-2.
Figure 221-2: The Terminal Inspector window.
3. Make changes in the Terminal Inspector window to suit your preferences as described in previous tasks. 4. To save the changes for all future Terminal windows you create, click the Use Settings as Defaults button at the bottom of the Terminal Inspector window.
Terminal Tricks 5. Click the red Close button in the Terminal Inspector window title bar to close the window.
475
Task
6. To save the current settings of the Terminal to a configuration file, from the menu bar choose File ➪ Save to display the Save dialog shown in Figure 221-3.
221
tip
•
You can edit two or more Terminal windows individu ally and save the custom settings for all windows at the same time. Or, you can save the Terminal settings.
Figure 221-3: The Save dialog.
7. Enter a name in the Save As field, then click the Where drop-down list to choose from several locations to save the file to. 8. For a complete file browser dialog, click the downward-pointing arrow next to the Save As field to display the file browser window, as shown in Figure 221-4.
cross-references Figure 221-4: The expanded Save dialog.
9. Choose what to save with the What to Save drop-down list, then click the radio buttons to choose what to do with the saved file when opening it with Terminal. 10. Click Cancel to not save the settings, or Save to save the Terminal settings.
• • •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” Customize the Terminal’s appearance by following the steps in Task 216, “Customizing Terminal Appearances.” To learn more about cus tomizing settings, see Task 217, “Customizing Terminal Settings,” and Task 218, “Customizing More Terminal Settings.”
476
Task
222
notes
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut to show the Terminal Preferences window is Ô-,.
Part 17
Changing the Terminal Shell
A
pple’s Terminal application launches an application called a shell. The shell is the application that displays the prompt and accepts and processes text commands that you type at the cursor. Apple settled on bash as the default shell to use for the Terminal, but other shells are also included in OS X. This task shows how to change the shell program used in the Terminal. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting
Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank
Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 222-1.
OS X 10.3 ships with the following shells available: /bin/bash, /bin/csh, /bin/zsh, and /bin/zsh-4.0.4. Enter the full path of one of these into the Terminal Preferences window to make that shell the one to be used. The tab-completion feature of Mac OS X is especially helpful when working with pathnames in Terminal. For example, if you type the first few characters of a pathname and then press Tab, Terminal fills in the rest of the pathname. If Terminal cannot find a match, it beeps. If Terminal finds more than one match, it beeps and shows you a list of matches.
Figure 222-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the Application menu, choose Terminal ➪ Preferences to display the Terminal Preferences window, as shown in Figure 222-2.
Figure 222-2: The Terminal Preferences window.
Terminal Tricks 3. Click the radio button to the left of “Execute this command (specify complete path).”
477
Task
4. Enter a complete path to a shell program in the field below the radio button. An example is shown in Figure 222-3.
222
tip
•
A complete path starts with a / at the beginning. The example shown in Figure 222-3, /bin/tcsh, is a complete path.
Figure 222-3: Setting a path to a new shell.
5. Use the “Declare terminal type as” drop-down list to change the terminal type. 6. Click the red Close button in the Terminal Preferences title bar. 7. Save the Preference by pressing Ô-S, entering a name for the file, and saving it, as is discussed in Task 221, “Saving Custom Terminal Settings.” 8. In the Terminal window, type exit. The Terminal window replies with a logout message, as shown in Figure 222-4.
Figure 222-4: Exit the old shell before you can start with the new shell.
9. Press Ô-N to open a new Terminal window using the newly specified shell.
cross-references
• •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” How the terminal responds to an exit command can be set in the Shell pane of the Terminal Inspector, which is discussed in Task 217, “Customizing Terminal Settings.”
478
Task
223
Part 17
Connecting to an FTP Server through Terminal
O notes
• • • • • •
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut for showing the Connect to Server Terminal window is Ô-Shift-K.
ne of the most common uses of a Terminal window is to connect to another system. Often, a file you want is on another system, and you want a copy of that file on your local OS X system. This task shows how to use Terminal to connect to an File Transfer Protocol (FTP) or Secure FTP (SFTP) server. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting
Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank
Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 223-1.
Enter a user name in the User field that the server you are connecting to will recognize. SSH is an acronym for Secure Shell. FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. SFTP is an acronym for Secure File Transfer Protocol. Telnet allows you to remotely log in to another machine and use your ter minal to run it. Telnet is not a secure way to connect (that is why most people will perform remote logins through SSH).
Figure 223-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Connect to Server to display the “Connect to server” Terminal window shown in Figure 223-2.
The tcsh represents an extended version of the csh (c-shell) that is part of Unix. To review activity from your computer, type last at the command prompt and press Return. You will see a list of who has logged into your machine, when and from where they logged in, how long they stayed, and when you last started or shut down your system. To review activity of a par ticular user from your com puter, type last user (where user is the name of the person you are inquiring about) at the command prompt and press Return. You will see a list of logins for that user on your system.
Figure 223-2: The “Connect to server” Terminal window.
3. Click the “File Transfer (ftp)” service in the Service list to select it.
Terminal Tricks 4. Click a server in the Server list to the right. If there are no servers in the list, click on the + symbol to add a server address or IP number.
479
Task
5. Click the User field at the bottom of the “Connect to server” window.
223
6. Enter a user name in the User field. The window should now resemble Figure 223-3.
Figure 223-3: The “Connect to server” Terminal window, ready to connect.
7. Click the Connect button. A new window appears. 8. If you are prompted for a password, enter the password for the user name you entered for that server. The window should now resemble Figure 223-4.
Figure 223-4: A connection to another server.
9. To connect to an SFTP server, click the “Secure File Transfer (sftp)” service in the Service list to select it. 10. From the drop-down list to the right of the User field, choose either SFTP Protocol 1 or SFTP Protocol 2, depending on the version supported by the SFTP server you are connecting to.
cross-references
• •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The “Connect to server” window in the Terminal is a windowing aid to making a command-line connection through a Terminal window. The OS X Finder has a Connect to Server window as well, and its use is shown in Task 74, “Connecting to a Local Server.”
480
Task
224
Part 17
Connecting to an SSH Server through Terminal
O notes
• • •
The keyboard shortcut for showing the “Connect to server” Terminal window is Shift-Ô-K.
ne of the most common uses of a Terminal window is to connect to another system. SSH (Secure SHell) is an encrypted terminal program that has become an almost universal replacement for the older Telnet program. This task shows how to use the Terminal to connect to an SSH or Telnet server. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 224-1.
Enter a user name in the User field that the server you are connecting to will recognize. Because SSH is much more secure against hacker attacks, Apple replaced the old Telnet with SSH begin ning with Mac OS X 10.1.
Figure 224-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Connect to Server to display the “Connect to server” Terminal window, as shown in Figure 224-2.
Figure 224-2: The “Connect to server” Terminal window.
3. Choose the SSH service from the Service list.
Terminal Tricks 4. Click a server in the Server list, or click the plus sign (+) to add a new server to the list.
481
Task
5. Click the User field.
224
6. Enter a user name in the User field. The window should now resemble Figure 224-3.
tips
•
Figure 224-3: The “Connect to server” Terminal window, ready to connect.
•
7. Click the Connect button, and a new window appears. 8. If you are prompted for a password, enter the password for the user name you entered for that server. The window should now resemble Figure 224-4.
Figure 224-4: A connection to another server.
9. To connect to a Telnet server, click the “Remote Login (telnet)”
service in the Service list to select it.
10. Enter the user name, and click connect. If you are prompted for a password, enter the password for the user name you entered for that server.
To review activity from your computer, type last at the command prompt and press Return. You will see a list of who has logged into your machine, when and from where they logged in, how long they stayed, and when you last started or shut down your system. To review activity of a par ticular user from your com puter, type last user (where user is the name of the person you are inquiring about) at the command prompt and press Return. You will see a list of logins for that user on your system.
cross-references
• • •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” Connecting to an FTP server is discussed in Task 223, “Connecting to an FTP Server through the Terminal.” The “Connect to server” window in the Terminal is a windowing aid to making a command-line connection through a Terminal window. The OS X Finder has a Connect to Server window as well, and its use is shown in Task 74, “Connecting to a Local Server.”
482
Task
225
notes
• • •
The keyboard shortcut for showing the “Connect to server” Terminal window is Shift-Ô-K. As new protocols emerge, OS X makes it easy to update the types of proto cols it will accept to con nect to.
Part 17
Adding Services and Servers
O
ne of the most common uses of a Terminal window is to connect to another system. OS X’s Terminal application includes a “Connect to server” window that is designed to make using Terminal with common protocols easier. However, you may have a specific need of a protocol not included in the Terminal defaults settings, so you can add new protocols and servers to the “Connect to server” window. This task shows how to add new protocols and servers to the “Connect to server” window. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting
Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new
blank Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in
Figure 225-1.
To connect to a server with out the “Connect to server” dialog, you simply type the protocol and the name of the server. For example, if you type ftp: // ftp.wiley. com, it will connect you to the Wiley servers using ssh and then prompt you for a user name and password.
Figure 225-1: A new Terminal window.
2. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Connect to Server to display the “Connect to server” Terminal window, as shown in Figure 225-2.
Figure 225-2: The “Connect to server” Terminal window.
Terminal Tricks 3. To add a service in the Connect to Server window, click the plus (+) button underneath the Service list to display the “add service” dialog shown in Figure 225-3.
483
Task
225
Figure 225-3: The “add service” dialog.
4. Enter the Service Name (such as Secure Shell). 5. Enter the Rendezvous Name (such as _ssh). 6. Enter the full path of the command to execute (such as /usr/bin/ssh). 7. Check the checkbox “Passes username to command” if the short name of the account you are logged into the OS X system under is the user name you want to send to the server you are connecting to. 8. Click the OK button to add the service to the Service list of the “Connect to server” command window. 9. To add a server in the “Connect to server” window, click the plus (+) button underneath the Server list to display the “add server” dialog, as shown in Figure 225-4.
cross-references
•
Figure 225-4: The “add server” dialog.
10. Enter the name or the IP address of a server, and click the OK button. The new server name appears in the Server list for all the services.
•
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The “Connect to server” window in the Terminal is a windowing aid to making a command-line connection through a Terminal window. The OS X Finder has a Connect to Server window as well, and its use is shown in Task 74, “Connecting to a Local Server.”
484
Task
226
notes
• •
•
You can turn your Mac into an FTP site by turning on the FTP Access checkbox in the Sharing pane of System Preferences.
Part 17
Turning on Sharing Services
S
ometimes you may want to have your OS X system act as a server for other people to connect to using FTP, SSH, or other services. The Sharing pane of System Preferences controls the activity of the built-in services. This task shows how to turn on the SSH server built into your OS X system. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to display the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 226-1.
If a user wants to remotely log into your computer, the user still must have a user name and password to do so. This means the user must have an account on the computer. To create an account on the computer so that a per son can use the remote login, see Task 46, “Adding a User Account.”
Figure 226-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the Internet & Network row, click the Sharing icon to show the Sharing pane. 3. Click the Services tab to display the Services pane of the Sharing window, as shown in Figure 226-2.
caution
•
Turning on a service allows people to connect to your OS X system. Not all of these people may be nice people. In general, leave services turned off unless you need them.
Figure 226-2: The Services pane of the Sharing window of System Preferences.
Terminal Tricks 4. Click the Remote Login name in the Service list to select it, as shown in Figure 226-3.
485
Task
226
Figure 226-3: Choose Remote Login to enable SSH access to your OS X system.
5. Check the checkbox next to Remote Login in the Services list, or click the Start button to the right of the Services list (as shown in Figure 226-3) to start up SSH as a service on your OS X system. 6. To turn off your SSH server, uncheck the Remote Login checkbox, or click the Stop button. 7. You can turn on the FTP server part of your OS X system by choosing the FTP Access entry in the Service list and checking the checkbox.
cross-references
• •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” Turning on a service auto matically opens the ports for that service in the builtin firewall, if you have the firewall security turned on for your OS X system. Turning on the firewall is discussed in Task 75, “Sharing an Internet Connection and Using the Firewall.”
486
Task
227
notes
•
• •
Dragging an application icon from the Dock and dropping it into the Terminal window just deletes it from the Dock. You’ll need to use an appli cation or folder icon in the Finder window.
Part 17
Using Terminal to Start an Application
T
erminal is a text-based method to use your OS X system, similar to the way that the Finder desktop and all of its windows operate. This task shows how to find where you are in the OS X directory structure and how to start an application from inside a Terminal window. 1. Start the Terminal application as shown in Task 214, “Starting
Terminal.” The Terminal icon appears in the Dock, and a new blank
Terminal window appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 227-1.
The pwd Unix command name is taken from its meaning. The command is the acronym for “present working directory.” The tab-completion feature of Mac OS X is especially helpful when working with pathnames in Terminal. For example, if you type the first few characters of a pathname and then press Tab, Terminal fills in the rest of the pathname. If Terminal cannot find a match, it beeps. If Terminal finds more than one match, it beeps and shows you a list of matches.
Figure 227-1: A new Terminal window.
2. Type pwd to show your prompt’s current location in the OS X directory structure. The Terminal should reply with /Users/ followed by your user account’s short name. 3. To start the TextEdit application, type the following at the prompt: open /Applications/TextEdit.app 4. Press the Return key. The Terminal displays a new prompt on the next line, and the TextEdit application launches, as shown in Figure 227-2.
Figure 227-2: Launching TextEdit from the Terminal window.
5. Click the TextEdit window to make it the active application, and press Ô-Q to quit TextEdit.
Terminal Tricks
487
6. If you’re not sure of the full path to a given application, you can find the application in a window on the desktop. Open the Applications folder on your hard disk, and find the Preview application.
Task
227
7. In the Terminal window, type open and add a space after the word but do not press the Return key yet. 8. Click the Preview application, and drag-and-drop the icon into the Terminal window, as shown in Figure 227-3. The full path of the application appears in the Terminal window. Press the Return key to launch the Preview application.
Figure 227-3: Drag-and-drop an icon from the desktop to show the full path to the icon in the Terminal.
9. You can also launch an application by using the New Command window. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ New Command to display the Run Command window in Figure 227-4.
Figure 227-4: Run command window.
10. Enter the command you want to run, and click the Run button.
cross-references
• •
Starting the Terminal appli cation is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” The short name for a user account is discussed in Task 46, “Adding a User Account.”
Part 18: Speech and Accessibility Task 228: Having Your System Read Aloud Task 229: Changing the System Voice Task 230: Starting Speech Recognition Task 231: Setting How Your System Listens Task 232: Choosing and Viewing Recognizable Commands Task 233: Enabling and Editing Spoken User Interface Preferences Task 234: Adjusting Mouse Usage Task 235: Changing Keyboard Settings Task 236: Viewing and Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
490
Task
228
notes
• •
• •
There’s no keyboard short cut for starting and stop ping the Speech Service.
Part 18
Having Your System Read Aloud
A
pple’s Speech functions built into OS X provide you with the ability to interact with your OS X system by having the system speak aloud to you and by setting your OS X system to recognize spoken commands. This task shows how to have your OS X system read text aloud to you. 1. Start the TextEdit application as shown in Task 55, “Starting and
Stopping TextEdit.” The TextEdit icon appears in the Dock, and a
new blank TextEdit window appears on the desktop, as shown in
Figure 228-1.
Stopping the Speech Service in the middle of reading stops it; it does not pause it. If you restart, the system reads from the beginning again. Select the text from where you want to start it to change the beginning and end points. The keyboard shortcut to select all the text in the active window is Ô-A. In addition to TextEdit, other applications that support text-to-speech can also read to you. Examples include Mail, AppleWorks 6, and FileMaker Pro.
Figure 228-1: A new TextEdit window.
2. Type a couple of sentences (anything you can think of will do). The text appears in the TextEdit window, as shown in Figure 228-2.
Figure 228-2: A TextEdit window with entered text.
Speech and Accessibility 3. Select the text in the window by choosing the Edit ➪ Select All command from the menu bar.
491
Task
4. From the Application menu, choose the command TextEdit ➪ Services ➪ Speech ➪ Start Speaking Text, as shown in Figure 228-3. The Speech Service starts and reads the selected text aloud to you.
228
tips
•
Figure 228-3: Use the Start Speaking Text command to
have the system read selected text aloud to you.
5. To stop the Speech, from the Application menu, choose the command TextEdit ➪ Services ➪ Speech ➪ Stop Speaking.
• • •
The Application menu is the menu immediately to the right of the Apple menu. The Application menu changes its name to show the name of the active application. Because applications have names of varying lengths, this means that the other menus in the menu bar shift slightly from left to right. If you want to silence the speech rapidly, use the Mute key on your keyboard if you have one. Always be sure to use punctuation in what you type. The application uses the punctuation to insert pauses as necessary. You can set a custom key board shortcut for starting and stopping the Speech Service using the Keyboard shortcuts pane of Systems Preferences, which is dis cussed in Task 29, “Setting Mouse and Keyboard Options.”
cross-references
• •
Starting the TextEdit appli cation is discussed in Task 55, “Starting and Stopping TextEdit.” Speaking to your computer is discussed in Task 31, “Setting Speech Preferences”
492
Task
229
notes
• • • • • • •
Part 18
Changing the System Voice
O
S X includes several voices you can use with the system. These voice preferences are stored in System Preferences. This task shows you how to change the default system voice. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 229-1.
The default system voice is set on a per-user basis. Changing the setting while you are logged in does not affect other users on the system. The sample text varies for each voice. Some voices are more understandable then oth ers. For example, Deranged isn’t easy to understand. Mac OS X has more than 20 synthesized voices from which to choose. Four of the voices actually sing rather than speak. Settings you make to the Default Voice affect any application that uses the text-to-speech capability. The voice is set on a peraccount basis. Therefore, if you have your voice set to hear Vicki, your coworker could have the voice set to hear Fred.
Figure 229-1: The System Preferences window.
2. First, you must make sure the sound is turned up on your OS X system so that you can hear the voices. Click the Sound icon in the Hardware row of the System Preferences window to show the Sound pane. 3. Click the Output tab to show the Output tab of the Sound pane, as shown in Figure 229-2.
Each voice has a profile that accompanies it. For example, Vicki is a 35-yearold female, whereas Pipe Organ is a pipe organ.
Figure 229-2: The Sound pane of the System Preferences window.
Speech and Accessibility 4. Move the Output volume slider at the bottom of the Sound pane to set the output sound level.
493
Task
5. Click the Show All button in the top-left corner of the System Preferences window to show the screen in Figure 229-1 again.
229
6. In the System row of the System Preferences window, click the Speech icon to show the Speech pane. 7. Click the Default Voice tab of the Speech pane to show the screen in Figure 229-3.
tips
• •
• Figure 229-3: The Speech pane of the System
Preferences window.
If you have the system muted, changing the vol ume slider automatically unchecks the Mute checkbox shown in Figure 229-2. Use the slider in the Default voice pane to change the rate of the speech. You can make any voice speak slower or faster. Sometimes making a voice speak at a different rate makes it eas ier to understand. If you work in an environ ment where you are near others, they may find it dis tracting to hear your com puter speaking all the time. Invest in a good pair of headphones.
8. OS X has a default voice already set. Click the Play button to play a text sample in that voice’s tone. 9. Click any voice name in the Voice list to play a text sample in that voice. 10. When you’ve settled on a voice, press Ô-Q to close System Preferences and save your change.
cross-references
• •
For more information on setting system sounds, see Task 5, “Setting the Volume.” For more information on setting speech preferences, see Task 31, “Setting Speech Preferences.”
494
Task
230
notes
• •
•
Setting Speech Recognition to turn on automatically only applies to the user account you are logged in as and does not affect other users.
Part 18
Starting Speech Recognition
O
S X includes the capability to listen to your voice and respond to commands. You can open folders, start applications, and perform many tasks by telling your OS X system what to do instead of typing the command. This task shows how to turn on Speech Recognition in OS X. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 230-1.
The Recognition System menu only shows Apple Speakable Items because there is no additional thirdparty system installed on the OS X system to choose from. If you have another speech-recognition appli cation installed, it should appear in the Recognition System drop-down list. The Speech Commands window that opens with the microphone will show you a list of acceptable commands and a list of the commands you have recently used.
Figure 230-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the System row of the System Preferences window, click the Speech icon to show the Speech pane. 3. Click the Speech Recognition tab, then the On/Off subtab to display the On/Off pane, as shown in Figure 230-2.
caution
•
Your voice needs to reach the OS X system clearly. If you try using speech recog nition in a noisy environ ment, a microphone may help reduce the volume and improve OS X’s response accuracy.
Figure 230-2: The On/Off pane of the Speech pane in the System Preferences window.
Speech and Accessibility 4. To turn on Speech Recognition, click the “Apple Speakable Items Is On” radio button. A microphone appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 230-3.
495
Task
230
Figure 230-3: When Speech Recognition is on, a microphone icon appears on the desktop.
tips
•
5. To have Speech Recognition start automatically, check the “Turn on Speakable Items at login” checkbox. 6. Click the Helpful Tips button to show a sheet of useful advice, as shown in Figure 230-4.
•
If you work in an environ ment with other people, you may want to let them know you are using Speakable Items so that they do not answer you when you are speaking to your computer. Using a headset with a microphone will give you more accurate results and a visual cue to your coworkers that you are not speaking to them.
Figure 230-4: The Helpful Tips sheet.
7. Click the Continue button on the Helpful Tips sheet to close the sheet. 8. By default, the system plays a sound when it successfully recognizes a spoken command. Click the Play sound drop-down list to choose None if you want no sound, or choose a different sound. 9. Check the Speak confirmation checkbox if you want the OS X system to repeat the recognized command back to you.
cross-references
• •
You set the microphone behavior to listen for com mands on the Listening tab, as discussed in Task 231, “Setting How Your System Listens.” For more information on setting speech preferences, see Task 31, “Setting Speech Preferences.”
496
Task
231
notes
•
•
•
When the microphone is off, the microphone picture in the top half of the circle is grayed out. When the microphone is listening, the microphone picture is clear, and colored sound bars flick in the bottom half of the microphone floating window to show that it is hearing sound. The Recognition System menu only shows Apple Speakable Items because there is no additional thirdparty system installed on the OS X system to choose from. If you have another speech-recognition appli cation installed, it should appear in the Recognition System drop-down list. If you are using an external microphone, or a headset with a microphone, you will choose the microphone you want to use at the bottom of the Listening pane.
Part 18
Setting How Your System Listens
O
S X’s built-in speech recognition does not automatically listen to everything you say. This is a protection against your absentmindedly deleting your favorite music folder, for example. This task shows how to set your OS X system to listen (and, just as important, to not listen) to your speech commands. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 231-1.
Figure 231-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the System row of the System Preferences window, click the Speech icon to show the Speech pane. 3. Click the Speech Recognition tab, then the On/Off subtab to show the On/Off pane, as shown in Figure 231-2. 4. To turn on Speech Recognition, click the “Apple Speakable Items Is On” radio button. A microphone appears on the desktop.
Figure 231-2: Speech Recognition tab of the Speech pane.
Speech and Accessibility 5. Click the Listening subtab to display the Listening pane of the Speech pane, as shown in Figure 231-3.
497
Task
231
tips
•
Figure 231-3: The Listening tab.
6. Your OS X system as shown in Figure 231-3 only listens for spoken commands if the Escape key is being held down. To change the listening key, click the Change Key button to display the dialog in Figure 231-4.
• •
•
The computer name has nothing to do with the net work name of the OS X system. This name is only used to let the OS X system know that you are speaking to it. Use the Listening radio but ton pair to choose how the listening key works. If you choose the “Key tog gles listening on and off” radio button, set the com puter name in the Name field, and choose when the name is required from the drop-down list. The Volume button next to the microphone field will allow you to adjust the vol ume at which you speak and the microphone under stands you. It is very useful and gives you visual cues as to when you are understood.
Figure 231-4: Change the listening key.
7. Press a key or key combination you want to use, which appears in the field in the sheet. 8. Click the Cancel button to close the sheet without saving any changes or click the OK button to save your changes.
cross-references
• •
Starting Speech Recognition is discussed in more detail in Task 230, “Starting Speech Recognition.” For more information on setting speech preferences, see Task 31, “Setting Speech Preferences.”
498
Task
232
Part 18
Choosing and Viewing Recognizable Commands
A notes
•
• •
The Recognition System menu only shows Apple Speakable Items because there is no additional thirdparty system installed on the OS X system to choose from. If you have another speech-recognition appli cation installed, it should appear in the Recognition System drop-down list. If you speak a command and the system is unable to execute the command, nothing will happen after the command appears above the Feedback window.
pple’s speech recognition built into OS X is extensive, but it has its limits. Speech recognition has certain commands that it can recognize, and these commands are grouped by application, so you can choose what groups are active. This task shows how to choose and edit these command groups and how to view the list of available commands. For this task, you will want to have Speech Recognition turned on. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window.
2. In the System row of the System Preferences window, click the
Speech icon to show the Speech pane.
3. Click the Speech Recognition tab, then the On/Off subtab to display
the On/Off pane shown in Figure 232-1.
To use Speech Recognition in conjunction with the menu bar, you must choose Enable Access to Assistive Devices in the Universal Access pane of System Preferences.
Figure 232-1: The On/Off pane of the Speech
pane of the System Preferences window.
4. Click the Open Speakable Items Folder button. The Speakable Items folder opens in a Finder window, as shown in Figure 232-2.
Figure 232-2: The Speakable Items folder opens in a Finder window.
Speech and Accessibility 5. Once you’ve finished reviewing the list, click the red Close button to close the window.
499
Task
6. Click the small down-pointing arrow at the bottom of the microphone on the desktop to show the Speech Commands menu.
232
7. Choose the Open Speech Commands window command to show the screen in Figure 232-3.
tips
• • •
Figure 232-3: The Speech Commands window.
8. In the Speech Commands window, you can use the arrows to open the lists of commands ordered by group. Close the Speech Commands window. 9. In the Speech pane of the System Preferences window, click the Speech Recognition tab, then the Commands subtab to show Figure 232-4.
•
You may want to change the Speakable Items folder window to a List View to view the commands more easily. You may want to leave the speakable commands win dow open until you learn what commands each application accepts. In the commands pane of the Speech window, you can loosen the restrictions on commands by selecting Global Speakable Items and then clicking the Configure button and removing the check next to “Speak command names exactly as written.” When issuing commands, be sure to speak slowly and clearly.
cross-references
•
Figure 232-4: The Commands pane.
10. Click the name of the command set to highlight it and show a description to the right, and check the checkbox to the left of the command set name to turn that set on or off.
• •
Starting Speech Recognition is discussed in Task 230, “Starting Speech Recognition.” For more information on setting speech preferences, see Task 31, “Setting Speech Preferences.” How Speech Recognition listens to your voice is detailed in Task 231, “Setting How Your System Listens.
500
Task
233
Part 18
Enabling and Editing Spoken User Interface Preferences
A notes
•
• •
The “Other spoken items” options in the Spoken User Interface tab of the Speech window include “Announce when an application requires your attention,” “Text under the mouse,” and “Selected text when the key is pressed.”
pple includes several features designed to make OS X easier to use if you have limitations in mobility, vision, or hearing. The Spoken User Interface reads aloud parts of the desktop and alert boxes, if you turn it on. This task shows how to turn on the text-to-speech capability and edit the Spoken User Preferences. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 233-1.
If an application assigns key combinations by default, Mac OS X inter cepts these keystrokes. Spoken Alerts can be assigned a different voice than the default voice. This makes it easier to distin guish alerts.
Figure 233-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the System row of the System Preferences window, click the Universal Access icon to show the Universal Access pane. 3. Click the Hearing tab to display the Hearing pane, as shown in Figure 233-2.
cautions
• •
Activating the “Text under the mouse” option of the Spoken User Interface may be helpful at times, but it can be overwhelming. Ensure that the alert phrase you choose is appropriate for your envi ronment. For example, don’t have your alert yell “Fire” every time a dialog appears.
4. Click the “Enable text-to-speech for Universal Access preferences” checkbox at the bottom of the Universal Access window. 5. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Speech to show the Speech pane of System Preferences. 6. Click the Spoken User Interface tab to show the screen in Figure 233-3.
Speech and Accessibility
501
Task
233
tips
• •
Figure 233-2: The Hearing pane of the Universal Access pane of the System Preferences window.
• •
You can add custom alert phrases to the alert phrases list in the “Speak the phrase” pop-up menu. Use the Demonstrate Settings button to test your configuration for spoken alerts. You can have your Mac tell you verbally when programs or applications need attention. You can have your Mac “read” buttons, tabs, dialog options, desktop icons, and so on, when your cursor passes over them.
Figure 233-3: The Spoken User Interface pane of
the Speech pane of the System Preferences window.
7. Check the “Speak the phrase” checkbox, and select a phrase from the drop-down list to its right if you want OS X to say a given alert phrase (such as “Excuse me”) before reading an alert box. 8. Use the “Talking Alerts voice” drop-down list if you want OS X
to use a different system voice for alerts than it does for reading
ordinary text and filenames.
9. Set the delay time with the “Wait before speaking” slider. 10. Use the three checkboxes in the “Other spoken items” area to set the relevant options.
cross-references
• •
Setting the default voice is discussed in Task 229, “Changing the System Voice.” For more information on setting speech preferences, see Task 31, “Setting Speech Preferences.”
502
Task
234
notes
• • • •
•
The tracking speed and double-click speeds affect the use of a mouse as well as the trackpad.
Part 18
Adjusting Mouse Usage
O
S X provides you with two areas to adjust the use of the mouse or trackpad. These two areas are the Keyboard & Mouse pane and the Mouse tab of the Universal Access pane of System Preferences. This task shows how to adjust both sets of preferences for optimal use. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 234-1.
The choices at the bottom of the Trackpad pane (such as Clicking and Dragging) only affect the trackpad. If you do not disable the trackpad when a mouse is connected to the OS X sys tem, you might accidentally brush the trackpad and throw off your accuracy. As you work in the Universal Access pane, your com puter will read you each word because “Enable textto-speech for Universal Access preferences” is enabled by default. To dis able this feature, uncheck the checkbox at the bottom of the Universal Access pane. Setting a longer initial delay for your mouse or trackpad may help you decrease accidental click ing or moving of the mouse.
Figure 234-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the Hardware row of the System Preferences window, click the Keyboard & Mouse icon. 3. Click the Trackpad tab to display the window shown in Figure 234-2.
Figure 234-2: The Trackpad pane of the Keyboard & Mouse pane of the System Preferences window.
Speech and Accessibility 4. Adjust the tracking speed with the Tracking Speed slider, and adjust the double-click speed with the Double-Click Speed slider.
503
Task
5. Use the checkboxes at the bottom of the Trackpad tab to set what to use the trackpad for, and to turn off the trackpad if a mouse is plugged into the OS X system. 6. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Universal Access to show the Universal Access pane. 7. Click the Mouse tab to show Figure 234-3.
234
tips
•
•
Some keyboards have a separate set of numbers to one side. You can use the numeric section of the key board as a multidirectional arrow (using 5 as the mid dle, and so on) to move the cursor. You can enable more fea tures for your trackpad with third-party software such as Side Track, which allows you to use your trackpad to scroll or “right” click.
Figure 234-3: The Mouse pane of the Universal
Access pane of the System Preferences window.
8. To use the numeric keypad of your keyboard (if you have one) instead of a mouse, click the On radio button next to Mouse Keys. 9. Use the Initial Delay and Maximum Speed sliders to set the response of a mouse.
cross-references
• •
•
Setting the keyboard pref erences is shown in Task 235, “Changing Keyboard Settings.” If you have problems using a keyboard or trackpad, you could turn on and use Speakable Items, which are discussed in Task 232, “Choosing and Viewing Recognizable Commands” For more information about keyboard and mouse preferences see Task 29, “Setting Mouse and Keyboard Options.”
504
Task
235
notes
• • • • •
If you turn on zoom in the Seeing tab of the Universal Access pane, you can click the Zoom Options button for further customizing of the zoom usage.
Part 18
Changing Keyboard Settings
O
S X provides you with two areas to adjust the use of the keyboard. These two areas are the Keyboard & Mouse pane and the Keyboard tab of the Universal Access pane of System Preferences. This task shows how to adjust both sets of preferences to suit your needs. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 235-1.
The keyboard shortcut to enhance contrast is ^-opt-Ô. There is a Seeing tab in the Universal Access pane that allows you to change con trast, zoom in, and zoom out of things on the screen. The keyboard and mouse settings are not global for all users. Each user can adjust the OS X system’s responsiveness to suit indi vidual preferences. Many people use a mouse, trackball, or graphics tablet with notebook computers, but many people also choose to carry one less item with them as a matter of personal preference.
Figure 235-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the Hardware row of the System Preferences window, click the Keyboard & Mouse icon. 3. Click the Keyboard tab to show the screen in Figure 235-2.
Figure 235-2: The Keyboard pane of the Keyboard & Mouse pane in the System Preferences window.
Speech and Accessibility 4. Adjust the key repeat rate with the Key Repeat Rate slider, and adjust the delay before repeat with the Delay Until Repeat slider.
505
Task
5. Click the “Type here to test settings” field, and test your settings by typing some text.
235
6. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Universal Access to show the Universal Access pane. 7. Click the Keyboard tab to show the screen in Figure 235-3.
Figure 235-3: The Keyboard tab of the Universal Access pane of the System Preferences window.
8. To allow you to use multikey commands without having to turn your fingers into a pretzel, click the On radio button to turn on Sticky Keys. 9. Delay characters printing on the screen when you have pressed a key by clicking the On radio button for Slow Keys. 10. There is a check in the box to use click key sounds. This can be useful when typing.
cross-references
• • •
Setting the mouse and trackpad preferences is shown in Task 234, “Adjusting Mouse Usage.” Setting keyboard and mouse preferences is dis cussed in Task 29, “Setting Mouse and Keyboard Optons.” Keyboard shortcuts are discussed in Task 236, “Viewing and Editing Keyboard Shortcuts.”
506
Task
236
Part 18
Viewing and Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
O notes
•
•
A good way to increase your productivity with OS X is to examine the list of keyboard shortcuts in Figure 236-2 and to look at the menus of any applications you use often. Keyboard shortcuts are usually assigned because people want to do something, and they don’t want to spend time search ing for a command in a menu. Learning what com mands have keyboard shortcuts can be a way to learn what an application is most often used for. There are keyboard short cuts for most Applications that may not be listed in the Keyboard Shortcuts pane. These applicationspecific shortcuts can usually be determined by searching for “Keyboard Shortcuts” in the Help pane for that application.
S X includes many keyboard shortcuts: combinations of keys that trigger a command. An example is the Shift-Ô-3 keyboard shortcut that takes a picture of the current desktop and saves it as a PDF file on the desktop. (Try it, if you haven’t before.) This task shows how to work with the Keyboard Shortcuts System Preferences introduced in OS X. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 236-1.
Figure 236-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the Hardware row of the System Preferences window, click the Keyboard & Mouse icon. 3. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab to show the screen in Figure 236-2.
caution
•
Keyboard shortcuts for basic commands are usu ally slightly different on a Mac and a PC. As a rule of thumb, if you use your Ctrl key on the PC, it will be replaced by the Ô key when using a Mac. An example is the keyboard shortcut for copy on a PC is Ctrl-C, whereas on a Mac it is Ô-C.
Figure 236-2: The Keyboard Shortcuts pane of the Keyboard & Mouse pane in the System Preferences window.
Speech and Accessibility 4. Check the box next to a given keyboard shortcut shown in the list to turn it on or off.
507
Task
5. Check a given family of keyboard shortcuts to enable or disable the entire group at once.
236
6. Click the Add Keyboard Shortcut button at the bottom of the list (+) to display the “add keyboard shortcut” dialog, as shown in Figure 236-3.
tips
•
Figure 236-3: The “add keyboard shortcut” dialog.
•
7. Click the Application drop-down list to choose the application, as shown in Figure 236-4. If the specific application you want to use the keyboard shortcut for is not visible, choose Other from the dropdown list to show a file browser.
The Screen Capture entry in the keyboard shortcut is an example of a family entry. Family entries are group labels, and do not have keyboard shortcuts of their own. If an application assigns key combinations by default, Mac OS X inter cepts these keystrokes.
cross-references Figure 236-4: The Application drop-down list.
8. Choose the application from the file browser window, then click the Add button. 9. Enter a command name in the Menu Title field that corresponds to the menu item you want to access by a keyboard shortcut. 10. Enter the keyboard shortcut in the Keyboard Shortcut field.
• •
Taking a screen shot is shown in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.” For more information about keyboard and mouse pref erences see Task 29, “Setting Mouse and Keyboard Options.”
Part 19: Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help Task 237: Finding Detailed Information about Your System Task 238: Using More System Profiler Features Task 239: Checking Your Connection Using the Network Utility Task 240: Running Software Update Task 241: Disabling Unwanted Updates Task 242: Downloading Installers through Software Update Task 243: Force-Quitting an Application Task 244: Force-Quitting an Application from Terminal Task 245: Launching the Help Viewer Task 246: Getting First Aid Task 247: Restoring System Software Task 248: Erasing a Disk Task 249: Resetting Your Forgotten Password Task 250: Resetting the Root Password Task 251: Deleting a Problem File Task 252: Controlling Access with Keychain
510
Task
237
Part 19
Finding Detailed Information about Your System
I notes
•
• •
•
•
The About This Mac window in Figure 237-1 shows the exact version of OS X installed on your system, the amount of RAM installed, and the proces sor type and speed.
f you encounter trouble with your OS X system, finding current information about your system can help you or someone else figure out what is causing the trouble. Apple includes an application called the System Profiler to gather this information for you. This task shows how to start and use the Apple System Profiler to find detailed information on your OS X system. 1. From the menu bar, choose Apple ➪ About This Mac to display the
About This Mac window, as shown in Figure 237-1.
An overview summarizes the main items of the Hardware, Software, Network, and Logs. If you are attempting to run the System Profiler and the application unexpectedly quits, check to be sure that you have the Helvetica and Helvetica Neue fonts installed. These are required for the application to run on Mac OS X. If you have installed addi tional memory and it does not seem as though your computer is recognizing it, you can go to the System Profiler to see if it is being recognized. If it is not, you can see which slot is not being recognized.
Figure 237-1: The About This Mac window.
2. Click the More Info button to start the Apple System Profiler application, as shown in Figure 237-2.
The System Profiler has a Log feature that logs all of your system’s processes. This log can be useful when you are troubleshooting a system problem.
Figure 237-2: The Apple System Profile window.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 3. Click the Hardware Overview line in the Contents column of the System Profile window to display an overview of the hardware capabilities of your system, as shown in Figure 237-3.
511
Task
237
tips
•
Figure 237-3: The Apple System Profile window showing the hardware overview.
4. To see a portion of the hardware profile, click the subheading under the Hardware heading. For example, click the Memory entry under Hardware to see the details for the installed memory of the computer.
•
You can click the small dot in the middle of the bar between the main pane and the bottom pane of the System Profile window to drag it and change the size of the two panes. You can also drag the separator bar between the Contents columns and the two verti cal panes to make the Contents column wider or narrower. The System Profiler can be found in the Utilities folder of the Applications folder.
5. Click the Software heading. 6. Click the Applications subheading. The System Profile application searches out all applications on the OS X system and shows them in the main pane of the System Profile window. 7. Scroll down in the main pane, and find the System Profile application line. 8. Click the System Profiler application line in the main pane to select it. Detailed information about the application appears in the small pane below the main pane.
cross-reference
•
More features of the System Profiler are intro duced in Task 238, “Using More System Profiler Features.”
512
Task
238
notes
• • • • •
•
The keyboard shortcut for the Short Report setting is Ô-1.
Part 19
Using More System Profiler Features
A
pple’s System Profiler is an excellent tool for finding the current status of your OS X system’s hardware and software configuration and issues. This task shows how to change the level of detail reported by System Profiler, as well as how to save or export the current system profile to a file. 1. From the menu bar, choose Apple ➪ About This Mac to display the
About This Mac window, as shown in Figure 238-1.
Figure 238-1: The About This Mac window.
The keyboard shortcut for the Extended Report setting is Ô-3. The keyboard shortcut for the Standard Report setting is Ô-2. Rich text preserves original text formatting and layout options, while plain text simply converts all text to a single style that is readable by virtually any system. If you are attempting to run the System Profiler and the application unexpectedly quits, check to be sure that you have the Helvetica and Helvetica Neue fonts installed. These are required for the application to run on Mac OS X.
2. Click the More Info button to start the Apple System Profiler application, as shown in Figure 238-2.
The Network area of the System Profiler is an easy place to identify your IP address.
Figure 238-2: The Apple System Profile window.
3. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Short Report. The two subheadings under Software disappear, and the Logs and Network headings also disappear from the Contents column. 4. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Extended Report to display the detailed version of the System Profile, as shown in Figure 238-3.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help
513
Task
238
tips
•
Figure 238-3: The Apple System Profile window showing the
•
Extended Report view.
5. From the menu bar, choose View ➪ Standard Report to display the standard version of the System Profile, as shown in Figure 238-2. 6. To save the current status of your OS X system, from the menu bar choose File ➪ Save. The Save dialog appears, as shown in Figure 238-4.
•
Clicking the downwardpointing arrow to the right of the Save As field in Figure 238-4 opens the File Browser dialog. Export your system profile for the IT department and send it to them when you are having computer prob lems. It may give them the clues they need to get you back up and running. In the System Profiler, if you are not seeing a piece of hardware you’ve just connected or a piece of software you’ve just installed, you may need to refresh it. Refresh the System Profiler by using View ➪ Refresh or Ô-R.
cross-reference Figure 238-4: Saving the system profile status.
7. In the Save dialog, enter a name in the Save As field, and choose a
folder from the Where pop-up menu.
8. Choose a file format from the File Format pop-up menu. 9. To export the current system profile, from the menu bar choose File ➪ Export ➪ Rich Text (to save the file as a rich text format file) or File ➪ Export ➪ Plain Text (to save the file as a plain text format file). 10. Choose a destination folder from the Where pop-up menu, then click the Save button.
•
The System Profiler is intro duced in Task 237, “Finding Detailed Information about Your System.”
514
Task
239
Part 19
Checking Your Connection Using the Network Utility
O notes
•
•
• •
When pinging an address, you can use the IP address (which is a maximum of 12 numbers, such as 192.168.1.1) or the domain name (which is the address in words, such as www.yahoo.com).
ne of the most frustrating things that can happen to you and your computer today is for the network connection not to work. Sometimes it is hard to tell if it is your home network or your Internet service provider (ISP). The Network Utility is a great tool for testing your network connection and troubleshooting any problem you may have to determine if it is an internal network problem or an external network problem. This task shows you how to ping another computer (that is, verify that the IP address exists and that it is functioning properly) and how to trace the route your network connection travels. 1. Select Go ➪ Utilities from the menu bar to open the Utilities
window, as shown in Figure 239-1.
The ping feature will not only tell you if you are reaching another computer, but also the time it takes to reach that machine. Look at Figure 239-4, and you’ll see the number of millisec onds (ms) it takes to reach Yahoo! For more information on pinging, open the Terminal application and type man ping. For more information about how to use Traceroute, open the Terminal application and type man traceroute.
Figure 239-1: The Utilities folder is stored within the Applications folder.
2. Double-click the Network Utility icon to open the Network Utility, as shown in Figure 239-2.
Figure 239-2: The Network Utility aides in troubleshooting many different problems.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 3. Click the Info tab to show your network interface information, including the IP address of your computer.
515
Task
4. Click the Ping tab to display the Ping pane, as shown in Figure 239-3.
239
tips
• •
Figure 239-3: Pinging tells you if your machine can
reach another through the network.
5. Type www.yahoo.com in the “Please enter the network address to ping” field, and press Return, or click the Ping tab. 6. Click the Stop button so that your computer stops trying to reach Yahoo! if it hasn’t stopped after a set number of pings.
•
7. Click the Traceroute tab to show the Traceroute panel. 8. Type www.yahoo.com in the “Please enter the network address to trace an internet route to” field to see how many hops your computer makes before landing at it’s destination, as shown in Figure 239-4.
You can ping a computer that is inside your home network to see if your home network is working correctly. If you are having trouble with an Internet connection, try pinging a computer out side of your home network such as www.yahoo. com. That way you can determine if it’s an Internet service provider (ISP) prob lem or a browser problem. The Info panel of the Network Utility gives you transfer statistics so that you can see how many packets have been sent and how many have been received.
cross-references
•
Figure 239-4: You may go half way round the world just
•
for your computer to talk to one on the other side of town.
•
The tasks of networking two computers or many comput ers together are discussed in Part 7, “Networking.” You can visit www. yahoo.com with Safari, which is discussed in Task 121, “Starting Safari.” For information on using the Terminal application, see Task 227, “Using Terminal to Start an Application.”
516
Task
240
notes
• •
• •
•
Apple’s Software Update only keeps software from Apple up-to-date. Software from other companies must be updated separately.
Part 19
Running Software Update
A
s a means of keeping your OS X system up-to-date, Apple includes a Software Update application as part of its System Preferences. The Software Update application checks the current OS X software with Apple, shows you any new updates, and installs them for you. This task shows how to use Software Update. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock or choose System
Preferences from the Apple menu to open the System Preferences
window, as shown in Figure 240-1.
You can view a list of recently installed updates by clicking the tab marked Installed Updates. This provides you with a history of what you recently downloaded. Your OS X system needs an active network connection to check Apple’s servers for updates to system software. If there is nothing new to update, the Software Update window displays “Last check: No new soft ware updates were avail able” when the check is completed. If the software update requires a restart, a dialog appears at the end of the installation that explains that the system needs to be restarted. Click the Restart button in the dialog to restart the OS X system.
Figure 240-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the System row near the bottom of the System Preferences window, click the Software Update icon to display the Software Update window, as shown in Figure 240-2.
Figure 240-2: The Software Update window.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 3. Click the Check Now button. The Software Update window shows a progress bar and the phrase “Status: Checking for new software.”
517
Task
4. If there is an available update to software, a new window appears, as shown in Figure 240-3.
240
Figure 240-3: The Software Update window showing a new update.
5. Click the title of a software update to see a description of the update in the lower pane, as shown in Figure 240-3. 6. Check the checkbox in the Install column next to each item you want to install. 7. Click the Install button in the lower right of the Software Update pane to install the selected software. The software is downloaded and installed automatically.
cross-references
•
•
You can download an installer for a software update and install it at a later time, as shown in Task 242, “Downloading Installers through Software Update.” If there are updates that do not apply to your system, you may want to disable those updates, as dis cussed in Task 241, “Disabling Unwanted Updates.”
518
Task
241
notes
• •
• •
•
Automatic checking for software updates does not install software on your OS X system. It merely checks to see if there are any new updates.
Part 19
Disabling Unwanted Updates
A
pple’s Software Update automatically checks for software updates the first time OS X is launched on a new OS X system, and it is set to automatically check for new software from Apple at weekly intervals. This task shows how to change the frequency with which Software Update checks for new software and how to set it to ignore a given update. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 241-1.
Software Update only checks for Apple software. If you have third-party software on your system, you will have to use the third party’s pre ferred method of getting updates. For example, you may go to the Help menu of the software and click on “Downloads and Updates,” as in Microsoft Word. The keyboard shortcut to ignore a software update is Ô-Delete. You can view a list of recently installed updates by clicking the tab marked Installed Updates. This provides you with a history of what you recently downloaded.
Figure 241-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the System row near the bottom of the System Preferences window, click the Software Update icon to display the Software Update window, as shown in Figure 241-2.
Your OS X system needs an active network connection to check Apple’s servers for updates to system software.
Figure 241-2: The Software Update window.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 3. Click the “Check for updates” pop-up menu, and choose Daily, Weekly (the default setting), or Monthly.
519
Task
4. Check the “Download important updates in the background” checkbox if you want important updates automatically downloaded to your OS X system. 5. To turn off automatic checking entirely, uncheck the Check for updates checkbox. 6. To set Software Update to ignore a certain update, first click the Check Now button to run Software Update.
tips
•
7. Click the title of the update in the Software Update window to select it. 8. From the menu bar, choose Update ➪ Ignore Update, as shown in Figure 241-3. The chosen software update will be ignored and not shown again.
241
•
Figure 241-3: Setting Software update to ignore a chosen
update.
•
If you do not have broad band access or a connec tion that is always on, you may want to only check for updates manually. If there is nothing new to update, the Software Update window displays “Last check: No new soft ware updates were avail able” when the check is completed. If the software update requires a restart, a dialog appears at the end of the install that explains that the system needs to be restarted. Click the Restart button in the dialog to restart the OS X system.
cross-references
•
•
You can download an installer for a software update and install it at a later time, as shown in Task 242, “Downloading Installers through Software Update.” The Software Update appli cation is introduced in Task 240, “Running Software Update.”
520
Task
242
Part 19
Downloading Installers through Software Update
T notes
• •
By retaining a copy of the installer, you make it easier to update multiple comput ers without each machine having to download each update.
he Software Update application downloads and installs software updates in a single action and deletes the installer afterwards. There may be times when you don’t have time to install the update, but you want to download it to your system and install it later. This task shows how to use Software Update to download installers to your system. 1. Click the System Preferences icon in the Dock to open the System
Preferences window, as shown in Figure 242-1.
If you have trouble down loading an update through the Software Update pane, you can go directly to the Apple download site at www.info.apple. com/support/ downloads.html and download any of the update packages.
Figure 242-1: The System Preferences window.
2. In the System row of the System Preferences window, click the Software Update icon to display the Software Update window, as shown in Figure 242-2.
Figure 242-2: The Software Update window.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 3. Click the Check Now button to run Software Update and check for new updates, as shown in Figure 242-3.
521
Task
242
tips
• •
Figure 242-3: The Software Update window
with a new update for the OS X system.
•
4. Click the title of an update in the Software Update window to select it. 5. From the menu bar, choose Update ➪ Download Only. The chosen update is downloaded to your OS X system. 6. If you do not see the downloaded update package on your desktop, press Ô-F to open the Find dialog.
Software packages have an icon that resembles a cardboard box with the top open, as shown in Figure 242-4. If you want to retain a copy of downloaded installers, but want to conserve hard disk space, consider down loading the installer and then burning it to a CD or DVD. This not only preserves disk space, it also retains a copy of the installer in case something goes wrong with your computer. Mac OS X software installa tions require that you be an administrator on the sys tem and will prompt you for an administrator password before installing the software.
7. Enter part of the software package name in the search field, and press the Return key. A window shows the results of the search. 8. Click the name of the software package when you see it in the Find results, and the bottom strip of the Find results window shows the selected file’s location on the OS X system, as shown in Figure 242-4.
cross-references
• • •
Figure 242-4: Finding a downloaded package.
The Software Update application is introduced in Task 240, “Running Software Update.” Searching for files on OS X is shown in Task 38, “Searching for Files.” You can choose not to see a given update, if you do not want to update that software. This technique is discussed in Task 241, “Disabling Unwanted Updates.”
522
Task
243
notes
•
• •
Force-quitting an applica tion causes it to stop exactly where it is, without allowing the application the chance to save its current information or status. For this reason, try to quit an application normally, and use Force Quit only if the application doesn’t respond normally.
Part 19
Force-Quitting an Application
A
pple’s OS X is a Unix-based operating system. Unlike previous versions of the Macintosh OS, an application that is unstable and crashes in OS X does not affect the other applications or the operating system. However, a hung (stalled) or otherwise misbehaving application can take up desktop space by showing windows that no longer respond, and can prevent you from restarting the application. This task shows how to forcibly quit an application through the graphical user interface (GUI). (Task 244 shows you how to find and quit an application through the command line.) 1. Start Safari by clicking the Safari icon in the Dock. The application
launches and opens a browser window, as shown in Figure 243-1.
The keyboard shortcut to open the Force Quit Application window is Ô-Option-Esc. If you prefer not to forcequit an application, or if this seems like too much trouble, you can always force-restart your system. Use the left-pointing trian gle button on the front or side of a desktop com puter, or press the Ctrl-ÔPower button on a laptop.
Figure 243-1: A browser window on the desktop.
2. Double-click the Safari window title bar to minimize the window. The browser window shrinks and appears as an icon in the Dock.
caution
•
If you force-restart your system, you will lose all changes that were made to any applications you have open. It may be wiser to force-quit just the applica tion that is giving you problems.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help
523
3. Open the Force Quit window by choosing Apple ➪ Force Quit from the menu bar. The Force Quit Applications window appears, as shown in Figure 243-2.
Task
243
Figure 243-2: The Force Quit Applications window.
tips
•
4. Click the Safari line in the Force Quit Applications window to select it, as shown in Figure 243-3. Figure 243-3: The Force Quit Applications window with the chosen application selected.
•
The Force Quit Applications window is shown in front of everything else on the desktop, including the Dock. This is intentional to prevent the Force Quit Applications window from being hidden behind a win dow belonging to a hung or malfunctioning application you want to quit. If an application is malfunc tioning and your mouse pointer is a pinwheel that won’t stop, click somewhere on the desktop to activate the Finder so that you can easily force quit.
5. Click the Force Quit button. The Safari application quits. 6. Press Ô-W or click the red button in the title bar of the Force Quit Applications window to close the Force Quit Applications window. 7. Another way to force-quit an application is to Ctrl-Option-click the application icon in the Dock, and choose Force Quit from the popup menu, as shown in Figure 243-4.
Figure 243-4: Force Quit an application by Ctrl-Option-clicking the Dock icon.
cross-reference
•
Using the Terminal appli cation to force-quit an application is shown in Task 244, “Force-Quitting an Application from the Terminal.”
524
Task
244
Part 19
Force-Quitting an Application from Terminal
A notes
•
• •
Force-quitting or killing an application causes it to stop exactly where it is, without allowing the appli cation the chance to save its current information or status. For this reason, try to quit an application nor mally, and use Force Quit or kill only if the application doesn’t respond normally.
pple’s OS X is a Unix-based operating system and includes command-line access to OS X through the Terminal application. From the command line, you can do many things normally done on the desktop. This task shows how to find and quit an application through the command line. 1. Start Safari by clicking the Safari icon in the Dock. The application
launches and opens a browser window, as shown in Figure 244-1.
If you force-quit the Classic environment, it will quit all Classic applications with out saving or shutting down properly. If you have attempted to force-quit the Classic envi ronment because it has hung or is frozen, but have not succeeded, look for the TruBlue application in the Process Viewer. This does not show up in the Force Quit window, but may be the culprit.
Figure 244-1: A browser window on the desktop.
caution
•
The kill –9 command is extremely powerful, only use this on processes you can identify and truly want to stop.
2. Double-click the Safari window title bar to minimize the window. The browser window shrinks and appears as an icon in the Dock. 3. Open the Applications folder. 4. Open the Utilities folder. 5. Double-click the Terminal icon to start the Terminal application, as shown in Figure 244-2. 6. Stretch the Terminal window to wider than its default by clicking and dragging the bottom-right corner, just as you would resize any other window.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help
525
Task
244
tips
•
Figure 244-2: The Terminal application is located in the
Applications/Utilities folder.
•
7. Type the following command in the Terminal window at the prompt: ps –aux | more The Terminal displays the active running processes, as shown in Figure 244-3.
If an application does not quit in response to the “kill” command, use the modifier “kill –9,” followed by a space and the process ID (PID) number. You can often determine the PID of an application in a list of running processes by looking for the applica tion name in the far-right column of the Terminal window.
Figure 244-3: The Terminal window showing active processes.
8. Find the PID (process ID) of the application you need to forcibly stop. In Figure 244-3, the PID you are looking for is 472. 9. Type the following code at the Terminal prompt: kill 472
cross-references
• •
The Safari application quits, and the minimized browser window vanishes from the Dock, as shown in Figure 244-4.
• Figure 244-4: Killing or force-quitting an application closes all windows of that
application.
The Terminal application is discussed in Task 214, “Starting Terminal.” Force-quitting an applica tion in the OSX GUI is dis cussed in Task 243, “Force-Quitting an Application.” For more information about using Unix in a Mac envi ronment, read Unix for Mac: Your visual blueprint to maximizing the founda tion of MacOS X by Sandra Henry-Stocker and Kynn Bartlett (Indianapolis: John Wiley & Sons, 2003).
526
Task
245
notes
• •
•
The keyboard shortcut to open the Mac Help window is Ô-?. If you are unable to find the help you need in Mac Help, consider visiting Apple’s Discussions home page at http:// discussions.info. apple.com. You may also review frequently asked questions (FAQs) from within that site.
Part 19
Launching the Help Viewer
A
pple provides a Help application with OS X. The files used by this Help Viewer are installed on your local OS X system and are available even if your OS X system is not connected to the Internet. This task shows how to start and use the Help Viewer. 1. From the menu bar, choose Help ➪ Mac Help, as shown in
Figure 245-1.
Figure 245-1: The Mac Help command in the desktop’s Help menu.
2. The Mac Help application window opens, as shown in Figure 245-2.
When you search Help, the results are ranked in order of relevance to your search criteria. This can be changed by clicking one of the col umn headings to resort the results.
Figure 245-2: The Mac Help window.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 3. Apple provides a short list of common problems and items that may help you in the Mac Help window. If you do not see what you need, you’ll need to search the Help window. Click the Search field to select it.
527
Task
245
4. Type a word or phrase you want to search for. For example, search for “keyboard shortcuts.” 5. Press the Return key. The Help window shows the pages of the installed help files that have the phrase you searched for. 6. Click one of the entries. The title and a short description of the Help page appear in the bottom pane of the Help window, as shown in Figure 245-3.
tips
•
•
Figure 245-3: The Mac Help window showing a search result.
7. Click the title of the entry in the bottom pane to display the Help page.
•
Some applications may override the Help menu with their own menu (such as Microsoft Word). Click the Finder icon in the Dock to switch to the desktop, then use Help ➪ Mac Help or Ô-? to open the Mac Help Viewer. Many applications use the Mac Help system to pro vide help for their thirdparty applications. If you need to see a list of each application that provides help through the Mac sys tem, click Library in the menu bar of the Help application. There you will get a list of all applications that have help. Click the Home button in the toolbar to see the initial Mac Help welcome screen.
8. Click the Back button to go back to the search results if the entry you’re looking at does not answer your question.
cross-reference
•
Since the Help seen by the Help viewer is installed locally on your OS X system, it may not have the latest answers to problems. Sherlock can search Apple’s online knowledge base of technical specifications and troubleshooting solutions if you have access to a live Internet connection. Using Sherlock to search AppleCare’s online knowl edge base is discussed in Task 98, “Searching AppleCare with Sherlock.”
528
Task
246
notes
• • •
You can only repair disk permissions on a drive or volume with OS X installed. You cannot repair permis sions on a write-protected disc or a disk with open files. To repair permissions on the startup disk, you must boot from another volume such as the OS X installa tion CD or an external hard drive.
Part 19
Getting First Aid
T
here may be times when your OS X system behaves oddly. You may not be able to start an application, open a file with the application that created it, or experience other similar behavior. If an OS X system is acting oddly, it can be because some of the files may have their permissions set incorrectly. Apple includes a Disk Utility application that can check and fix file permissions. This task shows how to use the Disk Utility to check and fix file permissions. 1. Find an OS X Install disc or Repair disk. 2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. The disk
appears on the desktop.
3. Restart the OS X system, and hold the C key down to boot from the CD-ROM drive. 4. Open the disk by double-clicking the disk icon. 5. Open the Applications folder, as shown in Figure 246-1.
Figure 246-1: The Applications folder of the OS X Install CD.
6. Open the Utilities folder, as shown in Figure 246-2.
Figure 246-2: The Disk Utility application in the Utilities folder of the OS X Install CD.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 7. Double-click the Disk Utility icon to start the Disk Utility application, as shown in Figure 246-3.
529
Task
246
tips
•
• Figure 246-3: The Disk Utility window.
8. From the left column, select a disk you want to work with. The main pane now shows three tabs at the top.
•
9. Click the First Aid tab, and click the Verify Disk Permissions button. The Disk Utility checks the permissions of all files on the selected disk, as shown in Figure 246-4.
If repairing permissions doesn’t help, you may need to wipe the Parameter RAM (PRAM). To do so, restart your OS X system, and hold down Ô-Option-P-R at the same time until you hear a bong from the OS X sys tem. Release the four keys, and let the system restart normally. It is good practice to run the verify permissions util ity on a new installation of OS X . There can be permis sions that are not as they should be out of the box. If verifying and repairing the permissions and wiping your PRAM do not solve the problem, you may want to invest in a third-party utility to analyze and repair your disk.
cross-references
• •
Figure 246-4: The Disk Utility window verifying disk permissions
on the selected volume.
10. If the report shows there are file permission errors, click the Repair Disk Permissions button to repair errors.
•
If repairing the file permis sions doesn’t help, you may need to restore system software as discussed in Task 247, “Restoring System Software.” If all else fails, you may need to erase the disk and rein stall the operating system and other software. Erasing a disk is discussed in Task 248, “Erasing a Disk.” Drives and volumes are dis cussed in Task 10, “Ejecting a Removable Disc.”
530
Task
247
Part 19
Restoring System Software
A
pple’s Disk Utility can not only check and fix disk permissions, but can also restore Apple software that has been corrupted or accidentally deleted. This task shows how to use the Disk Utility application to restore software. 1. Find an OS X Install disk or Repair disk.
notes
• • •
• •
Choose a disk image by clicking the Image button next to the Source field to show a file browser sheet. Checking the Erase Destination checkbox erases the target disk before restoring software.
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. The disk
appears on the desktop.
3. Open the disk by double-clicking the disk icon. 4. Open the Applications folder, as shown in Figure 247-1.
Problems on your Mac OS X computer may be caused by any or all of the follow ing: your hard disk drive, specifically your Mac OS X boot volume; your permis sions on some of your System files or folders; or your System, Application, or user-specific cache files. The Restore tab in the Disk Utility is used primarily for restoring your system soft ware, although it could restore an entire hard drive image.
Figure 247-1: The Applications folder of the OS X Install CD.
5. Open the Utilities folder, as shown in Figure 247-2.
If you would like to restore your hard drive to exactly the way it was when you bought the machine, you can use your Apple Software restore disks after restoring your operating system.
Figure 247-2: The Disk Utility application in the Utilities folder of the OS X Install CD.
6. Double-click the Disk Utility icon to start the Disk Utility application.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 7. Click the Restore tab in the Disk Utility window, as shown in Figure 247-3.
531
Task
247
tip
•
Before restoring your soft ware, you may want to try something a little easier and less invasive on your system such as wiping the Parameter RAM (PRAM). To do so, restart your OS X system, and hold down Ô-Option-P-R at the same time until you hear a bong from the OS X system. Release the four keys, and let the system restart normally.
Figure 247-3: The Restore tab of the Disk Utility window.
8. In the left column, choose a disk to restore from and drag its icon to the Source field on the main pane. 9. In the left column, choose a disk to restore to and drag its icon to the Destination field on the main pane, as shown in Figure 247-4.
cross-reference
•
Figure 247-4: The Disk Utility window ready to restore software.
10. Click the Restore button to restore system software.
The Disk Utility is discussed in Task 246, “Getting First Aid.”
532
Task
248
Part 19
Erasing a Disk
A
pple’s Disk Utility can check and fix disk permissions, can restore corrupted software, and can also erase disks or volumes. This task shows how to use the Disk Utility application to erase a disk or volume. 1. Find an OS X Install disk or Repair disk.
notes
•
•
• • •
Erasing a disk with multiple volumes creates a blank disk containing one empty volume. The process doesn’t keep the volumes and erase them; it erases the existence of the vol umes on the disk.
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. The disk
appears on the desktop.
3. Open the disk by double-clicking the disk icon. 4. Open the Applications folder, as shown in Figure 248-1.
You can also use the Disk Utility to reformat an external hard drive (such as a FireWire drive). After launching the Disk Utility, choose the drive from the left column and select the Erase tab. Then, follow the prompts. You cannot erase your startup disk if you are boot ing from it. You must boot from another disk to erase the startup disk. UFS represents the “Unix File System,” HFS represents the “Mac OS Standard,” and HFS Plus represents the “Mac OS Extended.”
Figure 248-1: The Applications folder of the OS X Install CD.
5. Open the Utilities folder, as shown in Figure 248-2.
When formatting a volume for OS X and all that it promises, it is best to use HFS Plus as your format.
Figure 248-2: The Disk Utility application in the Utilities folder of the OS X Install CD.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 6. Double-click the Disk Utility icon to start the Disk Utility application.
533
Task
7. Click the Erase tab in the Disk Utility window, as shown in Figure 248-3.
248
tips
• • •
Figure 248-3: The Erase tab of the Disk Utility window.
8. Choose a disk or a volume from the left column. 9. Click the Volume format drop-down list in the main pane to choose a volume format. 10. Click the Erase button to erase the selected disk and format it as a new blank disk or volume of the chosen format.
Back up a disk before eras ing it. That way, you will have no regrets later. If you have a UFS volume you’ve created, it will not be recognized by Classic applications or Classic itself. A Unix File System (UFS) volume is case-sensitive. That means you can have all of the following files in one folder: “my file,” “My File,” “my File,” and “MY FILE.” These would all be seen as different files, whereas in the HFS Plus system, you would not be allowed to place any of these files in the same folder with one of the oth ers because the system would see it as a repeated name.
cross-references
• •
The Disk Utility is discussed in Task 246, “Getting First Aid.” Drives and volumes are discussed in Task 10, “Ejecting a Removable Disc.”
534
Task
249
notes
• •
•
Remember your new pass word. You’ll need it when installing new software.
Part 19
Resetting Your Forgotten Password
O
S X is a multiuser operating system. You use a user account with a login name and a password to access an OS X system, even if you are the only user of the system and you’ve set the system to automatically log you in when the system restarts. This task shows how to reset your password if you forget it. 1. Find an OS X Install CD. 2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. The disk
appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 249-1.
You can prevent unautho rized access to your system by users who have the OS X Install CD by invoking the Open Firmware Password Protection feature available for many Macintosh com puters. This feature is avail able for Mac OS 10.2 and later. This feature is turned off by default. If you have multiple Administrators on your machine, you could have another administrator change your password for you.
Figure 249-1: The OS X Install CD on the desktop.
caution
•
3. Restart the OS X system, and hold the C key down to boot from the CD drive. The Installer automatically starts and displays the Select Language window, as shown in Figure 249-2.
Anyone with an OS X Install CD and access to your OS X system for a few min utes can reset your user account password and log in as you.
Figure 249-2: Ignore the screen asking you to pick a language.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 4. Ignore the Installer Select Language window. From the Installer menu, choose Installer ➪ Reset Password. The Reset Password window appears showing the drives and volumes on the local OS X system (see Figure 249-3).
535
Task
249
tip
•
Figure 249-3: Reset the password from the Installer menu.
5. Click the icon of the drive containing the OS X installation your user account is on. The icon is highlighted when it is selected. 6. From the “Select a user” drop-down list, choose your account. 7. Click the “Enter a new password” field and enter your new password, then click the “Reenter the new password” field and type it again, as shown in Figure 249-4.
In general, you should avoid obvious passwords, such as your name, your pet’s name, or the name of anyone you live with, your birthday, words found in the dictionary, or other obvious choices. You could take two or more words and type them together, with mixed capitalization, such as TwoOrMore. Or, take a sen tence you’ll remember and use the first letter of each word as your password. A password should be easy for you to remember with out writing it down, but hard to guess.
cross-references
•
Figure 249-4: Enter your new password twice for safety.
8. Click the Save button to save your new password.
•
9. Press Ô-Q to quit the Reset Password application, then restart your OS X system.
•
Resetting the root pass word is discussed in Task 250, “Resetting the Root Password.” Logins and setting up auto matic login are discussed in Task 1, “Logging In, Setting Automatic Login, and Logging Off.” Changing another user’s password is discussed in Task 47, “Changing a User’s Password.”
536
Task
250
notes
• •
•
Remember your new pass word. You’ll need it when installing new software. When resetting a root pass word, remember to select “System Administrator” because this actually refers to the root user. Be sure that you do not confuse it with a normal Admin account.
Part 19
Resetting the Root Password
O
S X is a multiuser operating system. In OS X, you use a user account with a login name and a password to access an OS X system, even if you are the only user of the system. The user with the most authority is the system administrator, who has access to see and do everything on the system. Since the system administrator account is rarely used (or activated), this task shows how to reset your root password if you forget it. 1. Find an OS X Install CD. 2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. The disk
appears on the desktop, as shown in Figure 250-1.
The system administrator account (or the root account) has the ultimate control on the computer. Make sure that you make this password something that is easy for you to remember, but hard for others to guess.
Figure 250-1: The OS X Install CD on the desktop.
caution
•
Anyone with an OS X Install CD and access to your OS X system for a few min utes can reset your user account password and log in as you.
3. Restart the OS X system, and hold the C key down to boot from the CD drive. The Installer automatically starts and displays the Select Language window, as shown in Figure 250-2. 4. Ignore the Installer Select Language window. From the Installer menu, choose Installer ➪ Reset Password. The Reset Password window appears showing the drives and volumes on the local OS X system (see Figure 250-3). 5. Click the icon of the drive containing the OS X installation your user account is on. The icon is highlighted when it is selected. 6. From the “Select a user” drop-down list, choose System Administrator (root).
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help
537
Task
250
tip
•
Figure 250-2: Ignore the screen asking you to pick a language.
Try determining a few levels of security and using the same password for each task on that level. For example, all Web pages that involve your credit card get password A, but those that only want you to regis ter for ease-of-use pur poses get password B. The security of your computer is probably going to require the same level as password A. Remember, if a person can log on as the system administrator, that person can get to anything.
Figure 250-3: Reset the password from the Installer menu.
7. Click the “Enter a new password” field and enter your new password, then click the “Reenter the new password” field and type it again, as shown in Figure 250-4.
cross-references
• •
Figure 250-4: Enter your new password twice for safety.
8. Click the Save button to save your new password. 9. Press Ô-Q to quit the Reset Password application, then restart your OS X system.
•
Logins and setting up auto matic login are discussed in Task 1, “Logging In, Setting Automatic Login, and Logging Off.” Resetting a non-root password is discussed in Task 249, “Resetting Your Forgotten Password.” Enabling the root user and setting the system adminis trator password for the first time are explained in Task 54, “Enabling the System Administrator Account.”
538
Task
251
notes
•
•
You can’t put a file in the Trash if the file is locked. You can’t empty the Trash unless you have Read & Write access to every file in the Trash or you are an administrator.
Part 19
Deleting a Problem File
I
f you are trying to delete a file, you may run into problems. You may not be able to add a file to the Trash. Those files are like the gum stuck to the bottom of your shoe. They require a bit more work to remove. Lucky for us, we can remove problem files without getting our hands dirty. This task shows you how to delete a problem file. 1. Create a new file; for example press Shift-Ô-3 to take a screen shot of the current desktop. The file is saved to the desktop as “Picture 1,” as shown in Figure 251-1.
If you choose Finder ➪ Secure Empty Trash, you will not be able to recover the deleted files, ever.
Figure 251-1: The Picture 1 file icon on the desktop.
2. Click the Picture 1 icon to select it.
caution
•
Make sure that you really want to dispose of a file before emptying the Trash. You can recover files with third-party software appli cations, but it is not as easy as it sounds.
3. From the menu bar, choose File ➪ Get Info to show the Info window for the file. 4. Click the Locked checkbox. A small padlock appears next to the file’s icon, as shown in Figure 251-2. 5. Drag the Picture 1 icon to the Trash. An error message appears (see Figure 251-3) telling you that you can’t move the file to the Trash because the file is locked. 6. Click the OK button to close the error message, and uncheck the Locked checkbox in the Info window for Picture 1.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help
539
Task
251
tips
•
Figure 251-2: The Info window
for the Picture 1 file.
Figure 251-3: The error message for trying to delete a locked file.
• 7. Click the Ownership & Permissions triangle, then the Details triangle inside the Ownership and Permissions section to display the dialog shown in Figure 251-4.
Steps 1 through 5 in this task show how to lock a file so you know how and where to unlock a file in order to delete it in the future. If you have administrative privileges, you can delete any file regardless of the owner. If you do not have administrative privileges, you will need to know the user name and password of an administrative account.
Figure 251-4: The Get Info window showing the Ownership & Permissions details.
8. You may not be able to add a file in the Trash because you are not the owner of a file, as shown in the Owner drop-down list in the Details section. Click the padlock icon if it is locked to unlock the Ownership & Permissions setting. 9. Set the owner to your account, and set access to Read & Write if it is not already set as such. 10. Put the file in the Trash, and you can now empty the Trash.
cross-references
• •
Taking a screen shot is dis cussed in Task 11, “Taking and Printing Screen Shots.” Deleting a file is discussed in Task 36, “Deleting and Undeleting Files and Folders.”
540
Task
252
notes
•
• •
• •
You won’t have to create a new keychain for every password. Often you can just add a new password to your user account keychain. Create a new keychain if you want an additional layer of security for the password or passwords in the new keychain.
Part 19
Controlling Access with Keychain
K
eychain is an application that keeps track of all of your passwords for Web pages, Mail, and other applications. By using Keychain, you can keep all of your passwords in one place and release any one of them to a program just by knowing your Keychain password. This task shows you how to control access with Keychain. 1. Select Go ➪ Utilities from the menu bar to open the Utilities window, as shown in Figure 252-1.
Your default keychain pass word is your OS X login password. A keychain is created in OS X for each user account. The default keychain user name is the user account short name, which is referred to as login in the Keychain Access window. You can create additional keychains for different types of information (such as all passwords you use at work, as opposed to the ones you use for personal use).
Figure 252-1: The Utilities folder is stored within the Applications folder.
2. Double-click the Keychain Access icon to examine your keychains. 3. Select the Safari Forms AutoFill item in the upper pane of the Keychain login window. 4. Click the Attributes tab to view the window shown in Figure 252-2.
An application must be keychain-aware to interact correctly with the keychain.
Figure 252-2: The attributes of a keychain item describe what it does.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Getting Help 5. Click the Show Password checkbox at the bottom of the Attributes pane.
541
Task
6. Enter the password you use to log into your computer. This is the default password for your login keychain. 7. The password you need is displayed as shown in Figure 252-3. This password is what you would need if you wanted to access the Safari Autofill database directly.
tips
• •
Figure 252-3: The password is stored in the keychain
and can be extracted.
8. Click the Access Control tab in the Keychain window for the Safari Forms AutoFill item. The Access Control pane is shown in Figure 252-4.
252
•
OS X will ask you whether to add a given password to your default keychain when you use one in a Web form. After performing some system updates, you will be prompted each time the keychain needs to be accessed in an application such as Mail. Simply click on the Always Allow button so that you will not be prompted each time you check your mail. You can store personal information such as bank account information and Personal Identification Numbers (PINs) in the keychain.
cross-references Figure 252-4: Access to this item is granted to the application listed.
9. Click the “Ask for Keychain password” checkbox. You will now have to only enter one password when you want your forms on the Internet completed, and that information is safe.
• •
You can add the Keychain Access application to the Dock by following the steps in Task 19, “Adding Applications, Folders, and Files to the Dock.” The Keychain Access application is introduced in Task 14, “Setting Keychain Preferences.”
Index
Index
Symbols ^ (caret), defined, 63 Ô (Command) key, 57, 63 $ (dollar sign), Terminal, 460 / (forward slash), Terminal, 463 ~ (tilde), Terminal, 460
A About This Mac command, 510 About This Mac window, 510–511 accented characters, inserting, 133 Access Control pane, 541 Access Control tab, 541 Access Privileges, .Mac account, 191 accessibility features. See also speech services key repeat rate, setting, 504–505 keyboard preferences, setting, 504–505 mouse preferences, setting, 502–503 speaking aloud, enabling/disabling, 66–67, 500–501 speaking aloud, starting/stopping, 490–491 speech preferences, setting, 66–67, 492–493, 500–501 system voice, selecting, 66–67, 492–493 trackpad preferences, setting, 502–503 accessibility features, speech recognition activating (Escape key), 66 choosing command groups, 66–67, 498–499 enabling/disabling, 66, 494–495 preferences, setting, 66–67, 496–497
Accounts icon, 98 Accounts pane. See System Preferences window, Accounts pane Action Menu button, 37 Add button, 414 Add Chapter button, 456 Add Fonts command, 69 Add Key Mapping dialog box, 473 Add Keyboard Shortcut button, 507 Add keyboard shortcut dialog box, 507 add server dialog box, 483 add service dialog box, 483 Address Bar, hiding/showing (Ô-Shift-|), 268 Address Book, Mail application. See Mail application, Address Book Adobe Photoshop, 396–397 Adobe Photoshop Elements, 396–397 Advanced menu (iMovie), 441, 451 Advanced pane, 60 Advanced tab, 61 Advanced tab, Trash warning, 79 age limits, .Mac account, 188 AIM screen name, iChat, 290–291 airplane flights, searching, 206–207 AirPort Base Station, creating, 162–163 closed network, 156–157 computer-to-computer, 152–153 configuring, 144–145, 152–153 enabling/disabling, 144–145 public network, 154–155
AirPort status icon, 152 AirPort Status menu Create Network command, 152–153 joining a network, 154–155 Other command, 157 alarms. See reminders albums, photo. See iPhoto, albums alerts, 10–11, 501. See also speech services aliases adding to sidebar, 18–19 applications, 18–19, 40–41 desktop, 19, 40–41 Dock, 19, 40–41 files, 40–41 files, searching by, 84–85 folders, 40–41 hard disks, 84 searching for, 84–85 American Heritage Dictionary, 208 animation, 38–39, 448–449 anniversary information, Mail application Address Book, 259 Announce Slideshow button (.Mac account), 429 ANSI terminal type, selecting, 463 Anti Aliasing, 468 AOL Buddy list, displaying (Ô-1), 290 Appearance options, 398–399 Apple Installer, 24–25 Apple menu About This Mac command, 510 Force Quit command (ÔOption-Esc), 47, 523 Log Out command, 2–3 Recent Items command, 138–139 Restart command, 6–7 Shut Down command, 6–7
546 Apple menu (continued) Sleep command, 6–7 System Preferences command, 2–3
Apple menu, Force Quit
command (Ô-Option-Esc), 47
Apple Music Store. See iTunes,
Music Store Apple Phone Book, 202–203 Apple software, 516–517, 530–531. See also software Apple Speakable Items Is On button, 495, 496
Apple System Profiler, 510–513
Apple technical support,
searching, 212–213 AppleCare channel, 212–213 AppleTalk AirPort, enabling/disabling, 144–145 Ethernet, enabling/disabling, 142–143
and network browser, 158
printers, adding, 170–171
application associations data files, 74–75 image files, 80–81 Application menu, 46, 138
applications
adding to Dock, 40–41
aliases, creating, 18–19, 40–41
automatic start, terminating, 20
cannot start, 528–529
in Classic Environment, 48, 61
crashed, 522–523
displaying all, 511
DVD Player, as default for
video DVDs, 53
error messages, capturing,
22–23 faxing from, 182–183 file associations, image files, 80–81
file associations, setting,
74–75
force-quitting (Ô-Option-
Esc), 47, 522–523, 524–525
handwriting recognition,
56–57
hiding, 17, 47
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less hung, 522–523
icons, bouncing, 39
InkPad, using with, 56–57
installing new software, 24–25
keyboard shortcuts, creating,
507
opening in Finder, 40
passwords storing (Keychain
Access feature), 30–31
pathnames, determining, 487
printing from, 178–181
recent, launching from Apple
menu, 138–139 restarting, 47, 522–523 running, identifying in Dock, 17
running, list of, 47
searching for, 86–88
setting defaults, 75
starting, 486–487
starting at login, 42–43
switching between windows
(Ô-~ or Ô-n), 465
windows, hiding all (Option-
Ô-click), 47
windows, switching between
(Ô-~ or Ô-n), 465
applications, setting as default
CD-ROM, music, 53
CD-ROM, photo, 53
DVD video, 53
editing application, 396–397
files, 74–75
Get Info window (Ô-I), 75
music CDs, 53
photo CDs, 53
Preview, 81
TextEdit, 127
Applications folder (Mac OS 9), 184–185 Applications folder (Mac OS X)
customized navigation, 72
installing applications in, 86
opening from the keyboard
(Ô-Shift-A), 87
opening from the menu bar, 23
application-specific menus, 12–13. See also specific application names appointments. See iCal
arrows on alias icons, 19
aspect ratio, still frames, 447
attachments, Mail application
creating, 226–227
failure to open, 242
finding, 243
opening, 242–243
saving, 242–243
sending to Windows users,
227
size issues, 244
and viruses, 242
attachments, to chats (Opt-Ô-F), 308–309
Attributes pane, 540–541
Attributes tab, 540
audio (music). See iTunes
Audio button, 450
audio chats, 302–303. See also
iChat audio clips. See also iDVD; iMovie
crop markers, 444
cropping, 445
embedded in DV clips, 441
importing from CD, 450–451
importing from iTunes,
450–451
locking position of, 451
markers, viewing, 450
pasting, 453
positioning at playhead
location, 451
putting on separate track, 441
selecting from Sound Effects
list, 45
trimming, 445
turning tracks off/on
individually, 450
volume level, 10–11, 451
Audio pane, 450–451
audiobooks, 383
Authenticate command, 116–117
AutoFill, Safari, 274, 284–285
autofilling Internet forms, 541
B Back arrow button, 14
Back arrow button, hiding, 36
Index background color, setting iPhoto, 398–399 Terminal, 470–471 background image, Terminal, 470–471
Base Station, creating, 162–163
bash shell, 462
battery life, 59
Bcc (blind copy), 235, 237, 246
Berkeley Software Distribution
(BSD), 460
bidding on eBay, 204–205
birthday information, Mail
application Address Book, 258–259
black border, still frames, 447
black frames, creating at
beginning of movie, 443
black text. See bold
black-and-white photos, 410–411
blind copy (Bcc), 235, 237, 246
blocking people from chats,
310–311
blue dot, email message, 224
BMP files, and Preview, 80
bold text (Ô-B), 131
Book button, 426
bookmarks. See Safari, bookmarks
Bookmarks Bar, hiding/showing
(Ô-B), 265, 268
bookmarks folder, adding
(Shift-Ô-N), 266
books, iPhoto
creating, 414–415, 426–427
printing, 427
booting, 528
bouncing
Dock icons, 39
email, 249
Brightness slider, 405
broadcast icon, calendars, 330
browsing
networks, 158–159 the system, 14–15 browsing the Web. See Finder; Safari BSD (Berkeley Software Distribution), 460
buddies. See iChat, buddies
Buffer pane, 468–469
547 buffer size, Terminal, 468
Built-In Ethernet configuring, 142–143 enabling/disabling, 142–143 proxy servers, 150–151 sharing connection over AirPort, 162–163
Burn button, 432
burning
CD/DVD, Windows compatibility problems, 433
CD-ROM, data, 52–53, 92–93
CD-ROM, photos, 432–433
DVD, 52–53
busy time, showing in calendars,
333
buttons, adding/removing on
Web pages, 268
B&W button, 410–411
C cache, clearing, 284–285 calendars. See also iCal
online location, 193
publishing with .Mac account,
189
calibrating monitors, 50–51
cameras. See iPhoto, cameras
Capture menu, Grab, 23
capturing, still frames, 436–437
carbon copy (Cc), 236
card reader. See iPhoto
cardboard box with top open
icon, 521
caret (^), defined, 63
case-sensitivity
Terminal commands, 460
UFS volumes, 533
cathode ray tube (CRT)
monitors, 50
Cc (carbon copy), 236
CDDB (Compact Disc
Database), 346, 354
CD-ROMs
available memory,
determining, 92
blank, setting default action,
52–53
data, 52–53, 92–93
desktop icon, hiding/showing, 46
ejecting, 20–21, 93
icons, showing/hiding on
desktop, 46, 94
music, 53
photo, 53
types of, 432
CD-ROMs icon, 20
CD-Rs, 370–371, 432
CD-RWs, 370–371, 432
CDs
booting from, 49, 528
preferences, setting, 52–53
types of, 92
CDs & DVDs pane, 52–53
CDs and DVDs icon, 52
centering text on page, 131
Change Key button, 497
Change Keychain Password
dialog box, 31
Change Keychain Settings dialog
box, 31
Change Password for Keychain
“login,” 31
Change Settings for Keychain
“login,” 31
changing Title (Shift-Ô-T),
Terminal, 464
channels. See Sherlock, channels
chapter markers, 456–457
Character Palette window,
132–133
Check Now button, 517
Choose File menu (iPhoto), 415
Classic Environment
applications, running slowly, 48
applications running,
determining, 61
database corruption, repairing,
60
desktop, rebuilding, 60
Dock icon, 60
force-quitting, 524
frozen, 524
hung, 524
menu bar appearance, 60
in a multiuser environment,
60
preferences, setting, 60–61
548 Classic Environment (continued)
printing from, 184–185
restarting, 60–61
sleep preferences, setting, 61
sleep settings, 61
as a standalone system, 61
starting, 60–61
starting automatically at login,
60
starting manually, 60
starting without extensions, 60
stopping, 60–61
TruBlue, 524
and UFS volumes, 533
version running, determining,
61
Classic Page Setup window,
184–185
Classic pane. See System Preferences window, Classic pane Classic Print window, 185
clips. See audio clips; iMovie;
video clips
Clips pane, 436
clock, 8–9, 64–65
Clockwise command (Ô-R), 391
Closed Network (AirPort) dialog
box, 157
closed networks, 156–157
closing windows, 17–18
cloud icon, iChat, 300
clutter, desktop, 16–17
CMYK (Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-
Black) color mode, 388
collections (fonts), 68–69
color
calendars, 335
customizing, Terminal,
470–471
events, 329
mode, iPhoto, 388
photos, 410–411, 424–425
prints, ordering, 424–425
settings, monitors, 50–51
text, 131
Color pane, 470–471
Color tab, 51
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less Column View, 15, 37
com.app.Terminal.plist file, 463
Command key (Ô), 57, 63
command-line access. See
Terminal
commands. See specific commands
Commands pane, 499
Commands subtab, 66–67, 499
comments
iChat, 296
photos, 389, 400–401
Compact Disc Database
(CDDB), 346, 354
compression formats, 454–455
Compression Settings window,
455
computer. See also desktop; OS X
clock, formatting, 8–9, 64–65
clock, setting time, 8–9
date, formatting, 8–9, 64
date, setting, 8–9
numbers, formatting, 64
power failure, restarting
automatically after, 59
putting to sleep, 6–7, 58–59,
61
restarting, 6–7
restarting from OS X CD,
48–49
shutting down, 6–7
time, formatting, 64
waking up, 6–7, 58–59
Computer Name field, 461
computer-to-computer networks,
152–153
configuring AirPort, 152–153 Built-In Ethernet, 142–143 Ethernet, 142–143 Mail application, 218–219 Terminal, 460–461, 474–475 Connect dialog box, 161
Connect to Server command,
160–161, 478
Connect to Server dialog box, 161
Connect to Server Terminal
window (Ô-Shift-K), 478–479
Connect to Server window, 161
connection speed, QuickTime,
54–55
Connection tab, 54
conserving power. See power
conservation Constrain menu, 392–393 Contact sheets, printing, 422–423 contacts. See iChat, buddies; Mail application, Address Book contextual menus, 12–13, 244–245
Contrast slider, 405
control buttons, 16–17
cookies, 274–275, 284–285
copying. See also importing
events, 321
iPhoto albums, 415
photos, 397
text (Ô-C), 128–129
from your computer to an
external device, 193
your data from online storage,
192–193
copying email recipients
blindly, 235, 237, 246
openly, 236
copyright, copying music, 350,
370
Counter Clockwise command
(Ô-Shift-R), 391
cover page, faxes, 182–183
Create iDVD Project button,
456–457 Create Network command, 152–153
creating. See item to be created
Crop button (Ô-Shift-C), 393
Crop command, 445
crop markers, 444–445
cropping
audio clips, 444–445
photos, 392–393
video clips, 444–445
CRT (cathode ray tube) monitors, 50
csh (c-shell), 478
c-shell (csh), 478
Index Ctrl key
defined, 63
handwriting recognition, 57
Ctrl-clicking, 12–13, 278, 279
current directory, Terminal, 460
cursor blink, 469
cursor shape, 469
Custom Keys setting, 63
Customize toolbar command, 73
Customize Toolbar pane, 73
Cut command, 441, 444–445
Cut command (Ô-C), 128
cutting text (Ô-X), 128–129
Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-Black
(CMYK) color mode, 388
D Darwin, 460
database corruption, repairing, 60
date
adding to photos, 400–401
formatting, 8–9, 64
setting, 8–9
Date & Time pane, 8–9
Default Voice tab, 67, 493
Delete Index button, 89
Delete User button, 108–109
Deleted Users folder, 109
deleting. See item to be deleted
Deranged voice, 492
Deselect All command
(Ô-Shift-A), 391
desktop. See also Finder; speech
services
aliases, creating, 19, 40–41
cluttered, 16–17
Exposé, 16–17
exposing (F11), 16
rebuilding, 60
screen shot, entire desktop
(Ô-Shift-3), 22
screen shot, selection from
desktop (Ô-Shift-4), 22–23
setting as save location (Ô-D),
226
spring-loaded folders,
enabling/disabling, 37
549 uncluttering, 16–17
windows, 13, 16–17
Desktop & Screen Saver button,
416
Desktop and Screen Saver
command, 417
Desktop button, 416
dialog boxes. See specific dialog
boxes dictionaries, searching, 208–209 digital cameras. See iPhoto, cameras Digital Video (DV) clips, splitting, 441
Digital Video (DV) format, 454
directory, listing files in, 464–465
Directory Access, 159
Disable Root User command,
117
disabling email temporarily, 218
disk images icon, 24
Disk Utility
Apple software, restoring, 530–531
disk, erasing, 532–533
Erase tab, 533
external hard disk,
reformatting, 532–533 FireWire drive, erasing, 532–533
First Aid tab, 529
permissions, repairing,
528–529
Restore tab, 531
system software, restoring,
530–531 volume, erasing, 532–533 volumes, erasing, 532–533 Disk Utility icon, 528
disks. See hard disks
Display Calibrator Assistant
window, 51
Display pane, 469
displays. See monitors
Displays icon, 50
Displays pane, 50–51
dividing lines, Dock, 40
.dmg file extension, 24
Dock aliases, creating, 19, 40–41 animations, enabling/disabling, 38–39 applications, adding to, 40–41 applications, opening in Finder, 40
dividing lines, 40
files, adding to, 40–41
folders, adding to, 40–41
Genie Effect,
enabling/disabling, 38
hiding/unhiding
automatically, 39
moving, 38
Scale Effect,
enabling/disabling, 38
size, changing, 38
windows, minimizing, 38
Dock, icons
adding, 40–41
bouncing, 39
dragging files to, 41
magnifying, 38
rearranging, 41
removing, 41
Dock icon, 60
Dock pane, 38–39
Document folder, 72
documents, 138–139. See also
files; folders; TextEdit
dollar sign ($), Terminal, 460
Double-click options, 394–395,
396–397
Download Only command, 521
Download window, clearing,
284–285 downloading music. See iTunes draft email messages, 238–239 Drafts mailbox, opening (Ô-3), 239
driving directions, 201, 202–203
drop shadows, 398–399
Duplicate command, 397, 415
duplicating. See copying
duration, still frames, 436–437
550 Duration controls, 447
DV (Digital Video) clips,
splitting, 441
DV (Digital Video) format, 454
DVD Player, as default for video
DVDs, 53
DVD-R, 432
DVD-R media, 456
DVD-ROM, 432
DVD-RW, 432
DVDs
blank, setting default action, 52–53
booting from, 49
burning, setting preferences
for, 52–53 desktop icon, hiding/showing, 46 power conservation, 58–59 preferences, setting, 52–53 video, setting default application, 53
DVDs icon, 20
E eBay, 204–205
Edit button, iPhoto, 392
Edit Key Mapping pane, 473
Edit Locations dialog box,
164–165
Edit menu (Finder), 77
Edit menu (iMovie)
Crop command, 445
Cut command, 441, 444–445
Split command, 440
Split Selected Audio Clip at
Playhead command, 441
Split Video Clip at Playhead
command, 441
Edit menu (iPhoto)
Deselect All command
(Ô-Shift-A), 391
Keywords command, 401
Keywords command (Ô-K),
402
Rotate command, 391
Set Title command, 401
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less Edit menu (Keychain Access), 31
Edit menu (TextEdit)
Cut command (Ô-C), 128
Paste command (Ô-V),
128–129
Special Characters command,
132
Spelling command (Ô-Shift-;),
125
Undo Typing command, 125
Edit pane, 392
Edit toolbar, 395
editing
email messages, 246–247 photos, 394–395, 396–397 text, 124–125 Eject command, 20
ejecting
CD-ROMs, 20–21, 93
FireWire target volumes, 167
iPod, 95
removable discs, 20–21
Ejecting FireWire target
volumes, 167
Electricity costs. See power
conservation
email. See also Mail application
accessing, 188
accounts, adding, 218–219
accounts, selecting, 225
application, choosing, 219
Bcc (blind copy), 235, 237,
246
blue dot, 224
bouncing messages, 249
Cc (carbon copy), 236
copying recipients, blindly,
235, 237, 246
copying recipients, openly,
236
deleting, 225
disabling temporarily, 218
draft, 238–239
editing new messages,
246–247
emptying the Trash, 224, 225
Exchange client, 218
filtering, 248–249 find and replace message text, 233
forwarding, 236–237
getting new, 225
grammar checking, 246–247
groups, 254–255
hiding, 233
hiding copied recipients, 235
IMAP (Internet Message
Access Protocol), 218
importing from other
applications, 220–221
importing from Outlook
[Express], 220
inviting people to events,
326–327
junk mail, 248–249
.Mac account, 188
mailboxes, 222
organizing, by color, 248
organizing, by sorting,
230–231 POP (Post Office Protocol), 218
reading, 222–223
rearranging columns, 231
red dot with number, 245
red number, 222
redirecting, 237
red-underlined words, 246
reminders, to-do items, 336
replying to, 234–235
Reply-To: headers, adding, 246
searching, 232–233
sending immediately, 224–225
sending later, 227, 238–239
sending to groups, 255
sending to individuals,
256–257
sent messages, saving to a
mailbox, 238
signature files, creating,
228–229
signature files, filtering, 229
signature files, in replies to
messages, 234
Index sorting, 230–231
spam, 248–249
spell checking, 246–247
starting a message, 224
“threading,” 230
unread messages, displaying
number of, 222
unread messages, indicator,
224 email, addresses adding to Address Book, 240–241
as links on Web pages, 277
.Mac account, 188
separating multiple, 240
underlined on Web pages, 277
Email button, 418
email folders. See mailboxes
emailing
photos, 418–419 Web pages, 276–277, 283
Empty Trash command, 79
emptying the Trash, 224, 225
Emulation pane, 467
emulation preferences, setting,
466–467
Enable Root User command, 117
encrypted terminal program,
480–481
End key, 453
Energy Saver, 58–59. See also
power conservation
Energy Saver icon, 58
Energy Saver pane. See System
Preferences window, Energy Saver pane Enhance button, 404–405 Enter Password (AirPort) dialog box, 155
EPS files, and Preview, 80
Equalizer window. See iTunes,
Equalizer window
Erase tab, 533
erasing, 532–533
error messages, capturing, 22–23
Escape key, speech recognition,
66
551 Ethernet configuring, 142–143 enabling/disabling, 142–143 proxy servers, 150–151 sharing connection over AirPort, 162–163 Event Info, displaying (Ô-I), 322
events, calendar. See iCal
Exchange client, 218
Export command (Ô-Shift-E)
File menu (Apple System Profiler), 513
File menu (iMovie), 454–455
File menu (iPhoto), 420, 430
File menu (Preview), 80–81
exporting. See also iTunes, exporting music
calendars, 331
files, 80–81
photos, 420–421
slide shows to iDVD, 428
slide shows to iMovie, 429
Exposé, 16–17
exposing the desktop (F11), 16
exposing windows, 16–17
exposure (photographic),
adjusting, 404–405 Extended Report command (Ô-3), 512–513 external hard disks connecting as a network, 166–167
defined, 20
reformatting, 532–533
Extract Audio command, 441
eye color, adjusting, 408–409
F FAQs (frequently asked
questions), 526
fast user Switching,
enabling/disabling, 112–113
Fast User Switching menu icon,
112–113
favorites, Sherlock channels,
215
faxing
from applications, 182–183
calendars, 341
from TextEdit, 182–183
Web pages, 283
file associations image files, 80–81 setting, 74–75 File menu
Eject command, 20
Make Alias command, 18
New Folder command, 76
Print command, 175
File menu (Apple System Profiler), 513
File menu (applications), 172–173
File menu (Finder), 69
File menu (Font Book), 69
File menu (iMovie)
Export command, Expert Settings, 454–455
Import command, 429, 438
Show Info command, 437
File menu (iPhoto)
Duplicate command, 397
Export command, 430
Export command (Ô-Shift-E),
420
Import command (Ô-Shift-I),
388–389
Page Setup command, 422
Revert to Original, 390
File menu (Preview), 80–81
File menu (Terminal)
Connect to Server command,
478
New Command command,
487
Save command (Ô-S), 475
Set Title command, 464
Show Info command, 466
File menu (TextEdit)
Open command, 127
Save As command, 127
Save command, 123
file servers, connecting to networks, 160–161
552 File Transfer Protocol (FTP), 478 files. See also Finder; folders adding to, Dock, 40–41 aliases, creating, 40–41 aliases, searching by, 84–85 application association, setting, 74–75 application associations, image files, 80–81 application associations, setting, 74–75 attaching to chats (Opt-Ô-F), 308–309
attaching to email, 226–227
browsing the system, 14–15
burning to CD-ROM, 92–93
cannot delete, 538–539
cannot open, 528–529
content, searching by, 47,
82–83, 90–91
creating new, 76–77
date created, searching by, 83
default application to open
with, setting, 74–75 deleting/restoring, 78–79, 538–539 exporting, 80–81 Get Info window, opening, 74–75 hidden, searching for, 90–91 images, opening in Preview, 80–81
invisible, searching for, 90–91
kind, searching by, 84–85
listing all, 464–465
locking/unlocking, 70, 74,
538–539
moving, 77
name, searching by, 82
naming/renaming, 74–75
opening in Preview, 80–81
ownership, setting, 75
Ownership & Permissions
pane, 75
permissions, default, 74
permissions, repairing,
528–529
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less permissions, setting, 75
read-only, setting, 74–75
recent, launching from Apple
menu, 138–139 recovering from deleted user accounts, 109
renaming, 74–75
saving in different format,
80–81
saving to desktop (Ô-D), 75
searching for, 47, 82–87,
90–91
selecting all (Ô-A), 76
selecting/unselecting, 76–77
sending to chats (Opt-Ô-F),
308–309
sorting, 15
template, creating, 74
transferring on CD-ROM,
92–93 transferring on iPod, 94–95 undeleting, 78–79, 538–539 visibility, searching by, 90–91 files servers, creating, 160–161
film roll numbers, 387
Film Rolls command (Cmd-
Shift-F), 387, 399
films (movies), 200–201
filtering
email, 248–249
signature files, 229
find and replace message text,
233
Find (Ô-F) command aliases, searching for, 84–85 applications, searching for, 86–87 content, searching for, 90–91 files, searching for, 82–83 folders, searching for, 86–87 hidden files, searching for, 90–91 invisible files, searching for, 90–91 Finder. See also Home folder
Action Menu button, 37
aliases, adding to sidebar,
18–19
Back arrow button, 14
Back arrow button, hiding, 36
bringing to front (Option-
Ô-click), 47
Column View, 15
Column View, setting as
default, 37
Customize Toolbar pane, 73
Forward arrow button, 14
Forward arrow button, hiding,
36
Icon View, 14
List View, 14–15
menu buttons, hiding, 36
multiple windows, switching
between, 13
network browsing, 158–159
new window, opening (Ô-N),
72
new window (Ô-N), 72
opening new window (Ô-N),
14
opening new window (double click hard disk icon), 16
preferences, setting, 46–47
sorting items, 15
toolbar buttons, hiding, 36
View button, hiding, 36
Finder icon, 13
Finder menu
Empty Trash command, 79
Preferences command, 37,
46–47, 94
Secure Empty Trash, 538
Finder Preferences window, 37,
46–47 Firewall tab, 162–163 firewalls, 162–163 FireWire devices iPod, for file storage and transfer, 94
reformatting, 532
target disk mode, 166–167
FireWire drive, erasing, 532–533 FireWire target volumes icon, 166
First Aid, 528–529
First Aid tab, 529
Index fixed-width fonts, 268 Flash animation, 274 Flights channel, 206–207 folders. See also files; specific folders adding to Dock, 40–41 aliases, creating, 40–41 creating (Ô-Shift-N), 76 deleting/restoring, 78–79 hidden, searching for, 90–91 invisible, searching for, 90–91 labels, using, 37, 76 naming/renaming, 76 opening in a new window, 37, 76 permissions, setting, 76 private, searching for, 90–91 searching for, 86–88, 90–91 spring-loaded, enabling/disabling, 37 undeleting, 78–79 Font Book, 68–69 Font command, 131 font size, changing, 269 Font window (Ô-T), 130–131 fonts chats, 312–313 collections of, 68–69 enabling/disabling, 69 Font Book, 68–69 InkPad, setting preferences, 57 installation location, determining, 68–69 multiuser environment, 68–69 organizing, 68–69 preferences, setting, 468–469 previewing, 68 searching, 69 setting preferences, 130–131, 468–469 smoothing, 468 Force Quit command (Ô-Option-Esc), 47, 523 Force Quit dialog box (Ô-Option-Esc), 47 force-quitting applications (Ô-Option-Esc), 47, 522–523, 524–525
553 Format menu (TextEdit) Font command, 131 Make Rich Text command, 127 Text command, 131 Formats tab, 9, 64–65 formatting text, 130–131, 301 Forward arrow button, 14 Forward arrow button, hiding, 36 forward slash (/), Terminal, 463 forwarding email, 236–237 frame rate, 455 frames, capturing, 436–437 frequently asked questions (FAQs), 526 frozen, Classic Environment, 524 FTP (File Transfer Protocol), 478 FTP server, 478–479, 484–485 Full Keyboard Access, enabling/disabling, 62–63 Full Quality DV format, 454
G Genie Effect, enabling/disabling, 38 geographic regions, setting preferences, 9, 64–65 Gestures tab, 57 Get Info window Content Index pane, 88–89 default applications, setting, 75 Delete Index button, 89 file ownership, setting, 75 file permissions, setting, 75 Index Now button, 88–89 indexing hard disks, 88–89 Locked checkbox, 538–539 opening (Ô-I), 74–75 Ownership & Permissions pane, 75 renaming files, 75 Stationary Pad checkbox, 74, 134 GIF files, 80, 389
Go menu about, 72 Connect to Server command, 160–161 Go To Folder command, 90–91 Home command, 412–413 Pictures icon, 412–413 Utilities command, 514 Go To Folder command, 90–91 Google, Safari cutting and pasting search terms, 279 search entries, clearing, 284–285 searching the Web, 270 Grab, 23 grammar checking email, 246–247 Graphics editor. See iPhoto graphics tablets. See handwriting recognition groups. See email, groups; iChat, buddy groups Groups drawer, hiding/showing (Shift-Ô-G), 298
H hand cursor, 449 handwriting recognition, 56–57 hanging applications, forcequitting (Ô-Option-Esc),
522–523
hard disks aliases, creating (Ô-L), 84 double-clicking icon, 16 erasing, 532–533 importing photos from, 388–389
indexing, 47, 88–89
permissions, repairing,
528–529 restoring to factory settings, 530 virtual, 190–191
554 hard disks, external connecting as a network, 166–167
defined, 20
reformatting, 532–533
hardware profile, 511
Hardware row. See System Preferences window, Hardware row hardware troubleshooting. See Apple System Profiler; help hearing limitations. See accessibility features
Hearing pane, 500–501
Hearing tab, 500
help. See also Disk Utility;
maintenance; troubleshooting
Apple FAQ (frequently asked
questions), 526
Apple System Profiler, setting
preferences, 512–513
Apple System Profiler,
starting, 510–511
applications, cannot start,
528–529
applications, force-quitting (Ô-Option-Esc), 522–523, 524–525 applications, hung, 522–523 applications, restarting, 522–523 file permissions, repairing, 528–529 files, cannot delete, 538–539 files, cannot open, 528–529 First Aid, 528–529 Help Viewer, 526–527 Keychain, 540–541 Mac Help window (Ô-?), 526–527 Network Utility, 514–515 networking, ping utility, 514–515 networking, testing connection, 514–515 networking, tracing routes, 514–515
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less networking, verifying IP addresses, 514–515 passwords, resetting, 534–535 passwords, tracking in Keychain, 540–541 permissions, repairing, 528–529 root password, resetting, 536–537
searching for terms, 517
software, checking for
updates, 516–517 Software Update, deleting items, 518–519 Software Update, downloading installers, 520–521 Software Update, setting frequency, 518–519 Software Update, starting, 516–517
speech services, 495
system administrator
accounts, resetting password,
536–537
system information, obtaining,
510–511
system software, restoring,
530–531
Terminal, 461
help, Mac Help window (Ô-?),
526–527
Help, Mail application, 220
Help menu, 526
Help Viewer (Ô-?), 526–527
Helpful Tips button, 495
Helvetica font, 510
HFS (Mac OS Standard), 532
HFS Plus (Mac OS Extended),
532
history, clearing, 284–285
History menu, 280–281
Home command, 412–413
home directory, 460
Home folder (Ô-Shift-H), 72–73.
See also Finder
Home key, 453
home page, setting a default, 262
Hot Corners, creating, 417
HTML files, opening, 127
hung, Classic Environment, 524
I
iCal, calendars
adding (Opt-Ô-N), 328–329
broadcast icon, 330
busy time, showing, 333
color coding, 335
exporting, 331
faxing, 341
item information, displaying,
319
mini-month, hiding/showing,
329
Preferences window, opening
(Ô-Y), 318
printing, 340–341
publishing, 330–331
renaming, 331
saving as PDF files, 341
searching, 338–339
shared, inviting people to
read, 332–333 shared, removing, 332–333 shared, updating (Opt-Ô-P), 332–333 sharing, 330–331 starting, 318–319 subscribed, automatic refresh, 334–335
subscribed, online
clearinghouse, 335
subscribing to (Opt-Ô-S),
334–335
today’s date, getting, 319
iCal, events
adding (Ô-N), 320–321
all-day, 320
color coding, 329
copying, 321
custom event schedules, 323
default start time, 320
deleting, 321
Index detail information, displaying,
319
Event Info, displaying (Ô-I),
322
hiding/showing, 329
Info drawer, resizing, 322
inviting people to, 326–327
moving between calendars,
335
on multiple calendars, 328
notes, 324–325
People window,
hiding/showing (Ô-option-A), 326–327
reminders, adding, 324–325
reminders, after the event, 325
reminders, default advance
time, 324
reminders, follow up, 325
reminders, via email, 324–325
repeating, changing stop time,
323
repeating, creating, 322–323
repeating, recognizing, 323
repeating, specifying number
of repetitions, 323
status, determining, 320
timing, changing, 320
iCal, to-do lists
adding items (Ô-K), 336–337
deleting items, 336
hiding/showing, 336
past due, reminders, 336
printing, 340–341
priority, 336
reminders, 336
searching, 338–339
iChat
AIM screen name, 290–291
cloud icon, 300
comments, 296
IM applications supported, 291
.Mac screen name, 290–291
Notes field, 296
screen names, 290–291
setting up, 290–291
status, setting, 292–293
555 iChat, buddies
adding (Shift-Ô-A), 294–295
chat type, determining, 296
deleting, 295
icons, 295
names, grayed out, 294
names, represented by @
(ampersand), 315
pictures, 295
video camera icon, 296
viewing information about
(Shift-Ô-I), 296–297 iChat, buddy groups
adding a buddy, 299
deleting, 298
Groups drawer,
hiding/showing (Shift-Ô-G), 298
hiding/showing, 299
renaming, 298–299
on the Rendezvous network,
298
Undo command, 298
iChat, chats
attachments (Opt-Ô-F),
308–309
audio, recording, 303
audio, starting, 302–303
audio, volume level, 303
background images, 313
blocking people, 310–311
existing, joining, 301
fonts, 312–313
formatting text, 301
IM window, opening
(Opt-Ô-M), 300
message appearance, setting,
312–313
message behavior, setting,
314–315 message color, 312–313 message contents, speaking, 315
message notification, 314
microphones, 302–303
named, joining, 301
notification of invitation, 304
Privacy Level menu, 310–311 reformatting incoming messages, 312–313
ringing phone sound, 304
saved sessions, opening, 307
saving a session (Ô-S),
306–307 sending files (Opt-Ô-F), 308–309
smileys, 300
text, starting, 300–301
text instead of balloons, 313
video, moving/closing the
inset video, 305
video, saving still photos, 305
video, starting, 304–305
video cameras, adding, 291
video cameras, and audio
chats, 302
video cameras, and video
chats, 304–305
video cameras, as
microphones, 302
video cameras, automatic
shutoff, 304
video cameras, buying, 305
volume level, 314
Icon View, 14
icons
AirPort status, 152
arrows on alias icons, 19
bouncing, 39
cardboard box with top open,
521
CD-ROMs, 20
disk images, 24
displaying names of, 219
DVDs, 20
Fast User Switching menu,
112–113
FireWire target volumes, 166
hard disk, double-clicking, 16
iChat buddies, 295
Input Menu for languages, 65
keyboard layout, 65
microphone, 66, 495, 496
mounted volumes, 24
556 icons (continued)
software packages, 521
Target disk mode, 166
Trash icon, changes to
triangle, 21
user accounts, adding picture
to, 29
volume, 11
iDisk access, 190–191
iDVD, 456–457. See also iMovie;
iPhoto
iDVD button, 428, 456
IEEE 1394. See FireWire devices
Ignore Update command, 519
IM (instant messaging). See iChat
IM window, opening (Opt-Ô-M),
300 image files, opening in Preview, 80–81
Image Size slider, 398
images. See iPhoto; video
Images dialog box, 104–105
IMAP (Internet Message Access
Protocol), 218
iMovie. See also iDVD; iPhoto;
video clips
Add Chapter button, 456
Audio button, 450
Audio pane, 450–451
black frames, creating at
beginning of movie, 443
chapter markers, appearance
of, 456
chapter markers, deleting, 457
Clips pane, 436
compression formats, 454–455
Compression Settings
window, 455
Create iDVD Project button,
456–457
crop markers, adding/deleting,
444–445
Duration controls, 447
DV (Digital Video) clips,
splitting, 441
DV (Digital Video) format,
454
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less End key, 453
formats supported, 454
frame, capturing, 436–437
frame rate, 455
Full Quality DV format, 454
hand cursor, 449
Home key, 453
iDVD button, 456
iPhoto photos, adding to
movie, 446–447 iTunes library, importing from, 450–451
and JPEG files, 448
Ken Burns Effect, 448–449
key frame number, 455
Movie Settings window, 455
MPEG-2 format, 454
MPEG-4 format, 454
music, adding to video clips,
450–451 photos, adding, 446–447 photos, adding to movie, 446–447
Photos button, 446
Photos pane, 446–447
Play button, 443
playhead, positioning at
beginning/end of movie (Home/End), 453
Preview button, 449
Preview monitor, 447, 449
Push transition, 442
Record button, 452
slide shows, creating, 446–447
slide shows, importing from
iPhoto, 429
Sorenson Video codec,
454–455
sound, adding to video clips,
450–451
Sound Effects list, 45
Speed slider, 442
starting, 436
and TIFF files, 448
timeline viewer, 450
Timeline Viewer Mode
button, 456
title cards, creating, 446–447
transitions, editing, 443
transitions, setting duration,
443
Transitions pane, 442–443
video clips, adding, 446–447
video crop markers,
adding/deleting, 444–445 voice recording, starting/stopping, 452–453 volume level markers, deleting, 450
Volume Level slider, 451
Zoom controls, 447
iMovie, audio
adding to video clips, 450–453
clips, cropping, 445
clips, trimming, 445
crop markers, 444
embedded in DV clips, 441
importing from CD, 450–451
importing from iTunes,
450–451
locking position of, 451
markers, viewing, 450
pasting clips, 453
positioning at playhead
location, 451
putting on separate track, 441
selecting from Sound Effects
list, 45
turning tracks off/on
individually, 450
volume level, 451
iMovie, still frames
adding to video clips,
436–437, 446–447
animating, 448–449
aspect ratio, 447
black border, 447
capturing, 436–437
creating from video, 436–437
panning around, 436–437
setting duration, 436–437
zooming around, 436–437
iMovie menu, 438–439
import button, iPhoto, 386
Index Import command
File menu (iMovie), 429, 438
File menu (iPhoto), 388–389
Import Option window (iPhoto), 388–389 importing audio clips from CD, 450–451 audio clips from iTunes, 450–451
audio into iMovie, 450–451
email, 220–221
iMovie video clips, 456–457
iPhoto color mode, 388
photos, 386–387, 388–389,
412–413 photos from cameras, 386–387 photos from disk, 388–389 photos to Photo Library, 412–413
slide shows from iPhoto, 429
slide shows to iMovie, 429
video clips, 438–439
Index Now button, 88–89 indexing files, language preferences, 47
indexing hard disks, 47, 88–89
Info drawer, resizing, 322
Info tab, 55
Information button, 400–401
Ink icon, 56
Ink pane. See System Preferences
window, Ink pane Ink window, 56–57 InkPad enabling/disabling, 56
font, selecting, 57
menu commands, setting
gestures for, 57
preferences, setting, 56–57
response settings, 57
setting font preferences, 57
using with applications, 56–57
words, adding to list, 57
Inkwell, 56–57 Input Menu (keyboard selection), 65 Input Menu tab, 65
557 Installer menu, 535, 537
installing
Apple software updates,
516–517 new applications, 24–25 software updates, 516–517 instant messaging (IM). See iChat
internal modem, 146–147
International command, 9
International icon, 64
International pane. See System
Preferences window,
International pane
Internet and Networking row. See System Preferences window, Internet and Networking row Internet forms, autofilling, 541
Internet Message Access Protocol
(IMAP), 218
Internet radio, 376–377
Internet route, determining, 515
Internet searches. See Sherlock
Internet Sharing feature,
162–163 Internet tab, 162–163 inviting people to events, 326–327 IP addresses
connecting to, 160–161
verifying, 514–515
your computer, 515
iPhoto. See also iDVD; iMovie; video clips
Add button, 414
and Adobe Photoshop,
396–397
and Adobe Photoshop
Elements, 396–397
Announce Slideshow button
(.Mac account), 429
background color, setting,
398–399
Book button, 426
books, creating, 414–415,
426–427
books, printing, 427
Brightness slider, 405
Burn button, 432
burning CD/DVD, Windows
compatibility problems, 433
B&W button, 410–411
cameras, 386–387
color mode, for importing,
388
computer, importing photos
from, 388–389 Constrain menu, 392–393 Contact sheets, printing, 422–423
Contrast slider, 405
Crop button (Ô-Shift-C), 393
customizing options, setting,
398–399
as default application for
photo CDs, 53
default editing application,
setting, 396–397
Desktop button, 416
disk, importing photos from,
388–389
Edit pane, 392
Edit toolbar, 395
Email button, 418
Enhance button, 404–405
file types, for importing, 388
film roll numbers, 387
iDVD button, 428
Image Size slider, 398
importing photos, 386–387,
388–389, 412–413
Information button, 400–401
information button, 400–401
keywords, 401
Keywords window (Ô-K), 401
Kodak Print Service, 424–425
and Kodak Prints Service,
424–425
libraries, 412–413
and .Mac account, 429–431
and Mail program, 418
mail programs supported, 418
.mov file, creating, 429
music, adding to slide show,
428–429
558 iPhoto (continued)
Order Book button, 427
Order Prints button, 424–425
and Photoshop, 396–397
and Photoshop Elements,
396–397
preferences, setting, 398–399
Preferences window, 394–395
Print button, 422
Retouch brush, 406–407
Slideshow button, 428
slow operation, 399
themes, applying to Photo
Books, 426
video clips, adding photos to,
446–447
Web page, adding photos to,
430–431
zoom arrows, 395
zooming, 392–393
iPhoto, albums
copying, 415
creating, 414–415, 426–427
deleting, 415
deleting photos from, 414
Photo Books, creating,
414–415, 426–427
Photo Books, printing, 427
printing, 427
renaming, 415
iPhoto, photos
adding to movies, 446–447
adding to video clips, 446–447
adding to Web page, 430–431
adjusting exposure, 404–405
adjusting eye color, 408–409
aligning to grid, 399
archiving on CD-ROM,
432–433
arranging, 387
black-and-white, 410–411
burning on CD-ROM,
432–433
checkmark keyword, 401
color, 410–411, 424–425
comments, adding, 389,
400–401
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less compared edited to original
(Control key), 393
converting color to black-and-
white, 410–411
creating from video, 436–437
cropping, 392–393
date, adding, 400–401
as desktop pictures, 392,
416–417 determining size for email, 418–419
duplicating, 397
editing in other programs,
396–397 editing in separate windows, 394–395
emailing, 418–419
exporting, 420–421
exporting for Windows, 420
exporting to QuickTime, 421
fitting in window, 395
importing, 386–387, 388–389,
412–413 keywords, adding, 400–401 order professional color prints, 424–425 organizing, 412–415 outlined in Organize pane, 390, 398
overexposed, 404–405
printing, 422–423, 427
publishing online, 430–431
red-eye removal, 408–409
resizing in Organize pane, 398
resizing in preview window,
389
retouching, 406–407
rotating, 390–391
saving in other formats,
420–421 saving to CD-ROM, 432–433 as screensavers, 416–417 searching for, 400–401, 401–403
setting borders, 390, 398
setting drop shadows,
398–399
sorting, 387, 399
text, adding, 400–401
titles, adding, 389, 400–401
underexposed, 404–405
undoing all changes, 390
iPhoto, slide shows
adding music, 428–429
creating, 428–429
exporting to iDVD, 428
exporting to iMovie, 429
importing to iMovie, 429
multiple music tracks, 429
pausing, 428
playing, 429
resuming, 429
saving to iDisk, 429
saving to .Mac account, 429
as screensaver, 416–417
iPhoto menu Appearance options, 398–399 Double-click options, 394–395, 396–397 Preferences command (Ô-,), 394
iPod, 46, 94–95. See also iTunes
IPv4 menu, 144–145
iSync, 192–193
italics (Ô-I), 131
iTunes
See also iMovie
See also iPhoto
See also iPod
See also iTunes, Music Store
automatic start, canceling, 94
copying music from other
computers, 358–359 as default application for music CDs, 53
Internet radio, 376–377
passwords, 375
shared music, identifying, 375
shared music, searching for,
375
sharing music, 374–375
streaming music, 374
video clips, adding sound to,
450–451
Index visual effects light show, 352–353 Visualizer (Ô-T), 352–353 iTunes, copying music from CDs CDDB (Compact Disc Database), 346, 354
copyright, 350
editing song information,
354–355
importing (Shift-Ô-O),
350–351
MP3 format, 359
quitting (Ô-Q), 344–345
ripping (Shift-Ô-O), 350–351
starting, 344–345
storing ripped music, location,
350–351 viewing song information, 354–355 iTunes, copying music to CDs
burned CDs won’t play, 373
burning CDs, 370–371
CD-Rs, 370–371
CD-RWs, 370–371
copyright laws, 370
from the iTunes Music Store,
370
MP3 format, 372–373
setting preferences for,
372–373
unable to burn CDs, 373
iTunes, Equalizer window
faders, 349
horizontal values, 349
opening (Ô-2), 348–349
preamp, 349
purpose of, 349
removing presets, 348
switching presets, 348
vertical values, 349
volume control, 349, 354
iTunes, exporting music
default storage location, 356
exporting a song list, 356–357
exporting song information,
357
Library Info file, 357
559 iTunes, Library Comments column, hiding/showing, 378–379
importing to iMovie, 450–451
reorganizing songs, 379
searching, 378–379, 451
sorting, 378–379
iTunes, Music Store
audiobooks, 383
authorization, 382
automatic purchase, 382–383
availability, 380–381
buying songs, 380–381
gift certificates, 383
MPEG-4 format, 381
purchase history, viewing, 383
returning songs, 380
shopping-cart purchase,
382–383
special requests, 383
iTunes, playing CDs
ejecting CDs, 347
fine tuning the sound,
348–349
keyboard controls, 347
starting, 346–3477
iTunes, playlists
creating (Ô-N), 360–361
deleting, 363
deleting songs from, 360–361,
365
deletions, undoing, 364
editing, 360–361, 363
gear icon, 360
hiding/showing the browser
(Ô-B), 360–361
musical-note icon, 360
one song in multiple lists, 360
playing, 364–365
random playback, 362–363,
365
rating songs, 363
rearranging songs, 360
renaming, 363
repeating the playback, 365
shuffling the playback,
362–363, 365
size requirements, 361
smart playlists, creating
(Alt-Ô-N), 362–363
iTunes, preferences adding music to the Library, 369
automatic volume control, 369
burning CDs, 372–373
connect to Internet when
needed, 366
crossfades, 368
editing CD information, 369
eject CD after import, 367
genre, displaying, 366
Internet connection speed,
368
music storage location, 369
Preferences window,
hiding/showing (Ô-,), 366
random playback, 369
response to new CD, 367
set as default Internet music
player, 367
shuffling playback, 369
Song Text, size, 366
Sound Enhancer, 369
Source Text, size, 366
J joining a network, 154–155
JPEG files, 388, 389, 448
JPG files, 80
junk mail, 248–249
K Ken Burns Effect, 448–449
key frame number, 455
key mappings, changing, 473
key repeat rate, setting, 504–505
keyboard
click sounds, enabling/disabling, 505
Custom Keys setting, 63
display delay,
enabling/disabling, 505
560 keyboard (continued) Full Keyboard Access, enabling/disabling, 62–63
key repeat speed, setting, 62
multikey commands,
enabling/disabling, 505
options, 62–63
preferences, setting, 62–63,
504–505
response rate, setting, 505
Slow Keys, enabling/disabling,
505
speed, setting, 62
Sticky Keys, setting, 505
as substitute for mouse, 63
using without a mouse, 63
Keyboard & Mouse icon, 62–63,
502, 504, 506
Keyboard & Mouse pane. See System Preferences window, Keyboard & Mouse pane keyboard layout icon, 65
Keyboard pane, 472–473,
504–505
keyboard shortcuts
adding a bookmarks folder
(Shift-Ô-N), 266
adding bookmarks (Ô-D), 264
adding bookmarks
(Shift-Ô-D), 264
AOL Buddy list (Ô-1), 290
for applications, creating, 507
Ô, defined, 63
creating, 505–506
Ctrl, defined, 63
emptying the Trash (Ô-K),
224
enabling/disabling, 507
hiding/showing the
Bookmarks Bar (Ô-B), 265
hiding/showing the Safari
Address Bar (Ô-Shift-|), 268
hiding/showing the Safari
Bookmarks Bar (Ô-B), 268
iChat buddies, adding
(Shift-Ô-A), 294–195
IM window, opening
(Opt-Ô-M), 300
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less importing music from CDs (Shift-Ô-O), 350–351 list of, 63
open Drafts mailbox (Ô-3),
239
Open Location (Ô-L),
264–265
pop-up windows, disabling
(Ô-K), 275
preferences, setting, 505–507 Rendezvous window (Ô-2),
290
ripping music from CDs
(Shift-Ô-O), 350–351
select entire document (Ô-A),
276
set location to desktop (Ô-D),
226
show Mail Preferences
(Option-,), 228
Show Safari Preferences (Ô-,),
264
start an email message (Ô-N),
256
symbols, defined, 63
Undo command (Ô-Z), 252
viewing, 506–507
Visualizer (Ô-T), 352–353
Web pages, saving as text
(Ô-S), 272
Keyboard Shortcuts pane,
506–507
Keyboard Shortcuts tab, 62–63,
506
Keyboard tab, 504–505 Keychain, 540–541 Keychain Access
creating new keychain, 30–31,
540
Internet forms, autofilling,
541
login keychain, password,
540
login name, default, 540
preferences, setting, 30–31
settings, displaying, 31
starting, 30
user name, default, 540
Keychain Access, passwords
changing, 31
default, 540
retrieving, 541
Keychain Access icon, 30, 540
Keychain Access window, 30,
540–541
keywords, adding to photos,
400–401
Keywords command (Ô-K), 399,
401–402
Keywords window (Ô-K), 401
killing applications. See force-
quitting Kodak Print Service, 424–425
L labels, folders, 37, 76
landscape orientation, 172
Language tab, 64–65
languages
for indexing hard disc, 47
keyboard layouts, selecting, 65
preferences, setting, 64–65
regional preferences, setting,
64–65
for searching file contents, 47
shifting on the fly, 64
Languages dialog box, 47
laptop computer. See notebook
computers
LCD (liquid crystal display)
monitors, 50
libraries, iPhoto
on CD-ROM, 412
creating, 412–413
on DVD, 412
renaming, 412–413
switching between, 413
libraries, iTunes Comments column, hiding/showing, 378–379
importing to iMovie, 450–451
reorganizing songs, 379
searching, 378–379, 451
sorting, 378–379
Library folder, 72
Index Limitations pane, 106–107
Limitations tab, 106–107
link addresses, copying, 279
linking, to eBay auctions, 205
liquid crystal display (LCD)
monitors, 50
List View, 14–15
listening key, changing, 497
Listening pane, 497
Listening subtab, 66–67, 497
Lock Audio Clip at Playhead
command, 451
Locked checkbox, 538–539
locking, user accounts, 99
locking/unlocking, files, 70, 74,
538–539 log feature, Apple System Profiler, 510
Log Out command, 2–3
Log Out dialog box, 2–3
logging in
as another user, 4–5 automatically, 2–3 pictures, adding to user name, 29
starting applications
automatically, 42–43 logging off, 2–3 login keychain, default password, 541
login keychain, password, 540
login name, default, 540
login options, user accounts,
114–115 Login Options button, 3, 110–111, 112–115
login screen, 114–115
LZW files, 388
M .Mac account
Access Privileges, 191
accessing, 190–191
accounts, adding, 218–219
age limits, 188
calendars, deleting, 333
calendars, sharing, 332
561 capacity, 190
creating, 188–189
email access, 188
email addresses, 188
iDisk access, 190–191
iSync, 192–193
membership, annual fee, 188
membership, expiration, 191
membership, free trial, 188
online storage, accessing from
other computers, 192–193 online storage, creating, 190–191
Public folder, 190
synchronizing computers,
192–193 virtual hard disks, 190–191
Mac Help command, 526
Mac Help window (Ô-?),
526–527. See also AppleCare; Sherlock .Mac screen name, iChat, 290–291
magnifying, Dock icons, 38
Mail application
accounts, selecting, 225
Address Book groups,
254–255
Bcc (blind copy), 235, 237,
246
blue dot, 224
bouncing messages, 249
Cc (carbon copy), 236
configuring, 218–219
contextual menus, 244–245
copying recipients, blindly,
235, 237, 246
copying recipients, openly,
236
deleting messages, 225
draft messages, 238–239
editing new messages,
246–247 email addresses, adding to Address Book, 240–241 email addresses, separating multiple, 240
emptying the Trash, 224, 225
filtering messages, 248–249
find and replace message text,
233
forwarding messages, 236–237
getting new messages, 225
grammar checking, 246–247
Help, 220
hiding copied recipients, 235
hiding messages, 233
IM (instant messaging), 256
importing email from other
applications, 220–221
junk mail, 248–249
Mail Drawer, moving, 223
Mail Drawer, view options,
223
mailbox contents, viewing, 221
mailboxes, creating, 222–223
mailboxes, switching, 223
organizing messages, by color,
248
organizing messages, by
sorting, 230–231
reading messages, 222–223
rearranging columns, 231
red dot with number, 245
red number, 222
redirecting messages, 237
red-underlined words, 246
replying to messages, 234–235
Reply-To: headers, adding,
246
searching, addresses, 241
searching, messages, 232–233
selecting multiple files, 245
sending email to groups, 255
sending email to individuals,
256–257
sending messages
immediately, 224–225
sending messages later, 227,
238–239
sent messages, saving to a
mailbox, 238
showing Mail Preferences,
228
562 Mail application (continued) signature files, creating, 228–229
signature files, filtering, 229
signature files, in replies to
messages, 234
sorting messages, 230–231
spam, 248–249
spell checking, 246–247
starting, 220–221
starting a message, 224
“threading” email, 230
Training mode, 249
unread message indicator, 224
unread messages, displaying
number of, 222
Mail application, Address Book
adding addresses from
messages, 240–241
adding fields, 250
anniversary information, 259
birthday information, 258–259
creating new entries, 250–251
customizing entries, 250,
258–259
deleting entries, 252–253
maps of contact addresses, 259
multiple addresses per contact,
253
Note section, 250
organizing, by groups,
254–255 phonetic pronunciation guide, 258–259
photographs, 259
printing labels from, 250
scrolling, 250
searching, 241
searching, for your contact
information, 259
selecting multiple contacts,
253
sending email to individuals,
256–257
swapping first/last name, 258
Undo command (Ô-Z), 252
view options, 251
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less Mail application, attachments
creating, 226–227
failure to open, 242
finding, 243
opening, 242–243
saving, 242–243
size issues, 244
and viruses, 242
Mail Drawer, 223
Mail Preferences, Mail
application, 228
Mail Preferences, showing
(Option-,), 228
mail programs supported, 418
mailboxes, 222
maintenance. See also Disk
Utility; help Apple System Profiler, setting preferences, 512–513 Apple System Profiler, starting, 510–511 file permissions, repairing, 528–529
Keychain, 540–541
passwords, tracking in
Keychain, 540–541
permissions, repairing,
528–529
PRAM (Parameter RAM),
wiping, 529
software, checking for
updates, 516–517
Software Update, deleting
items, 518–519
Software Update, downloading installers, 520–521 Software Update, setting frequency, 518–519 Software Update, starting, 516–517 system information, obtaining, 510–511 system software, restoring, 530–531
Make Alias command, 18
Make Default command, 171
Make Rich Text command, 127
maps of contact addresses, Mail
application Address Book, 259
maximizing windows, 16
meetings. See iCal
membership, .Mac account, 188,
191
Memory/Versions tab, 61
menu bar appearance, Classic
Environment, 60
menu buttons, hiding, 36
menus. See specific menus
messages, chat, 312–315. See also
iChat
microphone icon, 66, 495, 496
microphones, 302–303. See also
iMovie; speech services
minimizing windows, 16, 38
mobility limitations. See
accessibility features modem detects ring, wake computer, 59
modems, 146–147
monitors
calibrating, 50–51
color settings, 50–51
CRT (cathode ray tube), 50
LCD (liquid crystal display),
50
power conservation, 58–59
preferences, setting, 50–51
refresh rate, 50
resolution settings, 50–51
More Info button, 510
mounted volumes icon, 24
mouse
Ctrl-clicking, 278, 279
double-click speed, setting,
63, 503
keyboard as substitute for, 63
keypad as substitute,
enabling/disabling, 503
preferences, setting, 62–63,
502–503
response time, setting, 503
right-clicking equivalent, 278
Mouse pane, 503
Index Mouse tab, 63, 503 .mov file, creating, 429 Movie Settings window, 455 movies. See iDVD; iMovie; iPhoto Movies channel, 200–201 moving text, 128–129 MP3 format capacity, 372
CD compatibility, 373
definition, 359
MPEG-2 format, 454 MPEG-4 format, 454 multiuser environment Classic Environment, 60 fonts, 68–69 login options, setting, 114–115 security, 114–115 users, switching between, 112–113 music. See also iTunes adding to slide shows, 428–429 adding to video clips, 450–451 Music Store. See iTunes, Music Store My Account icon, 98 My Channels folder, 215
N naming. See renaming navigating, Home folder, 72–73 Netinfo Manager, 116–117 Netinfo Manager icon, 116 network browser, and AppleTalk, 158 network browsing, 158–159 Network icon, 142, 158 Network pane. See System Preferences window, Network pane network ports, 148–149 network servers, passwords storing (Keychain Access feature), 30–31 Network Time, setting, 8
563 network time servers, using, 8 Network Utility Info tab, 55 IP address, your computer, 515 Ping utility, 515 starting, 514 Traceroute utility, 515 networking. See also transferring files browsing networks, 158–159 external hard disk, connecting as, 166–167 file servers, connecting to, 160–161 files servers, creating, 160–161 firewalls, 162–163 FireWire, 166–167 Internet route, determining, 515 Internet Sharing feature, 162–163 IP addresses, connecting to, 160–161 locations, creating, 164–165 modem, configuring, 146–147 network locations, creating, 164–165 Network Utility, 514–515 packets, sent/received, determining, 515 ping utility, 514–515 ports, configuring, 148–149 proxy servers, configuring, 150–151
servers, connecting to,
160–161 servers, creating, 160–161 servers, local, 160–161 target disk mode (Power-T), 166–167 testing connection, 514–515 traceroute utility, 515 tracing routes, 514–515 troubleshooting, 514–515 verifying IP addresses, 514–515
wireless, 152–153
networking, AirPort Base Station, creating, 162–163 closed network, 156–157 computer-to-computer, 152–153 configuring, 152–153 public network, 154–155 networking, Ethernet configuring, 142–143 proxy servers, 150–151 sharing connection over AirPort, 162–163 networks, joining, 154–155 New button, 162–163 New Clips go to settings, 438–439 New Command command, 487 New configuration dialog box, 148–149 New Folder command, 76 New Location dialog box, 164–165 New User button, 100–101 New User Password sheet, 100–101 Note section, Mail application Address Book, 250 notebook computers AirPort network, public, 154–155 Energy Saver settings, 58–59 sleep settings, 58–59 trackpad options, setting, 62–63 notes, events, 324–325 Notes field, iChat, 296 notification, of chat invitation, 304 numbers formatting, 9, 64 regional preferences, setting, 64–65
O object-specific menus, 12–13 oblique text. See italics
564 online resources Adobe Photoshop Elements, 397
Apple Discussions, 526
Apple FAQ (frequently asked
questions), 526
Apple QuickTime, 24
Apple software updates, 520
CDDB (Compact Disc
Database), 346
DVD player compatibility, 456
handwriting recognition, 57
help discussion boards, 526
iChatter, 315
iDVD, 456
Inkwell, 57
iPhoto, 386
.Mac accounts, 431
published calendars, 335
QuickTime, 54
QuickTime software, 24
software updates, 520
speaking chat messages, 315
video cameras, 305
online storage, 191–193. See also .Mac account On/Off pane. See System Preferences window, On/Off pane On/Off subtab, 66, 494, 496
Open command, 127
Open Firmware Password
Protection feature, 534
Open Location (Ô-L), 264–265
Open Speakable Items Folder
button, 498–499 Option key, handwriting recognition, 57
Options tab, 59
orange circle button, 280
Order Book button, 427
Order Prints button, 424–425
Organize pane, 388
organizing email
by color, 248
by sorting, 230–231
organizing fonts, 68–69
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less OS 9. See Classic Environment OS X. See also computer; user accounts administrator access, setting, 101
aliases, creating, 18–19, 40–41
Apple Installer, 24–25
audio volume, setting, 10–11
automatically logging in, 2–3
bash shell, 462
booting from CD, 528
booting from Install disc, 528
booting from Repair disk, 528
browsing the system, 14–15
CD-ROM, ejecting (Ô-F12),
20–21
contextual menus, defined, 12
contextual menus, viewing,
12–13
external drives, defined, 20
hard disks, restoring to factory
settings, 530
indexing files, language
preferences, 47
installing software, 24–25
logging in, as another user,
4–5 logging in, automatically, 2–3 logging in, starting applications automatically, 42–43
logging off, 2–3
permissions, repairing,
528–529
pictures, adding to user name,
29
PRAM (Parameter RAM),
wiping, 529
removable discs, ejecting,
20–21 restarting, 6–7, 48–49 screen shots, entire desktop (Ô-Shift-3), 22
screen shots, selection from
desktop (Ô-Shift-4), 22–23
screen shots, timed capture
(Grab), 23
searching, language preferences, 47
shell, default (bash), 462
sidebar, using, 18–19
software, installing new, 24–25
startup disk, setting, 48–49
users, switching, 4–5
voice, setting for spoken
interface, 67
volume, muting, 11
volumes, defined, 20
OS X Install disk, and intruders, 534
OS X status, saving as report, 513
Other Channels folder, 214
Other command, 157
Outlook [Express], importing
email from, 220
Output tab, 492
output volume (hardware),
setting, 10–11
overexposed photos, 404–405
ownership, setting, 75
Ownership & Permissions pane,
75
P packets, 515
Page Setup command, 422
panning around, still frames,
436–437
Parameter RAM (PRAM),
wiping, 529
Password tab, 28–29, 98–99,
102–103
passwords. See also security
application, storing (Keychain
Access feature), 30–31
Change Keychain Password
dialog box, 31
Change Password for
Keychain “login,” 31
changing for others, 102–103
changing your own, 28–29, 99
default, 541
Enter Password (AirPort)
dialog box, 155
Index forgotten, 534–535 guidelines for creating, 98, 535, 537 hint, creating your own, 98–99 hint, setting for new user, 100–101 iTunes, 375 keychain, default, 30 Keychain Access feature, 30–31, 540–541 New User Password sheet, 100–101 Open Firmware Password Protection feature, 534 Password tab, 28–29, 98–99, 102–103 Reset Password command, 537 Reset Password window, 535 resetting, 534–535, 536–537 root, resetting, 536–537 root account, resetting, 536–537 by security level, 537 setting for new user, 100–101 setting for root account, 117 setting for system administrator, 117 storing (Keychain Access feature), 30–31 system administrator accounts, resetting, 536–537 tracking in Keychain, 540–541 Paste command (Ô-V), 128–129 pasting text (Ô-V), 128–129 pathnames determining, 487 expanding (Tab key), 472 specifying, 477 pausing, slide shows, 428 PDF files creating from screen captures, 22–23 opening in Preview, 80–81 saving calendars as, 341 saving documents as, 136–137, 180–181
565 people, searching for, 202–203 People window, hiding/showing (Ô-option-A), 326–327 permissions default, files, 74 repairing, 528–529 repairing, startup disk, 528 setting, files, 75 setting, folders, 76 user accounts, 106–107 Personal row, 64 personalities, system voice, 492 Phone Book, 202–203 Phone Book channel, 202–203 phonetic pronunciation guide, Mail application Address Book, 258–259 photo albums. See iPhoto, albums Photo Books creating, 414–415, 426–427 printing, 427 photographs. See iPhoto Photos button, 446 Photos pane, 446–447 PICT files, 80 Picture tab, 101, 104–105 pictures. See also iPhoto adding to user accounts, 29 adding to user name, 29 background chat images, 313 and iChat buddies, 295 purchasing rights to, 196 searching the Web for, 196 as user account icon, 29, 101, 104–105 Pictures icon, 412–413 PID (process ID), locating, 525 Ping utility, 514–515 Pipe Organ voice, 492 .pkg file extension, 24 Plain Text mode (Ô-Shift-T), 127 Play button, 443 playhead, positioning at beginning/end of movie (Home/End), 453 playlists. See iTunes, playlists PNG files, 80, 389
POP (Post Office Protocol), 218 pop-up menus, Safari, 275, 278–279 pop-up windows, disabling (Ô-K), 275 portrait orientation, 172 ports, configuring, 148–149 Post Office Protocol (POP), 218 PostScript, saving as, 180–181 PostScript files, 80 power conservation battery life, 59 Classic Environment sleep settings, 61 DVD playback options, 58–59 Energy Saver preferences, setting, 58–59 monitor, 58–59 monitors, 58–59 putting computer to sleep, 6–7, 58–59 power failure, restarting automatically after, 59 Power key, shutting down the system, 7 PPP, 146–147 PPP dialog box, 146–147 PPPoE, 142–143 PRAM (Parameter RAM), wiping, 529 preferences, setting. See also System Preferences window burning CD-ROM data, 52–53 CD operations, 52–53 Classic Environment, 60–61 colors, 470–471 cursor blink, 469 cursor shape, 469 default file name, 463 display, 50–51 Dock, 38–39 DVD operations, 52–53 emulation, 466–467 Energy Saver, 58–59 exit behavior, 466–467 Finder, 46–47 Font Book, 68–69
566 preferences, setting (continued) fonts, 468–469 geographic regions, 9, 64–65 handwriting recognition (Inkwell), 56–57 InkPad, 56–57 Inkwell, 56–57 iPhoto, 398–399 keyboard, 62–63, 504–505 keyboard options, 62–63 keyboard shortcuts, 505–507 Keychain Access, 30–31 languages, 64–65 locking settings, 59 monitor, 50–51 mouse, 62–63, 502–503 mouse options, 62–63 numbers, 64–65 power conservation, 58–59 processes, 466–467 QuickTime connection speed, 54–55
regions, 9, 64–65
restoring defaults, 463
screensaver, 417
script language, 64
scrollback, 468
setting, 462–463, 476–477
shells, 466–467
sleep mode, 61
sleep options, 58–59
speech, 66–67, 492–493,
500–501 speech recognition, 64–67 speech services, 66–67, 492–493, 500–501 startup disk, 48–49 Terminal, 462–463, 466–468, 476–477
terminal emulation, 467
text language, 64
trackpad, 502–503
trackpad options, 62–63
user accounts, 98–99
wraparound, 468
Preferences window, 318,
394–395
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less Preview versus Adobe Acrobat Reader, 81
file types supported, 80
files, opening, 80–81
setting as default application,
81
Preview button, 449
Preview menu (Font Book), 69
Preview monitor, 447, 449
previewing, fonts, 68
Print button, 422
Print Center menu, 171
Print command, 175
Print dialog box, 178–183
Print pane, 136–137
Printer Info window, 177
Printer List window, 170–171
Printer Setup Utility, 170–171
printers
adding, 170–171
choosing, 172–173
setting default, 171
sharing, 176–177
Printers menu
Make Default command, 171
Show Jobs, 175
printing from applications, 178–181 calendars, 340–341 from Classic Environment, 184–185 copies, number of, 178–179 customized settings, saving, 179
deleting print job, 175
error handling options,
setting, 180–181
to a file, 180–181
iPhoto albums, 427
labels from, Mail application
Address Book, 250
landscape orientation, 172
layout, specifying, 178–179
orientation, setting, 172
output options, setting,
180–181
page range, specifying, 178–179 page setup options, setting, 172–173, 184–185 pages per sheet, specifying, 178–179
paper feed, specifying, 181
paper size, setting, 172
paper trays, switching
between, 181
PDF, saving as, 180–181
photos, 422–423, 427
portrait orientation, 172
PostScript, saving as, 180–181
print jobs, managing, 174–175
resuming print job, 175
scaling, 173
settings, viewing summary of,
173
from SimpleText, 184–185
stopping print job, 175
from TextEdit, 178–181
to-do lists, 340–341
Web pages, 282–283
Privacy Level menu, 310–311
process ID (PID), locating, 525
Process Viewer, 524
processes
displaying, 525
preferences, setting, 466–467
Processes pane, 467
profiles. See hardware profile;
system profile programs See applications See processes See software See specific programs projects, creating from iMovie video clips, 456–457
protocols, adding, 482–483
proxy servers, 150–151
PSD files, 80, 389
Public folder, .Mac account, 190
public networks, 154–155
publishing
calendars, 330–331
photos online, 430–431
Index punctuation, importance of, 491
Push transition, 442
pwd command, 486
Q QuickTime, 54–55, 80–81 QuickTime icon, 54–55 QuickTime pane. See System Preferences window, QuickTime pane
Quit Printer Setup Utility, 171
Quit TextEdit command, 120
R rainbow Apple icon, 60
reading email, 222–223
read-only files, 74–75
Rebuild Desktop button, 60
Recent Items command, 138–139
recent items list, 138–139
Record button, 452
recording music to CDs. See
iTunes recovering files, 538–539. See also files
red dot with number, email, 245
red number, email, 222
red-eye removal, 408–409
Red-Green-Blue (RGB) color
mode, 388
redirecting email, 237
red-underlined words, email
messages, 246
reformatting, FireWire devices,
532 refresh rate, monitors, 50
Region drop-down menu, 9
region preferences, setting, 9,
64–65
reminders, 324–325, 336
removable disks, ejecting, 20–21
removable media. See
CD-ROMs; DVDs; iPod renaming
calendars, 331
email groups, 254
567 files, 74–75
folders, 76
iChat buddy groups, 298–299
iPhoto albums, 415
iPhoto keywords, 401
iPhoto libraries, 412–413
Rendezvous window, opening
(Ô-2), 290
Repair Disk Permission button,
529
repairing permissions, 528–529
Repertoire command, 69
replying to email, 234–235
Reply-To: headers, adding, 246
reports. See Apple System
Profiler
Reset Password command, 537
Reset Password window, 535
resizing photos, 389, 398
resolution settings, monitors,
50–51 Restart button, hiding/showing, 115
Restart command, 6–7
restarting, Classic Environment,
60–61
Restore tab, 531
restoring default preferences, 463
restoring windows, 16
resuming, slide shows, 429
Retouch brush, 406–407
retouching photos, 406–407
Revert to Original, 390
RGB (Red-Green-Blue) color
mode, 388
Rich Text mode (Ô-Shift-T), 127
right-clicking. See contextual
menus
right-clicking equivalent, 278
ring detected, wake computer, 59
ringing phone sound, chats, 304
ripping music. See iTunes
root account, 116–117, 536–537.
See also system administrator accounts
root password, resetting, 536–537
Rotate command, 391
Rotate menu (iPhoto), 391
rotating photos, 390–391
S Safari. See also Sherlock Address Bar, hiding/showing (Ô-Shift-|), 268
AutoFill, 274
AutoFill information, clearing,
284–285
Bookmarks Bar,
hiding/showing (Ô-B), 268
buttons, adding/removing,
268
cache, clearing, 284–285
cookies, definition, 274
cookies, deleting, 284–285
cookies, disabling, 275
customizing appearance,
268–269
default home page, 262
as default Web browser, 263
Download window, clearing,
284–285
enlarging text (Ô-+), 268
field size, changing, 271
fixed-width fonts, 268
Flash animation, 274
font size, changing, 269
hiding/showing the Address
Bar (Ô-Shift-|), 268
history, clearing, 284–285
History menu, 280–281
opening, 16
orange circle button, 280
pop-up menus, 278–279
pop-up windows, disabling
(Ô-K), 275
on a public computer,
284–285
resetting, 284–285
search engine, changing, 270
search history, deleting, 271
search terms, erasing, 271
security options, 275
SnapBack, 280–281
starting, 262–263
568 Safari (continued) status bar, displaying, 269 Web browser plug-ins, 274 Safari, bookmarks adding to Bookmarks Bar (Ô-D), 264 adding to Bookmarks menu (Shift-Ô-D), 264 Bookmarks Bar, hiding (Ô-B), 265 closing the view, 266 creating, 264–265 default folder view, 267 default location, 264 deleting, 267 displaying, 264 duplicates, 265 folders, adding (Shift-Ô-N), 266
managing, 266–267
resizing panes, 267
SnapBack, 280–281
temporary, 280–281
Safari, Google cutting and pasting search terms, 279 search entries, clearing, 284–285 searching the Web, 270 Safari, Web pages browsing with Tabs, 286–287 emailing, 276–277, 283 faxing, 283 link addresses, copying, 279 as links on Web pages, 277 multiple, in same window, 286–287 printing, 282–283 save location, setting, 272–273 saving as PDF, 273, 283 saving as shown, 273 saving as text (Ô-S), 272–273 scaling for printing, 283 searching, 270–271 select entire document (Ô-A), 276 source code, viewing, 269 underlined email addresses, 277
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less Save As command, 127 Save command (Ô-S) File menu (Terminal), 475 File menu (TextEdit), 123 Save dialog box, 475 save location, setting to desktop (Ô-D), 226 saving chat sessions (Ô-S), 306–307 customizations as defaults, 474–475 to desktop (Ô-D), files, 75 files in different formats, 80–81 files to new location, 127 files to same location, 122–123 search results, 195 slide shows to iDisk, 429 slide shows to .Mac account, 429 saving, photos to CD-ROM, 432–433 in other formats, 420–421 as screensavers, 416–417 saving, Web pages as PDF, 273, 283 save location, setting, 272–273 as shown, 273 as text (Ô-S), 272–273 Scale Effect, enabling/disabling, 38 Schedule tab, 59 scheduling. See iCal screen captures entire desktop (Ô-Shift-3), 22 selection from desktop (Ô-Shift-4), 22–23 timed (Ô-Shift-Z), 23 screen elements, spoken user interface, 67 screen names, iChat, 290–291 screensavers force no-start, 417 force start, 417 Hot Corners, creating, 417 photos as, 416–417 preferences, setting, 417 slide shows, 416–417 scripts, language preferences, 64
scrollback, preferences, 468 Scrollback Buffer, 468 search engines, changing in Safari, 270 search engines, Sherlock default, 195 definition, 194 selecting, 195 search history, deleting, 271 Search Results window, 85 search terms, erasing, 271 searching calendars, 338–339 for channels, 214–215 eBay, 204–205 email, 232–233 for email attachments, 243 fonts, 69 language preferences, 47 for LDAP servers, 254 Mail application Address Book, 241, 259
to-do lists, 338–339
Web pages, 270–271
searching for aliases, 84–85 applications, 86–88 folders, 86–88, 90–91 help terms, 517 invisible, files, 90–91 photos, 400–401, 401–403 searching for files by content, 47, 82–83, 90–91 by date created, 83 hidden, 90–91 invisible, 90–91 by name, 82 by type, 84–85 by visibility, 90–91 searching the Internet. See Sherlock Secure Empty Trash, 538 Secure File Transfer Protocol (SIFT), 478 Secure Shell (SSH), 478 security. See also passwords; permissions attachments, and viruses, 242 login screen, 114–115
Index multiuser environment,
114–115
Open Firmware Password
Protection feature, 534
OS X Install disk, and
intruders, 534
privacy level, chats, 310–311
Safari on a public computer,
284–285
Safari options, 275
server, acting as, 484
sharing services, 484
Telnet, 478
Telnet versus SSH, 478, 480
Security menu (Netinfo)
Authenticate command,
116–117
Disable Root User command,
117
Enable Root User command,
117
Security tab, 101
Select All command, 77
select entire document (Ô-A),
276
selecting
all items (Ô-A), 76, 131
files, 76–77
text, 124–125
Selection command, 23
sending email
to groups, 255
immediately, 224–225
to individuals, 256–257
later, 227, 238–239
sent email messages, saving to a
mailbox, 238
servers
acting as, 484
connecting to, 160–161
creating, 160–161
local, 160–161
Servers icon, 158
Services command, Speech, 491
Services tab, 160–161, 176–177,
484–485
Set Root Password dialog box,
117
569 Set Title command, 401, 464
SFTP server, connecting to,
478–479
SGI files, 80
shared calendars
inviting people to read, 332–333 removing, 332–333 updating (Opt-Ô-P), 332–333 sharing Built-In Ethernet connections over AirPort, 162–163 calendars, 330–331 Ethernet connections over AirPort, 162–163
services, 481–483
services, security, 484
sharing, music. See iTunes
Sharing icon, 150, 461
Sharing pane. See System
Preferences window, Sharing pane Shell pane, 466–467 shells changing, 476–477
default (bash), 462
defined, 476
list of, 476
preferences, setting, 466–467
Sherlock. See also Safari
multiple instances of, 213
preferences, setting, 213
Sherlock, channels
Apple defaults, viewing, 214
displaying, 195
favorites, 215
My Channels folder, 215
national variations, 198
non-Apple, loading, 214
Other Channels folder, 214
rearranging, 215
searching for, 214–215
switching, 196
Web links to, 215
Sherlock, Internet searches
adjusting your query, 203
airplane flights, 206–207
Apple technical support, 212–213 AppleCare channel, 212–213 dictionaries, 208–209 driving directions, people, 202–203 driving directions, theaters, 201
eBay channel, 204–205
film previews, viewing, 200
film previews, volume, 200
films, 200–201
Flights channel, 206–207
Movies channel, 200–201
people, 202–203
Phone Book channel, 202–203
pictures on the Web, 196
results not found, 203
saving results of, 195
search engines, default, 195
search engines, definition, 194
search engines, selecting, 195
simultaneous multiple topics,
213
sorting dictionaries and
thesauruses, 200
sorting stock information, 198
starting, 194–195
stock market information,
198–199
stock names, removing, 199
Stocks channel, 198–199
theaters, driving directions,
201
thesauruses, 208–209
translating languages,
210–211
Translation channel, 210–211
when traveling, 201
words and meanings, 208–209
Yellow Pages, 202–203
ZIP code requirement, 201
Shift key, handwriting
recognition, 57
Short Report command (Ô-1),
512–513
shortcuts. See aliases
Show Details button, 58
570 Show Font File (Ô-R), 69 Show Info command File menu (iMovie), 437 File menu (Terminal), 466 Show Jobs, 175 Show Safari Preferences (Ô-,), 264 Shut Down button, hiding/showing, 115 Shut Down command, 6–7 Shut Down dialog box, 166 shutting down the computer, 6–7 sidebar, Finder windows aliases, adding, 18–19
Network icon, 158
Servers icon, 158
sidebar, Home folder, 73 SIFT (Secure File Transfer Protocol), 478 signature files, 228–229, 234 SimpleText, 184–185. See also TextEdit singing voice, 492 size of text, 131 Sleep button, hiding/showing, 115 Sleep command, 6–7 sleep mode, 6–7, 58–59, 61, 386 sleep options, 58–59 sleep preferences, setting, 61 Sleep tab, 58–59 slide shows, 446–447. See also iPhoto, slide shows Slideshow button, 428 Slow Keys, enabling/disabling, 505 smileys, chats, 300 SnapBack, 280–281 snapshots. See screen captures sneakernet, 92 software See also Apple System Profiler See also applications See also help See also troubleshooting checking for updates, 55, 516–517
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less corrupted, restoring, 530–531 deleted accidentally, restoring, 530–531 installers, saving, 520–521 installing updates, 516–517 QuickTime, checking for updates, 55 restoring, 530–531 Software License Agreements, 25 software packages icon, 521 Software Update deleting items, 518–519
downloading installers,
520–521 setting frequency, 518–519 starting, 516–517 Software Update icon, 516 Software Update window automatic checking,
enabling/disabling,
518–519
Check Now button, 517 ignoring update items (Ô-Delete), 518–519 installers, saving, 520–521 running software updates, 516–517 songs. See iTunes Sorenson Video codec, 454–455 sorting dictionaries, 200 email messages, 230–231 files, 15 Finder items, 15 photos, 387, 399 stock information, 198 thesauruses, 200 sound. See audio Sound Effects list, 45 Sound icon, 492 Sound pane, 10–11, 492–493 spam, 248–249 Speak the phrase checkbox, 501 speakable items. See speech recognition; Spoken User Interface Speakable Items folder, 498–499
speaking aloud command confirmation, 495 enabling/disabling, 66–67, 500–501 starting/stopping, 490–491 special characters, inserting, 132–133 Special Characters command, 132 Speech command, 500 Speech Command window, 499 Speech icon, 493 Speech pane. See System Preferences window, Speech pane speech preferences, setting, 66–67, 492–493, 500–501 speech recognition activating (Escape key), 66, 497 choosing command groups, 66–67, 498–499 enabling/disabling, 66, 494–495 preferences, setting, 64–67 setting listening key, 497 setting listening preferences, 66–67, 496–497 starting automatically at login, 495 Speech Recognition tab. See System Preferences window, Speech Recognition tab speech services alerts voice, selecting, 501 help, 495 listening key, changing, 497 preferences, setting, 66–67, 492–493, 500–501 punctuation, importance of, 491
singing voice, 492
TextEdit, 490–491
speech services, speaking aloud command confirmation, 495 enabling/disabling, 66–67, 500–501 starting/stopping, 490–491
Index speech services, system voice default, 492 personalities, 492 selecting, 66–67, 492–493 speed, 66, 493 Speed slider, 442 spell checking, 125 spell checking email messages, 246–247 Spelling command (Ô-Shift-;), 125 Split command, 440 Split Selected Audio Clip at Playhead command, 441 Split Video Clip at Playhead command, 441 split-pane view, 464–465 Spoken User Interface, 66–67, 500–501. See also speech services Spoken User Interface pane, 500–501 Spoken User Interface tab, 67, 500 spring-loaded folders, enabling/disabling, 37 SSH (Secure Shell), 478 SSH server, 480–483 Standard Report command (Ô-2), 512–513 Start button, 162–163 starting/stopping, 120–121 startup disk defined, 48–49 erasing, 532 preferences, setting, 48–49 repairing permissions, 528 setting, 48–49 Startup Disk icon, 48 Startup Disk pane, 48–49 startup items, 42–43 Startup Items pane, 42–43 Startup Items tab, 42–43 Stationary Pad, 134–135 Stationary Pad checkbox, 74, 134 status bar, displaying, 269 status reports. See Apple System Profiler
571 Sticky Keys, setting, 505 stock market information, searching, 198–199 stock names, removing from view, 199 Stocks channel, 198–199 styles, saving, 135 su command, 4–5 subscribed calendars, 334–335 subscribing to calendars (Opt-Ô-S), 334–335 surfing the Web. See Safari Switchboard.com, 202 switching application windows (Ô-~ or Ô-n), 465
desktop windows, 13
iPhoto libraries, 413
paper trays, 181
Sherlock channels, 196
users, 4–5, 112–113
synchronizing computers, 192–193 system. See OS X system administrator accounts. See also user accounts access, setting, 101 versus administrator privileges, 536 enabling/disabling, 116–117 resetting password, 536–537 system alerts, 10–11, 501. See also speech services system beeps, setting volume (audio), 10–11 system information, obtaining, 510–511 System Preferences command, 2–3 System Preferences window. See also preferences, setting
CDs & DVDs pane, 52–53
Color tab, 51
Date & Time pane, 8–9
Deleted Users folder, 109
Desktop & Screen Saver
button, 416
Displays pane, 50–51
Dock pane, 38–39
International icon, 64 Limitations pane, 106–107 locking settings, 59 opening, 2 Output tab, 492 Personal row, 64 Sound pane, 10–11, 492–493 Startup Disk pane, 48–49 Startup Items pane, 42–43 Users folder, 109 View menu, Desktop and Screen Saver command, 417 System Preferences window, Accounts pane adding user accounts, 100–101 Delete User button, 108–109 Limitations tab, 106–107 Login Options button, 3, 110–111, 112–115 My Account icon, 98 New User button, 100–101 New User Password sheet, 100–101 Password tab, 28–29, 98–99, 102–103 Picture tab, 101, 104–105 Security tab, 101 setting accounts information, 98–99 Startup Items tab, 42–43 user account icons, 102 viewing accounts information, 98–99 System Preferences window, Classic pane Advanced pane, 60 Advanced tab, 61 Memory/Versions tab, 61 Rebuild Desktop button, 60 System Preferences window, Energy Saver pane
Options tab, 59
Schedule tab, 59
Show Details button, 58
Sleep tab, 58–59
System Preferences window, Hardware row CDs and DVDs icon, 52
572 System Preferences window, Hardware row (continued)
Displays icon, 50
Energy Saver icon, 58
Ink icon, 56
Keyboard & Mouse icon,
62–63, 502, 504, 506
Sound icon, 492
System Preferences window, Ink
pane
Gestures tab, 57
handwriting recognition,
56–57
Word List tab, 57
System Preferences window,
International pane
Formats tab, 9, 64–65
Input Menu tab, 65
Language tab, 64–65
Region drop-down menu, 9
System Preferences window, Internet and Networking row
Network icon, 142
QuickTime icon, 54–55
Sharing icon, 150, 461
System Preferences window, Keyboard & Mouse pane Add Keyboard Shortcut button, 507
Keyboard pane, 504–505
Keyboard Shortcuts pane,
506–507 Keyboard Shortcuts tab, 62–63, 506
Keyboard tab, 504
Mouse tab, 63
Trackpad pane, 502–503
Trackpad tab, 63, 502
System Preferences window, Network pane AirPort, 144–145, 152–153, 154–155, 156–157 AppleTalk, 142–145 creating network locations, 164–165 Ethernet, 142–143, 150–151 internal modem, 146–147 IPv4 menu, 144–145
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less modem, 146–147 network ports, 148–149 PPP, 146–147 PPPoE, 142–143 proxy servers, 150–151 TCP/IP, 142–145, 150–151 System Preferences window, On/Off pane Apple Speakable Items Is On button, 495, 496
Helpful Tips button, 495
Open Speakable Items Folder
button, 498–499
Speakable Items folder,
498–499
Turn on Speakable Items at
login button, 66, 495
System Preferences window,
QuickTime pane
Connection tab, 54
Update tab, 55
System Preferences window, Sharing pane
Computer Name field, 461
Firewall tab, 162–163
Internet tab, 162–163
New button, 162–163
Services tab, 160–161,
176–177, 484–485 Start button, 162–163 System Preferences window, Speech pane
Change Key button, 497
Commands pane, 499
Default Voice tab, 67, 493
Listening pane, 497
Speak the phrase checkbox,
501
Speech Commands window,
499
Spoken User Interface pane,
500–501
Spoken User Interface tab, 67,
500
System Preferences window,
Speech Recognition tab
Commands subtab, 66–67,
499
Listening subtab, 66–67, 497
On/Off subtab, 66, 494, 496
System Preferences window,
System row
Accounts icon, 98
Software Update icon, 516
Speech icon, 493
Startup Disk icon, 48
Universal Access icon, 500
System Preferences window, Universal Access pane
Hearing pane, 500–501
Hearing tab, 500
Keyboard tab, 505
Mouse pane, 503
Mouse tab, 503
system profile
exporting, 513
saving, 513
System Profiler. See Apple System Profiler System row. See System Preferences window, System row system software, restoring, 530–531 system status. See Apple System Profiler system voice
default, 492
personalities, 492
selecting, 66–67, 492–493
speed, 66, 493
T Tab key, pathname expansion, 472
Tab-completion feature, 472
target disk mode, 166–167
target disk mode (Power-T),
166–167
Target disk mode icon, 166
TCP/IP, 142–145, 150–151
tcsh, defined, 478
TeleType (TTY) connection, 466
Telnet, 478, 480
Telnet server, connecting to,
480–481
Index templates, 74, 134–135
.term file, creating, 464
Terminal
$ (dollar sign), 460
/ (forward slash), 463
~ (tilde), 460
active running processes,
displaying, 525
ANSI terminal type, selecting,
463
Anti Aliasing, 468
appearance, customizing,
464–465, 470–471
application pathnames,
determining, 487
applications, force-quitting,
524–525 applications, starting, 486–487 background color, setting, 470–471 background image, setting, 470–471
buffer size, default, 468
case-sensitivity of commands,
460
changing Title (Shift-Ô-T),
464
color settings, customizing,
470–471
colors, setting preferences,
470–471
commands, buffering, 468
commands, case-sensitivity,
460
commands, running, 487
configuration, saving to file,
474–475
configuring, 460–461
current directory, 460
cursor blink, setting
preferences, 469
cursor shape, setting
preferences, 469
default settings, changing, 464–465
default settings, restoring, 463
directory, listing files in,
464–465
573 emulation preferences, setting, 466–467 exit behavior, setting preferences, 466–467 files, listing all, 464–465 font, setting preferences, 468–469
fonts, setting default, 469
fonts, smoothing, 468
FTP server, acting as,
484–485 FTP server, connecting to, 478–479
help, 461
home directory, 460
key mappings, changing, 473
keyboard shortcuts,
customizing, 472–473
minimizing, 467
multiple windows,
distinguishing between, 470–471 OS X, changing system name, 460–461
OS X login history, 460, 478
panes, resizing, 465
pathname expansion (Tab
key), 472
pathnames, determining, 487
pathnames, specifying, 477
PID (process ID), locating,
525
preferences, default file name,
463
preferences, restoring defaults,
463
preferences, setting, 462–463,
476–477
process preferences, setting,
466–467
protocols, adding, 482–483
Scrollback Buffer, 468
scrollback preferences, setting,
468
server, acting as, 481–483
servers, adding, 482–483
servers, connecting to,
478–481
services, adding, 481–483 settings, customizing, 466–471, 474–475 settings, saving customization, 474–475 SFTP server, connecting to, 478–479 sharing services, enabling/disabling, 481–483
shell, changing, 476–477
shell, default (bash), 462
shell, defined, 476
Shell pane, 466
shell preferences, setting,
466–467
shells, list of, 476
split-pane view, 464–465
SSH server, connecting to,
480–481 SSH server, enabling/disabling, 481–483 starting, 4–5, 460–461 switching between windows (Ô-~ or Ô-n), 465
Tab key, pathname expansion,
472
Tab-completion feature, 472
Telnet server, connecting to,
480–481
.term file, creating, 464
terminal emulation, setting
preferences, 467
terminal type, default, 463
TextEdit, opening, 486–487
Title, changing (Shift-Ô-T),
464
title bar contents, setting, 471
Transparency slider, 471
TTY (TeleType) connection,
466
Use Settings as Default
command, 464
user login history, 460, 478
user name format, 460
VT100 terminal type,
selecting, 463
window dimensions, setting,
471
574 Terminal (continued)
window settings, customizing,
470–471
windows, switching between
(Ô-~ or Ô-n), 465
wraparound preferences,
setting, 468
terminal emulation, setting
preferences, 467
Terminal icon, 460
Terminal Inspector window
Buffer pane, 468–469 changes, saving as defaults, 465, 467
Color pane, 470–471
Display pane, 469
Edit Key Mapping pane, 473
Emulation pane, 467
Keyboard pane, 472–473
opening (Ô-I), 464
Processes pane, 467
Saving customizations as
defaults, 474–475 Shell pane, 466–467 Use Settings as Defaults button, 474–475 Window pane (Shift-Ô-T), 470–471 Terminal Preferences window (Ô-,), 462, 476–477
terminal type, default, 463
Terminal window, 4–5
text. See also TextEdit
accented characters, inserting, 133
adding to photos, 400–401
bold (Ô-B), 131
centering on page, 131
color, 131
copying (Ô-C), 128–129
cutting (Ô-X), 128–129
deleting, 125, 128–129
editing, 124–125
enlarging (Ô-Shift-+), 131
entering, 124–125
fonts, setting preferences,
130–131
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less formatting, 130–131
italics (Ô-I), 131
language preferences, setting,
64
moving, 128–129
pasting (Ô-V), 128–129
printing (Ô-P), 136–137,
178–181
selecting, 124–125
selecting all (Ô-A), 131
size of, 131
special characters, inserting,
132–133
underline (Ô-U), 131
text chats, starting, 300–301.
See also iChat
Text command, 131
text-based operation. See Terminal
TextEdit
accented characters, inserting, 133
bold text (Ô-B), 131
centering text on page, 131
Character Palette window,
132–133
color, setting, 131
copying text (Ô-C), 128–129
cutting text (Ô-X), 128–129
deleting text, 125, 128–129
editing text, 124–125
enlarging text (Ô-Shift-+),
131
entering text, 124–125
faxing from, 182–183
Font window, 131
Font window (Ô-T), 130
fonts, setting preferences,
130–131
formatting text, 130–131
HTML files, opening, 127
italics (Ô-I), 131
moving text, 128–129
opening, 486–487
opening files, 126–127
opening from Terminal,
486–487 pasting text (Ô-V), 128–129
PDF files, creating, 136–137 Plain Text mode (Ô-Shift-T), 127
Print pane, 136–137
printing (Ô-P), 136–137,
178–181 Rich Text mode (Ô-Shift-T), 127
saving files, 122–123
saving files to new location,
127
selecting all (Ô-A), 131
selecting text, 124–125
setting as default application,
127
size of text, 131
special characters, inserting,
132–133
speech services, 490–491
spell checking, 125
starting/stopping, 120–121
stationary Pad, 134–135
styles, saving, 135
templates, creating, 134–135
underline (Ô-U), 131
undoing changes (Ô-Z), 125,
129
TextEdit menu
Quit TextEdit command, 120
Services command, Speech,
491
text-to-speech capability. See
Spoken User Interface theaters, searching for, 200–201 themes, applying to Photo Books, 426
thesauruses, searching, 208–209
threading email, 230
TIF files, 80
TIFF files, 388–389, 448
tilde (~), Terminal, 460
time, formatting, 64. See also
clock; date
time zone, setting, 8–9
Timed Screen command, 23
Timed Screen Grab dialog box, 23
timeline viewer, 450
Index Timeline Viewer Mode button, 456
Title, changing (Shift-Ô-T), 464
title bar contents, setting, 471
title cards, creating, 446–447
titles, adding to photos, 389,
400–401
Titles command, 399
to-do lists. See iCal
toolbar buttons, hiding, 36
toolbars
hiding, 36
icons, customizing, 73
icons, restoring default set, 73
unhiding, 36
Traceroute utility, 515
tracing routes, 514–515
tracking, eBay auctions, 205
trackpad
double-click speed, setting, 63
preferences, setting, 62–63,
502–503
tracking speed, setting, 63
Trackpad pane, 502–503
Trackpad tab, 63, 502
Training mode, Mail application,
249
transferring files. See also
networking
on CD-ROM, 92–93
on iPod, 94–95
transitions, 443
Transitions pane, 442–443
translating languages, 210–211
Translation channel, 210–211
Transparency slider, 471
Trash
adding items to (Ô-Delete), 79
cannot empty, 79, 538
emptying, 79
files, cannot delete, 538–539
files, deleting permanently,
538
icon changes to Burn Dic, 93
undeleting items (Ô-Z), 79
warning, eliminating, 79
Trash, emptying, 224, 225
575 Trash icon
appearance, 78
ejecting CD-ROM, 21
Trash icon, changes to triangle
icon, 21
troubleshooting. See also help
Apple System Profiles,
510–511
applications, cannot start,
528–529
applications, force-quitting
(Ô-Option-Esc), 522–525 applications, hung, 522–523 applications, restarting, 522–523 files, cannot delete, 538–539 files, cannot open, 528–529 First Aid, 528–529 Help Viewer, starting, 526–527 Network Utility, 514–515 networking, ping utility, 514–515 networking, testing connection, 514–515 networking, tracing routes, 514–515 networking, verifying IP addresses, 514–515 networks, 514–515 passwords, resetting, 534–535 root password, resetting, 536–537 system administrator accounts, resetting password, 536–537 system software, restoring, 530–531
TruBlue, 524
TTY (TeleType) connection, 466
Turn on Speakable Items at login
button, 66, 495
TXT files, 122
U UFS (Unix File System), 532–533
UFS volumes, Classic
Environment, 533
undeleting files and folders, 78–79, 538–539
underexposed photos, 404–405
underline (Ô-U), 131
Undo command, iChat buddy
groups, 298
Undo command (Ô-Z), 252
Undo Typing command, 125
undoing, changes to photos, 390
undoing changes (Ô-Z),
TextEdit, 125, 129
Universal Access command, 503,
505
Universal Access icon, 500
Universal Access pane. See
System Preferences window, Universal Access pane Unix File System (UFS), 532–533 unread email messages displaying number of, 222
indicator, 224
Update menu
Download Only command, 521
Ignore Update command, 519
Update tab, 55
Use Settings as Default
command, 464
Use Settings as Defaults button,
474–475
user account icons, 102
user accounts. See also desktop;
multiuser environment; system administrator accounts account information, viewing, 98–99
adding picture to icon, 29
administrative privileges,
adding to account, 101 applications, adding to Dock, 40–41 applications, limiting access to, 106–107 applications, starting automatically at login, 42–43 authenticating, 98–99, 116–117 automatic login, enabling/disabling, 110–111
576 user accounts (continued) background image, changing, 32–33 creating, 100–101 deleting, 108–109 Dock, adding items to, 40–41 Dock preferences, setting, 38–39 files, adding to Dock, 40–41 folder options, setting, 36–37 folders, adding to Dock, 40–41 icon, changing, 29 icon, changing for others, 104–105 information, setting, 98–99 information, viewing, 98–99 keychain, setting preferences, 30–31 Kodak Print Service, 424–425 locking, 99 login options, setting, 114–115 multiuser environment, 112–113 name, changing, 99 name, setting for new user, 100–101
permissions, changing,
106–107 permissions, setting, 106–107 picture, using as icon, 29, 101, 104–105 preferences, setting, 98–99 recovering files from deleted user accounts, 109 removing, 108–109 root password, resetting, 536–537 screen saver, using, 34–35 simple Finder view, setting, 106 switching between, 112–113 toolbars, collapsing, 36 toolbars, hiding, 36 windows appearance, setting, 36–37 user login history, 460, 478 user name format, 460
Mac OS X Panther in 10 Simple Steps or Less User pane. See System Preferences window, Accounts pane Users folder, 109 Utilities command, 514 Utilities folder Directory Access, 159 Disk Utility icon, 528 Keychain Access icon, 30, 540 Netinfo Manager icon, 116 Network Utility, 514–515 Printer Setup Utility, 170–171 System Profiler, 510–511 Terminal icon, 460
V Verify Disk Permission button, 529 Vicki voice, 492 video camera icon, iChat, 296 video cameras, and chats. See also iChat
adding, 291
audio chats, 302
automatic shutoff, 304
buying, 305
as microphones, 302
video chats, 304–305
video chats, 304–305. See also iChat video clips. See also audio clips; iDVD; iMovie; iPhoto adding music, 450–451 adding photos to, 446–447 adding to Clips pane, 438–439 adding to Movie Timeline, 438–439 audio, adding, 450–451 blending, 442–443 cropping, 444–445 deleting, 440–441 exporting to iDVD, 456–457 exporting to QuickTime, 454–455
fades, adding, 442–443
importing, 438–439
inserting, 440–441
moving, 440–441 moving forward on timeline, 443 music, adding, 450–451 narration, adding, 452–453 saving as QuickTime, 454–455 saving compressed version, 454–455 saving to CD-ROM, 454–455 saving to DVD, 456–457 sound, adding, 450–451 speech, adding, 452–453 splitting, 440–441 still frames, adding, 436–437 transitions, adding, 442–443 trimming, 444–445 video crop markers, adding/deleting, 444–445 View button, hiding, 36 View menu Customize toolbar command, 73 Desktop and Screen Saver command, 417 International command, 9 Speech command, 500 Universal Access command, 503, 505 View menu (Apple System Profiler) Extended Report command (Ô-3), 512–513 Short Report command (Ô-1), 512–513 Standard Report command (Ô-2), 512–513 View menu (iPhoto) Film Rolls command, 399 Film Rolls command (Cmd-Shift-F), 387 Keywords command, 399, 401 Titles command, 399 virtual hard disks, 190–191 viruses, and email attachments, 242 vision limitations. See accessibility features
Index visual effects light show, 352–353 Visualizer (Ô-T), 352–353 voice, setting for spoken interface, 67
voice commands. See speech
voice recording,
starting/stopping, 452–453
volume, chats, 314
volume (audio), 10–11, 451
volume icon, 11
volume level markers, deleting,
450
Volume Level slider, 451
volumes (hardware), 20, 532–533
VT100 terminal type, selecting,
463
W Wacom devices. See handwriting recognition waking up, 6–7, 58–59 Web browsers. See Safari Web cams. See video cameras Web pages adding photos to, 430–431
browsing with Tabs, 286–287
emailing, 276–277, 283
faxing, 283
link addresses, copying, 279
as links on Web pages, 277
links to Sherlock channels, 215
multiple, in same window,
286–287 photos, adding, 430–431 printing, 282–283
577 save location, setting, 272–273
saving as PDF, 273, 283
saving as shown, 273
saving as text (Ô-S), 272–273
scaling for printing, 283
searching, 270–271
select entire document (Ô-A),
276
source code, viewing, 269
underlined email addresses,
277
Web searches. See Safari;
Sherlock
Web sites, passwords storing (Keychain Access feature), 30–31 Web surfing. See Safari
window dimensions, setting, 471
Window pane (Shift-Ô-T),
470–471
window settings, customizing,
470–471
Windows
importing email from Outlook
[Express], 220
mouse, right-clicking
equivalent, 278
sending email attachments to,
227
windows. See also desktop; Finder
appearance in Dock, 38
application, hiding, 47
application, switching
between, 465
closing all, 18
closing individual, 16–17
control buttons, 16–17
exposing, 16–17
grayed out, restoring, 17
hiding, 16–17
Icon View setting, 14
maximizing, 16
minimizing, 16, 38
multiple, switching between,
13
opening, 14, 16, 72
restoring, 16
selecting all items (Ô-A), 76
size, toggling, 17
switching between, 13, 465
Zoom button, 17
wireless networks, 152–153
Word List tab, 57
word processing. See TextEdit
words, adding to handwriting
recognition, 57
wraparound preferences, setting,
468
Y Yellow Pages, searching, 202–203
Z ZIP code, Sherlock requirement, 201
zoom arrows, 395
Zoom button, 17
Zoom controls, 447
zooming
iPhoto, 392–393
still frames, 436–437
